Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Prince Soren of Daein stood in front of his mirror with a brush in one hand. He worked it through his long black hair, pulling out any tangles effortlessly. Once he had finished his work, Soren reached for a trio of hair ties before moving to pull his hair out of his face. Soren locked eyes with his reflection for a long moment before letting out a thin sigh. 

A knock came at the door before Soren had the chance to think through everything he needed to do that day. He looked away from the mirror and over to the door, already knowing who would be waiting for him on the other side. “Enter.”

Ike walked inside as he adjusted the way his cape sat on his shoulders. Most people would have been tense and anxious at the idea of entering the room of a prince, but Ike didn’t mind it at all. “Good morning, Soren,” Ike greeted. As per usual, he didn’t bother with titles when he was around Soren. Very few would ever dream of dropping formality around such the prince of a nation, but Ike was not like most others, and Soren made sure to remind him of it often. 

“Morning to you too,” Soren returned. He reached out one hand and adjusted Ike’s cape, finally ensuring it sat evenly across his shoulders. Ike cast him a ghost of a smile of gratitude, the gesture small but still heartwarming to Soren regardless of circumstance. “You’re here early.”

“Father wanted me to come here and see you as soon as I finished with my training exercises for the day,” Ike explained. “What do you have to do today?”

“Not much,” Soren answered. “I finished my lessons for the week, and I doubt my tutors will have much of a reason to give me new work until tomorrow. The day is ours.”

Ike’s smile grew wider. “What do you want to do then?”

“Right now, eat,” Soren replied. He breezed toward the door, and Ike trailed after him by a few steps. “Do you know why your father wanted you to come and see me as soon as you finished your morning drills?”

“No,” Ike said with a shake of his head, and the headband tied through his blue hair ruffled from the motion. “He’s been busy much of the day. I think he has been in meetings with your mother.”

“I see,” Soren hummed. That gave them something to do for the day: speak with his mother about what was going on. “We’ll have to see if they can make time for us then. For now, let’s go. Mist will start to worry if we take too long to get to breakfast.”

Ike laughed his agreement as he fell into pace alongside Soren, and the two began to trace the familiar route leading to the dining hall of the villa. The two had lived there for their entire lives, and they could navigate it with their eyes closed. Even so, they always kept their eyes open just in case they were able to catch another glimpse of each other on the way to their destination. They were never bold enough to call it what it was, at least not verbally, but they didn’t need to. Some things simply went beyond the need for words, and they were hardly going to squander the silence in the name of something unnecessary. 

The royal villa was tucked away in a snowy corner of the kingdom of Daein, and it had been Soren’s home for as long as he could remember. He may have been a prince, but the rest of the world did not know that. In fact, most of the land of Tellius had no idea the king had an heir at all. As far as Soren was concerned, that was the best way for him to live. He hardly had a desire to leave and make a life elsewhere. The villa was familiar, comforting, and safe. 

More importantly, the villa was where Soren could find all of the people he cared about. His mother, Almedha, was the head of the household, and the two lived there far from the expectations and eyes of the rest of the world. Ike’s father, Gawain, was the head of the guard at the villa, and he had been tasked with protecting the queen and prince back when Soren was just a child. Ike had been training to take over the work as Soren’s personal guard one day, and his father prepared him for the work each day. There were few others their age in the villa, so Ike and Soren had quickly taken to one another and had been best friends for years. As far as children were concerned, it had always only been Soren, Ike, and Mist, Ike’s younger sister. Mist was not the fighter her father and brother were, instead learning healing magic from a few of the priests at the villa. Because of her focus on healing, Mist knew what it took to keep people healthy, and she always got on Ike and Soren when they were late to a meal. Soren was the culprit far more often, but both of them were happy to go to the dining hall as soon as possible to evade her wrath. 

None of the three had ever left the villa, and as far as Soren was concerned, that was just the way he wanted life to be. What reason did he have to leave the villa when he was happy there? There was a world beyond the limits of the villa, but the world was cynical and dangerous. Soren was best off remaining exactly where he was, and he took solace in the routine that came with each day following the previous in a cyclical, predictable fashion. Soren wouldn’t have traded his life at the villa for anything, and he considered each day he was able to wake up to the people he loved most a good one. 

Mist was already waiting for Soren and Ike in the dining hall. Discontent was written on her face, and Soren could tell she was debating finding and dragging Soren and Ike there for their meal. All of that unease vanished the instant she noticed her brother and friend. “There you are,” Mist chastised. “I was getting worried you were going to be too late to eat breakfast.”

“Soren slept a bit later than usual,” Ike remarked, nudging at Soren with his elbow. “I thought he would have come here already since my training drills ran long this morning. We started later than usual.”

“I was up late reading last night,” Soren explained, though he knew he may as well have not bothered. The excuse was the same one it always was. If Soren was awake late into the night, it was always because he had found a new book to read. He always lost track of time when he began to study magical theory. Every once in a while, Ike found Soren before he could fall asleep at all, and he had to stay with the prince to make sure he finally got some rest. Soren felt he slept best when he knew Ike was there with him, but he couldn’t put a finger on why. 

“Of course you were,” Mist sighed with a shake of her head. She nudged Soren’s plate closer to him as he sat down. Ike dug into his own meal while Soren sifted carefully through the fruit with his fork. Mist watched the pair for a long moment before she leaned over the table conspiratorially. “Have either one of you seen Father or Lady Almedha today? I saw them talking earlier, and it seemed like whatever they were discussing was really serious.”

“I saw Father during my drills this morning,” Ike answered. “But they started later than usual. He said he was busy doing something else beforehand, but he wouldn’t tell me what it was. He seemed distracted all throughout training too. I could tell there was something else on his mind, but he wouldn’t talk about it.”

Mist’s eyes widened. “I don’t think I’ve ever heard of Father being late to your training… I wonder if it has something to do with what he was talking to Lady Almedha about. I saw them a while ago, but when I got close, they stopped talking. It was really strange.”

“There’s only one way to find out,” Soren said as he delivered another bite of food into his mouth. “If we want the truth, then we have to go to them ourselves and see if they’ll tell us. Surely we can get my mother to talk to us if all three of us try to press her.”

“It sounds like a plan,” Mist agreed. When Soren pushed himself to his feet like he was going to do it now, she reached across the table to grab his wrist and pull him back down into his seat. “After you finish your food.”

Soren sighed and shook his head. “Whatever you say.”

~~~~~

On most days, it was very easy to find Queen Almedha of Daein. 

Almedha was hardly a fan of routine, but there were a few places she tended to frequent, and Soren had learned how to check those spots for her whenever he needed to speak with her about something. Today was no exception. He started by going to the villa’s library, expecting to find her reading a book, but no one there had seen her all day. After that, he explored the grounds, but once again, he came up short. Apparently, it was easy to find Almedah on all days except today, the time when Soren was hoping to find her most of all. 

After a normal lap through the villa bore no results, Ike, Soren, and Mist decided to try and find Gawain instead. As the captain of the villa’s guard, he was a bit harder to track down, but they knew of a handful of spots where he couldn’t be thanks to their search for Almedha. Gawain had to be around there somewhere, and regardless of if they found him or Almedha first, they would be able to get the answers they sought. 

Deep down, Ike was hoping they would find Almedha first. Both Almedha and Gawain were known for their stubbornness, but Gawain was even more so than Almedha. There were a few things Gawain refused to discuss, and when he drew a line in the sand, everyone knew better than to try and push him into talking about it. If Gawain and Almedha had refused to speak of whatever was bothering them when Mist drew near, then it must have been serious. 

Though Soren didn’t know where to start when it came to guessing what it could have all been about. Life in the villa was generally predictable. Soren had never suffered from an assassination attempt since the people of Daein–and Tellius as a whole–knew nothing of his existence. The few thieves that tried to stray into the villa to steal from the royal family were always caught in record time. The peace in the villa was complete and had been that way for many years. Soren saw no reason to believe it was going to shatter now, though he supposed he wouldn’t know for sure until he was able to speak with Gawain or Almedha. 

In the end, the reason he couldn’t find either one of them alone was because they were together. The villa hardly had a use for it, but it still had a war room in case there was a need to plan for an attack. Almedha and Gawain were inside, both looking down at a map of Tellius with something dark in their eyes. They had seemingly expected to be listened to, and they were talking as quietly as they could without running the risk of the other not hearing them. Soren could see their lips moving from the doorway of the room, but he couldn’t quite pick out what they were trying to say. 

“Father?” Ike asked, and the conversation went silent. Gawain and Almedha both looked up at the trio of teens waiting in the doorway of the room, and something like relief and fear washed through their gazes. Almedha pressed her lips together sternly, and Gawain let out a slow, unreadable breath. “Is something the matter?”

“Ike,” Gawain greeted, though his tone was hardly as welcoming as it normally was. On most days, Gawain wore a smile that betrayed a gentleness no one expected from a man of his stature. Gawain was intimidating to all those who did not know him, practically made of muscle and built to fight with a sword and well at that. Still, as long as the bulk of his work was peaceful, Gawain had no issues with letting his guard down as much as he could… But today, he was stiff in a way Soren could not quite put a finger on. All he knew was that he didn’t like it. “What do you need? Did something happen?”

“Nothing happened,” Ike answered, and tension visibly evaporated from Gawain’s shoulders. “We were just wondering if something was wrong. It’s not like you and Lady Almedha to come in here.” 

Gawain and Almedha exchanged a single glance that spoke far more than any words could ever hope to. Soren felt his blood run cold, and he watched the queen and her guard silently debate over which of them should be tasked with the difficult duty of explaining what they had been trying so hard to ignore all day. In the end, Almedha was the first one to surrender, and she let out a heavy sigh. “We have heard rumors from Nevassa,” Almedha began. “We have reason to believe the king is planning something.”

The king. Almedha had never called her husband what he was, and she didn’t use his name either. ‘The king’ felt like the best way she could refer to him without having to cross a line into an intimacy she did not believe in and had not for years. ‘The king’ put as much distance between them as possible, and that was all she had ever wanted for reasons she had never fully defined to her son or anyone else. Almedha was not a hateful woman, and yet, she hated King Ashnard of Daein deeply. 

Soren knew little of his father. He knew who he was, but that was about all he could say on the matter. Soren and Ashnard had not seen one another in years. Ashnard spent his days in the castle, and on rare occasions where he visited the villa, Almedha did all she could to ensure his time there was brief. Ashnard was a wild man with a cruel smile, and something about him had always sat uncomfortably in Soren’s chest. In fact, on most days, he was content to forget he father at all and focused instead on the parent who made an effort to be a part of his life. If Almedha was mentioning Ashnard, especially to Soren, then it must have been the mark of something serious and dangerous. 

“Planning something?” Mist echoed, stepping into the room and pulling the door shut behind her. “But what could he be doing?”

“From the sounds of it, starting a war,” Gawain replied grimly, and all of the air in Soren’s lungs was sucked out in an instant. Ashnard was planning to start a war? Surely even a monster like him knew there were some lines not meant to be crossed. Surely even the Mad King of Daein had enough sense to not do the unthinkable to his people and neighbors… Then again, if he had sense Almedha likely wouldn’t have left him behind to begin with. 

Silence fell heavy and thick between them all for a long moment. “Why in the world would he do that?” Ike asked when he finally felt confident enough to break through the quiet. “Why would he want to start a war? Just for the hell of it?”

“Ashnard is just…” Gawain seemed like he wanted to explain it, or at least try to guess as to why Ashnard was planning this, but he stopped when he realized there was nothing that would truly make this easy to stomach. He sighed and shook his head. “We’re just going to have to be careful going forward. All of this could just be a rumor, and we could be worrying ourselves for nothing. It’d be best to be safe rather than sorry.”

“Keep looking after Soren, will you, Ike?” Almedha asked, her tone fighting to imply a smile even though she couldn’t quite muster it visually. “If something happens, I want you to be there to keep him safe.”

“Nothing will happen,” Soren cut in, fighting to persuade himself far more than anyone else in the conversation. “It’s all going to be fine.”

“But just in case, I’ll be there,” Ike assured Almedha, and the queen finally smiled at him even though it came off as strained and blatantly forged. “I hope this all means nothing, but just in case it does lead to something… I’ll be ready.”

“We’re doing what we can to tighten security here just in case the king tries anything,” Gawain went on. “We’ll do everything in our power to keep this from being a problem, but…”

“We’ll be careful,” Mist promised, though Ike could see the shakiness behind her smile. “We’ll make sure everything is fine. I promise.”

“Good,” Gawain nodded. “We need to finish looking over security plans for the next few days. Go out and have some fun. There’s no point in being cooped up feeling paranoid when we don’t know if this is going to actually happen or not. Go.” He waved a dismissive hand at the three teens, and they all nodded before retreating from the war room. 

Soren’s fingers lingered on the doorknob even after he pulled the door shut, and he let out a heavy sigh that made his entire body shake. Even though Gawain and Almedha were trying to assure him everything was going to be fine, he couldn’t bring himself to believe it. His father was planning on waging a war. The rumors wouldn’t have spread this far if there wasn’t some nugget of truth in them… But why would he do something like that? Why would Ashnard put everyone and everything on the line in the name of bloodshed?

“Let’s go back to your room,” Ike suggested, and Soren finally remembered to look up at him. “You look like you need to sit down, and I don’t want to make you walk away when you look so nauseous.”

Soren nodded, only barely registering that he was still a resident of his body. He followed Ike through the familiar path that would take him back to his room, clenching and releasing his fingers from fists the whole way there. Surely all of this was wrong somehow. Surely the rumors were false and Ashnard was up to something else. Soren didn’t know what else would have sparked rumors like this, but he didn’t want to think about it either. He wanted all of this to be a lie, and he wanted it desperately. 

Soren practically collapsed onto his bed when he arrived back in his room, and Mist and Ike sat down on either side of him. Ike took Soren’s hand in his own and squeezed it gently before saying, “I’m sorry to ask this, but… What is your father like, Soren?” Ike asked. “You never really talk about him.”

“Because there’s nothing good to say,” Soren answered seamlessly. “He’s power-crazed and focuses too much on his ambition. He’s charismatic and knows how to get people to follow him… But you can never trust him with anything. If you give him even a step of ground, then he’ll take all you have, and he’ll laugh as he does it.”

“He can’t really mean to wage a war though, right?” Mist questioned desperately. “I mean, that’s really bad. I don’t know who he would want to attack, but a war like that… It would destabilize everything across Tellius, wouldn’t it?”

“I don’t know,” Soren confessed. “He’s certainly driven enough to want to try it even if it’s going to end poorly. It seems like nothing can really stop him when he puts his mind to something, and… I really hope all of this is wrong. I don’t know how a rumor like that would spread if it was false, but I don’t want it to be true.”

“We’ll handle it no matter what,” Ike assured him. “Right now, we should try to take things one step at a time. There’s no point in getting overwhelmed when we know there’s so much we can’t do yet. Father and Lady Almedha said they would handle this the best they could, and we need to trust them.”

“You’re right,” Soren said, hoping that by saying it out loud, he would be able to make himself believe it. He ultimately came up short in establishing his faith though, and he shook his head. “The rumors must be exaggerated. My father wouldn’t really try to wage war against another nation.” Except he definitely would. Soren was hardly close with Ashnard, but he knew about him from their limited contact to know exactly what he was like and what he would try to do. If Ashnard thought there was some benefit to be found in invading another country, then he would do it. Nothing could stop Ashnard once he truly decided he was going to do something, and Soren hated it more than anything else. 

“I’m sure you’re right,” Mist agreed. “We should do our best to enjoy the rest of the day. If we got worked up over every little rumor that made its way into the villa, then we’d never be able to truly enjoy ourselves. How about we go to the library and read for a while? Maybe you two could train and spar together.”

Soren found himself nodding despite the dread in his chest, and he pushed himself to his feet. “You’re right,” he murmured. He just needed a distraction, and this would be the perfect time for him to find it. “There’s no war right now, so we shouldn’t expect it and be afraid of it just yet. Let’s go to the library. We can talk about this more later.”

Ike squeezed Soren’s hand a little bit tighter. “That’s the spirit.”

If only Soren could actually believe the words he was speaking. If only his spirit was built of something honest instead of a foundation of fear and falsehoods. 

~~~~~

Throughout the rest of the day, Ike did his best to distract himself, Soren, and Mist from the horrible news Gawain and Almedha had given them. He and Soren did training exercises for as long as they could stand it, and Ike finished off their session by saying that he felt notably stronger than he had before. Soren hadn’t seemed to agree though, and the prince hummed under his breath as he packed up his tomes and prepared to return to the dining hall for dinner. 

The meal passed largely uneventfully, though Ike could hear a few whispers throughout dinner of servants and guards wondering if the rumors about Ashnard waging war were true. Ike had been hoping that eating would serve as a fine distraction to keep him and Soren from thinking about everything they were worried about, but he realized quickly just how wrong he had been. It was impossible to avoid everything Ashnard was planning. The truth haunted every corner of the villa, and no one would know true peace until the rumors were proven either true or undeniably false. 

Ike followed Soren to his room after dinner ended. He didn’t need to ask when Soren needed support; over their years together, Ike had come to just know when Soren needed him. Their bond went far beyond simply a prince and his bodyguard. Ike and Soren cared for each other in a way that could not be described in words, and so, they never bothered to try. As long as they knew what their relationship meant to them, nothing else mattered. They may as well have been the only people in the world when they sat together and laced their fingers beneath tables. No one else could understand, and they weren’t going to try and persuade them either. 

Soren continued to pace the perimeter of the room even after Ike settled down on the prince’s bed. Ike sighed, already knowing what the answer to his question would be before he could ask it but unable to think of any other way to start the conversation. “Are you worried about what your mother told us today?” Ike asked. 

“Of course I am,” Soren replied, his voice stiff but not angry. “My father would start a war if he was given a reason… But I can’t figure out what the reason could be for the life of me. He wouldn’t do something rash like this without a motive, but…”

“He’s a dangerous man,” Ike finished for him, and Soren nodded as he finally sat down on the bed beside Ike. “I’ll do everything I can to protect you, Soren. I know that may not count for much against him, but…”

“I appreciate it,” Soren assured him with a shake of his head. He reached out and took Ike’s hand in his own, and Ike squeezed at Soren’s fingers with a smile. A few years ago, Soren had told Ike that he was glad he was unknown to the world at large. If he had been raised in the public eye, then he never would have been able to have a relationship like this. He never would have been given the chance to bond so deeply with someone who wasn’t a royal or a noble. As far as Soren was concerned, being raised away from his father and away from his birthright was worth it if it gave him the chance to know Ike. At the time, Ike hadn’t known how to respond to that, and he still didn’t entirely know, but he understood what Soren meant deep in his chest. Once again, it went beyond the need for words, and Ike couldn’t have defined it even if he wanted to. 

Soren shook his head after the silence stretched on for a bit too long for him to be comfortable with. “I’m sure all of the rumors are exaggerated,” he murmured. “If my father is going to start a war, then he would have a reason for it, and we haven’t heard of any motive he could have yet. Surely everything we’ve heard is exaggerated and wrong. My father is a calculated man, and he wouldn’t do something like this out of the blue.”

“I hope you’re right,” Ike murmured. He squeezed at Soren’s hand when the mage deflated ever so slightly. “You know him better than most other people. He’s your father. If you say that he wouldn’t do something like this without a reason, then I trust you. You’re right when you say all wars have reasons behind them, and not even the Mad King would start a war without having a basis for it first.”

Soren nodded dully, clearly biting back a comment about how he didn’t know his father as well as Ike made it sound. In fact, Soren barely remembered his father at all, and the few and far between visits they had were cordial and nothing else. Soren only knew about Ashnard through what Almedha was willing to tell him, and nothing she said painted a pretty picture. There would have to be a reason for Ashnard to start a war, and there had been a reason for Almedha taking Soren away from the castle too. Soren didn’t know what it was, but he trusted his mother’s judgement, and he wasn’t about to start questioning it now. 

Ike studied Soren’s face for a long moment before his expression softened. “If you want me to stay with you tonight, then I can,” he offered. Neither one of them would ever dare to speak of it to others, but they both knew they slept better when they were in the same room. Something about Soren always soothed Ike’s nerves, and the reverse was true as well. It was another piece of their relationship that would never be allowed if Soren had been raised as the heir to a country rather than a forgotten prince in a faraway villa, making it another reason Ike was grateful for their circumstances being what they were. He didn’t think anything could have torn Soren away from him now that they had come to know each other this well. 

Soren nodded eagerly as he laid back onto the bed. “I’d like that. Thank you, Ike.” Ike followed his lead in laying down, and Soren rolled onto his side so he could look into his bodyguard’s eyes. “Everything is going to be fine,” Soren whispered. “As long as we’re here together, we’re going to be fine.”

Ike felt a smile spread across his lips even as he recognized just how treacherous such a thing could be. “You’re right,” he agreed. “I’ll be here to look after you no matter what happens, Soren. You don’t need to worry about your father or any wars he might start. I’ll make sure everything is alright.”

Soren allowed himself one last smile before his eyes slid shut. “Thank you, Ike,” Soren murmured. “What would I ever do without you?”

Ike smiled at Soren in return before closing his eyes too. He didn’t know what Soren would have done without him, but he didn’t want to know. What point was there as long as they were together? Nothing was going to change that. 

Nothing.

Chapter Text

Soren had been hoping the passage of time would soothe his nerves. 

Even after the initial news of the war broke, Soren thought he would be able to push it to the side and stop thinking about it with time. If he just distracted himself, then he would be fine. There would be no war, and he would have nothing to worry about. 

That was what he had been hoping for. Unfortunately, that was not happening. 

Even as Soren tried to keep himself composed, he knew others around him were struggling with the rumors of the war to come. Almedha had been growing even more protective than usual, and she was already fiercely defensive of her son. Almedha kept insisting that the rumors about Ashnard were simply rumors, but Soren could see the dark look in her eyes that told him there was more to it than that. Almedha knew there was something to be terrified of, and she was too afraid to admit it aloud. 

Soon enough, Soren found himself doubting his initial faith that everything would be alright. He had been sure Ashnard wouldn’t wage a war… But if Almedha was this anxious about it, then Soren couldn’t help but follow her lead. There was no guarantee Ashnard was going to wage war though, and he did his best to comfort himself with that. Beyond that, the chances of Ashnard doing anything to change life at the villa were slim. Daein starting a war against another country wouldn’t necessarily shift Soren’s regular life. Everything was going to be fine. It had to be. 

Soren was trying and failing to convince himself he was sure everything would be fine for the fourth day in a row when Mist suggested they go on a walk around the villa. The weather was starting to grow warmer, though ‘warm’ in Daein had always been relative. Daein was the coldest country in all of Tellius, and even its warmest days were still considered frigid by the people of Crimea. Mist was happy to distract Ike and Soren however she could, and right now, that meant getting them out of their rooms and their heads. 

Soren found that getting some fresh air was massively helpful, and the cool air quickly wound its way through his lungs to put a balm on his nerves. Maybe he was just wrong about all of this. Nothing had happened yet, and he had no reason to believe it would spiral after this either. Ashnard wasn’t going to wage a war. Soon enough, all of this paranoia would be proven to be simply unfounded fear, and Soren would wish he hadn’t wasted all of his time too unnerved and terrified to enjoy life. He just had to make it to that point. 

“What do you two want to do this afternoon?” Mist asked with a smile. “We can go to the library and see if there are any new books in. I heard there was supposed to be a new shipment arriving sometime this week.”

“There was,” Soren confirmed with a frown. When he thought about it though, he didn’t think the books had actually arrived at the villa. He didn’t know what had happened for the shipment to not come, but it left him with a horrible feeling in the pit of his stomach. Could the books have been delayed because Ashnard was preparing a war? Surely disrupted trade was a side effect of Ashnard wanting to wage a war against another country. 

“Hey,” Ike whispered, nudging Soren with his elbow. As per usual, Ike could see it when Soren was spiraling, and Soren forced himself to look up and meet his bodyguard’s eyes. “I’m sure there’s a logical explanation. You don’t need to worry. We just need to be patient.”

Soren nodded slowly. Ike had been trying his best to cheer Soren up over the course of the last few days, but it hadn’t worked as well as either one of them would have liked. Normally, Ike was able to pull Soren out of any spirals he suffered from, but that hadn’t been the case lately. It was hard for Ike to help Soren feel better when he didn’t entirely believe they were in the clear either. How could anyone feel safe if there was the possibility of Ashnard ruining their lives each time they woke up?

Ike paused suddenly, and Soren and Mist both halted on either side of him. “Do you hear that?” Ike asked, his voice dangerously low. He reached for his blade where it was hiding in its sheath at his hip, and for a moment, Soren feared he was going to pull it free. “It sounds like someone is fighting.”

Soren strained his ears to try and make out the distant clamor of combat, and sure enough, he found it. The sound was faint, but he knew he could hear steel on steel. Blades were clashing with one another, and the struggle of combat was notable and fierce. 

People were fighting… Just days after the rumor of Ashnard starting a war began to circulate. 

Ike grabbed Mist by the wrist with one hand and reached for Soren with the other. “Come on,” he instructed. “We have to get out of here. We need to find someone who can tell us what’s going on.”

Soren didn’t bother with protesting as Ike pulled him toward the mansion and any peace the walls of the villa could have offered them. Ike had been trained by Gawain specifically to handle a situation like this, and Soren knew he knew how to tackle a problem like this… But that did little to ease the raging nerves threatening to tear him apart. Ike shouldn’t have had to handle this in the first place. There shouldn’t have been a battle at all. The rumors should have been proven false, and there shouldn’t have been any problems to begin with. 

Soren felt terrified tears begin to rise at the corners of his eyes, but he did his best to ignore them. Now wasn’t the time for tears. He had to act, and he had to do it now. 

~~~~~

Almedha had never imagined she would be a queen. 

Back home, she had been fully aware she was the last one in line for the throne of her nation. Her older brother would be a fine king, and should something happen to him, Almedha could trust her younger brother to take over. She had no interest in the throne, and she had never primed herself for it. 

That remained true after she left to travel across Tellius on her own. She had thought with certainty that she didn’t need to worry about ruling over anyone or anything… But everything had changed when she met Ashnard. She would have little political power as his queen, but Almedha still wanted to be with him. That was what she had thought at the time anyway. Almedha learned with time how great of a mistake that had been, and she regretted it more than she could ever hope to express. 

Even so, Almedha had learned a lot about what it meant to be a queen. She knew how to handle even the worst of situations, and she faced terror with determination in her eyes and a stubborn smile across her lips. She couldn’t say she had ever imagined she would have to face her husband because he wanted to wage war by attacking her new home, but Almedha was as ready for it as she could have been. It was her duty to face him when he came to the villa, and Almedha would not back down because of something as petty as fear. 

Almedha kept her shoulders pressed back in the picture of grace as the army on the horizon drew nearer. One of the scouts patrolling the edge of the villa had told her about an approaching army, and Almedha had known what it meant long before she saw any traces of the king. The rumors about Ashnard waging war had been true, and he was coming to the villa before he began his charge into the nation he chose to victimize. Almedha had heard it would be Crimea, but she didn’t let herself speak of it openly. Right now, she had one priority, and that was defending the people who lived and worked at the villa. They were looking to her for guidance and security, and Almedha would not let them down. 

Ashnard was leading the charge just as she had been expecting. He rode atop his draconic mount, and Almedha narrowed her eyes at the sight of the so-called wyvern. To most, Ashnard’s mount Rajaion was a sign of overwhelming strength. Only Ashnard would be able to tame a beast with such boundless rage… But Almedha knew the truth. Rajaion was a sign of Ashnard’s weak resolve as a ruler. Rajaion was proof Ashnard was not the man he appeared to be, and she would resent him for it each day she drew breath and even on those she did not. 

Gawain dashed up to Almedha’s side, his sword already out of its sheath for the instant he had to swing it for a foe. “What do you need me to do, Lady Almedha?” Gawain questioned, only tearing his gaze away from the approaching army to look up at the queen. He didn’t ask if they would be able to even damage Ashnard at all; the answer was already clear, and it was the opposite of what anyone wanted to hear. 

“Get Soren and get out of here,” Almedha instructed, still not looking over at him. “I don’t know what Ashnard wants, but I’m not going to let him put Soren in danger again. Run. I’ll distract Ashnard for as long as I can.”

Gawain was hardly surprised to hear that command, but it made his heart sink regardless. He was fully aware of how dangerous Ashnard could be, and he knew why Almedha wanted him to leave… Though it didn’t make it any easier to walk away from the duty he had agreed to see to its end when he first began to work for Almedha so many years prior. “I understand,” Gawain finally replied thickly. He took two steps away from Almedha before he cast her one last glance over his shoulder. “Do your best to survive this, alright? I don’t want to have to tell your son you died in this fight.”

“I will do what I can,” Almedha said tensely, but they both knew it was impossible to truly make any promises as long as Ashnard was involved with a battle. Ashnard was among the most dangerous men in all of Tellius, assuming he wasn’t the strongest beorc alive at the moment. Survival against him was not guaranteed, and it never would be. “Now go. I’ll handle this the best I can.”

Gawain nodded and vanished through the villa to find Soren. He would have to find Ike and Mist on his way out. He would never forgive himself if he had to leave either one of his children behind. The four of them could escape together, and after that… Gawain didn’t know what he was supposed to do from there, but he could figure that out when the time came. Until then, he had a job to do. 

At the front of the mansion, Almedha kept her gaze as level as she could as Ashnard approached. Ashnard didn’t seem to have seen Gawain rushing away to retrieve Soren, or if he had, he was choosing to not comment on it. The soldiers at Ashnard’s side were all deadly serious as they approached the edge of the villa. Only Ashnard dared to smile, and he didn’t seem to care at all for the resentful glare Almedha was casting in his direction. He even had the audacity to laugh as he dismounted from Rajaion. “Almedha,” Ashnard greeted wildly. 

“Ashnard,” Almedha returned flatly. “Just what are you doing here?”

Ashnard’s smile widened, and the craze in his eyes only seemed to grow darker and greater. “I want to see my son again. Is that truly so wrong?” he asked, and Almedha’s glare narrowed even more. “I have heard he has become a strong sage and tactician. I can only imagine such skills will come in handy in defeating Crimea.”

“So you are going to wage war against Crimea,” Almedha concluded, and Ashard broke through her speech with a loud, echoing laugh. “It matters not. I won’t let you see him. You made your choice years ago, and I won’t let you see him ever again after what you did.”

Ashnard’s smile did not fade even with Almedha’s certainty. “You won’t be able to keep him from me forever, you know,” Ashnard reminded her. “I will tear apart this entire villa to find him if I have to. I think we both know I’m willing to do anything necessary to get what I need.”

“We do,” Almedha admitted. “But that does not mean I will let you get away with it. If you want to see Soren, then you will have to go through me.” All around her, the guards working at the villa sunk into defensive stances. The battle to come was no doubt a lost one even before it could begin, but that would not stop them from doing all they could to see this through. If fighting Ashnard was the only chance they had, then they had to try. 

Ashnard laughed as he mounted Rajaion once again. The dragon roared fiercely, but Almedha did not flinch even as the rest of her soldiers did. “You will not hurt me,” Almedha said levelly, though she was not speaking to Ashnard at all. “I know you will not. If you wish to fight though… Then I will defend my home however I must.”

“If that is your choice then,” Ashnard concluded. He pointed Gurgurant forward at Almedha and the rest of her soldiers, and the men around him surged on as one. “Let us see which of us is stronger!”

~~~~~

The chaos had come in the blink of an eye. 

Ike had been trained many times over the years in what to do in the case of an emergency. Gawain had told him it was crucial for him to know how to remain strong and win any battle that came his way. Ike had internalized each lesson he ever heard, but somehow, those old pieces of wisdom did nothing for him when the tides began to turn against him. Ike wanted to call upon every memory that could have told him how to get out of a situation like this, but his mind refused to give him what he needed most. The world was full of dizzying noise, and Ike had no idea how he was meant to break through it. 

He, Soren, and Mist took off running as soon as they were able to, but it seemed like each exit through the walls outside of the villa’s grounds had been sealed off. The soldiers wore the armor of Daein, and Ike knew without needing to ask that they had been sent there by Ashnard. Ike couldn’t even begin to fathom why Ashnard would want to attack the villa where his wife and son lived, but he supposed it didn’t matter. Very few people understood Ashnard at the end of the day, and they didn’t need to as long as he thought the chaos of combat would get him closer to what he needed to do. 

Even so, Ike couldn’t help thinking about why in the world Ashnard would do something like this. If he was truly planning on waging a war on another nation on Tellius, then why was he attacking his own home? What could he have wanted from Almedha and Soren to merit all of this? Was Ashnard’s relationship with Almedha truly so poor that he was willing to threaten to kill her in order to get what he wanted from her? There was no justification for what he was doing, but Ike found himself worried for what the reason was. Ashnard never acted without reason, and he couldn’t figure out what his reason for this could have been for the life of him. 

A few of the Daein soldiers managed to filter their ways through the walls surrounding the villa to attack, and Ike was ready for them. He fought off the rare attackers the best he could, though it was much harder than it had any right to be. Ike had been trained for years to protect Soren in case something like this happened, but his training felt woefully inadequate when he was truly faced with people trying to kill him. Ike had thought he would be ready if he ever had to fight for his life, but this… This was unlike anything he could have ever imagined. 

Soren had been carrying a few tomes on him when he went out for his walk with Ike and Mist, so he was mercifully able to help Ike to pick off the soldiers pursuing them. If Ike struggled to push through a foe with strong physical defenses, then Soren could finish the job for him. If they kept moving and trying to stay one step ahead of their foes, then they would be able to get out of this in one piece… Or so Ike was hoping. He really didn’t know how they could escape when the soldiers were surrounding them on all sides. There had to be some weakness in their defenses that would let them sneak away… But where was it? Just how many soldiers had Ashnard brought with him to attack the villa? Had he known he was going to have to fight and prepared accordingly? But why had he done it to begin with?

“Ike, look out!”

Mist’s voice pulled Ike out of his thoughts, and he looked to his right just in time to see a Daein soldier rushing at him with an axe at the ready. Ike swerved out of the way of the attack before slashing his sword across the man’s chest. The soldier staggered, and he was sent sprawling backward by a blast of wind magic before he had the chance to recover or retaliate. Ike watched as the soldier flew through the air before hitting one of the leafless trees lining the villa’s courtyard. The man was dead on impact, and Ike could tell even without needing to go and examine the corpse. 

Ike had made peace years ago with the fact that he was going to have to take a few lives as part of his work as Soren’s bodyguard. If he wanted to protect his liege and friend, Ike would have to be ready to kill those who may have looked to take his life. Ike had always expected that would mean assassins though. He hadn’t thought the danger would come from the army of Daein. Ike knew Soren didn’t like his father much, but he hadn’t ever expected it would be Ashnard’s forces that caused a problem like this. 

Seeing the soldier with the axe die because of him sent a shiver sprinting up Ike’s spine. He had known this was coming, but he had thought he would have at least a few more years to prepare before he had to take another life. He thought he would be able to prepare himself and train his skills before it came to something like this. Ashnard clearly had other plans though, and Ike’s only choice now was to try and end this however he could. If that meant killing the soldiers of Daein pursuing them, then so be it. Ike had agreed to protect Soren no matter what, and he wasn’t going to give up on it now simply because things were getting harder sooner than he had expected. 

Soren saw a knight wearing heavy armor and holding a lance rushing in his direction, and he snarled before blasting the man with wind magic. The soldier was sent tripping over the melting snow, and Soren hit him once again. The knight collapsed lifeless into the snow a moment later, and Soren let out an angry snarl of a breath. Soren knew his father was prone to irrationality and violence, but he hadn’t thought it would end this way. He had hoped he would never have to face his father’s behavior in this way, but there he was. Now, the only choice was to try and fight a way out. 

But Soren was quickly coming to the same conclusion as Ike: there wasn’t a way out. Ashnard had ordered his soldiers to surround the villa before they struck, and as such, all of the regular exits were already covered and swarming with Daein soldiers. Soren believed he and Ike would be able to handle their foes as long as they tried to strike one at a time as they had been, but trying to fight through too many of them at once would be a death sentence. It was just a matter of time before Ashnard’s best fleet of wyvern riders attacked too, and when that moment came… It would be over, assuming it wasn’t already over given the horrible circumstances. 

A flash of color out of the corner of Soren and Ike’s eyes pulled their attention from the current desperate search for an escape route. Gawain knocked three approaching soldiers to the ground in a single blow, and he was even ready for a wyvern rider that tried to attack him from overhead. Soren was on the verge of casting a wind spell to help Gawain, but he quickly realized such a thing was entirely unnecessary. Gawain had always been powerful, but somehow, he seemed even stronger now that he was in action and fighting to defend those he had sworn himself to. 

Gawain only let himself breathe once he was certain the immediate wave of enemies was gone, and he sighed heavily before turning to face Ike, Soren, and Mist. “Are you three alright?!” he demanded. 

“We are, Father,” Ike confirmed with a nod. Beside him, Mist was shaking like a leaf, clearly feeling otherwise but unable to find the words needed to protest the point. “What’s going on? What should we do?”

“Ashnard is here,” Gawain replied, and Soren felt his blood run cold. “He’s after Soren. Right now, we have to get out of here. We need to make our way to the stables, get some horses, and run as far away from the villa as we possibly can.”

“W-We can’t just leave!” Soren cried out, his face going impossibly paler. “What about my mother? We can’t leave her here! We barely know what’s going on!”

“Ashnard is here, and he wants to recruit you to fight in his war against Crimea,” Gawain cut in before Soren could protest further. Soren’s eyes widened as his lips pressed together into a thin, terrible line. “If we stay here for any longer, then we’re going to be practically handing you over to him. I don’t know what he wants you for, but I’m not going to let you find out either. Your mother is a strong woman, and she can take care of herself. Right now, we have to run.”

Soren wanted to protest again, to fight back for as long as he could, but his lips refused to form the words. Soren didn’t want anything to do with the war he knew his father was trying to wage, but he couldn’t leave his mother behind either. It didn’t matter how strong Gawain claimed Almedha to be; she wouldn’t last long if she had to face off against Ashnard. Soren knew she had trained to fight with a dagger in recent years, but what was a knife when she was faced against the king of Daein? What was anything when matched up next to the power of the Mad King? Almedha stood no chance, and Soren knew it. 

But he never got the chance to push back and insist on staying there to ensure her safety. Gawain grabbed his arm and took off sprinting just before another cluster of Daeinite soldiers could converge on their location. Soren barely noticed as his legs carried him in Gawain’s shadow through the courtyards and gardens of the villa. His body may have been moving, but his heart was right there with his mother, and it always would be. 

Gawain only stopped running when a new cluster of soldiers arrived to harass them, but even so, it was never for long. He only needed a few good swings of his blade to fend off their assailants, and just like that, the group was moving again. Ike and Mist said nothing as they made their desperate retreat to the stables at the back of the manor. They knew better than to argue with their father in a time like this. The look in his eyes told them he was not to be trifled with right now, and they wouldn’t dream of it. 

Soren finally snapped out of his trance when his legs stopped moving and he arrived at the outer entrance of the stables. Gawain pried the door to four stalls open and helped Mist to climb atop one of the horses. From there, Gawain mounted one of the horses for himself, though he kept one hand on his sword even as he reached for the reins. Ike helped Soren onto the other horse’s back, and he mounted a nearby horse for himself, taking the reins over and directing the steed out of the stables. The other horses were clearly distressed by all that was happening, but Gawain had no time to look after them. With so much on the line, all he could do was make sure his group of four escaped in one piece. 

Soren felt the memory of riding rise to his mind even as his heart raced with terror. It was a familiar skill, one he had felt his way through many times before, and he could only hope his old reminders of how to ride would guide him to safety now. There was no time for hesitation. The soldiers were getting closer, and Soren could hear them even above the cacophony of his mind. 

Soren took off on his horse after Gawain, Ike, and Mist, and they made for the break in the outer wall at the very back of the villa. A few soldiers had already moved to plug the gap, but Gawain was ready for them. He slashed at the soldiers that strayed too close, and Soren knocked the others down with a wind spell he hadn’t realized he was casting until it had already been released. 

Soren barely paid attention as he guided his steed out of the villa’s grounds and into the wooded wilderness nearby. He didn’t know if the soldiers of Ashnard’s army were following him, but he didn’t look back to check either. The cold wind tore mercilessly at his skin, but Soren fought to keep his hands steady where they were grasping at his horse’s reins. “Where are we going?!” he yelled, praying with all he had that Gawain would tell him Almedha would be meeting them somewhere. She had to be alright. She just had to be. 

For a moment that lasted just a bit too long, Gawain hesitated. “Gallia,” he finally settled on saying. Soren’s eyes went wide once more. He knew little of the nation of beast laguz, but he knew there must have been a reason for Gawain taking him there. There were surely better nations to settle on than Gallia, a country on the opposite side of the continent compared to their current location. On top of that, going to Gallia would mean cutting through Crimea, and that was Ashnard’s next target. That was what Gawain had said anyway. 

Just why was Gawain aiming for Gallia? Soren’s mind cast itself back to Almedha, and shock raced through his body. Almedha was a laguz, and she had said as much many times… But she never explained her heritage beyond that. She was a laguz, and so, Soren was one of the Branded. That much he had known for years… But Almedha had never dared to tell Soren where she had been from before she met Ashnard. Maybe Gawain was taking Soren to Gallia because that had been her home before she made her way to Daein. It would make sense, and it would finally answer the question of what laguz blood Soren had in his veins. 

Soren felt his heart ache more as the journey wore on though, and with each gallop his steed took, he feared more for his mother. Gawain had said Almedha was strong enough to survive an attack led by Ashnard, but… What if that wasn’t true? Almedha was a powerful woman, and Soren had known it all his life, but what did that matter if she was faced with a man like Ashnard? How could she ever hope to fight back against him? Was Gawain lying to Soren for the sake of keeping him focused? Did Almedha stand a chance at all?

And yet, Soren couldn’t bring himself to turn around. His body refused to betray him by charging back into danger. As much as he wanted to see the truth of his mother’s fate, he couldn’t do it. Soren needed to survive all of this, and he couldn’t let his greatest fears stop him from reaching Gallia. He wanted to perish on Ashnard’s blade if he learned his mother’s life had been taken, but Soren’s body refused to deliver him to the battlefield once more. All he could do was move forward and stare at the worn path in between the trees ahead. 

Soren began to cry at some point, but he did not calculate when it began. 

All he knew was that he did not stop until his body nearly gave out from exhaustion.

Chapter Text

The journey to Gallia was agonizing. 

Gawain picked up a map in the first town they passed by, and he immediately got them back on the road to Gallia. Gawain effortlessly led the quartet through the snows of Daein and then the warming climes of Crimea. Ashnard seemingly hadn’t led his attack on Crimea yet, so they were safe for the time being, but Soren knew it would not last for long. Soon, Ashnard would strike, and they would need to change from traveling through Crimea to moving through Begnion until they reached the Gallian border. 

Gawain explained on the road that he had taken many diplomatic visits to Gallia over the course of his career. Most of his visits had been years ago when he was still working as a member of the Four Riders, the strongest generals in Daein. He had let his position go when he opted to work for Almedha at the villa, but his experience remained with him. Apparently, he had a strong relationship with the king of Gallia, and he was confident King Caineghis would be willing to help them with all they had gone through. 

Soren’s curiosity only deepened at the mention of Caineghis. His suspicions up until then had been that they were going to Gallia because of his laguz heritage through Almedha, but those beliefs were quickly being proven wrong… Though Soren supposed that going to speak with Caineghis wasn’t necessarily mutually exclusive with Almedha coming from Gallia. He would just have to wait and see how the conversation with Caineghis went when he arrived at his destination. 

Soren could barely believe what was happening to him over the first three days after the attack. He knew he had to keep moving, but his forward motion did little to mitigate the sting of the shock settling in over his nerves. Ashnard had attacked the villa, and he had been after Soren, or so Gawain had said. Soren didn’t know why Ashnard would have wanted him for anything. After all, Ashnard had barely been involved with his childhood leading up to that point. Why would he want to reach out now? Did he only care for his family because of the war he thought Soren would be able to help him wage? Did Ashnard truly expect Soren to help him with something as dangerous as combat? It certainly seemed so, and Soren detested it with everything he had. 

The worst thought of all though was about Almedha. Gawain had promised he would keep his ears open for any news about her, but Soren knew he would find nothing. If there was any information to find about Almedha, then all of them would have heard it by now. Gawain had only broken away from the party once to purchase the supplies they would need on their journey, and he had instructed the children to stay where they were until he returned. Since then, the group hadn’t strayed near civilization once, seeing it as the threat it was so long as Ashnard was out for their blood. Soren knew Ashnard would not stop simply because they had escaped once. He would come after them, and he would be ruthless and merciless when he did. 

Though Soren supposed he could have heard news sooner than he thought. Gawain and Mist had gone off to get more supplies about an hour ago, though Soren and Ike had been told to stay behind once again. Soren couldn’t run the risk of being recognized by any rogue Daein soldiers. Very few within Daein knew of the secret of Ashnard’s son, but no one wanted to run the risk of Soren being spotted before they could come up with a plan. Soren hated feeling helpless and like he had to be defended, though he supposed that just came with his position. Ashnard had already proven he was willing to do anything to get to Soren, and the caution was justified even if it was terrifying. Soren hoped this would all end sooner than expected, but he knew that wouldn’t be the case, so instead, he hoped Almedha was alright long after any information about her had completely dried up. 

The longer Soren was left in the dark about Almedha’s fate though, the worse he felt. He just wanted to know his mother was okay. Almedha was the only family he knew, and he didn’t want to lose her because of Ashnard’s thirst for bloodshed. Ashnard had done more than enough harm to the world, and Soren couldn’t stand the thought of losing his mother on top of everything else. He wouldn’t let himself think about it. If he imagined Almedha was hurt or dead, he would never be able to convince himself to keep moving. As it was, Soren was only traveling because he knew to stop would be to die, and he couldn’t fall without knowing what had happened to his mother. He couldn’t fail without seeing her at least one last time. 

“Soren?”

Ike’s voice cut through Soren’s thoughts like a knife, and he jolted before looking up at his bodyguard. The group had stopped in the shade of a few massive Crimean trees, and they were getting ready to make camp for the night. Soren vastly preferred riding on horseback to camping these days. If he stopped for even a second, then his thoughts always caught up with him, and he had no way of fending them off. 

He had gotten lost in his fears this time too, and Soren only remembered to respond after Ike sat down beside him. “How are you feeling?” Ike went on. 

“Bad,” Soren said before he could hold himself back. It was a massive understatement, but it was all he could think of replying with. After a few beats of silence, Soren sighed and continued. “Afraid would probably be a better word for it. I really thought all of the rumors of my father waging a war were just that: rumors. Now… Ashnard attacked the villa because he was trying to get to me specifically. I don’t know why he’s acting this way, and I don’t know why he would want to wage a war like this. I know Ashnard is bloodthirsty, but this… It’s too far. I never thought it would end like this.”

Ike nodded along throughout Soren’s ramble, and once the conversation hit a brief lull, he took Soren’s hand in his own. “I’m sorry it all ended this way,” Ike murmured. “I wish there was more we could do to stop him, but…”

“There is no stopping him,” Soren finished for him, voice dark and bitter. “When he sets his mind to something, he’s going to figure out a way to accomplish it no matter what anyone else says or does to push back. Ashnard wanted to take over the villa, and he did it. Now, he’s probably on his way to destroy Crimea, and there’s nothing we can do to stop him. It’s impossible to deal any damage to him. He’s going to win this war, and he’s going to win it fast.” 

The air between them fell silent for a long moment before Ike found the strength to breathe aloud again. He squeezed tighter at Soren’s hand. “What is Ashnard like?” Ike ventured carefully. “If we’re going to defeat him, then we need to know what we’re going up against.”

Soren bit back a comment about how there wasn’t a way to defeat Ashnard. He was too strong for any of them to face, and beyond that, he was impossible to damage. How could they stand a chance against a man like that? What possibility did they have to win when there was so much working against them? Soren didn’t let himself say any of that though, and he forced a slow, steady breath in and out of his lungs instead. “Dangerous,” Soren started slowly. “My father is a very dangerous man. I don’t know what happened between him and my mother after I was born, but I know that there is no one she fears more than him. She doesn’t like to talk about him, and I’m not going to make her either. If it’s too much for her to bear, then it must be bad.”

Ike wanted to press for more information, but he stopped when he saw Soren visibly deflate at the mention of Almedha. If he kept pushing, then all he was going to do was end up upsetting him more, and Soren had been through more than enough as it was. Instead, Ike opted to remain quiet, reaching out and taking Soren’s hand in his own. Soren leaned over until his head was pressed against Ike’s shoulder, seeking out any comfort he could find in the touch. Ike leaned his head on top of Soren’s in return, hoping that helped him to feel even a little bit better about the situation at hand. He couldn’t blame Soren for being anxious and afraid, but if there was something he could do to help, then he had to try. 

The sound of footsteps between the trees quickly turned their attention in a new direction, and Ike looked up to see Gawain and Mist coming down the path through the forest. Gawain’s face was set in something deadly serious, and Ike felt a shiver sprint up and down his spine. “What happened?” Ike asked. If nothing else, he was glad to see his father didn’t look as if he had been forced to run. He could take solace, even if it was only a little, in the fact that they had not been discovered yet. 

“Is it about my mother?” Soren asked immediately, and Ike could feel his friend’s heart rate increase through the pulse point between his thumb and pointer finger. “Do you know what happened to her?”

Gawain remained still and silent for a long moment before he shook his head. “No news of the queen… But Ashnard attacked Crimea and killed the entire royal family in a single invasion,” Gawain replied, and Ike felt his blood run impossibly colder, even more so than it had during the attack on the villa. “Just as he said he would, he waged his war, and now the entire Crimean royal family is dead.”

Soren’s head fell away from Ike’s shoulder, and he stared down at the grass in front of his shoes. None of this felt like it was real… But he knew it had to be. Ashnard’s war was impossible to ignore now, not after he had launched his attack on Crimea and seen the entire royal family to their graves. What hope was there of winning against him so long as he had managed to ruin so much in so little time? 

“I still don’t understand why he could be doing all of this,” Mist admitted in a whisper. She had her hands pressed to her chest in an attempt to keep them from visibly shaking, but it wasn’t working anywhere near as well as she wanted to make it seem. “Why would he want to attack Crimea? I would think he would have everything he could ever want here in Daein, so why go after Crimea?”

“I don't know, but he must have a reason for it,” Soren said, his voice coming out scathing and biting. “He wouldn’t be doing this if he didn’t have a plan… But I don't know what it could be. He should have everything he could ever want or need, and the fact that he’s acting like he doesn’t now…”

Ike shook his head. “It’s all the more reason for us to get to Gallia. The sooner we can find a place to settle down there, the sooner we’ll be able to come up with a plan to stop him.”

“Will we be able to stop him at all?” Mist asked, her eyes wide and her face pale. “If he was able to destroy everyone in the royal family of Crimea, then what chance do we stand as long as there are only four of us? We can’t go up against that, and his armor stops him from being hurt by regular weapons, doesn’t it?”

Ike didn’t have a response to that, but he also knew that he couldn’t be asked to just give up. He couldn’t back down as long as there was a chance he would be able to set this right. He didn’t know how he was going to stop Ashnard, but he had to try. He couldn’t let the Mad King get away with ruining so many lives and so many people for the sake of his sick gain. If it took Ike the rest of his life to see him killed, then he would do whatever was necessary. 

“What… What about my mother?” Soren questioned softly. “You said you haven't heard anything, but for all you know, you could have just not been looking in the right places. There has to be something about her that you can tell me. I need to know if she’s alive or not.”

“No information about the queen has made it this far,” Gawain reiterated. “Lady Almedha is made of stronger stuff than Ashnard realizes. He tried to break her a few times over the time they were together, but it never worked. She’s still standing tall, and she isn’t going to give in to him no matter what he tries to do. As long as you’re out of his hands, she’s going to do what she can to stay above him too.”

Soren pressed his lips together in a thin line. He wanted to believe Gawain was right, but there was a paranoid part of his mind that couldn't quite bring himself to follow Gawain’s words. Almedha was strong, and Soren was fully aware of that. In fact, he would go so far as to argue that he knew it better than just about anyone else in all of Tellius. Even so, the fact remained that she was with Ashanrd, and he was the most dangerous man alive in Soren’s mind. If Almedha remained with him for too long, then she was bound to start to crack. Even if she was still alive, there was no guarantee she would be when Soren next saw her. 

“I’m sure she’s going to be fine, Soren,” Ike insisted, squeezing tightly at his friend’s hand. Soren didn’t look up to meet his gaze though, still staring daggers through the grass in front of his shoes. Ike squeezed once again, and Soren slowly but surely forced himself to look up at Ike. “We’re going to do everything we can to find her and ensure this is set right. If it takes us forever, then we’ll just have to keep fighting forever. We won’t let him win. We can’t let him win.”

“Will we be able to find allies in Gallia, Father?” Mist asked, looking up at Gawain with something dangerous like hope in her eyes. “If there are people there who are willing to help us, then maybe we can take the fight to him first and stop all of this before it can get any farther out of our control.”

“I’m not sure,” Gawain admitted, and everyone else in the small clearing winced. “I know King Caineghis from years ago. The two of us came to know each other quite well because of my ambassador work. Back then, Ashnard seemed like he wanted to try and foster peace across Tellius, or at least he was willing to act like it. He’s always been power hungry, but at least there was a way to work beyond it back then. I suppose he decided recently that it would be better for him to just attack other nations instead of trying to foster alliances with them, but things were different in the past, at least for a short while.”

Soren nodded along, a muted frown on his face. Even though Gawain kept saying they were going there because he knew the king of Gallia, Soren couldn’t help thinking of how Almedha could have factored in with the rest of the pieces of the puzzle. For all Soren knew, he was right when he assumed Almedha was from Gallia and that her laguz blood came from the beast tribe. Almedha had never elaborated on what kind of laguz she was, preferring to keep that secret pressed as tightly to her chest as she could, but Soren knew there must have been some truth about it out there. Maybe Gallia was where he would find the answers he sought. If Gawain wasn’t going to tell him upfront, then Soren would just have to conduct his own searches once he arrived in Gallia. 

“We should settle down for the night though,” Gawain went on, and Soren looked up at him once more. “We’re going to have our work cut out for us once we get to Gallia. We’ve been lucky enough to avoid being caught by any Daein soldiers up to this point, but there’s no guarantee our luck is going to hold strong in the future. We need to rest in case we have to fight against any soldiers coming after us.”

Soren nodded once again, and a shiver sprinted up his spine. No matter how little he wanted to admit it, he was technically on the run right now. Ashnard wouldn’t have been happy to hear his son had escaped the reach of his army, and if he really wanted Soren on his side in the war to come, then he was willing to do anything he had to in order to get him and force him into servitude. It was just a matter of time until a fight broke out, and Soren could only hope he was ready to face it when the time finally came. 

“We’re going to be fine once we get to Gallia,” Mist declared, though Soren could tell by the slight waver to her voice that she was trying to convince herself every bit as much as the others in the clearing. “We just need to hold on for a little bit longer. Once we can talk to the king, everything will be fine.”’ She sat down with a bit too much force, but Mist did her best to keep her fear under control. “We can hold on until we get there. I’m sure of it.”

“Let’s turn in for the night. Ike, you take the first watch. Wake me up in a few hours, and we’ll swap places,” Gawain instructed, and Soren realized just how dark it had become since they settled down there. “We’ve got a long journey ahead of ourselves, and if we’re going to stay a few steps ahead of the king, then we have to be careful. Rest well, everyone.”

Soren settled down as well as he could once the group made camp, but his mind continued to race. He wanted to be able to consider himself safe, wanted to say that he thought everything was going to work out, but he couldn’t quite bring himself to believe it. There was simply too much happening all around him, and Soren didn’t know how to calm his mind. He needed to see his mother again. It was only in seeing Almedha again that he would be able to calm down again, but as long as that wasn’t an option… 

Soren did his best to push the thought as far out of his mind as he could, but he already knew it would be a failing effort. Instead, he buried deeper into his cot for the night and forced his eyes shut. He could get through another night of rest, he was sure. When he woke up in the morning, he would be able to continue the journey to Gallia. Once he arrived there, everything would fall into place. He was going to be fine. 

Soren repeated it like a mantra well into the night, but he was never quite able to bring himself to believe it. 

~~~~~

Soren lost track of how much time had come and gone since he settled down to try and sleep. He had been staring up at the dark sky overhead for what felt like ages, but it did nothing to help him feel rested and calm. He would only make tomorrow worse for himself if he stayed up too late without getting rest, but how could he sleep when he had no idea what was waiting for him? How could he rest knowing that Ashnard had likely sent assassins after them and that their pursuers were getting closer with each moment their group was not moving?

Ike was sitting near the fire a few steps away, staring into the blaze with a muted frown on his face. Soren watched the firelight play across Ike’s features, casting his eyes into light and the darkness with the passing of the seconds. Before Soren knew what he was doing, he sat up in his cot. Ike was too distracted by looking into the fire to say anything about it, but Soren didn’t let him remain lost in his thoughts for too long. “Ike?” Soren asked softly. 

Ike jolted out of his trance in an instant, and he turned to face Soren with something like panic on his face. When he realized it was only Soren, he calmed visibly, but Soren winced at the sight anyway. “Oh, Soren,” Ike greeted, his voice a bit too breezy for Soren’s liking. “Sorry if I scared you.”

“I could say the same to you.” Soren got to his feet and approached Ike slowly, taking care to avoid any sticks or leaves that would have crunched loudly enough to wake up Gawain or Mist. He sat down beside Ike again, pulling his legs up to his chest to chase all the warmth he could find. “What are you thinking?”

Ike looked like he wanted to explain himself fully, but he held back after a few seconds of contemplation. “Just… Thinking about everything,” Ike eventually answered with a loose shrug. “Everything happened so fast, and it feels like we haven’t been given much of a chance to really face what it could mean for us.”

Soren nodded with a hum. Just a few short days prior, he had been back in the villa. He had been back in the familiarity of everything he had ever known, and he had loved it dearly. Even though he had heard the rumors of Ashnard wanting to start a war, it hadn’t ever felt real enough for him to need to take it seriously. Even now that it was undoubtedly his reality, Soren couldn’t bring himself to fully believe it. Maybe his anxiety and terror had numbed the bulk of his nerves and kept him from reacting the way he knew he needed to. Soren wasn’t entirely sure, but he knew he hated it. 

“How are you holding up?” Ike asked after a few moments of silence, and Soren realized just how long he had been staring into the middle distance trying and failing to respond. “I know all of this is harder on you than any of us.” He didn’t mention Almedha by name, but her presence was still felt in the air between them, and it made Soren feel sick to his stomach in a way he couldn’t properly calculate. 

“I…” Soren didn’t realize he had started to cry until hot water began to stream down either one of his cheeks. He raised one hand to try and wipe his tears away, but it didn’t do much to help him. The tears were coming too quickly for him to avoid them entirely, and he knew it. “I want to go home.”

Ike was there at Soren’s side in an instant, wrapping an arm around his shoulders. Ike’s cape fell around Soren like a blanket, and he leaned against his friend’s side. Something warm bloomed in his chest, and it felt a lot like the love he had been chasing ever since he lost his home. Soren didn’t say that though, instead leaning against Ike’s side and letting the tension in the back of his throat suffocate any words he may have been considering saying. “I’m sorry,” Ike murmured. “I wish there was something I could do, but…”

“It’s fine,” Soren whispered even though he knew it was very much not fine. Nothing could be fine as long as he was away from his mother under such horrible circumstances. Nothing could be fine when he had no way of knowing for sure if Almedha was even alive. Nothing could be fine when Ashnard’s war had already claimed all of Crimea, and it was just a matter of time before it spread. Ashnard would not be content with simply stopping at the first nation in his path. He was going to keep pushing and keep fighting for as long as he could, and he would tear all of Tellius apart if he had to. 

“We’re going to get the help we need in Gallia,” Ike went on. “My father knows what he is talking about, and if he believes we’ll be able to find help in the king, then I trust him. We just need to hold on long enough to make it there.”

“I know,” Soren murmured even though he didn’t know it at all. He tried in vain to rub at his tears again, and his head fell over on Ike’s shoulder. He and Ike had been casually affectionate with each other like this for years, and right now, it was all Soren could ever need. As long as he was forced to spend his time away from his mother, Soren would turn to Ike for company, and he was glad he had at least someone on his side in the face of all his father had done. Even if Soren feared the worst and all it could mean for him and his family, he knew he would be as fine as he could be if Ike, Mist, and Gawain were there. 

Ike rubbed circles across Soren’s upper arm with a ghost of a touch, and Soren chased it even if he would never dare to admit it aloud. “Do you want to stay up with me for a bit longer?” Ike asked. They both knew Soren had been struggling to sleep ever since the attack on the villa; it was the reason Gawain hadn’t wanted Soren to have to take on a shift for guard duty if it could at all be avoided. “I’d be fine with sitting with you if you wanted me to.”

“I would appreciate it,” Soren replied. He leaned impossibly closer to Ike, watching as the fire danced atop its small bed of sticks before them. There was no such thing as perfection after all the harm Ashnard had brought to both of their lives, but this felt like the closest they were going to get. They were fine for just a little bit longer. Ashnard would come after them eventually, and Soren was fully aware of it, but he was safe for now. All of them would be alright for a short while longer so long as they were willing to believe it. 

Guilt rose up in the pit of Soren’s stomach at the thought of Ashnard pursuing them. Ashnard had gone to the villa because he wanted Soren to help him in this war of his, didn’t he? That was the reason for all of this. Ashnard had no doubt sent his spies out to try and figure out where their group was because he wanted to get his hands on Soren. How was Soren supposed to live with that? How was he ever going to live with himself if he was the reason the people he cared so deeply for got hurt? Ike and Gawain could fight, but Mist was a healer. She was still learning how to handle a blade, and her development was far slower than Ike’s had been. If they were attacked, then–

“I’m not going to let him hurt you.”

Ike seemed to read Soren’s mind, and the prince looked up at his friend with wide eyes. Ike’s face was set in stony determination, something dark gleaming beneath the surface of his sapphire irises. “I know what you’re thinking right now,” Ike went on. “You’re afraid you’re going to bring danger to the rest of us because your father is after you. I don't care about what Ashnard is planning to do or why he wants you. I’ll do everything in my power to make sure he never gets the chance to lay a finger on you. I promise.”

Soren wanted to protest the point and say that Ike didn’t know for sure that he would be able to succeed. He wanted to remind Ike that Ashnard was immune to almost all attacks because of the special armor he wore. Ashnard was difficult to defeat even when he wasn’t wearing his armor, but if he had so many advantages on his side between the armor and the entirety of the Daein army, stopping him would be nigh impossible. Ike may have been willing to give his life to stop Ashnard from reaching Soren, but that wouldn’t completely solve the inevitable. Soren would still be a target whether Ike was there at his side or not, and he wouldn’t be able to live with himself if Ike gave himself up to give him the chance to escape. 

But Soren said none of this. Instead, he curled a little bit closer against Ike’s side, letting his friend’s warmth chase away the chill that had settled deep into his bones. “Thank you, Ike,” Soren said softly, the words so fragile they seemed to want to die away on the nighttime breeze. 

Ike pulled Soren in tighter. “You’re welcome, Soren.”

Chapter Text

When morning came, the group set out once again. The journey to Gallia was growing shorter with each step they took, but they were all aware of their situation a bit too acutely. They had to make it to the Gallian border before Ashnard got any ideas of trying to expand his reach from Crimea into the land of the beast laguz. They had to move fast, and they couldn’t waste even a moment when it could have been the difference between them making it to King Caineghis’ palace and missing him entirely. 

Ike had been hoping with all he had that their paranoia was just that: fear without a basis. In a perfect world, they would have made it to the Gallian border, forged an alliance with the king of Gallia, and then had an extra force at their back when it came time to push back against Ashnard. Ike still wasn’t entirely sure of how they were going to defeat Ashnard, but that wasn’t going to stop him from hoping with all he had that they could pull it off. They had made it this far, and Ike wasn’t going to give up just because Ashnard was after them. He was going to keep fighting for as long as he had to, and that started with making it to Gallia. 

Unfortunately, Ike’s hopes had been shattered as soon as the Gallia border came into view. There were Daein soldiers already patrolling the edge of the country, though they had chosen a spot that would let them go by largely unnoticed by the beast laguz. There were Daein soldiers standing at the edge of a clearing marked by many trees on one side and the expansive fields of Gallia on the other side. The soldiers had not yet crossed over the border into Gallia, but they were clearly planning on it, and there was a strange tension in the air as they patrolled the edge of the territory. 

Ike didn’t understand why any of this was happening. If Ashnard was hoping to go after him, Soren, Mist, and Gawain, then he could have just tried to follow their trail instead of aiming to cut them off at a nation that they may not have even chosen to seek refuge in. It would have been far more logical for them to go to Begnion, another beorc nation, and Ike was certain that was what Gawain had been hoping Ashnard would think. If Ashnard placed all of his bets on their group going to Begnion, then that would make it easier for Gawain to escort them into Gallia and out of the line of fire. 

No matter how he looked at it, Ike knew there was something odd about this situation. He wanted to get to the bottom of it, but he knew there was no time to concern himself with something like that too much. Right now, his goal had to be to get Soren to safety, and that meant pushing through the Daein soldiers. It didn’t matter how many of them there were or how desperate they were to keep anyone from getting into Gallia. Ike had to find a way to get past them. He didn’t have any other choice. None of them did. 

“Do you think the king took over Gallia while we were on the road?” Mist asked softly. “Why else would there be so many soldiers here looking after the border?”

“If Ashnard had managed to destroy Gallia already, then we would have heard about it long before we got here,” Gawain replied. “Besides, these soldiers aren’t even really attacking. They’re standing at the border, but they won’t cross over into Gallia itself. I have to wonder if they’re hoping to cut someone off from getting inside.”

“But the king has no reason to believe we would choose to come here,” Soren pointed out. Ike took silent notice of how Soren referred to Ashnard as ‘the king’ rather than through any terms of familial connection. Ike couldn’t blame him for it in the slightest. “To him, it would make more sense for us to go to Begnion.”

“I have to wonder if the soldiers aren’t trying to cut us off at all,” Gawain admitted. “For all we know, they could be trying to defeat another group. I don’t know why they would be doing something like that, but it makes a lot more sense than them somehow finding out we would be coming here and then trying to cut us off.”

Ike was on the verge of saying something else on the matter, but he was cut off when he caught a glimpse of a new set of figures moving through the trees. They clearly did not wear the armor of Daein, and their clothing was made of bright colors in stark contrast to the Daein dark gray and black. The leader of the company appeared to be a woman with red hair, and all around her, there were other soldiers fighting. 

But they weren’t really soldiers, were they? If Ike had to wager a guess, he would have said that they were actually mercenaries. The fighters weren’t wearing any uniform armor. After all, the laguz didn’t wear much armor since they fought in their animal forms most of the time. Ike had never been outside of the villa or the rest of Daein before now, but he also knew the Crimean army wore white armor, not some strange mix of red, green, and blue. That pattern didn’t match the armor of the Begnion army either. This new group, whoever they were, appeared to be a rogue faction. 

Near the back of the group, Ike could see two fighters with green hair standing near a person wearing a cloak over an elaborate orange dress. Ike stared at the trio for a long moment, but he couldn’t quite make sense of who any of them could have been. If they were just mercenaries, then why in the world had they come to clash with the Daein army? Surely Ashnard would have had more important things to do than try to go after a small group of independent fighters like this. 

“It seems like they’re the reason for the Daein soldiers gathered at the Gallian border,” Soren murmured with a frown. “But I can’t even begin to fathom why they would be the reason for so much trouble. They’re not wearing the colors of any particular nation. They look like mercenaries, so why are they trying to fight Daein?”

“I don’t know,” Gawain admitted. “But it seems to me like they’re far more important to the Daein army than we are… But I would have expected Ashnard to want to come after us first and foremost, especially after all the effort he went to try and get his hands on the prince. Why in the world would he target a group like that before he would come after us?”

“What are we going to do?” Mist asked. “If they’re enemies of the king, then maybe they could be allies of ours. We’re not going to be able to make it through the line of Daein soldiers on our own, but if we found a way to work with them, then maybe we could all push through together.”

Gawain paused at that, the frown on his face growing more prominent. He weighed his options in the silence, clearly trying to figure out if it was worth taking a risk like that. Their group of four would not be enough to break through the guards at the Gallian border. That much was clear and true. However, they would be taking a chance by telling the other group of fighters who they were or what they were trying to accomplish. It could end up making another group of enemies, and that would only make it harder to make it across the border. 

Another wave of Daein soldiers rushed toward the commander of the mercenaries’ forces. The redheaded paladin fought with the strength of three men, but it was clear from the way she swung her axe that she was growing tired. This fight had been going on for far longer than just what Ike’s company had seen. In fact, he would have wagered a guess that the mercenaries had been fighting through the Daein soldiers for quite some time. They must have been if there were forces at the border ready and waiting to catch them off guard and try to keep them from getting into Gallia. 

A purple-haired swordswoman swerved out of the way of an axe blade before counterattacking and knocking the man off his feet. Another green-haired fighter with an axe defeated the soldier before moving to press forward. Each of the mercenaries glanced desperately at the path that would take them into Gallia, but it was being guarded by more Daein soldiers than they would have been able to break through. Even the path of least resistance would have been too much for them, especially since they didn’t have a diversion. If Ike waited around for any longer, then he was going to see all of them destroyed by the Daein forces. 

If he waited around, that was. 

Ike rushed forward all at once, his blade glinting in the sunlight. “Over here!” he shouted. He was distantly aware of Gawain hissing at him to get back into the trees and out of view, but it was too late. The Daein soldiers had already caught a glimpse of him, and they clearly thought he was meant to be a reinforcement for the main group of mercenaries in the fight. They surged toward him accordingly, and Ike brandished his blade and waited for them. 

Behind Ike, Gawain gave up on any ideas of making it through the treeline stealthily. Now that Ike had drawn attention to them, they would have to stand and fight… But perhaps they stood more of a chance against the Daein forces if they decided to ally themselves with the mercenary company. The enemy of their enemy had to be their friend right now. Even if they waited until the mercenary group had been defeated, it wouldn’t have helped them to reach Gallia. They were only going to get one shot at this, and if it was going to have to come in the eyes of an unfamiliar ally, then so be it. 

The redheaded paladin was caught so off guard by the sudden arrival of reinforcements that she froze for a split second. One of the Daein soldiers tried to take advantage of this distraction to stab at her, but her counterattack made him regret it. The soldier was dead before he hit the ground, and the paladin barely noticed as she urged her horse ever forward. Her curiosity about the sudden arrival of new allies was clear, but so long as they were not wearing the armor of Daein’s forces, then she was willing to work with them.

Gawain and Soren joined the fight together, and Gawain fended off two soldiers with his dominant arm. With the other, he punched an approaching Daeinite back, leaving them perfectly vulnerable for Soren’s blast of wind magic. Mist remained close to the both of them, gripping at her single healing staff tightly. She had it just in case their group found itself in a situation like this, and she was overwhelmingly glad she had wound up purchasing a staff before everything spiraled out of her control this way. 

With the Daein forces now split between two groups to target, the forward advance on the border of Gallia grew faster and simpler. The trio standing at the back of the mercenaries’ group was starting to move more readily too, though the archer and cavalier were still taking care to not move so fast as to leave their other ally behind. Ike tried a few times to catch a glimpse of the face hiding beneath the brown cloak, but he gave up on it as another soldier rushed at him. 

In a matter of minutes, the group had cleared out a path leading toward the border. All that remained was the final party of defenders they needed to break through. The Daeinite soldiers on the other side of the area were rushing to greet them, but it was clear that they would not make it in time. A river marked the center of the battlefield, and moving around it was proving to be a lot more troublesome than they had expected. Ike felt the pressure in his chest begin to alleviate. He just needed to worry about making it over the border. The Daeinite soldiers wouldn’t want to pursue them beyond that unless they wanted to make an enemy of the king of Gallia, and that was likely not in Ashnard’s plan, at least not yet. If Ashnard was going to strike at Gallia, then he would want to do it himself. His pride wouldn’t let him leave the job to anyone else. 

Gawain was the first to reach the final wave of soldiers. None of them seemed to recognize him despite his past position as one of the Four Riders. It had been long enough ago now that those who would have recognized him wouldn’t have been in a pursuit party like this. Gawain did not hesitate to take advantage of this, and in a matter of seconds, he struck down all of the approaching soldiers. The path to Gallia opened soon afterward, and he tilted his head towards the road. “Come! We must hurry!” The other group of soldiers was fast approaching, and it would be a close call for the final members of the party to make it over the border before they were caught. Ike, Soren, and Mist followed him through first, and they vanished into the nearby trees in the blink of an eye. 

The mercenaries all looked to the redheaded paladin for guidance, waiting to see if she would confirm or deny the suggestion to remain with this group. She said nothing to turn the alliance down though, instead pressing her lips into a thin line and instructing her horse to make a run for it. The rest of the mercenaries followed her lead, and the other cavalier took up the rear, covering for the person in the cloak. The hooded figure cast one last glance over their shoulder, but at the cavalier’s urging, they kept moving and followed the paladin down the path Gawain had opened for them. 

Ike’s breaths were heavy and echoing in his chest by the time he came to a stop in between the trees. He had known to expect a fight eventually, but he hadn’t thought it would come quite like that. Either way, he was glad to be able to say he had come out of it in one piece. He had managed to escort Soren and the rest of his party to Gallia, and they may have even made a few allies along the way. 

“That was risky.”

Gawain’s voice cut through Ike’s peace, and he glanced up to see his father staring down at him with something stern in his eyes. Even so, Gawain was not as upset as he could have been, and Ike knew he would not be in for too harsh of a punishment. “In the future, consult the rest of us before you make a decision like that,” Gawain said, and Ike nodded. Gawain clearly wanted to go into detail about how dangerous such a move had been, but he held back. After all, Ike had potentially won them some new allies, and that meant more than any of them could have ever expressed in the moment. 

“I certainly never expected help would come in a moment like this.”

Ike looked up to see the redheaded paladin approaching the party with a faint smile on her face. It was clear she didn’t trust the new arrivals to the battle yet, but she was willing to at least extend an olive branch. “Thank you for the save,” the woman continued. “We likely wouldn’t have gotten out of that fight without your help.”

“It was nothing,” Ike replied with a shake of his head. He looked past the paladin at the rest of the mercenary group, and he finally got a good enough look at them to figure out how many of them there were. Three of the mercenaries had green hair–one a cavalier, one an axe fighter, and the last an archer. Another sniper stood near a heavily armored knight, and the last of the group was a purple-haired myrmidon. The cloaked figure remained near the back of the group while they assessed if these newcomers were trustworthy, but Ike couldn’t figure out any other details about them right now. 

“Are we sure we can trust them?” the older sniper asked, narrowing his eyes into a glare. “They wear colors I would expect to find in the Daein army. They couldn’t be from Crimea or Begnion.”

The paladin’s eyes shifted with doubt, but before she had the chance to express her fears, Soren jumped in to cover his party’s tracks the best he could. “We’re refugees because of the war,” Soren explained. “After the attack, we were left on the road, and we decided to come here.”

“Gallia is awfully far from Daein, isn’t it?” the paladin questioned. “What brings you to Gallia?”

“We’re here to meet with the king,” Gawain answered. “He’s an old friend of mine, and I believe he’ll be able to help us out of our… Less than fortunate circumstances.”

The paladin’s eyes widened. “You’re here for the same reason we are then,” she commented. “I suppose we have no reason but to go toward the castle together… After all of you introduce yourselves.”

Ike nodded. “My name is Ike. These two are…” He immediately regretted speaking so forwardly about his name. What if someone found out who he was and what he was going to do in Gallia? For all he knew, this could have led him and the rest of his group into danger, and he wouldn’t even register until it was much too late. 

“I’m Soren, and this is Mist,” Soren said. He didn’t seem to have the same reservations around being honest that Ike did, and if he thought it was safe enough to say who he and Mist were, then that had to mean something. Soren didn’t say anything about Gawain though, and he cast a glance up to his guard out of the corner of his name. 

“You can call me Greil,” Gawain chimed in with a bit too much ease. Ike immediately understood his logic; Gawain had been a member of the Four Riders in the past, and even though he had been away from his position for many years, he could have still been recognized based off his name. It would be safer for him to say he was someone else and then explain himself later if such a thing wound up being necessary. 

The paladin seemed to notice the hesitation in the air, but she didn’t comment on it. “It’s nice to meet all of you. My name is Titania, and this is Oscar, Boyd, Rolf, Shinon, Gatrie, and Mia. We’re the Crimson Mercenaries of Crimea,” the paladin–Titania–explained. “Thank you again for your help in fending off the Daein attackers.”

“But they’re still from Daein,” the sniper, Shinon, cut in. “For all we know, this could be another of Ashnard’s traps to try and get rid of us.”

“You think the king is after you?” Soren echoed in shock. Just what had this group of mercenaries done to get into trouble with the king of Daein of all people? Ike had thought he would be one of Ashnard’s greatest targets for quite some time, but this mercenary group clearly contradicted that idea. 

“We know he is,” Boyd declared with an exasperated sigh. “It’s a miracle none of his soldiers decided to take the chance to follow us across the border into Gallia. With how much they’ve been chasing us, it seemed like they were going to try it.”

“I’m glad they didn’t,” Mia sighed as she shook her head. “All of that aside, we should start to make our way up to the castle, shouldn’t we? We’ve got a meeting to get to as soon as possible.”

“Assuming that’s alright with everyone,” Titania corrected her. She turned to face the rest of the group, her gaze falling on the hooded person at the back of the group in particular. The figure was looking at Ike and the rest of his group a bit more openly now, but Ike couldn’t make out any details of their face even so. After a few seconds of staring and contemplation, the hooded figure nodded. Titania visibly relaxed, and she turned back to Ike’s group. “Let us be off then. We don’t have a moment to lose.”

Mist fell into step just beside Titania once the group started moving, and she looked up at the paladin in admiration. “I didn’t think we would run into any other groups that needed to talk to the king of Gallia on our way to the castle,” she admitted. “What are you there to talk to him about?”

Titania hesitated at that, and Gawain decided to probe a bit deeper too. “It doesn’t seem like the kind of mission a mercenary company would take under normal circumstances,” he commented. “I would have expected you to want to stay in Crimea until… Until everything blew over.” 

“The war forced us on the move,” Oscar said, though Ike could tell by his tone that he was trying to turn the subject of the conversation away from the reason they were in Gallia. “We were going to try and stay in place for a little bit longer, but we didn’t have much of a choice after the attack on Crimea.”

“The news of the war has already spread far and wide, I see,” Ike hummed. When Titania cast him an odd glance, he explained. “We were attacked a while ago, and we didn’t realize how quickly the news was going to spread. We’ve been on the road ever since the attack ended, so we’re a bit… Out of the loop.”

Titania clearly had a few questions about Ike’s choice of phrasing and what it meant for him to be on the run, but she chose to not voice any of them. She didn’t understand why fighters from Daein of all places would have been left on the run from an army they should have been working with. Beyond that, Titania didn’t know why in the world the group would have wanted to help her party when it would have been easier for them to close in around her and destroy them once and for all. Why try to forge an alliance with the group when they could have just killed them when working with the rest of the Daein forces at the border? 

And yet, despite what she would have expected, they were there looking at her with curiosity in their eyes and their weapons already put away. Regardless of how strange or improbable it seemed, Ike’s party seemed to have little to do with the Daein soldiers that had attacked them before they managed to break through the border and into Gallia. Something else must have been happening with them, though Titania had no idea how she was meant to get to the bottom of it. 

“I see,” Titania finally settled on saying with a muted nod. “I never would have expected to meet refugees from Daein all the way out here in Gallia. There are surely closer places for you to want to settle down.”

“We needed to speak with the king about something important,” Gawain reminded her. “And you need to do the same if I recall correctly. What are you here to speak with him for?”

Titania pressed her lips together into a thin line. After a few seconds of contemplation, she shook her head with such a tiny motion that it was almost unnoticeable. “I’m afraid that’s classified,” she said. “We can discuss it more another time… After we have already talked to the king about all we need to do.”

“It has something to do with the strange girl you’ve been protecting this entire time, doesn’t it?” Soren questioned, and Ike turned to face him with wide eyes. Soren inclined his head toward the figure at the back of the party, and they pulled the cloak a little bit closer to their body. “I can see an orange dress peering out from the bottom of the cloak, and it’s far too fancy for what someone would wear on the road. You went out of your way to make sure she was kept safe throughout the fight. If I had to wager a guess, I would say that the entire fight happened for the sake of keeping her out of the hands of the Daein attackers. You needed to deliver her to the castle of Gallia, didn’t you?”

The girl in the cloak looked down at the ground, not stopping her march toward the castle but clearly needing a moment to process just how quickly and easily Soren had seen through her. Before the girl had the chance to speak up though, Boyd stepped in front of her, his arms spread wide and defensive. “You had better not be looking for trouble!” he snapped back at Soren. “We don’t have to trust you, and if you show that you’re going to cause issues for us, then–”

“I’m not trying to seem untrustworthy,” Soren countered, keeping his voice shockingly level in the face of Boyd’s accusations. “I just want to know why you are so determined to make it to Gallia. Beyond that, I don’t understand why Daein soldiers would go so far to cut you off from reaching your destination. You must be important to Daein if they want to keep you from making it across the border. You said you were from Crimea, and if I had to guess, I would say that has everything to do with why you are being targeted. You must have survived the attack on Crimea, and now, you’re here. Why?”

Soren’s thorough, brutal assessment of the situation was enough to make the air in between the trees go stiff with newfound tension. The girl let out a slow sigh, and her breath shook on its way out of her parted lips. Ike watched her for a long moment before he opted to break the silence in her stead. “We can help you if you want us to help you,” Ike offered. “You don’t have to do this alone if you want someone else to stand with you. If this has something to do with the war, then we would be more than happy to help you however we can.”

Once again, the girl in the cloak opened her mouth to explain herself, but she was cut off when Oscar placed a hand on her shoulder. The girl looked up to meet his gaze, and Oscar smiled kindly but bittersweetly down at her. He was afraid of what all of this could have done for them if they were forced to reveal their hand prematurely, but he understood her desire to talk about it. “You don’t need to say anything if you’re not comfortable with it,” Oscar assured her. “It’s your choice.”

The girl remained quiet for a few seconds after that, considering his words as she stared at her shoes and the hem of her dress. She swallowed dryly, clearly trying and failing to banish her nerves. “No… I want to say it,” the girl finally managed to say. “I believe it would be wrong of us to accept their help during the previous fight and not give them an explanation in return. They saved us, and we should thank them for their hard work. It would only be right.”

“You shouldn’t feel pressured into it though,” Rolf reminded her. “If something bad happens, then it would be best if we didn’t talk about it with anyone we didn’t already know we could trust.”

“But they’re going to speak with King Caineghis as well, are they not?” the girl countered. “If they are friends with him, then it would stand to reason that they would likely be friends with us as well.”

“But they could be lying about it. Daein’s soldiers clearly knew we were making our way toward Gallia. That was how they knew to cut us off when we were getting closer to the border,” Boyd told her. “For all we know, they could be another group trying to gain our trust before they stab us in the back the instant they get the chance.”

The girl shook her head. “If they were going to do that, then they could have already betrayed us. It would have been much simpler for them to lash out the instant they realized who we were. They could have betrayed us during the previous battle when their allies were there with them. However, they did not, and I doubt Ashnard would be able to attack Gallia with such a small force. I believe we can trust them.”

Titania remained silent for a few seconds of contemplation before she settled on sighing. “How about this? We can talk to the king, and if he trusts them, then we can tell them everything we know. That way, we don't put ourselves in danger before we have to.”

The girl nodded, and Ike found himself doing much the same. Even so, he had to wonder what in the world could have merited all the secrecy. He supposed he would just have to find out soon. He could be patient for a little bit longer. 

Especially if it would make sense of all the strangeness he had seen in the last few hours. 

Chapter Text

The remainder of the journey to the castle of Gallia was quiet and tense. Soren did his best to keep an eye on everyone in his new ragtag group, restricting his frown the best he could to varying degrees of success. Any goodwill that could have been built from fighting and surviving the previous battle was long gone now in favor of a paranoia of being stabbed in the back. All would find an answer or an honesty when they arrived in the Gallian palace. They just needed to be patient. 

Gawain spoke up when the group arrived at the castle’s exterior. The group was greeted by three laguz–two cats and a tiger–that decided to escort them up to their destination. One of the cats had bright orange hair and a constant scowl. The tiger beside her had blue hair and a constant soft smile. The final of the trio was a blue-haired cat with heterochromia, and his smirk refused to fade. They were all starkly different, and Soren couldn’t say he understood how the trio seemed to have become such good friends. 

The journey up to the throne room took the group through the halls of the palace, and Soren caught a glimpse of the training grounds below. A red-haired lion was facing off against a silvery tiger and a cat laguz who looked almost identical to the scowling escort at the front of Soren’s party. Soren paused for only a moment to look over the edge of the nearby railing into the courtyard before he forced himself to keep moving. 

“Of course we had to come to damn beast country,” Shinon muttered under his breath. Unfortunately, he was in reach of Titania’s earshot, and she whirled around to silence him with a glare. Shinon seemed like he wanted to snap back, but after a few seconds of tense staring at Titania, he thought better of it. Gatrie sighed heavily at his side, clearly having expected Shinon’s aggression and having long given up on trying to stop it. 

Soren shook his head and rolled his eyes when he was certain no one would notice it. He knew many people both in and out of Daein were incredibly racist and cruel to the laguz, but he had never stooped to that low. He had been raised by a laguz, after all. Almedha had never transformed or spoken of her heritage beyond vague implications, but she had been certain to raise her son right so he wasn’t regurgitating the bigotry found throughout Daein. Soren realized now that he was glad to have been raised properly; clearly Shinon hadn’t been in that same position, and it was just a matter of time before he found himself in trouble for it. 

Shinon’s upset mutterings only brought more questions to Soren’s mind. If Shinon so clearly didn’t want to be there, then why was the entire party in Gallia to begin with? Clearly their purpose there went far beyond Shinon’s petty rambles, but that did little to explain the situation. Soren knew the circumstances must have been intertwined with the secrecy of the girl in orange at the back of their party, but he hadn’t been able to glean any other details but that over the course of the journey through the palace. He would just have to wait until they arrived in the throne room and he could hear it from the lips of his begrudging allies, he supposed. 

Soren’s hopes for answers received a reply sooner than he expected, and his group fell into stillness just outside a magnificent set of double doors. They had arrived at the throne room, it seemed. The cat with blue hair excused himself before he slipped inside to speak with the king briefly. Soren looked at the doors long after the cat had disappeared from view, a muted frown on his face. There was still a bit too much of this that he didn’t understand for his liking, and he could only hope he would be able to get to the bottom of it soon. 

After a few minutes of quiet waiting, the doors were pushed open once again. The cat with heterochromia had opened them, and he gestured for the group to file inside. The orange-haired cat and the tiger remained outside the room to close the doors, but the blue-haired cat remained in the room. His smile never faded even though he was clearly aware–at least to some extent–that the conversation at hand was bound to be a somber one. 

Soren froze at the sight of the king of Gallia, and his heart skipped a beat in his chest. He had heard about King Caineghis over the course of his studies growing up, but he had never imagined he would find himself face to face with the man responsible for the greatness of Gallia. Caineghis was massive and towered over everyone in the room. Gawain was incredibly tall, and Soren had been forced to crane his neck back to meet his gaze for years, but even Gawain seemed like nothing when set beside Caineghis. Soren could only hope they were able to get Caineghis’ help from this coming conversation; having an ally like him on their side would be a massive boon, and it would likely be the first step of many needed to reclaim Daein and Crimea from Ashnard’s control. 

Caineghis looked over the group of guests for a moment before his gaze caught on Gawain. He was clearly shocked to see him, but before he had the chance to say anything that may have defeated the point of Gawain’s ruse, the silence was broken. Gawain stepped forward and cleared his throat. “It is a pleasure to see you again, King Caineghis. It has been far too long,” he began. There was something cautious about his posture, and he was hoping the message got across to the king that he was keeping something secret from the others he was with. 

Caineghis only needed to study his posture for a few moments before he understood. “It certainly has been,” he confirmed. He looked to the rest of the group once again, his eyes narrowing. “You brought quite a few guests with you, I see…”

Caineghis went silent, all of his thoughts dying away in the back of his throat when the girl in orange stepped forward. She had reached up to pull back the hood of her cloak, revealing her face in full for the first time. Her hair was a deep emerald green color, and it fell across her back in gentle waves. Her eyes were overflowing with waves of grief, and she made no attempt to hide it. Caineghis seemed to find something familiar in her face much like how he had with Gawain, but there was something different about it this time. “What brings you here to Gallia?” he asked, his gaze not leaving the green-haired girl. 

“My apologies for coming here unannounced, Your Majesty,” Titania began as she took a step forward. “You do not know who most of us are, but… My name is Titania. I am the captain of the Crimson Mercenaries of Crimea. We have come here to seek your aid because… Because of the war in Crimea. The king has been killed, and the entire royal family is dead… Save for his daughter.”

Soren’s eyes widened. King Ramon didn’t have a daughter… Right? Soren had studied all there was to know about the politics of Tellius, and that included learning all he could about the rulers and their families. Surely he would have known if the king of Crimea had a daughter. Such an idea was completely absurd… 

Or so he wanted to believe. All of the protests rising up in the back of Soren’s throat fell away when he looked up at Caineghis and saw the king of beasts’ face grow dark. “You survived,” he concluded, and Soren felt the color drain from his face. If Caineghis was confirming it, then that meant that this was true. Caineghis knew this was true. 

The girl with green hair let out a shaky sigh, and Soren realized belatedly just how much she resembled the late king. He had the same dark green hair she did, and his eyes were kind much like hers. King Ramon had been a great man, and he was known far and wide across Tellius for his great deeds for the people of Crimea and even beyond his home’s borders. Even so, Soren had never heard of him having a daughter. Surely such a detail would have come up at some point, right?

Then again, he supposed that most people did not know about him either. He was Ashnard’s son, but the vast majority of the world was unaware he existed too. If it was possible for his identity to have been hidden for all this time, then it wasn’t entirely out of the question for another country to make much the same gambit. 

“My name is Elincia Ridell Crimea,” the girl with green hair began. Her voice shook with each word she spoke, but she did her best to keep her composure intact. “I am the daughter of King Ramon, and…” She looked like she wanted to say something else, but she couldn’t find the words nor the power to continue for another few seconds. “I am the last surviving member of the Crimean royal family.”

“Hold on a moment,” Ike interjected, holding up a hand. “The king of Crimea had a daughter?”

“That was the same reaction all of us had,” Titania told him, gesturing to the rest of her company. “We found Princess Elincia while routing an attacking party of Daein soldiers. They were pursuing her, but she managed to escape on her own. When she awoke, she told us of her story. She was born to the king after the next heir was named to be her uncle. To avoid a civil war over the line of succession, she was raised in secret… But the other nations’ rulers were all made aware of her existence ahead of time.”

“We didn’t know what to say when we first heard all of this, but we had no choice but to listen to her,” Oscar added. “As soon as we took her in and tried to protect her, we were attacked by wave after wave of Daein soldiers. That was enough to tell us all we needed to know. She truly is the daughter of the king of Crimea, and the fact that King Ashnard is targeting her is proof of it. He would not go so far unless he knew she was telling the truth about her bloodline.”

“I was made aware of Princess Elincia’s existence shortly after her birth,” Caineghis chimed in. “All of the leaders of Tellius knew about it in case of a tragedy. It seems now though that someone who was aware of the secret chose to take advantage of it in order to drive Crimea to ruin.”

“The nobles and royal family all fell in a sudden attack on Melior,” Elincia went on. “I was separated from my retainers, and… King Ashnard is doing all in his power to find me and eliminate the final member of the royal bloodline.”

Soren found himself looking over at Ike out of the corner of his eye. Not only was there another nation with a secret heir–and one around his age, no less–but they were under danger because of the same circumstances too. Ashnard was after both Soren and Elincia for the sake of his war, and he would do anything in his power if he was able to kill or capture them and complete his conquest. Through a perfect storm, Soren had stumbled into perhaps the only other person who would ever understand his situation. 

He wished he knew how to feel it. 

His heart still racing in his chest, Soren looked up at Caineghis again. “Is this true?” he demanded, his voice coming out hoarse. He knew what the answer was going to be already, but he couldn’t stand by and not pose the question regardless. 

Caineghis nodded. He studied Soren for a long moment, and Soren felt the world slow down. He looked much more like his mother than his father, but Soren still bore a bit of resemblance to Ashnard. Soren had no idea if Caineghis had heard of his existence, but it wouldn’t matter either way if Caineghis was able to deduce his bloodline just by looking at him. 

Gawain stepped forward to shift the tides of attention. “We can explain more about our situation soon enough,” he told Caineghis. “For now, we should stay on topic. We encountered Titania and Princess Elincia’s party on our way into Gallia, and we rescued them from a Daein attack. Daein soldiers were waiting for them at the border, but we pushed through and came here to speak with you.”

Caineghis studied Gawain for a long moment, trying to pull some new information from everything he was and was not saying. He seemed to realize Gawain was no longer with Daein as one would have expected, and he nodded, though his eyes demanded an explanation as soon as the opportunity arose. “I see… I had heard of the attack on Crimea, but I was unaware Daein’s soldiers had already spread so far as to threaten our borders,” Caineghis frowned deeply.

“Will you be able to help us, King Caineghis?” Elincia questioned, her eyes gleaming from grief and exhaustion. “I know you were close friends with my father before his passing, and… I thought that if anyone would stand by me to reclaim Crimea, it would be you.”

Caineghis considered his words for a long moment, and Soren could tell by the tension in the air that the answer was going to be no. “Tensions between the beorc and laguz have remained tense and dangerous in recent years,” Caineghis began. “I am afraid I cannot help you without causing great internal strife within Gallia. It would be dangerous for both of our nations as long as the beorc and laguz stand so firmly opposed.”

Elincia’s shoulders sagged like all of the air had been sucked out of her body. “I… I see…” she murmured. She didn’t seem too surprised by that response, but it was disheartening to her regardless. She had pinned all of her hopes on receiving aid from Caineghis, and as soon as it was denied, the world seemed to cave in around her. 

“However… I believe you will find an ally in Begnion,” Caineghis went on, and Elincia looked up at him with wide eyes. “The army of Begnion is great, and if you can forge an alliance with the apostle, then you will have all the help you could ever need. I can provide you with a ship to reach Begnion, and once there, you can speak with the apostle.”

Elincia’s smile returned, though it remained every bit as fragile and breakable as it had been previously. “Thank you,” she whispered, the words seeming to shatter as soon as she spoke them. “I cannot say it enough.”

“We can discuss the details of the plan when morning arrives. I imagine you are all tired from your journey,” Caineghis said next. “I can give you all accommodations for the night, and we can talk more about your path to Begnion tomorrow. Until then, you are welcome to rest here for the night.”

“Thank you so much,” Titania smiled, bowing her head and pressing one hand to her chest. “I cannot say it enough.”

Caineghis nodded. “Of course. Ranulf will show you to your rooms. I look forward to speaking with you in the morning.” At Caineghis’ words, the blue-haired cat–Ranulf, it seemed–stepped forward and led the mercenaries and Elincia out of the room. 

Soren watched them go, not daring to move a muscle until after the door had been tapped shut once again. Soren let out a heavy breath he hadn’t even realized he was holding, and the air rattled in his lungs on the way out. He had never imagined he would find himself in a situation like this. He hadn’t ever thought he would leave the villa, much less that he would meet someone else who knew what his life was like so perfectly. Ashnard was not the only ruler with a secret heir, and Soren’s reflection was suffering from much the same pain he was. Soren hadn’t thought anyone would be able to fully understand the pain he had been put through after he was forced to flee from his home, but now, he knew he was wrong to jump to such conclusions. Elincia knew it better than anyone, and she would for a long time if they had to go all the way to Begnion in order to forge an alliance. 

“I never would have thought Crimea was hiding a princess for all these years,” Mist admitted with a shake of her head. “It seems like something out of a story.”

“But it is very much rooted in reality… As I am certain all of you know,” Caineghis remarked, looking down at Soren. The prince of Daein resisted the urge to squirm beneath Caineghis’ gaze, but the lion king did not let up. “Daein has been doing much the same for many years now… Though I am surprised to see you here of all places. I would have expected you to be fighting under Ashnard’s banner.”

“I’m afraid plans changed,” Gawain replied with a shake of his head. “Ashnard led an attack on the villa where the prince was being raised. He wanted his son to join him, and when Lady Almedha refused to give him up, he invaded the villa.”

“I see,” Caineghis nodded slowly. “I was wondering what had become of you after the war began. I should have known you would be loyal to your new charge rather than siding with Ashnard after all he has done.”

Soren looked back and forth between Caineghis and Gawain, his anxiety starting to bubble up in his chest. “How do you two know each other?” he blurted out even though that was far from the most pressing question at hand. “How do you know about me?”

“I came to Gallia many times on diplomatic trips when I was a member of the Four Riders. It’s just as I told you,” Gawain said, though Soren felt that explained even less than ever before. “I came to know the king well over the course of my trips here, and we became friends even outside of our work.”

“Ashnard never told the rest of the leaders of Tellius about your birth. He wanted to keep you a secret, it seemed,” Caineghis went on. “I heard about you from Gawain… Though it does not seem like you are going by that name these days.”

“The prince’s existence has been kept a secret, but my past position in the Four Riders has not been held to the same level of secrecy,” Gawain explained. “I thought it would jeopardize our cause if they knew who I am by name, so I decided to give them the name of Greil instead.”

“I see…” Caineghis nodded, not offering his understanding or disapproval on the matter. “You have come a long way since you were a member of the Four Riders.”

“I wish I could have come farther,” Gawain replied vaguely. When he noticed all three of the teens in the room were looking at him in shock, he explained. “King Caineghis was one of the first to know when I decided to resign from my position. Lady Almedha asked me to move to the villa with her when she left the castle, and I decided to join her. I told King Caineghis of all of this during my last trip herer many years ago. I know we can trust him with anything. You have nothing to fear with him knowing what we need to do.” He looked back to Caineghis. “Though I suppose I cannot expect you to look after Prince Soren given what you told the princess of Crimea.”

Caineghis shook his head. “I am afraid not… Though I would like to know more about the attack that sent you on the run to begin with. The situation with Ashnard deteriorated rapidly, I take it?”

“It did,” Soren replied with a stern nod. “He wanted me to join him in planning for the war on Crimea. I haven’t seen him in years, and when I do see him… I want nothing to do with him. My mother has not told me much of what happened between them, but I can conclude that none of it is good. When he attacked the villa, all of us were sent on the run to try and escape him, but… My mother stayed behind to try and buy us time. We do not know what happened to her after we were separated.”

“I have heard a few rumors of her fate,” Caineghis told him, and Soren’s eyes widened with anticipation. “The people say she was taken captive by Ashnard and is being held in the palace of Daein. I cannot say for certain if this is true or not, but if there is a chance that it is, then you may have the answers you seek sooner than you expected.”

“Oh, thank Ashera,” Soren murmured, pressing one hand to his chest just to feel his heart beating beneath his fingertips. He had never been particularly religious, but he was willing to offer his thanks to the goddess so long as it seemed necessary, and it had never been more important than it was right now. “Thank you so much for telling us.”

“I fear that is where the good news will have to end though,” Caineghis frowned. “Just as I told Princess Elincia, I will not be able to look after you or provide you the support you seek. It would be even harder to protect a prince of Daein than a princess of Crimea, and if the current tensions between beorc and laguz are keeping me from looking after Ramon’s daughter… I am certain you understand what this must mean.”

“Unfortunately, yes,” Gawain nodded. “But you have something else in mind for us, don’t you?”

“That I do,” Caineghis confirmed. “You may not be able to find an alliance in Gallia, but there are others who would be willing to help you, I am sure. I believe you would be able to go to–”

Gawain shook his head and took a step forward. “I am afraid that will not work,” he cut in. “There are a few things that must remain hidden at the moment, and that is one of them.”

Caineghis studied Gawain’s face for a long, silent moment. Soren looked back and forth between the two men, trying to discern any details he could from everything they were not saying, but he came up short. In the end, Caineghis nodded, though the motion was far slower this time. “There will likely be little safety for your party there then… But I may have another suggestion for you.”

Shock swept across Soren’s face, and he felt the world stop all in an instant. “You want us to go to Begnion with the princess of Crimea,” he concluded. “We want to defeat Daein just like the Crimson Mercenaries and the princess they fight for. If we worked together, then we would stand a greater chance of killing Ashnard and winning Begnion’s alliance.”

The room fell silent and stiff for a long moment. Soren should have seen this coming. If he was being honest with himself, it was perfectly expected just as it was perfectly reasonable. If Caineghis wasn’t able to help them because of their beorc nature or ties to Daein, then it would stand to reason they would need to find another ally. Begnion was far from being a nation Soren wanted to associate with, but it wasn’t as if he had much of a choice in the matter. If he wanted to stop Ashnard, then he would do what was necessary, and it started with finding allies to stand by him. If Begnion would be the nation to give him the guiding light he needed, then the choice was as good as made for him already. 

That didn’t mean it was something Soren wanted to do though. He had heard his fair share of unsavory stories about the senate of Begnion, and even if he didn’t know the details of what the nation’s leaders had gotten up to, he knew they were dangerous. Trying to form an alliance with people like that was going to be risky… But if Begnion was the only choice he had in finding help, then he would do it. If it would help him to find his mother again even a little bit sooner, then he would do what he had to. 

“We don’t have to do this,” Ike tried to offer even though he knew just as well as Soren that their choice had already been made. “If you don’t want to do this, then we can find another way to defeat Ashnard.”

“What other way will we have to defeat him?” Soren challenged, and Ike went silent, already knowing what the answer was going to be. “If we’re going to win, then we have to make an alliance with someone. Begnion seems like it’s our only choice right now, so we’ll have to go there and see if we can get help from the apostle.”

“What are we going to do about the mercenaries?” Mist questioned with a frown. “Do you think we should tell them everything we know?”

Soren shook his head. “We should keep our histories a secret for as long as possible. She barely has a reason to trust us right now, and if she learned who we were and how we’re connected to the man who killed her parents… We’ll never be able to work with her. We need all the help we can get, and our only choice at the moment is to stand with the Crimean princess. She wouldn’t want to help us if she learned who we were, so we just won’t tell her. If we have to talk about it one day, then it’ll happen after we’ve won enough of her trust for her to want to hear us out on our secrets.”

Soren knew even before he finished his explanation that his choice would be an unpopular one. Mist squirmed on the spot at the idea of being dishonest even though she knew better than to think they had any other options. If they wanted to find allies, then they had to be willing to put their reservations with secrecy and truth aside. Their only choice now was to go to Begnion with Elincia’s forces and hope they were able to win the approval of the apostle after they arrived. 

Even so, no one spoke out against his suggestion. They knew they had no other choice but to go along with it. Caineghis had been unable to offer them the help they craved, so they would go to Begnion and see if the senate was willing to give them the army they needed. If this was the only path that would lead to Ashnard’s death and downfall, then it was the only path they could even think of following. 

“I suppose that’s that then,” Ike concluded. There was something dark in his eyes despite his best efforts to hide it, but he didn’t let his reservations tumble from his lips without permission. “We should get some rest so we can talk about this tomorrow. We have a lot to catch our new allies up on when morning comes.”

“If you need help with explaining anything, I would be more than happy to help,” Caineghis offered. “I will do all in my power to keep your secrets hidden for as long as you would like me to keep them hidden. I trust you to do what is best for the sake of your cause… Though I would ask that you tread as carefully as possible. I do not want you to place yourselves in danger because of your situation.”

“I’ll make sure we’re safe,” Gawain assured him even though they all knew there was little a single man would be able to do when he was forced to face off with an entire army and all of the danger it brought. “Thank you again for your help. I appreciate it.”

Caineghis nodded, and he rose to his feet to get the door for his guests. Soren watched him silently, a frown on his face. He never would have thought he would find himself in a situation like this, but there he was. His only choice now was to try and make the most of it. He needed to set this right, and at the moment, that meant going to Begnion and finishing this by forging an alliance with the largest nation of Tellius. 

When Soren thought about it that way, he couldn’t help feeling as if ice had been poured into his lungs… But he refused to let it stop him. He would do anything in his power to destroy his father and the horrible rule he had brought to Daein and now Crimea. If it took Begnion’s help to see him into an early grave, then Soren would do what was necessary. 

Soren let out a slow breath, and the chill of the air seemed to destroy him from the inside out… But the pain was far less than everything else he had endured for the last few days. He would find a way to make this work. He had to. His mother was counting on him, and so were countless others. 

For the first time, Soren would have to step up and behave like a prince… And he could only hope he was ready to rise and meet the challenge.

Chapter Text

Soren’s body felt heavier than he could have ever imagined when he started the journey to the room Caineghis had reserved for him for the night. He couldn’t say he was surprised with the way the conversation had ended. Caineghis was a king, and he would have to think of his people before he focused all of his attention on helping foreigners like Elincia or Soren. Caineghis needed to protect the laguz under his care before even thinking about the beorc who came to him for aid. Begnion would have to be their only option, and Soren could only hope it turned out to be a good one. 

But at the same time, Soren wished Caineghis could have done something more for him. He had come all this way pinning his hopes on the idea that Caineghis would be able to bring him to a brighter future, but that was clearly asking for too much. His only option right now was to wait and see what happened when he arrived in Sienne. Hopefully, the apostle would be willing to hear him and Elincia out on their desire to see Ashnard stopped. 

But what if the apostle wanted nothing to do with either one of them? For all Soren knew, that could have turned out to be a fool’s errand too. He wouldn’t know for sure until it was too late to pull out of it, and no one else involved with him would either. Soren needed to make sure his father was stopped before he had the chance to hurt anyone else, but it was hard to be certain of anything until he got there. At this point, all Soren could say with certainty was that he didn’t like having to bury so much of the truth behind his circumstances. 

Because he knew he would have to lie to Elincia and the rest of their party. What reason would any of them have to trust him if they learned he was Ashnard’s son? Soren had never wanted much to do with the throne before then, and he wanted even less to do with it now that his father had tried to kill him and captured his mother. Soren would be happiest if he was able to stop Ashnard once and for all without ever having to acknowledge what he was doing to the world. He would be happiest if he didn’t need to worry about any of this, but he knew better than to fall for it. There was too much for him to do, and he needed to be ready for all of it. 

“How are you feeling?”

Soren barely realized he was alone with Ike until after his bodyguard spoke up beside him. Soren turned to face him with a thin breath so he looked at least a bit more in control of himself. “I… I don’t know,” Soren replied, though he knew what his gut instinct was. He was disappointed, and he didn’t understand half of what Gawain and Caineghis talked about over his head. He wanted to get to the bottom of all of this, but he couldn’t do that if he had no way of getting help from Gallia. He was going to have to waste even more time by getting on a boat and going out of his way to Begnion. This was one of the worst outcomes he could have ever imagined, and he really wished he didn’t have to admit it. 

“I’m glad to know your mother is safe if nothing else,” Ike said. “Well, maybe ‘safe’ is pushing it a bit as long as Ashnard is involved, but I’m glad she’s still alive. If she has been captured, then that means we can get her back if we just push as hard as we can.”

Soren nodded dully. “Yeah… That’s true.” He was relieved to know Almedha was still alive, but he couldn’t relax fully when he knew there was always the chance that could change in the blink of an eye. In fact, he knew it would change with very little notice if Ashnard realized what he was thinking. If Soren tried to break Almedha out of her prison prematurely, then Ashnard would kill her. There was very little stability Soren could rely on, and what peace he did have felt like it was being held hostage right along with Almedha. 

Soren walked into his room and sat down on the edge of the bed. He was exhausted, but at the same time, he was too anxious to sleep. He needed to stay up for as long as possible so he could come up with a plan, but he couldn’t ignore his body’s needs for sleep as long as he would need to start marching when the morning came. Ike sat beside him, and Soren realized his friend would not be leaving him. Even though they technically had their own rooms for the night, Ike would stay there for as long as he was needed. He would be there at Soren’s side through the whole night if that was what he thought was necessary. Soren couldn’t have thanked him for it enough, and his throat refused to form the words needed to express it. 

“I don’t know how I feel about having to lie to the others though,” Ike went on. “I didn’t think Crimea had a secret princess, but I suppose Daein couldn’t be the only nation to come up with an idea like that. I would much rather be honest with them about what we know and who we are, but… I suppose we don’t have much of a choice.”

“We would only put ourselves in danger if we told them who we are right away,” Soren pointed out. “They have no reason to want to work with a group from Daein at all, and they especially won’t want to work with a group containing the secret prince and his guards.”

“I guess you’re right,” Ike agreed, though Soren could tell he didn’t like having to admit it. Ike was honest to a fault at times, and his trusting nature was one reason he had found a place in Soren’s heart so soon after they met. Soren wanted to trust as deeply and greatly as Ike, but he knew he couldn’t do it. He was a prince, and he knew the danger that came with that. Ike, on the other hand, wanted something better to be possible, and it was every bit as admirable as it was mystifying.

Soren found himself leaning back until he was sprawled across his mattress for the night, and he let out a heavy sigh he hadn’t realized he had been holding in. “I never thought this would happen,” Soren muttered before he could hold the words back. “I never thought I would have a reason to leave the villa, much less to come all the way to Gallia and get ready to wage a war against my father.”

“We’re going to find a way to stop Ashnard,” Ike assured him. “We’re going to make sure all of this is set right again. If that means working with Elincia, then so be it. We’ll do what we have to in order to fix this, and then we’ll go back home.”

“I don’t know if we’ll be able to do that though,” Soren hummed, choosing to not comment on how familiar Ike had already come to think of Elincia. He didn’t even bother with using a title for her, though Soren supposed Ike had never used a title for him either. “I don’t know if we can return to the villa again once this is over. If we defeat Ashnard, then Daein is going to be left without a ruler. I’ve been kept a secret from the public up to this point, but the war could bring me into the light. It could cause major problems for Daein and the rest of Tellius. Nothing is ever going to be the same.”

Ike laid down beside Soren, staring up at the ceiling with a frown so heavy it seemed to make his entire face droop at the corners. “We should get some rest,” he advised, seemingly figuring out that the longer they talked about this, the worse it would make them both feel. 

Soren couldn’t help but agree. He knew he would have to confront the truth of his circumstances soon enough, but he couldn't do it tonight. There was nothing he could change tonight no matter how little he wanted to admit it. He could think about a solution when morning came. Right now, the best thing he could do was sleep. 

When unconsciousness claimed him, Soren found it merciful and complete. He did not dream, and he was grateful for it. He knew his mind would have steered him in a direction he detested, and if he could avoid it for a short while longer, then he would do it. 

After all, he would not have that option in the morning. 

~~~~~

When morning came, Soren woke along with it. He blinked to awareness slowly, finding himself still sprawled out on top of the blankets of his bed rather than beneath them. Ike was in a similar position at his side. Ike hadn’t even removed his sheath from his hip before he laid down. Soren let out a small huff through his nostrils at the sight as he got ready for the rest of the day. 

It was cruel and miserable, wasn’t it? Soren had fought so hard to make it to Gallia, but that hadn’t meant much of anything in the end. He would have to leave just as soon as he had arrived and set out for Begnion. Caineghis was giving him a path to Begnion, and hopefully, the largest nation of Tellius would give Soren the salvation he was searching for so desperately. 

But before he left Gallia, Soren had one other question nagging at the back of his mind. He needed to speak with Caineghis and see if he could press even a few more secrets out of him. Caineghis and Gawain had talked above him during their conversation the day before, and Soren needed to see if he could find anything on his own even if he had failed to ask Gawain. Soren couldn’t help theorizing even now that his mother had come from Gallia, and based on the familiarity with which Gawain and Caineghis spoke, it wasn’t out of the question to guess that Almedha had known Caineghis too. Soren knew nothing of his laguz heritage, but maybe Caineghis would be able to fill him in on a few details. 

Soren charted a course for the throne room. He hoped Caineghis would be awake despite the early hour, and when he arrived, he realized he had been right to hope for it. Caineghis was standing on the other side of the room, his hands clasped together behind his back as he looked out at the ocean of trees surrounding the castle. The doors leading into the throne room were ajar, and Soren hesitated when he was standing between them. He swallowed back the rest of his nerves and knocked at the door. “King Caineghis?” he called out. All of a sudden, Soren felt like his training in speaking with nobles and royals had been horribly insufficient. Something about Caineghis was far more intimidating than anyone else he had ever met could have been. 

Caineghis pulled himself out of his thoughts at the sound of Soren’s voice, and he turned to face the prince with a smile. “Prince Soren,” he greeted, though he silenced himself when he remembered the ruse he was meant to be helping to uphold. “Is there something you need from me?”

“I had a question for you,” Soren said, stepping into the throne room and ignoring the way his heart screamed in his chest. “You have known… Greil for a very long time. I was wondering if perhaps you knew my mother too. I know she is a laguz and that I am a Branded, but she has not told me anything about her laguz heritage. I… I was hoping you would be able to fill me in on a few details about where she came from. Greil chose to come here to Gallia for a reason, and I was wondering if perhaps my mother’s history had something to do with it.”

Something indecipherable flared up in Caineghis’ eyes, but he shoved it back where it had come from just as quickly as it had appeared. “I… I see,” Caineghis began. He looked out over the trees outside the throne room once again, his eyes narrowing into slits. “I fear this is not something I am at liberty to share. Your mother should be the one who–”

Another knock at the door pulled Soren and Caineghis out of their conversation, and Soren looked up to see Elincia had appeared in between the two massive double doors leading into the throne room. She pulled her hand away from the door and folded it in front of her chest. “My apologies,” she said hurriedly. “I did not realize the two of you were already speaking.”

“It is fine,” Caineghis assured her, something like relief washing through his voice. Soren stared up at Caineghis as Elincia entered the room, and his heart went stiff in his chest. Caineghis clearly knew what his laguz heritage was, but he was choosing to not say anything about it. What could be the reason for all of the secrecy? Almedha was being held hostage at the moment, and it wasn’t as if Soren would be able to ask her about it until after the war had ended and she had been set free. Why hold back right now? “What did you need, Princess Elincia?”

Elincia tried and failed to maintain her composure as she arrived a few paces in front of Caineghis and Soren. She snuck in another glance at Soren, and that was seemingly the final crack her defenses could take. She bowed her head in his direction, pressing her eyes shut so she didn’t need to look at him directly. “I wanted to say sorry to you,” Elincia told him softly. “I know that I have brought great danger upon your party already, and–”

Soren stared at Elincia for a long moment, his shoulders growing tense and uncomfortable. “Don’t apologize,” he cut in. “We’re going to help you get to Begnion. You’re not going on your own.”

Elincia was so shocked that she shot upright again in an instant, her eyes wide and her cheeks pale. “You… What?” she asked softly. “You do not need to come with us if you do not want to.”

“We’re interested in accomplishing the same goal, aren’t we?” Soren asked bluntly, and Elincia floundered before going entirely silent. “It makes sense for us to work together and ensure the king of Daein’s conquest stops as soon as possible. Why wouldn’t we collaborate?”

Elincia considered that question for a long moment before she nodded. “I… I suppose you are right about us having the same goal… But I do not wish to put anyone else in danger if at all possible,” Elincia told him. “I know Lady Titania has already done a great favor for me by bringing me this far, but I was thinking of telling her to walk away. It would be dangerous for her to continue to travel with me as long as the entire army of Daein is trying to pursue us.”

“I don’t think you would be able to ask her to walk away now even if you wanted to… And I think we both know that you don’t,” Soren said bluntly, and Elincia’s entire body stiffened. “You need her if you’re going to reclaim your country. You know that. You may as well just take advantage of her help as long as you have it.”

“You are the sole hope Crimea has right now,” Caineghis added. “You may feel you are inviting danger onto them, but the fact of the matter is that you need to keep going for the sake of your people. Ashnard would continue to pursue your new friends even if you parted ways from them. The choice has already been made for all of you, and it is in your best interests to embrace it rather than trying to fight it.”

Elincia nodded slowly, though it was clear that she did not believe it as much as she would have liked. “Thank you… Both of you,” she managed to say. “I appreciate all you have both done for me, and… I am glad I can say that I have such powerful and strong people on my side.”

Soren felt something warm creep up the back of his throat, bile born of bitter tragedy, but he didn’t let it spill free of his lips. “We’ll do what we have to in order to stop Ashnard,” Soren eventually settled on saying. “We all have a common goal of wanting to stop him. If we’re going to fight toward the same purpose, then we may as well work together. My party is made up of refugees from Ashnard’s attack, and we’re not going to take his violence sitting down either.” All of a sudden, he understood why Ike hesitated so much when the idea of lying to Elincia and her party came up. He almost wanted to be honest with them for a few seconds too even though he knew it was not in their best interests at all. If they were to remain strong, then they would need to keep the secret hidden for a little bit longer… Assuming it ever came out at all. 

Elincia nodded, and she cast Soren a shaky but grateful smile. “Thank you.” She swallowed dryly, pressing her hands a little bit closer to her chest. “I am admittedly shocked to hear there are people within Daein who are willing to risk so much to go against Ashnard’s rule… I would have thought most of the nation would support him given the circumstances.”

Soren shook his head. “I want nothing to do with that monster. If I have to turn against my own country in order to make sure he never has the chance to hurt anyone, then so be it. That is a choice I am happy to make any day.”

Elincia nodded once again, though Soren could see there was more on her mind than she was willing to admit. “Thank you again. I am glad to have you by my side.” She snuck in a glance over her shoulder, her hardly subtle way of trying to excuse herself from the conversation. “I should go and make arrangements with Lady Titania for our march to come, especially if your party is planning on joining us. I will see you shortly.” Elincia offered one last bow to Soren and Caineghis before she retreated from the room, the door tapping shut behind her. 

Soren watched her go for a long moment before he looked back to Caineghis with a thin sigh in his nostrils. As strange as it felt to say, Soren couldn’t help but feel like Caineghis looked almost upset that Elincia was gone. Perhaps he had been chasing the distraction he felt she would be able to offer to Soren. Caineghis clearly did not want to answer the questions that Soren had posed for him, and if that meant hiding behind Elincia, then he would do it. That did little to explain the situation though, and it only made Soren’s curiosity burn deeper in his stomach. 

“There is little I can tell you about your mother,” Caineghis settled on saying when he realized Soren would be picking up the topic again momentarily. “I believe it is best for you to wait to see what she has to say. I did know her once… But much has happened and changed since then. I can tell you though that she is not a beast laguz. She lost her ability to transform after you were born. As for any other details you may want to know… You should see what she has to say on the matter rather than turning to anyone else.”

Soren nodded into the silence. He couldn’t say he was surprised by that answer, but it was disappointing regardless. He was even more desperate now to know the truth Caineghis and Gawain were so desperate to bury, but so long as they had no plans of revealing it, then he would have to opt for something else. Perhaps his other solution would be to wait for Almedha to be set free. It only made his anxiety worse, but Soren couldn’t see any other way out of this. “Thanks,” Soren murmured, trying and failing to keep his upset out of his voice. 

Uncomfortable silence fell between the pair for a long moment, and Soren stared down at the spot where his shoes met the ground beneath him. He was on the verge of excusing himself and leaving when Caineghis spoke first. “Are you certain you want to do this?” Caineghis asked. “Keep the secret of who you are from the princess’ retinue, that is.”

Soren felt his throat tighten. As tempting as it may have been to bond with Elincia over their similar circumstances, he knew he couldn’t take that chance. There was simply too much on the line, and right now, Soren had to tread with caution. He had to keep his eyes trained on the future, and the best choice he had for self-preservation was to lie. It would hardly make him popular when the truth inevitably came out, but if this was what it took to earn Elincia’s trust in the meantime, then so be it. Gawain had already committed to keeping his identity as a former member of the Four Riders a secret. Soren wasn’t going to betray his trust by going behind his back and revealing something that could have put their entire plan in jeopardy. They couldn’t risk something like that after they had come this far. 

“We have no choice,” Soren eventually settled on saying. “They have no reason to trust us right now. Our best option is to do what we can to ensure they will continue to fight with us for a bit longer. We can reveal the truth one day when we are certain they will stand by us. Until then, we have a secret to keep. This is the best way to see Daein defeated, and if it means lying to the people of Crimea, then so be it. It’s too late for us to back down from it now.”

Caineghis let the weight of Soren’s words hang in the air for a long moment before he nodded. “I wish you the best of luck,” he finally settled on saying. “I pray that one day, we will be able to meet and speak about the future without the fears that hold us back now. The war will end with time, and I look forward to seeing you again once it is over.”

Soren found himself smiling at the king’s words. If Caineghis believed the war would end one day, then that meant he trusted Soren, Elincia, and the rest of their party to be able to finish all of this and make a new future for Tellius. One day, Soren would have a reason to return to Gallia, and he would be able to talk to Caineghis about their better circumstances when the day arrived. “Thank you,” Soren told him. He took a small step back toward the door, and the weight of all he had left to do rushed in to greet him. He would be able to do it though. No matter how hard it was to make his way to Begnion and finally finish this fight, he would do it. He had to. If this was what it meant to stop Ashnard and return home, then he would fight with all he had. 

Soren made his way out of the throne room and into the courtyard of the castle once he and Caineghis had finished their conversation. The rest of the group was gathered on the grass, and the grounds had been emptied out for them to prepare for their march to Begnion. No beast laguz were out training today as there had been the day before. Shinon was clearly grateful for that, and he seemed upset that he even had to stand in the courtyard after seeing what it was used for on every other day. He took up as little space as he could so he didn’t have to acknowledge the beast laguz around him, each breath stiff and tense. 

The rest of the mercenary company was much more relaxed, and Soren fell into place just beside Ike. Gawain and Titania were talking about the plan for the trip to Begnion. If their two parties were going to work together, then they would have to collaborate on coming up with a plan. Caineghis had secured them a boat trip to Begnion, but they needed to make it to the Crimean port where the ship would be waiting for them first. 

Ike smiled down at Soren as the prince came to stand beside him. “Morning,” Ike greeted, and Soren remembered a bit too late that he had left Ike behind in the name of speaking with Caineghis earlier in the morning. “Where did you get off to? You were gone by the time I woke up.”

“I went to talk to the king,” Soren explained. “But he didn’t have anything new to share with me. We already heard everything he had to tell me today. I confirmed that we were going to go to Begnion though.”

“Elincia said as much,” Ike confirmed with a nod. “She came out here and told us all that you had said you would be joining us, and she wanted to see if that was true. My father is making the arrangements for us to go with them now.”

Soren nodded and glanced up to Gawain. He was going to have to get used to calling Gawain by a different name going forward. He had grown used to calling him Gawain for years, but now, he couldn’t afford to make that mistake. He needed to keep the secret for as long as possible, and Soren would do all in his power to make sure it worked as he had hoped. From then on, his name would be Greil, and Soren had to do everything he could to keep the lie alive for a little bit longer. 

“I’m excited to go to Begnion,” Mist told the two boys with a smile. Soren could tell she was a lot more stressed about the situation than she wanted to make it seem, but her optimism remained appreciated. Mist couldn’t let herself stew in her negativity as long as there was a chance for something greater in the future. It was perhaps Mist’s most admirable trait, and Soren still felt that way in the midst of his misery. “I wonder what the apostle could be like… Do you think she’ll be willing to help us?”

“I hope so,” Soren hummed. They were in the same position they had been when they left the villa; their current goal was to leave their current destination behind in favor of seeking aid from a major nation. Begnion was a much larger country than Gallia though, and the situation was perhaps even more intimidating now than it had been before. Soren knew he couldn’t let that stop him. He had to find a way to fix all of this, and right now, that meant going to Gallia and hoping the apostle would be willing to collaborate with the rest of their group. 

Nearby, Titania let out a small breath to mark the end of her conversation with Gawain. “Alright. I suppose that finishes everything we had to work out before we left,” she declared. “You’re absolutely sure you want to come with us to Begnion?”

“We’re certain,” Gawain assured her without missing a beat. “We’re all trying to do what we can to stop Ashnard, and it would be best if we worked together instead of splitting up. We’ll do everything in our power to escort the princess to the port in Crimea and then set out for Begnion.”

Titania nodded, but Soren could see the uncertainty behind her eyes. Titania was worried about being stabbed in the back, and Soren could barely blame her. If he had been in her position, he would have been worried about that too. Titania had been tasked with looking after the princess of a fallen nation, and that was a great enough burden even without her fears of betrayal. Even so, Titania knew she had no other choice but to collaborate with her new allies. She could work out her personal opinions on the matter later; for now, there was work to be done. 

“Thank you all for your help,” Elincia said, bowing her head to Ike, Soren, Mist, and Gawain as she pressed one hand to her chest. “We cannot thank you enough for all you have done for us.”

“We’re happy to help,” Mist assured her, and Soren felt the pressure in his chest grow. He knew lying to Elincia and the rest of the party was the best course of action, but he was starting to understand Ike’s hesitation with it. Elincia was so genuine, and Soren didn’t want to have to lie to her… But the need for safety absolutely defeated the desire to be honest. The truth would come out when the moment was right. Until then, Soren would be careful, and he knew the rest of his allies would too. 

After all, they had no other choice. 

Chapter Text

After the group set out from the castle of Gallia, they charted a course for Port Toha in Crimea. That was where they would be catching their ship that would take them around the southern edge of Tellius and to Begnion’s capital. Technically, they could have traveled through land, but it was considered too risky. If they wanted to make it to Begnion without being caught, then they would need to move quickly and effectively. Traveling on land would only make their job harder, especially since there were two secret royals among their party that Daein soldiers would have loved to kill. 

Their decision to travel on sea was only confirmed to be a good idea a few short hours after they left the castle behind. Caineghis had left them with Lethe and Mordecai, two of his strongest soldiers and the orange-haired cat and blue-haired tiger that had escorted the party up to the throne room. The laguz were very capable in a fight and knew how to take care of not only themselves but helping others around them too. It was impressive just how easily they could slip into a battle, though Soren supposed that was why they had come along. Caineghis knew the road to Begnion wasn’t going to be an easy one, and he wanted to make it as simple as possible for the party as long as they had to leave Gallia behind. 

During the fight, Titania met up with a pegasus knight who settled down on the beach. Apparently, she had met the flier–a former Begnion soldier named Marcia–during a mission a few weeks before everything fell apart. Marcia was happy to join the cause when she heard what they were fighting for. Soren found it a bit too convenient and feared she was going to stab them in the back, but when he looked at Marcia for longer than a few seconds, he knew his paranoia was getting to him. He wasn’t sure Marcia would ever think of betrayal, especially if she was using things like ‘boat monkey’ as insults. 

A matter of hours after the end of that battle, the group ran into a party of traveling merchants looking for business. One of their members, a mage named Ilyana, vowed to fight if the rest of the merchant group was given a place to stay with the tiny army. Soren hadn’t been sure about the idea of inviting more people along for the trip, but he was ultimately convinced by Ike and Titania both thinking this was the best course of action. They were going to need weapons, and if they could get a personal team of merchants with blacksmiths included, then they wouldn’t need to put themselves in danger to go out and fetch weapons each time their steel began to wear thin or ragged. It was a better option than the alternative, and so, Soren agreed no matter how bad he felt about all of this. 

The sinking feeling in his stomach hadn’t improved at all in the hours since the end of the previous fight. He didn’t know if he was ever going to feel better at this rate. Soren had fought with all he had, and he had learned that Titania’s company was very capable of holding their own in a fight. If they encountered more danger–and Soren was certain they would–they would be able to take care of it together. Any distrust that had once hung in the air between them was long gone now, and Soren knew he should have felt relieved. Anyone else would have been relieved to know they had a solution to this problem. 

But he couldn’t bring himself to follow suit. Soren felt nauseous in ways he couldn’t describe, and he knew it all came down to lying to Elincia, Titania, and the rest of the party. Soren knew this was necessary in order for them to reach Begnion. Elincia and Titania had no reason to trust anyone from Daein, much less the secret prince and his personal entourage. Keeping the secret was the best way to ensure they made it to Begnion and then saw Ashnard defeated… But Soren couldn’t shake the feeling that the truth was going to come out before he was ready. He didn’t know what he was going to do if that happened, but he didn’t want to think about it either if it could at all be avoided. 

Soren knew all it was going to take was one wrong move for everything to come to light. There were many members of the Daein army who didn’t know that Ashnard had a son, but there were a precious few who were fully aware of it. For all Soren knew, he could run into one of the Four Riders who would be aware of the secret and then use it to ruin him. He wasn’t close with any of Ashnard’s four generals, but he knew at least some of them were aware of his existence, and he wouldn’t be able to bury that secret if it came up. If Ashnard truly decided to pursue them with everything he had, then someone was going to end up talking, and Soren hoped with all the strength in his heart that he would be ready for it when the moment came.

Soren’s paranoia led him to fall into pace beside Elincia. She was still wearing the brown cloak she had borrowed to hide her face, but she had traded her orange dress for something a bit more practical in Gallia. She was doing her best to keep her spirits up, but Soren could tell by looking at her that it was a struggle. Not receiving any help from Caineghis had been a blow regardless of how little she wanted to admit it, and the weight still pulled at her. 

“Hey,” Soren greeted, unsure as to if he should bother with calling her by a title. Would that only put her in more danger? He didn’t see anyone around, but he didn’t know if he wanted to take the chance… Not that it would matter when he actually got to talking to her. “Can we talk for a minute?”

Elincia snapped out of her thoughts all at once, and her entire body shuddered with enough force that Soren was shocked it didn’t send her tripping through the sand. “Ah… Yes,” she agreed. “Is something the matter, Sir Soren?”

Soren did his best to control the way his eye wanted to twitch at being referred to with any title that could have been considered adjacent to royalty. This was just how Elincia spoke, and he knew that, but that didn’t make it easier to face. “Back in Gallia, you said that the rulers of the other nations knew about you in case of an emergency. You were never named the heir to your kingdom, but the other leaders of Tellius still knew about you.”

Elincia nodded. “Yes, that is correct. My family had been hoping there would never be a need for me to reach out to the other leaders of Tellius, but… I suppose we are well beyond that point now.”

Soren hummed, desperate to keep the conversation moving before he picked up her somber mood. “Do you know if the other rulers of the continent shared any secrets that way?” he asked. “Anything that might help us when it comes to defeating Ashnard?”

Elincia shook her head. “I know of no other major secrets. My father and uncle were the ones who heard of everything important… I believe I am the best-kept secret in Crimea and perhaps even beyond, though that doesn’t seem to be true anymore.” She let out a dark laugh that quickly faded away and died on her lips. 

Soren nodded, doing his best to not let his emotions show too clearly on his face. Even as the other rulers of Tellius’ nations trusted Ashnard with their secrets, Ashnard never bothered to return the favor. Ashnard was willing to do anything if it would give him an advantage in pushing back against his neighbors in a war, and if that meant being a two-faced liar, then so be it. Soren knew his father had done worse things, but he was certain he would think often about this subject as he pushed on toward Begnion and the alliance waiting for him there. 

“I… I have a question for you,” Elincia went on when Soren remained silent for a few seconds too long. “You are from Daein. I assume you do not know the king, but… Do you know if there was anything that indicated he was going to do this? Did he do anything to make it seem as if he was going to attack Crimea or the rest of the continent?”

Soren shook his head. “I didn’t know the king that way. I know only what you know about him, and I don’t think that's going to help you learn much more on the subject.”

Elincia nodded with a distant hum, but Soren could tell she was disappointed. He stared down at the ground before them with a muted frown. Everyone was unsure of how to handle the attack Ashnard had led, and Elincia was hardly an exception. Hopefully, they wouldn’t need to think of it for too much longer. Once they reached Begnion, they would be able to forge an alliance with the army there and then lead Daein to its doom. 

Assuming Begnion felt like there was a reason to get involved with the fight at all. Soren knew the Begnion senate could be fickle at times. He had read all about the history of Begnion, and he was fully aware of how the petty whims of the senators could lead the country down a path it otherwise would not have wanted to follow. Soren could only hope he would be able to work through them to reach the apostle and earn her favor. If he could get her on his side, then everything else would fall into place and become significantly easier… Or so he was hoping. He would have to wait and see for himself, he supposed. 

Unfortunately, Soren knew he was going to be waiting for a long time. Making it to Begnion was likely going to take a few weeks if not months. The journey was a long one, and it would be harder because he couldn’t take the path that would have been fastest: the land route. Sailing around the edge of Tellius was going to be an unfortunate complication, but Soren could only hope it would lead him in the direction he was hoping for. 

“We should stop here.”

Titania’s voice cut through the air, and Soren looked up to see her falling to a halt a short distance away. Her gaze locked on a castle in the distance, and she narrowed her eyes at it like she was looking for something. Soren followed her gaze with a frown, but he ultimately found none of what he could only assume Titania was trying to find. He gave up and turned away, reaching for a tome and starting to flip through it so he had an excuse for why he wasn’t trying to meet anyone’s gaze around him. 

“Where did Ranulf go?” Ike questioned as he found a spot beside Titania. That was right; Caineghis hadn’t offered Ranulf to fight with the group permanently, but he was still accompanying them until they could make it to Port Toha. Ranulf was acting as their escort, and it was a job he was not taking lightly. He was determined to ensure the army reached their destination of the small town, and after that, he would peel away and return to Gallia so he could continue planning for everything that would have to come next in the war effort. 

“He said he was going to scout ahead,” Titania explained. “But he hasn’t come back yet. I can only hope he hasn’t found himself in too much trouble.” The laugh that followed her words was dry and humorless, and Ike’s lips pressed together in a heavy frown as he looked up at the castle in the distance once again. 

Soren’s frown deepened as well, though he couldn’t say he was too concerned for Ranulf or his safety. If there was one thing he knew about Ranulf, it was that the cat laguz was very slippery and knew how to get himself both in and out of trouble. He never would have found a position so high up in the Gallian army if he wasn’t able to hold his own. If he was off on his own, then he must have known what he was going to be dealing with.

Even so, Soren couldn’t help but wonder if perhaps Ranulf had gone off to the castle specifically. It wouldn’t have shocked him to know that he had. Ranulf must have seen it a while ago, and he was bound to want to see what it had in store for the army. Soren found himself curious about it too, though if the castle was going to distract him from reaching his destination of Port Toha, then he was willing to not bother with investigating.

“Were you talking about me? I’m touched.”

Soren jolted out of his thoughts violently at the sound of Ranulf’s voice, and he glanced up to see the cat laguz approaching with a lopsided smile on his face. “There you are,” Titania sighed, all of the tension immediately melting away from her shoulders. “We were worried something had happened to you.”

“You don’t need to worry about me,” Ranulf assured her with a wave of his hand. “I was just taking a look around the castle up ahead… I think you might want to make a quick stop there on your way to Crimea.”

Ike and Soren exchanged a glance. “Why?” Ike asked. “Is there something important there?”

“I know you’re wanting for fighters right now, and I think that castle will be able to help you to fill out your ranks,” Ranulf explained. “Daein conquered that old fort very early on into the war, and now, they use it as a prison for captives they took after their battles. I’m sure the Crimeans who are being held there would be more than happy to help you.”

Soren felt a chill sprint up his spine. They were already in Crimea then. He had been so distracted that he hadn’t even noticed they had crossed over the border… Though that was hardly the most concerning part of what Ranulf had said. If there were Crimean prisoners of war in that castle, then that meant there were at least a few fighters. News about Elincia must have spread across Crimea by now, at least to an extent, and if she said she was the princess of the fallen nation, then she would be able to earn herself quite a few allies. 

And as far as Soren was concerned, they were going to need the help. Trying to make it to Begnion with a force as small as this wasn’t going to be easy. If they attracted any attention from Daein, then they were going to have to fight, and even having the extra four fighters of Ilyana, Marcia, Lethe, and Mordecai wasn’t going to be enough to win the fight. They needed a lot more help, and if they went to the castle, then they would be able to pick up many allies in one fell swoop. 

“Alright,” Ike finally relented. “You’re right. We’re going to need all the help we can get, and right now, that starts with finding allies. Let’s go to the prison and see if there’s anyone we’ll be able to set free.”

The corners of Ranulf’s lips tilted upward in a smile. “Good. Let’s get to it then.” He took off toward the castle faster than anyone could calculate, and in the blink of an eye, he had vanished from view. Soren stared at the spot he had last seen Ranulf even after the cat laguz was gone. He couldn’t shake the feeling that something strange was going on with Ranulf, but he couldn’t put a finger on what it was meant to be. There was something else in Ranulf’s head, and Soren could only hope he would be able to get to the bottom of it sooner or later. 

The path to the castle was simple but empty, and it was clear that no one dared to wander in the area out of fear of being captured and put behind bars next. Soren wondered how far the prisoners from Crimea had come in order to end up being locked away here. He didn’t know if he would ever truly understand the truth, but he could at least help them to escape. That would hopefully be all he needed to worry about. 

There weren’t any guards outside the building, and even if there had been, Soren knew his group would have been able to cut through the attackers easily. There were too many of them compared to how few guards seemed to be patrolling the prison. Even after he arrived inside, Soren heard only a few sets of footsteps in the distance. Daein was overconfident if it thought it would be able to get away with keeping so many people held captive with so few soldiers. 

The air inside the prison was tense and silent, and Soren stayed near the back of the group so he wouldn’t be able to convince himself to look around the corner at the guards and risk revealing his location. Ike was a bit more confident, and he caught a glimpse of a few soldiers walking around the edge of some of the cells. There were a lot of prisoners holed up in cells, all of them silent and staring at the ground. Their hope had been lost long ago, and it was all they could do to keep themselves somewhat upright with imitations of smiles on their faces. 

The overconfidence of Ashnard was even clearer now than ever before, and Soren could see it on Ike’s face when he turned around to face the rest of the group. Ike was concerned about the fight in the way he would have been worried about any other battle, but he seemed comparatively relieved. The battle before had been intense and large, sweeping through a beach and the nearby shore. This fight was in a contained space, and there were remarkably few soldiers on patrol trying to ensure the prisoners from Crimea remained in their current locations. 

“There aren’t many soldiers here,” Ike explained in a whisper. “I believe we’ll be able to push through the few fighters here and defeat them before they have the chance to call for reinforcements. If we play our cards right, then we can free the prisoners and get rid of the commanders before anyone even realizes we’re there.”

“We’ll have to make sure the soldiers stay silent when we go after them,” Titania said. “It won’t be easy to ensure they don’t scream out to try and get someone’s attention. If they do, then that could mark the end of our plan.”

The sound of footsteps behind Soren silenced the conversation, and he whirled around with his tome at the ready. Had a soldier seen them coming inside and decided to follow them? His spell was already coming to life on his tongue even before he saw who he was meant to be aiming it at. 

But it all fell silent when he was met with the sight of a man wearing largely dark clothing and a small, unreadable smile on his face. His hair was brown in color, and the peach fuzz promises of stubble had grown in around his chin. Soren stared at him with a frown, trying to figure out what reason the man could have had to be there. He didn’t recognize him, but it didn’t seem like he was from Daein. He wasn’t wearing the army of Daein at all, and if he had been a soldier, then he would have raised the alarm to start an actual fight by now. Instead, the man simply watched the group with that inscrutable look in his eyes, and Soren resisted the urge to glare at him. 

“You seem to be in a bit of trouble,” the man remarked. “Are you in need of some aid?”

The entire room went stiff and silent. Titania seemed halfway tempted to shout at him to not scare them, but she bit her lip so as to not alert the nearby Daein soldiers that they were there. The man didn’t seem to mind the unsettled and rattled looks he was receiving. He was there for a specific purpose, and Soren knew he was thinking about it even if he couldn’t describe it to his new companions just yet. 

Gawain was the only one who seemed to recognize him, and his face both hardened and softened in completely different ways. “I never thought I would see you here,” he greeted, his voice both too casual and too stilted for Soren’s liking. “What are you doing?”

“I had a feeling you would need some help,” the man answered simply, though to Soren, it wasn’t much of an answer at all. “Will my services be required?”

Gawain looked around the corner at the cells containing the prisoners. Door keys jangled from the hips of the soldiers patrolling the area, but none of them had the skills needed to steal the keys without drawing attention to themselves. The only one who would have been able to do it was a seasoned veteran in the art of theft… And he knew exactly who that was going to be. “Yes,” Gawain confirmed. “They will be.”

“You know my price,” the man said, though something in his eyes told Soren that Gawain wasn’t going to need to pay it so much as the rest of the people he was with would have to. “You need those doors to the cells opened, don’t you?”

Gawain nodded. “Yes. We’ll discuss it more after the battle ends.” 

“Hold on a moment,” Titania cut in, glancing back and forth between Gawain and the strange man. “You two know each other? How do you–”

“He’s an old friend,” Gawain explained hurriedly. “He and I have been helping each other for a long time now. He’s going to be crucial to us finishing the fight.”

Titania was on the verge of pressing the man for his name, but he cut in before she had the chance to put her confusion to words. “Volke,” he told her. “You can call me Volke. I’m something of an… Extinguisher.”

Titania’s face set itself in something stoic, and Soren felt like he could hear every objection racing through her mind long before she could find the words to voice it. She let out a thin sigh before turning her attention back to the path ahead leading into the prison. “Alright,” she agreed carefully. “If you can help us to set the prisoners free, then we would appreciate the help.”

Volke nodded, and his smile fell away in favor of a firm determination for the battle to come. His eyes narrowed as he caught a glimpse of the first guard patrolling the prison. He struck with impressive speed, curling one hand around the man’s mouth to silence him before he had the chance to scream. Volke slashed his dagger sideways, and the soldier fell to the ground limp a second later, stopped only by a small cushion of wind magic from Soren. It prevented the entire prison from realizing something was amiss, and Soren let out a thin breath of relief once he was certain all was as fine as it could have been. 

Volke didn’t even bother with reaching for the keys that had jangled to the ground just beside the guard. Instead, he jammed a lockpick into the lock on the nearest prison cell door, and in a matter of seconds, it sprung open without any problems. Soren stared into the cell, watching as a peculiar man rose to his feet. The man did not emerge from the cell, and that was somehow not the strangest thing about him. His eyes were unreadable, but he was undeniably curious about who his saviors were. 

Ike was the first to approach the man, and he looked up at him with a frown. The man’s face was angular yet kind, eternally set in a smile that would have been soothing if it did not feel starkly unfamiliar in a place like this. Somehow, the man felt too regal and powerful to belong in a prison, and Soren had to wonder just what could have led the man there of all places. He had clearly been captured by Daein, but if Soren had to wager a guess, he would have said there was more to it than that. There simply had to be. 

“Are you alright?” Ike questioned. He took to checking the man over for injuries, but he was met with nothing. It was hard to see any of the details of the man’s body beneath the oversized brown cloak he wore that hid everything below his neck. “Did you get hurt?”

The man shook his head, and that stunningly serene smile only deepend. “No, I am fine,” he assured Ike. “Might I ask what all of you are doing here?”

“We’re here to set the prisoners free,” Titania answered. “And seeing as you’re one of the prisoners, you are more than welcome to come with us… Or if you would prefer, you can remain here until we are certain the battle is over. We intend to set everyone free.”

The strange man let out a thin sigh and shook his head once more. “I am afraid I would be of little use to you if I came with you now… I am all but useless without my tomes. Unless you happen to have any light spells on hand, I will be of little help.” Soren glanced around the rest of the group even though he already knew no one would have any light magic. He had always preferred to study elemental magic, and none of the mercenaries in Titania’s company were fond of light magic either. Even Ilyana knew nothing about it, preferring to fight with thunder magic instead. 

“We’ll be back to set you free,” Titania assured the man. She stepped out of the cell and pulled the door shut, though she did not lock it. That way, if any guards came by, they would believe nothing had happened unless they looked close enough to notice the lock was gone. While it wasn’t a foolproof plan, it was the best they could have done at the moment. 

“I look forward to it,” the man nodded, his smile still startlingly calm in the face of a battle that was bound to be brutal once it broke out in full. He stepped back deeper into the cell, and the darkness seemed to swallow him like it was all it had ever wanted to do. 

Soren stared at the man’s pitch black hair for a long moment before Gawain’s hand came down on his shoulder. “Come on,” Gawain told him softly. “We should keep going.” 

There was something off about Gawain now too if Soren was being honest. He had no idea how Gawain knew Volke, but he was determined to get to the bottom of it once this fight was over. He had to. Gawain wouldn’t know a common thief like Volke… Though something about Volke made him seem like he was a bit more than a common thief. What in the world was he doing in the prison? What was all of this going to mean for their army? 

All of that would have to wait until after the battle ended though. Volke had already started off toward the next guard, but this soldier seemed a bit stronger than the previous one had been. In other words, it was going to take a bit more force to take him down, and Volke didn’t have much of that as long as he was only fighting with a dagger. 

Titania was more than happy to step in, and she darted over to join Volke in approaching the soldier. She raised her axe high and brought it down in a single fatal swing, and the soldier was dead even before his knees gave out beneath him. Once again, Soren eased the man’s body to the floor to ensure it didn’t make too much noise when it hit the ground. He wasn’t used to using wind magic in such a strange way, but as long as it was helping, he had no reason to stop. He could only hope it didn’t prove too necessary going forward. 

Another set of keys fell to the ground alongside the guard, and Ranulf picked them up before moving to open the doors to the next few cells. One cell held three people, and Soren knew without needing to ask that all three of them were Crimean soldiers in some way or another. Only one of them–seemingly a cavalier with fiery red hair–wore official Crimean armor. The other two seemed to be from some kind of militia, though Soren did his best to push his questions aside in favor of focusing on the situation at hand. 

“Hey! What are you doing?!”

Soren bit back a swear upon realizing they had been spotted, and he looked up to see a soldier standing in a nearby hallway. Soren moved to kill the man with a spell, but it was too late. He was already raising the alarm, and the entire prison was going to strike at once now. 

They had tried stealth… But it was time for something a bit more upfront. 

And Soren was determined to see it through no matter what it took. 

Chapter Text

All things considered, the remainder of the battle went about as well as it possibly could have. The other soldiers in the castle realizing there was a group there to attack wasn’t great, but it didn’t take long for Ike and the rest of his company to sweep through them and free the rest of the prisoners. Ilyana and the other merchants in her caravan armed the three soldiers who decided to join them, and the added force made the charge to reclaim the castle and get rid of the Daein forces much easier than it otherwise would have been. 

The three soldiers were named Kieran, Nephenee, and Brom, though only Kieran was an actual soldier out of them. He had worked in Crimea as a member of the army, but after the attack on the capital, he had been sent into the countryside. From there, he tried to fight back, and it didn’t take long for Daein to realize what he was up to and capture him. He had been planning his escape when the party arrived, though Ike had to wonder if that was entirely true or if Kieran was letting his tongue get the best of him. 

If nothing else, Kieran’s story was somewhat corroborated by Oscar of all people. Apparently, he had once been a member of the Crimean army years ago, and he and Kieran had come to know each other well then. Kieran’s thoughts on their ‘rivalry’ were wild and loud, but Oscar didn’t seem to mind it as much. Kieran’s rage and confidence gave him the extra advantage he needed to help the fight end in his favor, so no one had anything to complain about. If it would work, then why push back against it?

The other two prisoners in Kieran’s cell were nowhere near as experienced in combat. Nephenee and Brom were both from a militia formed in a small village forgotten by the majority of the world. Their country accents slipped freely into every word they spoke, though it was much harder to hear on Nephenee on account of her shyness. She seemed to want to retreat into her helmet and never come back out from under it. She was a decent enough fighter though, and Ike was glad to have her and Brom at his back going forward. 

Ranulf had been right when he said passing through the prison was the perfect way to get a few extra allies. Kieran, Nephenee, and Brom were more than happy to join the Crimean resistance, and Ike was glad to have them there. He felt a bit better about the situation of going to Begnion to eventually take on Ashnard, though he knew he wanted a few extra soldiers at his back before he planned anything significant regarding the final push. 

Soldiers aside, someone else had been set free during the prison escape: the strange man Ike had found near the front of the prison. His smile had remained permanently throughout the entire escape process, and he seemed entirely unbothered by what was happening. Despite the danger roaring all around him, the man remained composed and calm. He didn’t seem to think he was at risk at all, or if he did recognize the danger he was in, he didn’t let it stop him from continuing to smile in the face of all hardship. 

Ike remained close to the man after he left the castle behind and stepped out into the bright sunlight beyond the limits of the palace. He wouldn’t have necessarily said that he was suspicious of the dark-haired man, but he certainly found him… Odd. A man like that didn’t seem like he belonged in a prison, and Ike had to wonder what circumstances could have led to him being hidden away from the world like that. There was only one way to find out, he supposed. 

“Pardon me,” Ike began, approaching the dark-haired man with a frown. The man was shockingly tall, towering over Ike, and Ike didn’t think he was particularly short. “May I have a moment?”

“Yes?” The man turned to face Ike, and his face softened when he realized who had asked after him. “Oh, you’re the man I met earlier. I owe you so much for freeing me. Thank you from the bottom of my heart.”

“Who are you?” Ike asked. He knew Soren would have chastised him for his bluntness if he had been there, but Soren was off handling the logistics of taking Kieran, Nephenee, and Boyd into their army, and that left Ike alone with the man. Why would Ike bother with beating around the bush when he knew what he wanted to uncover? 

The man didn’t seem to mind Ike’s upfront honesty at all, and he bowed his head even though it still didn’t bring him back to Ike’s height. “I am a monk on a pilgrimage. My name is Sephiran,” he explained. “Thank you for your aid in the prison.”

“You’re a monk?” Ike echoed, his eyes going wide. “Why did the Daein army arrest you?” He could understand why soldiers or militia members would be arrested and imprisoned, but a priest felt far stranger. 

Something imperceptible shifted across Sephiran’s face. “I was arrested in a nearby village where I was treating wounded Crimean knights. I received no trial but taken prisoner nevertheless. I was scheduled to be executed on the morrow. I owe you my life. I thank you from the bottom of my heart.”

Ike shook his head. “You don’t have to thank us,” he assured Sephiran. “However, I am curious about your situation. Why were you aiding Crimean soldiers?”

“Do you question my story?” Sephiran asked with an arched eyebrow and a strange cast of darkness across his lips. 

“You’re a monk on pilgrimage as well as an ally of Crimean resistance fighters?” Ike began. “Under the circumstances, do you blame me?”

Sephiran considered his words for a moment before he took a step forward. “Tell me something,” he started. “If you came across a wounded person, could you ignore their plight?”

Ike only needed to think about it for a second before he shook his head. “Normally...No, I could not. But in times like these, where it means risking my own life... I don't know. It's tough to say.”

Sephiran let out a small laugh, the sound strangely tinny yet empty like sound bouncing around a tiny glass and nowhere else. “You’re quite honest. However, if actually faced with such a choice, a man such as yourself would not hesitate. If faced with an individual in pain, you would act instinctively. Your body would not wait for the command.”

Ike’s eyes narrowed. “Who… Who are you? Really. You’re so calm, so full of peace… I can’t believe you’re a simple monk.”

Sephiran offered no response, instead simply casting Ike yet another impossible smile. “If you'll forgive me, I must be going. Fare thee well, young warrior. I am certain that we will meet again.”

Sephiran turned and started to walk away at that, and Ike watched him retreat with a frown on his face. He was halfway tempted to call after Sephiran to try and draw at least a few more answers out of him, but he already knew he was doomed to fall short. Sephiran had made up his mind, and trying to change it now was not going to work regardless of how desperate Ike was. 

Ike let out a sigh and tilted his face up so he was looking at the crisp blue sky overhead. Somehow, he knew he was going to meet Sephiran again one day. He was unsure of when or where it would be, but Ike was confident they would cross paths soon enough. Until then, all Ike could do was wait and keep fighting for a little bit longer. 

Ike caught a glimpse of his father out of the corner of his eye, and he saw Gawain speaking with the strange thief that had appeared just before the fight. Volke was his name, wasn’t it? But who in the world was Volke? Ike wouldn’t say that he knew everyone his father had ever met, especially since he hadn’t left the villa before all of this, but he was still unsettled by Volke. If Gawain and Volke knew each other as well as it seemed, then why hadn’t Ike ever heard about him before now? What had prompted Gawain to keep Volke a secret from both of his children? It made no sense. 

“You’re wondering about that thief too, aren’t you?”

Mist’s voice pulled Ike’s attention down beside him, and he glanced to find her standing next to him. “I’ve been thinking about it ever since he showed up too,” Mist admitted. “Something about him is so strange, but I don’t know how to put a finger on any of it… Just who is this man? Why hasn’t Father ever told us about him?”

“I don’t know,” Ike replied despite his deep desire to be able to offer Mist with something more than that. “Volke doesn’t seem like he works for Daein either. He’s not wearing any of the colors of the army. He doesn’t even seem like he’s from Crimea, but I guess he must be.”

“Volke must have met him when we were too young to remember… Or before we were born,” Mist said, her gaze never leaving Volke for long. Ike knew Mist was intentionally not mentioning the possibility that Gawain had met Volke after both of them were born. After all, that would mean Gawain was going out of his way to keep Volke a secret from the rest of his family, and the thought made Ike nauseous in ways he couldn’t quite put a finger on. 

For a reason he could never hope to define, Ike found his thoughts straying in the direction of his mother. He hadn’t thought much of Elena since all of this began, but he had wondered about her often when he was in the villa. Gawain had never described specifically what happened to his wife when she disappeared, only that she was gone and would not be able to return to her family any time soon. Ike wasn’t sure if that meant she was dead or not, but he doubted he would be able to convince Gawain to talk about it openly. If Gawain was going to be honest with Ike and Mist about what happened to Elena, then he would have done it already. 

But that only made Ike’s paranoia worse. Why would Gawain go so far to make sure something like this stayed hidden? He must have had a reason, but that didn’t help soothe Ike’s nerves at all. Even if there was a reason for this, it didn’t feel sufficient to explain the darkness of what was happening. 

Ike forced himself to look away from Volke before he could say anything about how worried he was about Gawain keeping secrets from them. Instead, he looked over to Soren where he was talking with Titania and Elincia about the logistics of their next few steps. That was right. The battle wasn’t over just because they had liberated the castle. The group needed to keep pushing forward if they wanted to reach Port Toha and then take to the sea. They had to keep moving unless they wanted Daein to chase after them. 

“What’s the plan next?” Ike asked as he approached Soren, Titania, and Elincia. Mist stood beside him, gripping tightly at her staff so she didn’t have to dedicate too much of her attention to the paranoia that was quickly seeping through her skin and into her bones hidden beneath. “Do we have a path that will take us to Port Toha?”

“Ranulf has gone ahead to scout it out for us,” Titania explained. “I imagine he will return shortly with all the information we need to finish this.”

“I see,” Ike nodded. If they were getting closer to Port Toha, then that was a good sign. They were going to be fine once they were able to get on the ocean. Volke probably wouldn’t follow them out onto the sea. Volke had appeared out of the blue, but Ike doubted he would be willing to come along with Gawain’s next few steps, especially if it would put him in danger. 

Or at least that was what Ike was choosing to tell himself. He didn’t know what he would start to think if he began to doubt what Gawain was going to tell Volke, and he didn’t want to think about it either. 

~~~~~

Gawain had taken the first excuse to pull away from the rest of the army to speak with Volke. He knew the others in the area were curious about who the new arrival to their group was, but Gawain didn’t stay in the spot for long enough for anyone to ask questions about it. If Volke was there, then that had to be a sign of something bad, and Gawain needed to get to the bottom of it as soon as possible. 

“How is it going?” Gawain asked, his voice soft but firm. “Is the mission going well?”

Volke nodded. “Nothing of note has happened. No one from Daein has come to investigate the area either.”

“Good,” Gawain murmured with a nod, forcing himself to process Volke’s words again and again to make them feel more real. He could have stopped there, but he couldn’t bring himself to. If there was even a chance there was something else he could learn, then he had to get to the bottom of it. “Is she safe? Is everything alright?”

Volke nodded once again. “Both of them are,” he confirmed. “But Daein is still after what they have, and they won’t be able to stay hidden forever. The soldiers are going to swarm the rest of the area near their hiding spot if we take too long to get rid of Ashnard.”

Gawain nodded with a bitter groan. He was entirely unsurprised to hear that Volke had already made himself perfectly aware of the circumstances around the war. Volke always had a way of getting to the bottom of something that caught his attention or curiosity, and Gawain had stopped trying to ask questions about it years ago. As long as their deal held firm, Gawain had no reason to push it. “We’re doing the best we can,” he said. “We have to go to Begnion. We need to find a way to get around Ashnard’s impenetrable armor too. We won’t be able to stop him if we can’t get past that.”

“Begnion is your best option there,” Volke agreed with a nod. “What do you want from me? Should I go back to look around and make sure no one else finds the house? Or do you want me to stay with you?”

Gawain shook his head. “Go back. I know she has been training in light magic for a long time, but… I don’t think she would be able to turn back the full force of an attacking Daein battalion if they came after her. She needs your help more than I do. I appreciate the help today, but…”

“I understand.” Volke took a step back, and the darkness seemed to rush in to cradle him even before he disappeared fully into the shadows. “You know… I believe now is the best time to reunite with her. It would be safer if she had more people there to look after her. There’s no time quite like the present.”

Gawain fell silent, and he was all too aware of the sound of his heart racing in his chest. He wanted to argue with Volke and say that he would stay away for as long as he possibly could, but he knew there was no point in it. Gawain was going to have to go back to them sooner or later, especially if this conflict had something to do with what he feared it did. There would be no holding it off forever. The best he could do was make sure it was done on his terms rather than letting Ashnard or anyone else push him into it. 

“I’ll keep that in mind,” Gawain said simply, measuring each word with a bit too much care. He didn’t know when he was going to be able to take Volke up on his suggestion though; right now, his priority had to be going to Begnion. It would be dangerous to take her to Begnion given the circumstances around the war. Gawain knew less about Begnion than he knew about Daein, but he knew Begnion’s senate was every bit as corrupt as Ashnard in some ways. The last thing he wanted was to put anyone in danger because he didn’t think out his choices in full. He would have to make a choice when the moment was right, and it was not right just yet. 

Gawain swallowed dryly, forcing himself to focus on the situation at hand once again. “Keep an eye on her for a while longer,” he instructed. “I’ll be there to see what is going on when the moment is right. Until then, you’re needed with her.”

Volke nodded. “We’ll meet again soon then.” He disappeared into the shadows soon afterward even though it was a sunny day. Gawain had never quite known how Volke could vanish without anyone realizing where he had gone, but he didn’t care enough to find out either. Volke’s methods were best off staying secret, especially if it would play into his hands and keep the people he cared for safe. 

Gawain let out a thin breath and looked up at the sky overhead. He had been hoping it wouldn’t come to this… But he knew Ashnard had a reason for this war. Ashnard had to be aware of all of this. Gawain had seen evidence of it many years ago, and it was the reason all of this had happened in the first place. His best option was to be careful and wait for the right moment to strike back and get rid of the king of Daein. If he went to Volke’s current hideaway prematurely, then he could have just led Ashnard back to the spot he was looking for, and Gawain would never be able to forgive himself if he did that. He needed to be careful, and he would do everything in his power to ensure the plan continued on as he had hoped. 

Gawain forced himself to look back down at the rest of the group. They were getting ready to plan out their path to Port Toha, meaning they were on the verge of setting out to their next destination. Good. If Gawain was distracted with helping them, then that meant he wasn’t thinking at all about what it meant to have to consider going back after all this time. If he began to dream about it prematurely, then he would never stop, and he couldn’t afford that. 

Everything would happen when it was meant to. He knew that… But he wished it was easier to convince himself of it. 

~~~~~

The group continued to march in the direction of Port Toha after the battle at the prison ended. Ike kept an eye out to see if he could find Volke anywhere, but he saw no traces of him. Volke had vanished just as quickly as he had appeared, and Ike was beginning to wonder if he had ever been meaning to stick around at all. It seemed like the answer was no, but if that was the case, then why had he come by at all? Why would Volke be there for a single battle only to disappear before anyone could figure out who he was or what he wanted?

Well, one person knew who Volke was and why he had been there. Gawain had been silent ever since the march began again, focused on the horizon and nothing else. His face was set in a stony frown, and Ike couldn’t help the worry that bubbled up in his stomach at the sight. The war was hard on all of them, but Gawain seemed to be taking it harder than he wanted the world to know. It was impossible to quite describe what was going through Gawain’s head when he thought about the war, but Ike knew his father well enough to say that it was nothing good. Gawain was worried about something, and he was seemingly terrified of having to admit it to anyone. 

Mist stood just beside Ike as they continued their march. She was looking at Gawain the same way Ike was. Normally, Mist distracted herself with talking to Elincia and seeing what she could learn from the princess, but today, Mist was silent. She was just as worried about Gawain as Ike was, and she had no idea what she was meant to do about any of it. If Gawain wasn’t going to tell them anything about why Volke was there or who he was, then that meant they were just going to have to find the truth on their own… But Ike had no idea where he was meant to start with such a daunting task. 

“Maybe we should talk to him,” Mist suggested softly. “If he’s not going to talk to us about this, then we should try to go to him first. He must be able to tell us something, right?” She was trying to convince herself just as much as Ike, but she was doing all in her power to hide it. Ike knew better than to be fooled though, and the quiet uncertainty in her voice was enough to make his frown grow deeper and heavier. 

“I guess you’re right,” Ike agreed. He stared at Gawain for a short while longer before he let out a sigh and decided he had seen more than enough. The best option he had now was to finish all of this and just get it over with. Regardless of if Gawain was willing to talk to him or not, Ike had a duty to ask him about it. He could do that. 

Ike started over toward Gawain before he could overthink his way into silence once again. Gawain barely seemed to notice Ike had fallen into pace just beside him, and he only pulled himself out of his thoughts when he heard Ike clear his throat. “Father,” Ike began, and Gawain finally met his gaze. “I wanted to ask you about the man who helped us in that fight… Volke was his name, wasn’t it?”

Gawain looked down at Ike in shock for a moment before he remembered to school his expression back into neutrality. “Yes, Volke,” Gawain confirmed. “What about him?”

“Who is he?” Ike asked. “How did the two of you meet? What was he doing at the castle in the first place?”

Gawain turned his attention to the path ahead, and Ike wondered if his father was avoiding looking him in the eyes because he knew he wouldn’t be able to stand it. Gawain let out a slow breath when he finally found the ability to keep breathing. “The two of us met a long time ago,” Gawain began to say. “He and I have worked together on and off since then. He has been on… A mission from me for a long time. He wanted to give me an update on it, but when I wasn’t at the villa, he came to search for me.”

“And he just so happened to know exactly where to find you without you telling him?” Ike finished for him, and Gawain’s shoulders went tense again. “How in the world could he do that? Unless… Did you tell him where he would be able to find you so that you could talk about it?”

“No,” Gawain replied a bit too quickly. “Volke is… He has his ways of doing these things. He needed to report back to me, and I was there to hear his report. Now, he has gone back to his mission so that he can continue to take care of it.”

Ike nodded and looked to the path ahead as well. He only managed to stay silent for a few moments longer before he spoke again. “What is this mission?” Ike asked. “What is it that he has been doing for you all this time?”

Gawain remained quiet for a long moment, simply looking at the path he was walking on like he thought it would be enough to save him from this conversation. When nothing changed simply from his staring, he let out a thin breath. “I am afraid I cannot tell you,” Gawain eventually answered. “This needs to stay secret for as long as possible, and that means not telling anyone about it.”

Ike wished he could have said he was surprised by that. He had never known Gawain to be a particularly secretive man, but it had felt like there was more on his mind these days. Ever since the war started, it was like Gawain had become a different person. He was every bit as stern yet kind as before, but there was something more to it now that Ike didn’t know how to define. Gawain was almost afraid of something… No, he was afraid of multiple things, and he was doing his best to hide it from everyone. The only person who would have known anything about it was Caineghis, and Ike doubted he would have been able to convince the lion king to open up about it no matter how hard he pressed. 

“But what if he ends up needing our help?” Ike asked. “We need to be there for him if he needs us, but we won’t know it until it’s too late unless you tell us what is going on.”

“It’s safer for everyone involved if we leave this to Volke alone. Having too large of a group would only draw attention to what is being done,” Gawain answered, the response a bit too perfect for it to have been come up with on the spot. He had been preparing for this for a long time; he just hadn’t imagined it would all come to a turning point today of all days. “The time will come for us to do something eventually. For now, we have to keep our attention on the path ahead. We need to make it to Port Toha and then to Begnion so we can seek aid from the apostle and senate.”

Ike pressed his lips together unhappily. Why in the world would Gawain want to hide something like this? It made no sense. If there was something that needed to be done, then it would be more logical to open up about it so that he could get help… Unless he didn’t want help. Why would he hide something so important though? Or maybe he was hiding it precisely because it was so important? Ike couldn’t say for certain what any of it meant, but he knew he wanted to get to the bottom of it. 

“We got what we wanted from the mission to the castle,” Gawain told Ike. “We were able to free the prisoners, and we have more allies on our side than we did before. We can use the extra help, and they’ll do a lot for us as we move toward Begnion. Even if we can secure the aid of the apostle, we could use all the help we can get. This mission was a success. That is what matters most.”

Gawain didn’t tell Ike to push Volke out of his mind, but he knew that was where the conversation was going. Ike let out a heavy sigh of surrender. Going down this same path wasn’t going to help anyone, and it would probably just exhaust him. Gawain didn’t want to talk about Volke or his relationship with him, and he probably wasn’t going to open up about it until well after the right moment had arrived. Ike’s only option at this point was to be patient. 

It was a shame it felt like everything in his life came down to matters of patience now. 

Ike slowly fell out of pace with Gawain to return to Mist’s side. She already knew even before Ike opened his mouth that he had found nothing of note from his conversation with their father. Even so, Mist asked about the discussion with a heavy sigh. “Were you able to hear anything helpful?”

Ike shook his head. “He doesn’t want to talk about it. He says Volke is on a mission of some kind, but he didn’t elaborate on what it could have meant.”

Mist nodded dully, though her eyes made it clear that she was trying to come up with any theories as to what the mission could be. Ike was in much the same position, but he didn’t know where to start. Volke had clearly been working with Gawain for far longer than the war had been going on. That was what Gawain had made it sound like, at the very least. Volke had been giving Gawain regular reports for a long time, and that meant he would have had to start doing it long before Ashnard’s attack. 

But what mission could have started before the war? What could be so important that Gawain would keep it secret for all that time? What in the world was Volke hiding? Why was Gawain going out of his way to keep it hidden with him? What in the world was Ike supposed to be looking for?

But he knew he would find no answers just yet, so Ike continued to put one foot in front of the other. He would get to the bottom of this one day. He just had to wait it out. 

Even if waiting was the last thing he wanted to do. 

Chapter Text

The rest of the journey to Port Toha was fairly uneventful, much to Ike’s relief. He couldn’t help the constant paranoia that came with feeling like he was being followed, and he couldn’t even reassure himself by saying that the situation wasn’t as bad as he was making it out to be. After all, it absolutely was bad; he was on the run from the military of an entire country, and that wasn’t going to get any easier to face just because he didn’t want to think about it. 

Luckily, no other attacks happened over the course of the journey to the port. Ike was always ready to lash out at a moment’s notice, but it was proven pointless and unnecessary each day. He didn’t know how his nerves would ever recover once this war ended though. He was too wound up to even think of relaxing, and he doubted he would feel truly calm until Ashnard was dead. Even after Ashnard was gone, that didn’t feel like it was going to be enough to help him feel better. Ike would have to balance the aftermath of the war even once it was over, and he had no idea how he was meant to keep it all under control. 

Soren pulled up the hood on his robes once the group arrived in Port Toha to hide his Brand from view. Chances were slim of anyone recognizing him off the mark alone, but Ike wouldn’t have been shocked at all if Ashnard had told his soldiers about what Soren’s symbol looked like. If Ashnard was still trying to track him down–and Ike was certain he was–then he would have had to pass on the information to his soldiers. Soren wasn’t in anywhere near as much danger as Elincia, but it was still something he was going to have to worry about and consider going forward. 

Toha was a fairly unassuming town, and Ike found himself sighing with relief when he arrived in the city’s limits. In the past, towns like this had been a source of anxiety since he was constantly paranoid about someone figuring out who he was and deciding to reveal why he was there. Ike wasn’t as worried now though. Maybe he was too glad to finally have a place to rest for a moment to care. He had been stiff ever since leaving Gallia, and Ike’s body was certainly thanking him for having a chance to decompress even if it was just for a few minutes. 

The trip to Toha wasn’t just a matter of getting in and out as quickly as possible. An extended stay on a ship was going to require supplies, and Ike and the rest of the army had been told to split up in order to buy what they needed for their voyage. Ike’s job was to pick up steel for the blacksmiths in Ilyana’s merchant caravan. Ike was hoping they wouldn’t run into any battles on the water, especially since he didn’t entirely know what a fight like that would have entailed, but he knew it was best to be safe rather than sorry. Right now, that meant getting everything that could have been needed no matter how slim the chances of its usefulness was. 

Soren was with Ike, humming to himself as he checked off supplies from the list he had written for himself. Ike recognized the tune on Soren’s lips as one Almedha had sung for him when he was a child. Ike hadn’t ever known his mother, so he had occasionally joined Almedha when she was getting ready to put Soren down for the night when they were young. Something about Almedha’s voice had always been captivating to Ike, and he knew Soren admired it too. Now, Almedha’s old lullaby was the only connection Soren could find to his mother, and he was desperate to treasure it as much as he could. 

“Alright,” Soren said, cutting off the song when it finally reached its end. “I want to pick up a few tomes before we get on the ship. My current tomes are starting to run low on uses, and it will be harder for Jorge and Daniel to forge tomes than it would be for them to make a sword or spear.”

Ike nodded, and he trailed after Soren as they started off in the direction of a stall selling tomes. Ike had never understood much about magic. No matter how many times Soren tried to explain it to him, the information just never stuck in his head. Ike admired mages for being able to master something that had always been so far out of his reach. He knew he would never be able to follow in their footsteps. Magical skill was partially genetic, and Ike was definitely inclined against it. Mist had inherited a prowess for healing from their mother, but Ike most certainly had not, and he doubted he would be able to turn it around in his favor no matter how hard he tried. 

Ike stepped out of the way of a man rushing through the streets of the city. The man was young, likely only a few years older than Ike, but he had a passion for combat that shone in his eyes. Ike watched the man go by before he turned his attention back to Soren. “What do you know about the man whose ship we’re getting on?” he asked. “King Caineghis arranged for us to board his boat, but we don't know much more than that.”

“Ranulf told me his name is Nasir,” Soren explained. “He has been working with laguz nations for many years as a merchant. I do not know for certain if he is laguz or beorc, but the rulers of the laguz seem to trust him. Ranulf didn’t seem to know much more about him than that, so take that however you will.”

Ike hummed as Soren settled down in front of a stall lined with mostly wind tomes. Soren picked up three wind tomes before grabbing one lightning volume and one fire book. Soren had always specialized in wind magic, but he could use fire and thunder as well if need be. “It never hurts to be prepared,” Soren said, anticipating Ike’s question about buying the extra tomes before it could be posed. Soren tucked the books away into his satchel and then checked them off the list on his notepad. “That should be everything we needed to get. We should make our way to the ship so we can get settled in before we leave. The sooner we can get out of here, the better.”

Ike frowned at Soren’s words. “You don’t seem to like being in Toha much. Is something wrong, Soren?” 

Soren glanced around, watching a few men dart through the crowd once again. They were carrying special blades unlike any Ike had ever seen. Soren’s eyes narrowed at the sight of the swords. “Those blades are meant to slay laguz,” he muttered. “But there are no laguz in town.”

Ike looked at the surrounding streets and realized that Soren was right; all of the people bustling around Toha’s streets were beorc. When Ike saw someone who broke the pattern, it was a flash of orange from Lethe’s hair. Lethe was wearing a cloak to hide her features, and she only met Ike’s gaze for a second before she averted her eyes. “Lethe is wearing a cloak,” Ike realized. “I wonder why.”

“Crimea is more tolerant of the laguz than Daein, but that isn’t saying as much as it should,” Soren explained. “I’ve heard people whispering about laguz, and none of it has been good. Toha isn’t as perfect of a town as one would expect. The people here are… They’re something.”

Ike arched an eyebrow. “You can say it, Soren.”

Soren let out a thin breath. “The strong relationship between Crimea and Gallia seems to extend solely to the upper classes. King Caineghis was close with King Ramon, but that does not mean the rest of the people in their nations feel the same way. I can only assume the other laguz are also hiding their true natures because they know they will be treated poorly for it if the people realize what they are,” he explained. “The people here seem more focused on their hatred for the laguz than the war that is right outside their doorstep. I suppose they are choosing ignorance at this point.”

“Why would they do something like that?” Ike asked. “Gallia isn’t Daein. It would make more sense for them to want to ally with Gallia so they can take a stand against Daein. It wasn’t Gallia that led to the death of the king and a bunch of people in the capital. They have their priorities all wrong.”

“The war has not done much to touch this town so far,” Soren pointed out. “The people here likely do not care because they do not believe they have a reason to care. If Daein’s army has not made it this far, then they have no reason to try and fight back. The king likely feels distant to everyone here. They do not know the ruling class of Crimea, and as long as the ruler does not impact their individual lives too much, then they have no reason to care.”

Ike held back his protests with a thin sigh. He couldn’t say he understood the mentality of the people of Toha at all, but at this point, it was likely better to trust Soren than to try and argue the point. Soren wouldn’t have been saying all of this if he did not think it was true, and Ike trusted Soren to know what he was talking about. He had always been better when it came to handling political matters, and if he thought the people of Toha were burying their hands in the sand deliberately, then Ike was going to place his faith in him. 

“Either way, I believe it would be best for us to make our way to the ship as soon as we can,” Soren went on. “The last thing I want is to be caught out here in case trouble breaks out. We have enough to deal with to get to Begnion as it is.”

Ike nodded. “Alright. Let’s go.”

As Ike followed Soren down the path toward the ship, he found himself starting a new conversation. He could have remained silent, but he simply couldn’t convince himself to do it. Instead, he leaned in close to Soren and began to whisper. “I’m glad the news of us escaping the villa doesn’t seem to have gotten out,” he remarked. “I know you’re hiding your face just in case, but… I haven’t seen any wanted posters out for any one of us. The only person the Daein army seems to be targeting at this point is Elincia.”

“I’m sure Ashnard is trying to bury it for a reason,” Soren said, and Ike noted how Soren was calling his father by his name rather than the title of ‘father’ his bloodline dictated. “He doesn’t want the world to know about me. Maybe he thinks it will make it harder for him to concentrate on the war. I don’t know. Either way, the fact that Ashnard wants to keep it secret is a good thing for us. It means the chances of the truth getting out against our will are slim.”

Ike nodded, but he couldn’t help shuddering inwardly at the thought of all that could mean. Ashnard planning anything was a cause for alarm at this point, and Ike could only hope they would be able to stay a few steps ahead of him until they were able to come up with a plan of their own. No one needed to know the truth about who they were or where they had come from… Though that did little to help the paranoia of knowing they could run into trouble at any given moment. 

“Hey, you two!”

Ranulf’s voice cut through the crowd and Ike’s thoughts in the blink of an eye, and Ike looked up to see the cat laguz making his way through the streets toward them. Ike waved back at him, though he bit back a frown when he caught a glimpse of the cloak Ranulf had taken to wearing. Just as Soren had said, the other laguz were hiding who they were too, and Ike couldn’t help wishing there was something he could do to make all of this unnecessary. 

“How has your shopping been going?” Ranulf asked. “I hope you were able to find everything you–”

Before Ranulf had the chance to finish that thought, his shoulder collided roughly with that of a much taller, larger man. Ranulf was sent to the ground from the force of the blow… But worse, his cloak came undone and fell to the dirt ineffectively around him. Ike felt the air in the area go stiff and lifeless, and the man Ranulf had run into silenced the apology on his lips as soon as he realized what had just happened. 

Ranulf offered a small laugh up at the man as he moved to gather his cloak and then go on his way. Before he had the chance, the man delivered a swift kick to his ribs. Ranulf let out a gasp at the force, but he seemed less bothered by it than most others would have been. “H-Hey,” Ranulf tried to reason. “You don’t have to–”

“Subhuman!” a passing woman cried out, pointing down at Ranulf. She screamed and turned to run in the opposite direction. The chaos spread through the crowd quickly, and those who were not brave enough to confront Ranulf turned tail to return to their homes as soon as they could. 

Ike found himself staring at everyone with wide eyes and a dropped jaw. Ranulf hadn’t done anything to anyone, but he was being treated like he was less than the dirt beneath their shoes. How could anyone think of something like this as being right? How could they justify it? 

Ike decided after a moment that he didn’t care, and he began to push his way through the crowd. “Hey!” Ike yelled. “Leave him alone! He didn’t do anything to you!”

“What’s all this about?!”

Ike looked up at the sound of the unfamiliar voice, and his blood ran cold at the sight of a man wearing the deep black of Daein armor marching toward them. Soren had been wrong when he said the war hadn’t made it this far yet; Daein was there now, and the army was going to break up the chaos however it could. Ranulf was in even more danger now than ever before, and he wasn’t the only one. Their entire party was at risk of being discovered, and if the Daein army realized what they were trying to do and who they were–

Ranulf managed to slip out of the way of the crowd, darting through the small gap Ike had managed to open for him. “Get to the ship,” Ranulf instructed quietly as soon as Ike was in earshot. “Get the others moving. I’m going to head back to Gallia after shaking these guys off my tail.”

“You’re not coming with us?” Ike asked, unable to hold back his shock even though he knew that now was not the time. “I thought you were–”

“Daein’s presence has me worried. Just trust me on this, alright?” Ranulf said, and his voice was enough to keep Ike from objecting. Ike still wanted to press the point though, to make sure Ranulf was going to be alright, but the cat laguz silenced him with a shake of his head. “I’ll catch up with you another time. Be careful, alright?”

Ranulf was gone in an instant, and Ike’s objections died out on his tongue long before he had the chance to voice them. Soren’s hand clamped down on his wrist and started pulling, and Ike snapped out of his thoughts in an instant. “Come on,” Soren instructed. “I don’t know what’s going to happen if they catch up with us, but I don’t want to ask either.”

“Hey! Get back here!”

A young woman’s voice cut through the crowd, and Ike winced at the realization that it was far too late for him to hope they could make a clean break to get away. He took off as he heard the beating of wyvern wings against the air. If he had any doubts about the Daein soldiers being after him and Soren, that was enough to silence them. The wyvern knights of Daein were beyond terrifying, and Ike had learned a long time ago to not cross them. He could only hope he would be able to get back to the ship before anything too bad happened. 

The Daein soldiers took a few precious minutes to prepare themselves for the charge ahead, and in that time, Ike and Soren took to weaving in and out of the crowd. Ike thought he caught a glimpse of Lethe and Mordecai at one point, but they were gone just as quickly as they had appeared. The people of Toha were all scrambling for safety now, desperate to get away from the Daein soldiers. They hadn’t cared much for the war until they realized how much danger they were in, and now, they had no easy way of getting away. The chaos made it both harder and easier for Ike and Soren to get away. Ike just hoped the Daein army didn’t start cutting down civilians in their pursuit of the group trying to run for the harbor. 

Ike wasn’t sure when he had left the merchant’s square and wound up in a residential area, but before he knew it, he was surrounded by houses on all sides. Soren glanced around, trying to find the best path forward, before he took off between a pair of homes. “This way.” Soren’s lungs were clearly straining to keep up with the trying physical strain of running so much, but he didn’t let that stop him. Ike knew Soren was going to have to rest when they got to the ship. He would probably have to force Ike to take a moment to breathe, but he would do it if that was what it took. He was willing to do what he had to in order to make sure Soren was alright. 

Soon after Ike and Soren darted between the nearby houses, a door opened behind them. Ike turned to see what had happened, wondering why anyone would want to come out of their house willingly at a time like this… But he didn’t see a civilian at all. Instead, he was met with the hulking, terrifying silhouette of a man in armor so heavy that it was a miracle he could walk while wearing it at all. The armor was a stark black color, catching all the heat and attention of the midday sun and the battle at hand. For a long moment, all Ike could do was stare at the obsidian steel and the red cape that fluttered in the air around it. 

Soren let out a frustrated sigh as he realized Ike had paused behind him, and he turned to face his bodyguard. “Ike, what are you doing?!” he cried out. He fell silent when he followed Ike’s gaze to the figure in black armor that had emerged from the house. Soren’s eyes went wide, and his face lost all semblance of color. He moved toward Ike as carefully as he could before taking his hand once again. “We have to keep going.”

“Do you know who that is?” Ike asked, but he could tell by the urgent fear behind Soren’s voice that the answer was going to be yes. 

“The Black Knight,” Soren replied breathlessly. “A member of the Four Riders… Arguably the most dangerous.” 

Ike didn’t need to be told twice. He spared only a moment on staring at the Black Knight before he followed Soren’s advice and took off through the crowd toward the harbor once again. The Daein soldiers were spreading out now, and a few had come to stand in their way. Ike readied his blade while Soren pulled out one of the tomes he had procured on the market that day. Neither one of them stopped running as they attacked the soldiers that tried to swarm them. None of the soldiers called them out by name or title, and Ike was willing to take that as a blessing. Even so, the soldiers knew they were enemies, and that was enough to put them in danger. At least none of them had realized Soren was the prince of Daein. That was enough of a relief for Ike for the time being. 

“Hey!”

Lethe’s sharp voice pulled Ike’s attention to his right. Mordecai had transformed into his tiger form, and he knocked aside a Daein soldier with a brutal slap of his paw. Beside him, a swordsman with silvery lilac hair stood, and he struck down a Daein attacker with his blade. The swordsman only turned to face Ike and Soren when he realized they were who Lethe was talking about. Lethe had seemingly already drained her energy in order for them to make it this far, and if Ike had to guess, he would have said she and Mordecai had started much closer to the front of town than him and Soren. 

“What happened?” Lethe demanded as she slid to a stop in front of Ike. She was gripping at her right side like she had sustained either a severe bruise or a broken bone, but the pain did not show on her face save for a few beads of sweat across her temple. “The Daein soldiers realized we were here, didn’t they?”

“Yeah. One of the townsfolk realized Ranulf was a laguz, and the chaos that followed was enough to show the Daein soldiers there was something going on,” Ike explained. In the back of his mind, his worry for Ranulf flared with renewed vigor. “Do you think he’s going to be alright? He said he was going to shake off some of our pursuers.”

“I’m sure he will be,” Lethe assured him. “Ranulf is too sharp to die in a place like this. He wouldn’t let some bigoted humans kill him.” 

Soren looked past Lethe at the swordsman, a frown on his face. “Who’s your new friend?”

“My name is Zihark,” the swordsman replied. “I’m an ally of the laguz. If you are allies to the laguz as well, then you can consider me on your side. You need to make your way to the docks to catch a ship, yes?”

Ike nodded. He knew Soren would probably have words for him later for choosing to trust someone they knew so little about, but he couldn’t bring himself to care right now. If Lethe and Mordecai trusted Zihark, then he saw no reason to undermine that faith. Lethe in particular was slow to put her faith in people, and if she thought Zihark was someone to be trusted, then Ike was willing to agree with that sentiment. “We have to get there before the Daein soldiers can catch up with us,” Ike explained. “Do you know what else is going on in town right now?”

“There are a few vigilantes here who are trying to go after the laguz in your party,” Zihark said. “I think we managed to get past all of them, but if you see anyone holding a blade meant to slay laguz… Avoid them as much as you can. They’re not strong, but those weapons of theirs are dangerous.”

Ike nodded, his mind flashing back to the blade he and Soren had seen back when the battle was first on the verge of starting. He could only hope they would be able to slip away before anything else bad happened. They were getting closer to the docks if nothing else, and Ike was willing to take that as a victory. 

Before he had the chance to get too caught up in his relief though, Ike heard the distant clattering of armor against the ground. He knew without needing to turn around that it was the Black Knight. The general of Daein wasn’t trying to move particularly quickly, but he was still imposing as could be at his slow speed. Ike needed to get out of the line of fire, and the rest of his allies did too. He could only hope none of them had been left behind when the battle broke out. He wouldn’t know for sure until he managed to reach the ship unfortunately, and by that point… 

No, he couldn’t let himself fear that it would be too late by the time he got to the boat. He had to keep moving. He could think about the potential consequences of losing his grip on the fight later when he was sure he would need to worry about it. Right now, he had too much on the line to stall for even a moment. 

The harbor came into view shortly afterward, and Ike saw a few Daein soldiers already trying to block the way. Soren struck before they had the chance to mount a defense, and wind magic knocked the commander off his horse and into the water nearby. The man screamed as he tumbled overboard, and a few soldiers rushed to his aid. The horse ran wild, off to find any reprieve it could from the close brush with danger. 

Ike didn’t pay much attention to the fallen Daein commander or the soldiers trying to help him out of the water. Instead, he made a beeline for the only ship that still had a ramp attached to the dock. That had to be the right one. He was quickly proven right in his assumptions too; Elincia was standing on the deck and looking out over the town in worry. 

Elincia relaxed as soon as she caught a glimpse of Ike, Soren, Lethe, Mordecai, and Zihark. “I am so glad to see you are all alright!” she cried out. She glanced over to Zihark, muted confusion rising in her eyes. “I do not believe we have met… Who might you be?”

“A friend,” Zihark replied simply. He looked over his shoulder at the dock below, finding that the Daein soldiers were trying to make a run for the ramp once again. “We can’t afford to stay here for too much longer. If we linger, they’re going to find a way onto the ship, and we won’t be able to get away if they can board the boat.”

Ike nodded. “Elincia, is everyone here? Are there any who we would be leaving behind by making sure the ship sets off right now?”

Elincia shook her head. “No. Everyone got here before you. We were waiting for you, Soren, and Ranulf to arrive… Hold on a moment. Where is Ranulf? I was under the impression he would be coming with us.”

“Ranulf decided to stay behind and see what Daein is up to,” Soren explained. “He ran out of town shortly after the battle broke out. He said he was going to distract the soldiers as much as possible, though I don’t know how well that’s working out for him right now.”

When panic flashed in Elincia’s eyes, Lethe held up a hand to silence her. “Don’t worry about Ranulf. He wouldn’t die in a place like this no matter what anyone tried to do to him. We’re going to see him again. I’m sure of it,” Lethe assured her. “For now, we have to get out of here.”

Ike nodded, and he looked back out at the dock below. The Black Knight had drawn close to the harbor, and he was staring up at the ship from beneath his mask. Ike felt a shiver sprint down his spine, and for a tense moment, he was certain the Black Knight was looking directly at him. 

Before the Black Knight could go after the ship though, Ranulf came into view in his cat form. He blocked the Black Knight from reaching the boat, and after a few moments of exchanging words, Ranulf lunged toward his opponent. Ike felt his chest go tight, and he hoped with everything he had that Ranulf knew what he was doing. He didn’t know what he would have done if he lost Ranulf when they should have been so close to freedom from all of this. 

It was difficult to make out the details, but Ike saw a person rush to stand in between Ranulf and the Black Knight. With the person there, the Black Knight decided to retreat. Ranulf managed to dart away before any of the townsfolk could go after him again, and Ike wished with all he had that he would have been able to let Ranulf on the ship with them. It wouldn’t have been quite so simple, especially since the Black Knight had come so close to catching them, but Ike couldn’t help wondering what that would have been like anyway. 

Soren looked out at Toha beside Ike with a heavy frown on his own face. Ike turned to face him slowly. “Just who was that?” Ike asked. “The Black Knight…”

“He’s one of the Four Riders of Daein,” Soren replied, his eyes still locked on the last spot he had seen that mass of black armor. “Rumor has it he is the strongest of the group… We’re going to have to be careful going forward.”

Elincia let out a slow breath. “We truly are being pursued by the entire Daein military,” she murmured. “I wish I could say I was surprised.”

Soren hummed, something dark and terrified beyond the power of words in his eyes. “I wish I was surprised too.”

Chapter Text

Soren was so distracted with making it to the ship that he didn’t spare much of a thought for the captain that would be taking him and the rest of his party to Begnion. His close brush with the Black Knight didn’t help him much with calming down enough to be able to talk to the owner of the ship. The man’s name was Nasir, but Soren didn’t know much of anything else about him. Soren figured he would be able to go and talk to him when he was ready. 

For the moment, all Soren could do was stare out at the water around the ship with a frown. He knew there was no way for the Black Knight to find his way onto the ship. Realistically, it would take a while for Daein to catch onto what they were doing and then pursue them, especially since the Black Knight had been stopped by someone from trying to pursue them. The details were out of Soren’s reach, and he was worried about what it could all mean. His mind was swimming with a million theories, and he doubted he would have a resolution to any of them until after he was able to meet up with Ranulf again to hear his side of the story. 

Beyond that, Soren hadn’t been able to stop thinking about the Black Knight in general. If the Black Knight was there, then that was a sign of something undoubtedly horrible. Soren knew the Black Knight was a serious figure in Daein. Most people knew nothing about him save for his skill in combat. Soren didn’t even know if Ashnard knew who he was beneath the mask. Ashnard probably didn’t care as long as he was able to capitalize on his strength and use it to win the war. Soren could only hope he was able to get away without having to face him again. 

But the Black Knight would come up again one of these days, wouldn’t he? It would be nearly impossible for Soren to be able to get out of this war without having to face the Black Knight. If he was going after Ashnard, then he was going to have to fight through each of the generals in the Four Riders. Soren didn’t want to have to admit it, but he knew the truth of his circumstances, and he wouldn’t be able to deny it forever. 

“Who might you be?”

Soren joled out of his thoughts at the sound of a voice behind him. He whirled around to see a man with tanned skin and blue hair watching him with a frown. This had to be Nasir. Soren couldn’t think of anyone else it could have been. Right. He was on a ship on the way to Daein. Of course the captain of the ship would find him and want to talk to him at least a little bit before the journey continued. 

Soren blinked once and then twice, trying to keep himself composed in the face of a man who felt so… Strange to him. “I… I’m Soren,” he managed to say. “I’m here with the army fighting with Princess Elincia.” That was certainly one way he could introduce himself, though Soren could think of many others. 

Nasir’s eyes narrowed at him. “I’m glad to hear you’re here intentionally and not as a stowaway. I know we’ve got enough of those already,” he remarked, and Soren found himself blinking in confusion. There was a stowaway on the ship? Did he even want to know what the story behind that was? Probably not right now if nothing else. “Regardless… It is nice to meet you.”

Nasir’s face softened into something that should have been a smile, but Soren couldn’t bring himself to believe it entirely. There was something off about it. Nasir seemed to be looking for something in his eyes that would change the way he viewed Soren… But Soren didn’t know what he would have wanted to find. Soren had never met Nasir before, and he had no reason to believe Nasir would be able to learn more about him just from a glance. What in the world was going on with him? Why did it leave Soren’s stomach filled with bile?

Nasir took a step away from Soren, and he moved to go back where he had come from, not that Soren knew where it was specifically. “I am shocked to see you here,” Nasir said simply. “I wonder what it could mean.”

Soren stared after Nasir as the blue-haired man disappeared, and he felt his chest grow tight. The way Nasir was talking made it seem like he knew something he shouldn’t have been aware of… But how was that possible? Soren certainly hadn’t told him anything incriminating, and he doubted anyone else had either. Only Ike, Mist, and Gawain knew who he truly was, but that didn’t explain Nasir’s reaction at all. 

Why was Nasir shocked to see Soren there specifically? It didn’t make any sense. Nasir had never met Soren before. Soren was certain he would have remembered it if he had… So why had he reacted like that? What in the world was going on in his head? Why did he seem to recognize Soren when Soren knew nothing about him? 

Soren pressed one hand to his chest. He was fine. He didn’t know what Nasir wanted, but he wasn’t going to push it either. He would get to the truth at the heart of all this when the time was right. Nasir would talk when the moment was correct. He just needed to be careful to not let anyone figure out what was going on. 

Deep down, Soren knew that Nasir knew something… But he couldn’t bring himself to admit it. Somehow, it felt like it was just too much. Soren had been through enough, and he didn’t want to make his fear any worse. 

If he was being honest with himself, he knew it was already much too late for that… But at least he could pretend he was still in control. 

~~~~~

Soren’s paranoia about both Nasir and the Black Knight slowly but surely began to cool as the days came and went. He learned about the stowaway Nasir had mentioned. Apparently, a young thief by the name of Sothe had snuck onto the ship when they were docked in Toha. Titania had agreed to let him stay as long as he put his lockpicking skills to good use to help the army. Volke would have been the perfect person to ask for help with that, but since he was out of the picture just as quickly as he had appeared, Sothe would have to do. Sothe was a bit mouthy, and he lashed out at just about anyone who tried to push him, but he knew what to do in the case of an emergency. Soren was willing to take that as a victory. If Sothe was willing to help, then what right did any of them have to complain?

Soren was glad he had been given the chance to breathe. The battle at Port Toha had been terrifying and stressful, and Soren needed time to decompress before he had to fear any other attacks would come in his direction. He hoped Daein would be smart enough to try and not pursue them, but he knew it wouldn’t be that easy. At least he would be ready for the battles to come this time. He wouldn’t be caught off guard this time. 

Soren was happy to take the chance he had been given to relax with Ike. They had taken to spending their days together in their shared room on the ship. There wasn’t enough space for everyone to have their own room, so a lot of them had to double up and share. Soren was glad he and Ike were sharing space. He wouldn’t have wanted to be with anyone else even when the idea was separated from his current tense circumstances. 

The more time he spent with Ike, the better Soren found himself feeling. He knew he could have taken the chance of being on the ship to get to know the other members of the army… But he couldn’t bring himself to do it. Instead, he was distracted with enjoying his time with Ike. Because of the limited space, he and Ike had been put in the position of sharing a common bed for the duration of their trip. There technically would have been space for them to set up a cot on the floor if they wanted to. They could have also left the room with the single bed for anyone else to occupy if they so chose… But in the end, they decided to split it together. 

And if Soren was being honest with himself, he loved it. Back at the villa, being able to spend the night with Ike had been a rare treat whenever they were both able to spare the time to enjoy an evening together. Ike was often busy in the mornings with his training drills, and he chose to stay in his own room most of the time to ensure too many rumors didn’t begin to spread about the time they were spending together. Soren was glad they had no reason to worry about such a thing anymore. No one would ask questions about them sharing space. As far as the rest of the army knew, they were simply longtime friends who were fine with splitting a room. There was no scandal to be found as long as no one knew there was a prince staying there. 

It was refreshing to feel like he was known for only his actions rather than his bloodline. Soren had grown used to thinking of himself through his relationship to his father, and he had almost given up on ever being acknowledged as a person on his own rather than as an extension of Ashnard. Now though… Soren felt like he was in a much better place than he ever could have expected. He wasn’t just the son of Ashnard or a secret to be kept. He could simply be Soren for a while. 

And he wanted to simply be Soren. He had no intention of inheriting the throne from his father, and even if that had been the plan for him, he would have set it aside before he had the chance to succeed the position. Soren wanted to be able to spend the rest of his days in peace without having to worry about what others would say about him. He wanted to be with Ike, and he didn’t want to have to worry about producing an heir for the sake of Daein’s future. 

That thought certainly held implications, didn’t it? Soren had been doing his best to ignore them to the best of his ability, but he knew it wasn’t going to be that simple. He wanted to be able to push all of his thoughts about running away from the world and living in domestic bliss to the back of his mind… But he just couldn’t do it. Soren wanted to be able to live simply, and he wanted to be able to settle down with the person he loved most in the world. He would have done anything to be there with Ike and no one else from then on. 

The world wasn’t going to give him that chance though. After this war ended, Daein would be in need of an heir, and Soren was going to have to step up and do something. Even if his choice was to abdicate the throne and spend the rest of his days in the countryside studying magic, he was going to have to step up for at least a short while. Soren didn’t know if he would be able to embrace the simple life he had been dreaming of recently, and the thought terrified him. 

But for the time being, he was able to enjoy it with everything he had. Soren liked waking up with Ike by his side, and on rare occasions, he was lucky enough to find Ike’s hand across his waist. For a short while, it seemed as if they were not bodyguard and prince. They were simply friends, perhaps something more, and that was all Soren really wanted. He didn’t want to be the prince of Daein if it meant he was going to have to give this up one day. He wanted to enjoy it forever. He would have done nearly anything to embrace that. 

But wishful thinking wasn’t going to change the fact of his circumstances. Soren was going to have to be patient and wait for all of this find an end. After that… Well, he could cross that bridge when he got to it. He would have his fair share of problems to fight through then, but he couldn’t do any of that heavy lifting right now. For just a little while longer, Soren would be able to enjoy his time with Ike. 

He pretended it wasn’t a matter of selfish indulgence but instead practicality, but deep down, he knew the truth.

Soren and Ike were spending an afternoon together when they heard chaos on the decks above. Soren had been reading through a book to try and hone his mastery over fire magic when he heard the noise, and a frown creased his features. Ike had been examining one of his blades, but he perked up when he realized something was strange. “Did you hear that?” Ike questioned. 

Soren nodded, and he set his book aside. Instead, he reached for one of his tomes and started toward the steps that would take him up to the main deck. There was no guarantee that noise was the promise of a battle, but he knew there was a chance, and Soren wasn’t going to risk wasting time if something happened. They had been able to spend the last few days in relative peace, but it was just a matter of time before Daein tried to pursue them. Maybe their luck had failed them a bit sooner than they expected. It wouldn’t have shocked Soren, though he didn’t particularly want to face that reality either. 

When Soren arrived on the deck, he glanced around and found the ship had come to a stop… But it wasn’t for the reason he had expected. There was no boat running parallel to the ship. Instead, there were attackers coming in from all directions on the wind. Raven laguz had cornered the ship and were coming at it however they could. Soren cursed under his breath. He had heard that raven laguz could be ruthless at times, attacking beorc ships in the name of plundering their treasure. They were the pirates of the sky, and they had set their sights on the best target they could find in this part of the sea. 

Soren was glad he had grabbed one of his wind tomes specifically when he left his room behind. Wind magic was strong against flying opponents, and hopefully, that would hold true against the raven laguz too. If he was able to get in an accurate strike, then Soren would be able to knock at least a few of them out of the air. Hopefully, that would deter the entire flock from trying to attack the ship again… Though Soren figured that ship had already sailed. If they were going to back down, they would have done it already, and yet, they had not. 

“We’re going to have to fight them off, aren’t we?” Ike asked as he came to stand just beside Soren. 

The wind mage nodded. “We have no other choice. Are you ready for a fight, Ike?”

Ike raised his blade, though Soren could see the reservations in his eyes. Ike didn’t want to have to fight laguz, but given their current circumstances, he knew they had little other choice. “As ready as I’ll ever be.”

Another bird hurtled down toward Soren from the sky, and he summoned a wind spell to knock them off course. Ike was ready to deal the finishing blow. Soren didn’t look to see if the bird had managed to recover and retreat or if they fell into the water below. He figured it didn’t matter. He was going to give this fight everything he had. The other details could wait. 

Soren would get to Begnion, and if he had to fight through raven laguz to do it, then so be it. 

~~~~~

Mist hated having to fight. 

She had never liked it. Perhaps it was because she was nowhere near as inclined to combat as her father or brother. Gawain and Ike could spend time bonding together thanks to their shared interest in fighting, but Mist had never been given the same chance. She didn’t like to fight, and she wasn’t any good at it either. She had taken up healing instead, something Gawain said she had taken a shine to from her mother. Apparently, Elena had been a strong healer too, though Mist didn’t remember enough about her to be able to say for sure. 

Mist didn’t like having to fight now either even though she knew it was necessary. She had accepted after she was forced on the run from the villa that she was going to have to fight if she wanted to come out of this war in one piece. She would have to get used to doing what she despised, and she would have to figure out a way to make peace with it sooner rather than later. Mist wasn’t looking forward to having to face the battles to come, but she knew she had no other choice. She was going to find a way to live through all of this, and if that meant fighting, then that was a price she would simply have to pay. 

Mist was still much better with healing than fighting, so she stayed to the back of the group when the raven laguz began to swarm the ship. The rest of her allies were strong and knew how to handle the fight at hand. They were unused to fighting raven laguz, but they were still giving it their all and finding a way to turn the tides back in their favor. Mist watched on with wide eyes as she gripped at her staff tightly. She and Rhys had to work overtime in order to keep everyone in fighting condition, and it was starting to wear on her. 

Mist finished healing a wound Mia had sustained when she saw a flash of red and green out of the corner of her eye. She turned to see what could have been responsible, a frown on her face. She didn’t think it was possible for any bird laguz to be bright red. It could have been a hawk, and that would certainly explain the green, but no bird laguz had a reason to be fiery red. What in the world had she seen then? If it wasn’t a raven laguz, then–

It was a beorc. 

Mist nearly froze at the sight of her. The girl was a Daein soldier, and Mist could tell by the set of her armor even though it wasn’t the same black color she was used to seeing from her home nation. A wyvern rider with flaming red hair and bright pink armor sat atop a green wyvern, a lance in one hand and a determined frown on her face. Mist didn’t recognize her, and she found herself staring at the girl for a long moment. She was from Daein too. Somehow, that meant a lot more than it should have. 

Mist knew now wasn’t the time to be getting distracted. She had to give her all to the fight if she wanted to come out of it in one piece. Survival was hardly assured if she let herself get distracted to the point of being unable to do much of value to contribute. Still, she found herself staring at the girl in the pink armor. She was from Daein too. Mist knew many people from Daein, but she hadn’t ever been able to get to know other girls her age at the villa. The only children near her age had been Ike and Soren, and even so, they were too distracted with each other to give Mist the attention she silently and selfishly craved. She had wanted to find a friend she could call her own, but that simply hadn’t been possible as long as she was forced to rest at the corner of the world out of the reach of everyone she could have wanted to be around. 

But for a moment, Mist felt like it was possible for there to be a different future for her. Maybe she would be able to find a friend and make peace with her circumstances. She hadn’t been able to know any other fighters from Daein who were also girls her age, but all of that was about to change. If the girl was there on the ship, then she must have been there to help them, right? She was certainly doing her best to fend off the attacks from the incoming laguz well enough. That was a great sign in Mist’s eyes. 

Or it would have been if the girl had not spoken to ruin the fantasy that had settled over her. 

“Out of my way, you beasts!” the girl cried out, and Mist felt all of the hope begin to melt away. That was right. She wasn’t just a girl from Daein anymore; she was a fugitive, and she was trying to make it to Begnion so she would be able to win the war against Ashnard. On top of that, she was from Daein specifically, and Daein was hardly a nation known for its love of the laguz. If this girl was from Daein too–and Mist was certain she was–then she must have been raised in the prejudices that came with being Daeinite too. Mist hated having to admit it, but her hopes were already being dashed. 

Still, Mist had never been one to give up easily, and she made her way over to the wyvern rider with a firmness to her step and a gleam to her eyes. “What are you doing here?” Mist asked. “Just who are you?”

The wyvern rider was distracted with holding off a raven laguz, but when she was able to spare a glance down at Mist, she frowned at her. “My name is Jill,” the girl answered. “I’m from Daein, and I’m here to turn in the princess of Crimea to the authorities. That is who is aboard this ship, yes?”

Mist’s hopes continued to evaporate the longer she stared up at Jill, and she let out a thin sigh. “If you’re here because you want to get to the princess, then you’re going to have another thing coming. We’re not going to let you do that.” 

Jill paused for only a moment to twist her spear around and drive it into a nearby raven laguz. Once the job had been finished, she turned back to Mist and eyed her from head to toe in a few critical seconds. “Then I would like to propose a temporary truce,” Jill settled on saying. “I cannot sit back and let a human vessel be torn apart this way. I will stand by you, and we can talk about the consequences after the fight is over.”

Jill was gone before Mist had the chance to protest, and she most certainly wanted to protest. She didn’t know what Jill was on about, but she had to know that starting a conversation like that wasn’t going to win her any favors. If Jill was after Elincia, then she was going to have to go through the entirety of the Crimean rebellion to reach her… But none of that seemed to matter when Jill thought about the fact that the ship was under attack from laguz. Did Jill really dislike the laguz so much that she was willing to put her mission aside in order to see them defeated? What kind of person was she if that was her train of thought?

Mist quickly realized that she had no way of getting to the bottom of it now. No matter how desperate she was to press Jill for more information or even just a single answer as to her motivations, Mist had no time. The laguz were still attacking, and as far as she could tell, it wouldn’t stop until they were able to defeat the enemy commander. There was one raven laguz who was flying farther back than the others, watching everything in the battle unfold from afar. He was going to rush in and attack when he felt he had no other choice, but for now, he was weighing his options. Mist could already tell he would be stronger than the others just by looking at him for a second or two. She would need to be ready when the time came for him to rush in. 

Mist forced herself to focus by healing the rest of the army’s members over the course of the minutes that followed Jill’s arrival. She wasn’t sure if the others in the rebellion had realized that they had picked up a new ally during the fight, but she wasn’t going to call attention to it either and risk putting anyone in danger. Jill didn’t seem to mind the circumstances at all, too focused on finishing the fight to care. Mist couldn’t say she was fond of the way Jill spoke about laguz or her opinions on the current situation, but she had to admit that the wyvern rider knew how to handle herself in a fight. Jill was holding up admirably well, and if she wasn’t so stubbornly loyal to Daein, then she may have been a great ally to have in the coming war. 

When the commander of the raven laguz finally rushed forward, Mist and the rest of her comrades were ready for him. Soren opened with a blast of wind magic, and it tore apart the air just in front of the laguz. While he was distracted, Rolf nocked an arrow and sent it flying. From there, all it took was a single deadly blow from Shinon to end everything. Mist looked away as the laguz fell out of the sky and plummeted toward the ocean below. She heard the splash, but she didn’t make herself check to see if the bird was going to right himself and come back up. If she was being honest with herself, she already knew the answer. 

Titania let out a heavy sigh once all of the laguz were gone, and she stared as the few stragglers retreated in light of their leader’s defeat. “That certainly could have gone better,” she muttered. The fight had ended about as well as it could have, but they would have all been better off if they didn’t need to worry about the fight in the first place. At least they had come out of it in one piece. That was a blessing Mist wasn’t going to let herself forget as long as so much was on the line. 

Mist glanced around at the rest of the ship’s deck, and she found that everyone was largely intact. There were no major injuries, and the greatest wound was a sprained ankle that Gatrie had somehow sustained despite his heavy armor. Rhys was taking care of it though, and Mist was free to turn her attention back over to Jill. Now that the fight was over, she would be able to figure out what the wyvern rider wanted. Jill had said she was there to take Elincia back to Daein, but Mist wasn’t going to let her do it. If Jill had any sense, then she would see that trying to fight off all of them now was a death sentence. Mist could only hope she saw reason. She didn’t want to have to fight in yet another battle on what should have been a peaceful boat ride. 

Mist only had the chance to take one step toward Jill before the entire ship shook, and Mist felt the boat come to a screeching halt. Mist stumbled into the edge of the ship, grabbing tightly onto the railing with her free hand to ensure she didn’t go careening into the sea below. Mist glanced around, her heart racing in her ears as a fresh wave of adrenaline crashed over her. “What was that?!” she cried out, her voice barely sounding like her own. 

Mist soon found the answer when she saw Nasir’s shoulders stiffen from his place at the front of the ship. “The ship has run aground,” Nasir explained. He looked out over the edge, and Mist forced herself to do the same. She quickly realized why the ship had stopped, and she winced at the sight. A series of massive rocks had appeared just in front of the boat, and if Mist had to guess, she would have said that Nasir had turned into them in an attempt to shake the ravens off. In the end, all it had done was get them stuck. 

Mist let out a heavy sigh. She didn’t know what the protocol was for getting a massive ship like this unstuck from the rocks, but she knew she had a horrible feeling about all of it. Somehow, she felt like they weren’t supposed to be there even if she couldn’t quite put a finger on why. Surely at least someone had to have a plan for how they were going to get out of there, right?

All of a sudden, Jill was the last thing on Mist’s mind, and she hated it more than anything. 

Chapter Text

Soren very quickly decided that he did not like the feeling of a ship scraping across rocks. 

The battle against the raven laguz came to a swift end thanks to the collaboration and combined skills of the many combatants on the field. Soren was glad to see it all over once everything was said and done; he couldn’t say he liked having to fight in such a specific way. His wind magic was strong, but it was nowhere near powerful enough to be able to defeat every raven laguz coming in his direction. That didn’t even begin to get into the unfortunate moral implications that came with having to fight against laguz in the first place, and Soren really didn’t want to think about any of that. 

The victory had been short-lived though; just as quickly as Soren had started to celebrate, the ship scraped against something rough and powerful beneath the waves. Soren stumbled and nearly fell into the railing, but Ike’s hand had come down on his shoulder to keep him stabilized. Soren had looked up at him in relief, but that joy was gone just as quickly as it had appeared when he realized what the ship’s sudden halt must have meant. The boat had struck some rocks, and it was probably going to take a lot of heavy lifting in order to get it unstuck. 

Soren let out a heavy sigh, and he shook his head as he glanced over at the rest of the army. “Is everyone alright?” he called out. As far as he could tell, the answer was yes. He hadn’t heard of anyone being sent tumbling over the edge of the boat, and even if they had wound up in the water, it would be fairly simple for Marcia to direct her pegasus around the edge of the ship to pick them back up again. 

“As fine as we can be,” Titania remarked with a heavy sigh. She glanced up to Nasir where he was standing at the front of the boat, a frown creasing her features. “What do we have to do in order to get the ship unstuck? There has to be something we can try.”

Nasir frowned for a long moment, barely seeming to hear what she was saying. Instead, he was focused on a small crop of land just beside the boat. The rocks they had run into were lining the bottom edge of an island of some kind… No, that wasn’t true. If it was an island, then Soren would have been able to see the end of it somewhere on the horizon. Their ship had struck the edge of the continent of Tellius’ mainland. Soren had no idea what that was supposed to mean for them, but he had a horrible feeling about it. 

Just where were they in association to Begnion? They had to be getting closer, but Soren didn’t think they were anywhere close to docking just yet. There were still a few weeks remaining on their journey, and if they were close to Sienne, then he would have known it already. That must have meant they were somewhere else. Perhaps they had wound up near the edge of Gallia. If that was the case, then all they had to do was get off the ship and look around for any help. If someone was in the area, then surely they would be willing to help the boat get unstuck and continue its voyage. The people of Gallia had been friendly enough up to that point. Even if the beast laguz were stubborn and refused to help, Soren was sure Lethe or Mordecai would be able to call in a favor or two. 

Ike seemed to have much the same idea as Soren, and he started for the edge of the deck. “I’m going to head ashore and see what I can find,” he announced. “If there’s nothing we can do to get the boat unstuck right now, then we may as well go and see if there’s something we can get done by asking around.”

Nasir seemed to have his fair share of objections to that idea, but he didn’t let himself voice any of them. Instead, he let out a stilted sigh and moved to lower the ramp onto land. Nasir seemed completely different now from how Soren had come to expect him. Soren couldn’t say he knew much of anything about Nasir, but he was aware enough to be able to tell that something was on his mind. Nasir was upset about the ship having run aground, but it didn’t seem to be for the reasons Soren would have expected. There was something else on Nasir’s mind, and Soren couldn’t tell if he wanted to know what it was or not. He would simply have to wait and see what Nasir had to say about it, he supposed. 

Ike started off the ship and onto solid ground, and Soren found himself following suit. He expected Mist to be willing to come along, but she was distracted with talking to the strange wyvern rider who had appeared in the middle of the battle. There was another question for Soren to solve after their current problem had been taken care of. Right now though, Soren knew he had to focus his attention on making sure the ship got unstuck as soon as possible. 

Finding solid ground again for the first time in weeks was strange. Soren had grown so used to the constant sway of the ship beneath his feet that he almost didn’t know what to do when he no longer had to fight in order to keep some semblance of balance under his control. He shook the thought off, instead taking this chance to glance around the area to see if there were any people nearby. No individual people would be able to help the ship to get unstuck, but if there were enough of them, then perhaps they would be able to come up with a solution. That was all Soren could really hope for at this point. 

“I wonder where we are,” Ike hummed as he glanced over to Soren. “I don’t think we’re in Begnion yet, but this doesn’t look like Gallia either. The Gallia we saw was full of trees, and I don’t see much of anything around here.”

Soren found himself glancing around at that, and he realized that Ike was right. There weren’t any trees to speak of in the immediate area, and Soren doubted that fact was going to change even if he pressed closer inland. This didn’t seem to be Gallia or Crimea, and it certainly wasn’t Begnion yet. They hadn’t been on the sea anywhere near long enough for it to be Begnion. 

But if all of that was true, then where in the world were they?

“Is something the matter?”

The sound of a new voice jolted Soren out of his thoughts, and he whirled around to see someone new had stepped onto the field. It was a young man who seemed to be just a few years older than Soren… But that was hardly the strangest thing about him. The young man wore a pleasant smile, but it felt familiar to Soren in a way that punched him in the stomach. Everything about the young man felt familiar, as a matter of fact, and Soren found himself staring with wide eyes and a dropped jaw. 

The young man’s hair was a deep green color, so dark it bordered on being black. It hung close to his face in a practiced bob, framing his tanned skin and warm smile perfectly. His eyes were a piercing crimson color, but they were lined with something kind so as to not scare away his new companions. As strange as it was to say, Soren felt like he was a perfect mirror of the young man. Their skin tones were different, but their deep green hair and bold red eyes were the same. The young man even had a few markings of red on his skin, and the color perfectly matched the Brand etched into Soren’s forehead. They could have been brothers, and all Soren could do was stare. 

He had never heard of anyone else looking this much like him. He had known for years that he took after his mother more than his father. Other than his paler skin tone, he was practically her spitting image. Somehow, the resemblance was even cleaner between Soren and this newcomer. How was such a thing possible though? Soren didn’t even know him, and he had no way of drawing a line between their histories… But they must have been linked somehow, right? There was no way they could have just looked that similar without something else going on between them. Soren knew it was simply impossible. 

The young man seemed caught by surprise too, and Ike found himself looking back and forth between Soren and the newcomer for a long moment. “What… What is this?” Ike asked softly. 

The young man snapped out of his trance first with a shake of his head. “My apologies. I did not mean to go silent on you that way,” he said, though Soren could tell there were a million other things he wanted to say instead. “My name is Kurthnaga. Might I ask what you are doing here?”

“Our ship has run aground,” Ike explained, regaining his footing much sooner than Soren would. “We were wondering if perhaps you would be able to help us with getting it back on the water. It seems to have gotten caught on some rocks.”

Kurthnaga nodded with a smile. “I see… I must say that your upfront attitude is refreshing. I don’t think I’ve ever met someone quite like you.”

“I hope we’re not intruding on anything,” Soren found himself chiming in before he knew what he was saying. He didn’t know why, but he felt like he had crossed every line he had ever been instructed to leave be just by standing there and looking at Kurthnaga. That name felt like it should have struck a nerve in his heart, but Soren didn’t know where to start. He was close to figuring out what it was meant to mean, but he had no idea what to do. 

“Not at all,” Kurthnaga answered, though his eyes still never left Soren for long like he was terrified of having to look at him directly. To be more accurate, Soren was the one terrified of what was happening, and he knew he was projecting it onto Kurthnaga. The young man didn’t seem to mind what was happening at all. He was slightly unnerved, but he was more curious than anything else. Soren wished he could bring himself to feel the same way. It all felt like too much, and he had no idea how he was meant to keep himself held together in the face of it. 

“I can handle this,” Kurthnaga went on. He turned to look back in the direction he had come, and Soren saw a few figures starting to walk closer. Soren could tell the men were on the verge of speaking, but they were silenced when Kurthnaga held up a hand. “Our friends here have lost control of their ship. It has struck some rocks, and I would like to help them to get it unstuck. Might I ask you all for your help?”

Soren stared at the newcomers for a long moment, realizing they all had red hair and warm brown skin to match. Something about them felt familiar, but not in the way that he had met them before. Soren instead knew he had read about these people somewhere before. His mind was full of cotton and static, and he couldn’t find a way to push through it long enough to make sense of what he was finding. 

The first man in the group took a step forward. “But–”

Kurthnaga shook his head to silence him. “I would ask that you help them. They will be on their way as soon as they are able to get their ship unstuck,” he assured the man. “I believe you will be able to help us. Please?”

The man hesitated for a long moment before he nodded. “Of course, Your Highness.” With that, the man stepped forward alongside the rest of his allies, and he pressed his hands together in front of his chest. His body began to morph and shift, and he grew massively in a matter of seconds. Soren found himself staring, and he staggered back by a step or two. All of a sudden, he knew exactly what was going on and where he had found himself. 

They were in Goldoa, the land of dragons. 

Three red dragons had pulled away from Kurthnaga’s side, and they made their way over to the ship. They were large enough to actually move the ship, and in a matter of seconds, they began to pull it away from the rocks. Soren stared with wide eyes and a pounding heart. This was why he felt as if it was all familiar. He had read about Goldoa countless times, and he had always felt like there was something more there than he realized. Now, Soren felt his blood rushing through his ears, and he knew there was much more to this than he could have ever thought he could put to words. 

Kurthnaga did not seem to realize just how lost in thought Soren was, and he stepped closer with a fragile smile on his face. “My apologies for interrupting,” Kurthnaga went on. “But what is your name?”

“Soren,” Soren found himself choking out, and for a reason he couldn’t define, he almost wanted to confess to being the prince of Daein. He held it back though, biting down on his bottom lip. “My name is Soren.”

“Soren,” Kurthnaga hummed, testing the weight of the word on his tongue. After a few seconds more of silence, he let out a slow sigh. “I want to know… Do you happen to know anyone by the name of Rajaion?”

Soren thought about it for a moment before shaking his head. “No.” He knew that was the name of his father’s mount, but that hardly seemed relevant. The Rajaion Soren knew was a wyvern, and that meant it was a far cry from the man Kurthnaga was inquiring about. “Why do you ask?”

Kurthnaga hesitated for a long moment, continuing to stare at Soren while studying him for any signs of something useful. In the end, he was forced to relent when the tall man leading the red dragons appeared at his side once more. “The ship has been unstuck,” the man told Kurthnaga. “I believe it is time for us to send the foreigners on their way.”

Kurthnaga blinked a few times, nodding to try and snap himself out of his trance. “Yes… I suppose you are right.” He pressed a smile across his face and looked up at Soren once more. “I guess you have to get back to your ship. My apologies for keeping you.”

“I appreciate you for your help,” Soren found himself saying, though the words came automatically rather than being an active effort from his mind. He stared at Kurthnaga for another few moments, and he found himself wanting to ask more about Rajaion. There should have been more to his answer than there was, but he couldn’t come up with a reason for why. Kurthnaga seemed to be struggling to explain himself too, and the realization came like a punch to the stomach. 

Kurthnaga nodded, something like hesitation rising in his eyes before he could smother it again. “I wish we had more time to talk. Perhaps one day,” Kurthnaga went on. “I would not want you to be caught here. I fear that would not end well for any of us.”

Soren was on the verge of asking why that was the case, but he knew standing there and talking about it would only put him in greater danger. He nodded instead, taking a step back toward the ship. “Thank you again… For everything.” 

Soren trailed after Ike and got back on the ship before it had the chance to drift away. Titania and Lethe pulled the board that had been set down on the ground onto the deck once again, and Titania let out a heavy sigh once Soren and Ike were safe on the ship. “I was worried something was going to happen when you ran off like that,” Titania said. “I don’t think most others would have the confidence to go and speak with the dragons of Goldoa.”

“Goldoa…” Soren found himself murmuring. That was right. The nation on the western edge of Tellius between Gallia and Begnion was Goldoa, the country of dragons. Goldoa had always been hidden away from the world, and the dragon laguz who called it home never interacted with those beyond the limits of their territory. Kurthnaga was a dragon laguz, and for some reason… 

For some reason, Kurthnaga had looked just like him. Kurthnaga looked younger than Soren, though if he had to guess, Soren would have said Kurthnaga was much older than him. Dragon laguz were said to age incredibly slowly, so he was likely countless years older than Soren. With how similar they looked, Soren felt like there simply had to be a connection there… But how could there be? He knew nothing about the dragons of Goldoa. He had never been to the country until then, and he wouldn’t have had a way to get there either. The dragons of Goldoa were isolated, and they had no reasons to leave their home either. 

Soren must have had a reason for looking so much like Kurthnaga though… Right? Soren did not believe in coincidences most of the time. Everything happened for a reason, and he couldn’t imagine he and Kurthnaga looked that similar simply because of chance. None of this could be just luck. Kurthnaga and Soren could have been brothers, and yet… 

“Are you alright?”

Soren jolted out of his thoughts at the sound of Ike’s voice from just beside him. Right. He wasn’t alone. Ike had been there to see everything happen too, and it was only natural that Ike would have his fair share of questions too. Soren turned to look at Ike, and he felt like he was finally forced to crash down to earth again. “I… I’m fine,” Soren replied even though he wasn’t entirely sure if that was true. After a moment’s silence, Soren remembered it was pointless to lie to Ike. If anyone was going to be able to break through Soren’s defenses, it would be Ike, and trying to ignore that would be pointless. “You… You saw that, didn’t you? I look… I look just like him.”

Ike nodded. “You do,” he confirmed. “I have to wonder… Do you think he could have anything to do with your mother?”

Soren opened his lips to object, but he couldn’t find the words to protest. What if Ike was right? Soren didn’t know anything about where his mother came from, and if there was a chance she had come from Goldoa, then… That would explain all of this, wouldn’t it? Almedha had never told Soren what kind of laguz she was. There was a chance she was from Goldoa, wasn’t there?

No… No, that couldn’t be the truth. Soren didn’t think he had ever heard of a dragon laguz leaving Goldoa behind. They didn’t have a reason to do it as long as they were safer in their country’s borders than anywhere else. The rest of Tellius could be a risky place for laguz, and the dragons of Goldoa lived the longest. They knew better than anyone that they were meant to hide away and stay out of the troubles of the other nations. There was no reason for anyone to leave, much less for Almedha to decide to leave her home behind in favor of something miserable that was no doubt waiting for her in Daein. 

Soren shook his head, trying to shake the thought off before it tried to dig its heels in and beg for any more of his attention. “I don’t know what happened for my mother to end up in Daein, but I don’t think it matters either. We don’t know for sure if she comes from Goldoa, and even if we did, then…” Soren looked at the distant land of Goldoa. It was getting farther and farther away now, and Soren wouldn’t be able to go back to it to ask Kurthnaga if he knew anything about Almedha. That ship had already sailed quite literally. Soren couldn’t go back, and he didn’t know if he would have been ready to hear the truth even if Kurthnaga had been able to offer it to him. 

“I’m glad we were able to get back on the water as soon as we were.”

Soren looked up and realized that Nasir was looking down at him and Ike from his place at the front of the ship. Nasir had turned to glance over his shoulder at Ike and Soren, and somehow, Soren felt like Nasir was looking straight through him instead of at him. “I was worried we would be trapped there for a long time,” Nasir went on. “With how reclusive the dragons of Goldoa are, I figured none of them would have a reason to come out and greet us.”

Nasir’s gaze caught on Soren for a few seconds more, and Soren stared back up at him in return. Somehow, Soren felt as if he was invisible now, and even if he was there and made of flesh and blood, it didn’t feel like it would have mattered. Nasir didn’t seem to care much for him, but he cared all too much at the same time. Soren didn’t know how he would put words to it. He had never been a poet, and he lacked the voice he needed to define just why this made him so uncomfortable. Nasir seemed to know something, but Soren couldn’t put a finger on what it was. He almost wondered if he wanted to know at all.

“I’m shocked we were able to get back on the water so quickly too,” Mist admitted. She turned to look at Ike and Soren, her eyes gleaming. She didn’t seem to notice the tension that had risen between Soren and Nasir at all, and in a strange way, Soren was glad for it. “You can’t just not tell us what happened while you were there on Goldoa! How were you able to get them to help us to keep moving?”

“We spoke with a young man by the name of Kurthnaga,” Ike explained. “He called on a few dragons, and they helped the ship to get back on the water. He was happy to help us, though… I’m afraid I don’t know much about him aside from his name.”

“Kurthnaga?” Elincia echoed, her eyes wide. Ike turned to look at her, and he nodded his confirmation. “Kurthnaga is the name of the prince of Goldoa. I heard as much from my father many years ago.”

Soren felt his jaw drop, and his eyes went wide enough to feel like they were going to pop out of his head. “The prince of Goldoa?” Only he and Ike would have the strange luck required to stumble into the ruler of a country known for its isolation from the rest of the world. Soren wished he knew how he felt about it, but he doubted he ever would. 

Elincia nodded. “I never imagined we would find him here of all places… I would expect him to be in the capital.”

“Though none of us really know how far away the capital is from the ledge we found ourselves on, huh?” Titania asked, forcing herself to smile even as something like worry rose in her eyes. “I’m glad we were able to get moving though. If we were stuck there for too long, then we would risk Daein catching up with us.”

That was right. They were all still in danger because of Daein. The army was going to keep pursuing them for as long as it took for them to catch up with the Crimean rebellion, and there was nothing any of them could do to deny it. Soren could only hope they managed to reach Begnion before it was too much of a concern. They would be fine. They had to be. 

Soren found himself looking back up at Nasir, and in something like cat and mouse, the man with blue hair looked away from him just before they could lock eyes. Soren knew he was doing it on purpose even if he couldn’t put a finger on exactly how he was so certain. The only thing that seemed to matter was getting as far away from Nasir as he could stand, and Soren’s feet moved before his mind had the fortitude to tell them to. “I… I’m going to head back to my room,” Soren declared. “I’ll see you all another time.”

Soren could feel the strange glances that had been cast in his direction as he made his hasty escape, but he couldn’t bring himself to care enough to look over his shoulder and see how they were looking at him specifically. He had received enough bizarre looks already, and he wasn’t about to make it any worse. Soren needed to go somewhere safe. He needed to hide away where he would not be seen or watched by anyone. Maybe that would make all of this easier to swallow. The chances were slim, but Soren had hoped on vague hopes like this before. He just wished he had the ability to remember if they had worked now.

Soren pressed his back against the door once he arrived in his and Ike’s room, and he let out a thin breath that seemed to make his entire body deflate. He was fine. Of course he was fine. He had nothing to worry about regarding Nasir or anyone else. It didn’t matter that Kurthnaga looked exactly like him. It didn’t matter that Soren felt like he knew too little about his own life all of a sudden. Nothing seemed to matter other than waiting out all of this and hiding away until he was certain he would be able to forget about it. 

“Soren?”

A knock at the door reminded Soren that he was not the only person in the world, and he glanced up when he heard Ike’s voice. Soren pulled himself away from the door, and he sat down on the bed at the center of the room. Ike walked in without the need for a cue, and his face fell into a frown at the sight of Soren’s discomfort. “Are you alright?” Ike asked. “It’s not like you to run off that way.”

Soren wanted to explain that the way Nasir had stared at him was bothering him. He wanted to find the strength to tell Ike that he didn’t want to be around anyone until he knew what he was supposed to be and where he fit in with the greater picture of the world. He didn’t want to know why he looked just like Kurthnaga, but at the same time, that felt like the only thing that would bring him any semblance of peace. It was too much and not enough, bitter opposites colliding and screaming against one another in a way that Soren’s silence could not bear. 

“I just… Need some time alone,” Soren said instead. He didn’t know why he couldn’t put a finger on why he was so uncomfortable, but he was too tired to bother with pulling the words together. He collapsed backward onto the covers of the bed, suddenly all too aware of the fact that he had fought an entire battle before the close encounter with Kurthnaga and the dragons of Goldoa. It felt like at least a week had passed in the span of the last few hours. Perhaps that was the price of getting lost in Kurthnaga’s crimson eyes. Everything was too much. Soren couldn’t stand any of it. 

“I see,” Ike hummed. He remained in the doorway for a few seconds more, the silence between them heavy and thick. “Do you want me to stay with you?”

Despite his request to be alone, Soren found himself nodding. Somehow, being alone never seemed to exclude Ike from his personal space. Even if he needed time to breathe, he was happy to share his fleeting moments with Ike. He was the best person for Soren to feel safe with, and Soren wasn’t going to deny him in a moment when he needed him so much more than usual. 

Ike sat down on the bed beside Soren before he laid across the bedspread too. For a moment, Soren almost convinced himself they were laying in the grass during a Daein summer, staring up at the sky as the clouds rolled by. They used to have so much time and so little to do with it, but none of it had mattered as long as they were together. The world was theirs, and they would claim it so long as they were together. 

Soren’s hand found its way into Ike’s in the silence, and Ike squeezed at it gently in return. Soren smiled despite the dread that had been clawing away at his insides ever since his encounter with Kurthnaga. He was terrified in more ways than he could describe, but he knew this was where he was meant to be. As long as he was by Ike’s side, he was fine. 

Soren dreamed of the dragons of Goldoa anyway, and he only found consolation again when he awoke in Ike’s embrace. 

Chapter Text

To say things had been strange since Goldoa felt like an understatement. 

Ever since the boat got stuck in Goldoa and then set sail again, Ike had been lost in thought about everything that the encounter with Kurthnaga could have meant. There was a lot he felt he didn’t understand, especially when it came to just how similar Kurthnaga was to Soren. The details were so perfect that Ike couldn’t help feeling like they had to be connected somehow. The link was on the tip of his tongue, but he couldn’t quite figure out what it was all meant to mean. 

Unfortunately, Ike had something else he had to think about, and that kept him from getting to the bottom of Kurthnaga and Soren’s link. Ever since the ship got back on the water, Gawain had been acting incredibly strangely. It reminded Ike a little bit of the way he had behaved when Volke stumbled into the group, but there was something different about it too. In hindsight, Ike would have expected Gawain to want to go into Goldoa proper with him and Soren, but Gawain had stayed on the ship. Ike hadn’t thought much of it at first, but the longer he considered it, the stranger he thought it was. 

Ike hadn’t been given much time to talk to Gawain though. Soren had been growing stressed ever since the group left Goldoa, and Ike was the best person to calm him down, so they had been spending more time together than ever before. That was certainly saying something given how much time they had shared back at the villa. Ike was happy to be with Soren until he started to feel better, but the thought of all that was happening admittedly filled him with a dread he couldn’t quite put a finger on. Ike needed to get to the bottom of all of this, and he wished he knew how he was meant to do that. 

On this particular afternoon, Soren had chosen to take a nap in the afternoon. That was rare for him, but he had no other choice given how restless he had been at night ever since Goldoa. Ike was taking this chance to go and look around the rest of the ship, hoping he would be able to find Gawain and press him about why he was acting so bizarrely all of a sudden. Ike didn’t know if he was going to get this chance again, and he was determined to take advantage of it. 

It didn’t take long for Ike to figure out where Gawain had gone. He was standing on the deck and looking out over the ocean with a heavy frown. Nearby, Ike saw Mist speaking with Jill and Lethe. Jill was the name of the strange wyvern rider who had arrived during the battle against the raven laguz of Kilvas. She was from Daein, but Mist had managed to convince her to cooperate with them instead of trying to turn Elincia in. Ike didn’t know how she had managed to do that, but he supposed it didn’t matter much either. Mist was doing her best to try and help Jill to get out of her horrible habits of treating laguz as lesser, and Ike wished her nothing but the best on it. He knew he would have lost his patience if he had to teach someone from square one why they needed to treat the laguz with dignity, especially with everything else he had to think about already. 

Ike shoved Jill as far out of his mind as he could as he approached Gawain, his frown still on his face. “Father?” Ike questioned. “Can we talk?”

Gawain looked down at Ike, his eyes growing dark before he chased away the shadows through force of will. “Ike,” Gawain greeted. “Is there something you need from me?”

“I wanted to talk to you about… About Goldoa,” Ike started. “You’ve been acting off ever since the ship set sail from Goldoa again. I was wondering if something had happened to prompt it.”

Gawain didn’t seem shocked by Ike’s question, but something dark swept through his eyes anyway. “That is…” He shook his head, cutting the thought off before it had the chance to truly thrive. “I know a lot about Goldoa from my time in Daein. I was worried about what would happen when we met with the dragons. I see now that I had no reason to fear, but…”

“But you’re worried about it anyway,” Ike pressed. “I can tell. You don’t have to hide it from any of us. If you want to talk about it, then we would be more than happy to listen. There’s nothing we can do to set it right if you won’t tell us what you’re thinking.”

A million tiny thoughts seemed to rage at Gawain’s mind, but he didn’t let any of them free. Instead, he simply shook his head, the motion so tiny that Ike had to strain to see it. “There is not much to say to begin with,” Gawain told him. “I have nothing to share about Goldoa. You have no reason to worry about any of it.”

“But that’s not true, is it?” Ike insisted. “I know you have something on your mind, and it only started to become clear after we left Goldoa. What happened for everything to change so much? I want to know.”

“Everything is fine, Ike,” Gawain insisted, something dark starting to seep into his tone. “You have nothing to worry about. We should be more concerned with the coming war. We will be arriving in Begnion shortly, and we have no time to think about anything else. In a matter of days, we will touch down on Begnion’s shores, and we have a lot to do when we arrive. That should be our main priority right now.”

Ike wanted to keep pushing the point for as long as he was able. He wanted to insist on getting to the bottom of this, but he already knew there wasn’t going to be much of a point in it. Gawain had decided he was finished talking, and Ike wouldn’t be able to draw the truth out of him unless he was absolutely ready to share it. Ike didn’t know how he was meant to express that he wanted to help beyond what he had already said. Everything was so close, but it was far off too, and Ike didn’t think there was a way for him to close the impossible distance that had risen between him and his father. 

The sudden lurch of the ship snapped Ike out of his thoughts, and he stumbled into the railing. Gawain’s hand came down on his shoulder to stabilize him. Ike glanced around, paranoia flourishing through his chest. The last time the ship had moved like that, it had been because the boat had gotten stuck on the rocks near Goldoa. Something else horrible must have happened to prompt this. Had they steered in the wrong direction? Had Nasir misjudged their trajectory on the way to Begnion? Would they be stuck again until some miracle came along to set them free? 

The truth made itself clear when Ike turned around fully and caught a glimpse of another massive boat that had come just a bit too close for comfort. There was more to it than that though; another ship was coming up nearby too. One of the ships flew no flags, and the other had the colors of Daein. Ike’s stomach sunk into his feet. He had known ever since they left Port Toha that Daein soldiers would try to pursue them on the sea as they made their way toward Begnion. He should have thought to remember that they would catch up with the Crimean rebellion eventually. Of course they would. 

“No time for any of this now,” Gawain told Ike sternly, and Ike felt his chance to speak with his father about all that had happened in Goldoa melt away between his fingertips. He wished he could have said he was shocked by the shift, but somehow, he was not. “We have to get ready for the next fight.”

Ike nodded, and he readied his blade. Its weight felt somewhat unfamiliar to him, not that he was shocked by that. The group hadn’t run into any troubles or battles over the course of the last few weeks on the sea. The only fight they had to endure was the one against the raven laguz, and that battle had been over relatively quickly. Since then, training had become something of an event, and it was one Ike rarely had the chance to embrace. The space on the ship was limited, and that meant Ike had to reserve space on the deck when he knew no one would be getting in his way. Sparring was rare, and while he was trying to do other things to keep his instincts ready for combat, he knew he was still at a disadvantage compared to how he had been before all of this. 

There was no time to think about it now though. Ike prepared himself for a fight, and the news of the coming fight spread quickly through the rest of the ship. He watched the boats nearby settle into place beside one another, and he realized there were people on the other ships trying to secure the decks together. The Daein soldiers were trying to board the two other ships, knowing one of them had to carry the princess of Crimea they were hoping to pursue. As for the second ship… Ike didn’t know what the story with the people on it was, and he didn’t know if he wanted to hear it. The details could wait until after he had managed to finish this fight. 

The unknown ship was rooted in between the Daein ship and the one the Crimean rebellion called home. There were a few soldiers on it, and much to Ike’s surprise, they didn’t wear the Daein colors. Instead, the soldiers had the colors of Begnion across their steel. He supposed that made sense; they were getting closer to Begnion with each passing second, and that meant it was just a matter of time before they arrived close enough to Begnion to run into its citizens on the waves. 

Even so, there was something else going on with the ship that Ike couldn’t quite put a finger on. He felt like the boat was much more elaborate than it had any right to be. Whoever was on the ship must have been rich, though Ike didn’t know any other details. That explained the soldiers, he supposed, but he would hear everything else once he was sure the fight was over. 

There was one soldier in particular that caught Ike by surprise. She didn’t seem to be prepared for the fight in the same way the others were. Her hair was a dark brown color, and she wore white and purple armor. She was staying near the back of the group fighting off the Daein attackers, and her bow hand was slightly shaky. She was clearly not an experienced fighter, and that meant she must have been one of the people the ship’s guard was trying to protect. 

Ike started to approach the Begnion ship, stepping carefully to ensure he didn’t lose his footing and tumble over the edge and into the water. There were boards secured between the boats so people could cross over between them, but Ike knew there must have been other ways the ships were connected too. There was no way the Daein soldiers would have felt so comfortable with crossing over to the Begnion ship without something else to root them to the spot. 

Ike was the first to arrive on the Begnion ship, and he approached the girl with dark hair. “Excuse me,” he started. “What’s going on here?”

The girl jolted at the sight of him, and she let out a heavy sigh of relief when she realized he was not wearing the colors of Daein. “I… I don’t know,” she admitted. “This ship is meant to carry a few important people from Begnion, but it was attacked by Daein forces, and…” She shook her head. “I don’t know why they’re here.”

“Because Daein waged war on Crimea, most likely,” Ike concluded, and the girl winced. She clearly knew this detail, but she didn’t want to admit that it was the reason she was being put in such danger now. “What’s going on? Do you know who is on the ship that they could want to get to?”

The girl shook her head. “I’m here to defend them though. You can count on me in a fight.” She adjusted her grip on her bow. “Assuming you’re here to fight, that is… But that is the reason you are here, yes?”

“Something along those lines,” Ike replied. He looked past the line of Begnion armor knights to the forces of Daein. The Begnion soldiers wouldn’t be able to stand the attacks they were taking for too much longer. Something was going to have to change, and Ike knew he would have to be the difference. “If you need our help, then we’ll give it.”

“Thank you so much,” the girl smiled, relief washing over her features like the waves battering at the sides of each of the three ships. “My name is Astrid. I am still new to fighting, but so long as you are willing to have me, I will stand by you. I promise.”

“Thank you,” Ike said, though he wasn’t entirely paying attention to her. He watched a Begnion soldier eject a Daein attacker from the ship into the nearby water, and he winced at the sound of the man slamming into the waves below. “Come on. We have to keep going.”

Astrid nodded, and she nocked an arrow before releasing it. The Daein soldier that was hit didn’t take too much damage from the blow, but Astrid refused to let that stop her, and she readied yet another attack. Ike pushed his way past the nearby Begnion soldier when he noticed the man was struggling to keep himself held together. Ike struck the Daein soldier, and after Astrid struck the man with one more arrow, he collapsed lifelessly to the ground. 

The rest of the Crimean resistance swarmed into action soon after Ike spoke with Astrid. All of them had their weapons at the ready, and they pushed toward the Begnion ship and then onto the Daein boat. Ike led the charge, and other strong soldiers like Titania, Gatrie, and Marcia followed his lead. Rolf, Oscar, and Boyd stayed behind to look after the door to the interior of Nasir’s ship. Elincia was hiding there, and they had to make sure she was kept safe until the battle came to an end. They hadn’t seen any Daein fliers yet, but it was just a matter of time before one of them showed themselves if they were there, and they had to be ready in case the attack came. 

The fight was a haze around Ike, and too much was happening in far too little space. He fought on for as long as he could, and he retreated when he was certain he had pushed himself to the limit. When Ike retreated, he noticed that Soren had joined the fight. He was standing near Gawain, and Ike could have sworn he saw Gawain’s posture change when he realized Soren was beside him. Gawain did his best to brush it off though, and a moment later, he was back to focusing on the rest of the battle. 

Ike was uncertain of how much time had gone by before he heard Rolf yell out, “watch out!” from somewhere behind him. Ike turned to see what Rolf was referring to, and he got his moment one brutal second later. More laguz were converging on the ships from the sky. By now, the boat should have been safely out of the territories of Phoenicis and Kilvas. The islands of the bird laguz were off to the south of Tellius, but no one had spotted any laguz on the skies in quite some time. Ike was clearly wrong for thinking that would be the end of it, and he hadn’t known it until it was too late. 

That wasn’t all though; the laguz were rushing toward the doors leading to the below decks on both the Crimean and Begnion vessels. Ike snarled under his breath and prepared himself to take the fight directly to the laguz if he had to. He couldn’t let them get inside and go after Elincia or whoever was being hidden away on the Begnion ship. With renewed vigor, he rushed off to strike down the laguz to end this as soon as possible. 

A small part of Ike’s mind wondered all the while though why there were laguz seemingly working together with Daein. This attack couldn’t have all been a matter of coincidence. Ike simply knew there had to be more to it than that… But if that was the case, then why were laguz working together with Daein’s army? Daein was perhaps the worst nation for laguz out of all of the beorc countries in Tellius, and Ike knew it well after growing up there. So long as Daein had not changed that drastically in his absence–and Ike knew it had not–then why were the laguz here and fighting on the side of Daein?

The rest of the battle would pass without Ike receiving the answers he sought. He saw the outline of a few laguz flying on the horizon, but they never entered the fight fully, instead simply staying back and waiting to see what would happen. Ike was glad when they retreated with the rest of the laguz at the end of the fight. Astrid had proven invaluable in defeating the raven laguz with her bow. Her accuracy was strong despite her inexperience in combat, and soon enough, she had proven herself more than worthy of standing with the rest of the group. 

Once the skies had completely cleared and the Daein ship had been shaken off once and for all, Ike finally let himself breathe again. He glanced around to survey the damages, and he found that a few of the raven laguz had been lucky enough to hit the ship during their assault. Even so, Ike knew the damage was minimal enough to be mended during the group’s time in Begnion. Hopefully, Nasir wouldn’t hold too much trouble against the group that had brought such chaos to his vessel. 

Speaking of ships, the three boats had all detached themselves from one another by now. The Daein boat had been left entirely unoccupied, and the soldiers had either hidden beneath the main deck or jumped overboard when they recognized their defeat. Ike couldn’t even begin to fathom why, but he supposed it didn’t matter as long as it ended the battle a bit sooner. The Begnion ship had split away from the Crimean boat as well, though Astrid had been left on the Crimean vessel. Ike wasn’t sure if that meant she would be staying with his army going forward, though he wouldn’t have complained if that was the choice she decided to make. He could use all the help he could get, and Astrid was a helpful pair of hands he wasn’t going to decline.

Ike made his way over to Soren’s side, and he found the prince rubbing at his eyes with the side of his hand. Soren was exhausted after being roused from his nap for this fight, and Ike could see it just by looking at him. However, Ike could also see that Soren wasn’t going to be able to get back to sleep again after all that had happened. It would be a miracle if any one of them was able to relax after the battle. As long as they were both awake though, Ike was happy to comfort Soren however he could, and he wrapped a gentle arm around the sage’s shoulders. Soren didn’t openly press himself against Ike’s chest, but the comfort was still wanted, and Ike could feel it in the way Soren relaxed at the touch. 

Ike barely had the time to feel relieved after the fight ended though. Moments later, he saw motion shifting across the skyline, and he squinted to try and make out the approaching figures. They didn’t look like raven laguz though. If anything, it seemed like pegasus riders atop their steeds. They were coming from the direction of the Begnion ship too, though Ike didn’t think he had seen any signs of pegasus riders aside from Marcia during the fight. 

The sight of the pegasus knights was enough to make Soren perk up beside Ike. “Hold on a moment… Those are the pegasus knights of Begnion,” Soren realized, his eyes widening. “Pegasus knights make up the Royal Guard set to guard the apostle.”

Ike felt his jaw drop, and his chest went tight. “Oh.” That certainly explained the other ship and what treasures were hiding beneath the deck there… But it also filled him with a thousand other questions he could only hope found an answer in the next few minutes. 

Two pegasus riders settled down on the ship’s deck, and Ike watched them both for a long, silent moment. One of them had turquoise hair tied into a ponytail off to the side of her neck. The other had brown hair cut close to her severe scowl. The first woman of the two approached Ike and Soren, something like worry in her eyes. “My apologies for dropping in unannounced,” she began. “We owe you our thanks for helping us to fend off the attack from the Daein soldiers.”

“It’s… It’s nothing,” Ike said, only remembering to speak when Soren nudged him in the side. “Who are you?”

“My name is Sigrun, and this is Tanith,” the woman with teal hair explained. She gestured to her companion, and Ike realized that Tanith had stepped away to interrogate a nearby Begnion soldier who had wound up on the Crimean ship when the boards between their boats were pulled up. Ike couldn’t quite make out what Tanith was saying, but he could tell by the rage splayed across her features that she was far from happy. Sigrun was close to center his attention back on her though, and she smiled distantly in his direction. “I’m sorry for asking this of you so suddenly, but has anyone… Unfamiliar boarded your ship over the course of the battle?”

“Strange?” Ike echoed, his eyes going wide. How was he supposed to answer a question like that? There had just been a fight against the forces of Daein along with some stray raven laguz. That was certainly strange, especially since some of them had boarded the Begnion and Crimean ships in order to continue the battle. Somehow though, Ike didn’t think that was what Sigrun was talking about. He wasn’t sure of how he was so confident in that conclusion, but he didn’t ignore it once the thought asserted itself in his mind. “Stranger than the attack that just happened?”

Sigrun looked like she wanted to laugh, but she cut herself off when Tanith approached the group. “Have you seen the apostle of Begnion?” Tanith questioned sternly. “We lost track of her during the fight.”

All of a sudden, everything made sense. The apostle was the person who had been on the Begnion ship, and that was the reason the royal guard was there. They were trying to find their liege after she went missing during the fray of the battle. Even so, Ike didn’t have an answer to their question, and he shook his head. “No, I haven’t seen her.” Ike didn’t know what the apostle looked like, but he would have assumed that he would recognize her if he saw her. How could he not recognize a woman like that? She was bound to be a woman of high standing, and Ike liked to think that even with his limited experience with the nobility outside of Daein, he would be able to spot the apostle if he saw her. 

Tanith let out a frustrated sigh. She was on the verge of snapping at Ike, but Sigrun cut her off by raising a polite hand. “Can you help us to find her?” Sigrun questioned gently. “I apologize for putting this on you so suddenly, but–”

“We’ll help,” Soren cut in, and Ike found himself staring at his friend in shock. “Come on, Ike. Let’s go search for her.”

Ike let Soren guide him away from Sigrun and Tanith, and they vanished into the lower decks of the ship. Ike was on the verge of asking why Soren had agreed to help them, but Soren answered before he could pose the inquiry. “If we can earn the favor of Begnion now, then that will make it much easier to negotiate for their aid when we arrive in Sienne,” Soren explained. “If we find the apostle, then that will help us with securing help to fight back against Ashnard.”

Ike nodded. “I see.” It was just like Soren to think about the practicality of a situation, though Ike didn’t know how Soren didn’t tire from always examining things through that lens. “Let’s see if we can find her then.”

Ike and Soren continued to search through the ship together, and Soren’s frown grew heavier as they looked. They were meant to be looking for a woman of notable high standing, but so far, they hadn’t found anyone who fit the description. Ike hadn’t seen anyone out of the ordinary in general, and he had to wonder if perhaps the apostle wasn’t on the ship at all… But Sigrun and Tanith wouldn’t have come to the Crimean vessel unless they were certain the apostle was there, right? They must have already searched through their own ship extensively. 

A flash of red caught Ike’s attention, and he gestured for Soren to come over and investigate it with him. The red was pressed in the space between a few crates in the cargo hold, and when Ike looked closer, he saw that the flash of color in question made up an elaborate, large cloak. A few strands of purple hair peered around the crimson, and Ike found himself frowning deeper as he approached the figure of the stowaway. 

For a moment, Ike wondered if perhaps he had finally found the apostle, but he was quickly proven wrong. There was no way this was the apostle; this was no woman. Instead, it was a young girl who couldn’t have been older than ten. She was practically drowning beneath the red cape around her shoulders. Ike wouldn’t have been shocked if she was the daughter of some noble or another given how elaborate her clothing was, but she was much too young to be the apostle. 

“Are you alright?” Ike asked, extending a hand down to the girl. 

The purple-haired girl pushed herself to her feet slowly, refusing to take his hand at first. However, she stopped when she put weight on her right ankle, and when Ike looked closer he found it slightly swollen. Protectiveness bloomed in Ike’s chest, and he extended an arm to wrap around her shoulders. “Here,” he offered. “Let me help you with–”

“Don’t touch me!” the girl shrieked, batting his hand away with surprising force given her small size. Ike found the slap stung much more than it had any right to, but he did his best to not let the surprise show on his face. “Who are you?”

“My name’s Ike,” Ike explained. “I’m here as one of the mercenaries defending the princess of Crimea.” That was a massive understatement and a poor explanation of his actual role in this, but it felt like the best he could offer. Beside him, Soren nodded, clearly happy with how little he had actually shared. “Who are you?”

The girl pressed her shoulders back in a show of determination that could have only come from someone with noble blood. “My name is Sanaki,” she declared. “I am here with–” Sanaki forgot about her bad ankle until she took a step forward onto it, and her words devolved into hissing from the weight against her injury. After a moment of consideration, Sanaki let out a strained breath and looked up at Ike. “Help me return to my ship.” 

Ike was on the verge of asking if it would kill her to tack on a ‘please’ to the end of that command, but he didn’t bother when he saw the fire in her eyes. “Alright.” He went back to hooking his arm around her shoulders, though it was hilariously awkward given how short she was compared to him. Ike hadn’t recognized just how tall he had grown over the course of his journey until he was forced to stand next to Sanaki. She was struggling to keep herself upright because of their different heights too, but Sanaki’s determination held firm, and she pressed onward regardless. 

“What’s a kid doing on the ship anyway?” Ike questioned of Sanaki. “You shouldn’t be wandering around on your own. Did you get separated from your parents during the fight?”

Sanaki’s face went bright red, almost matching the color of her cape. “Do you have any idea who you are speaking to?” she spat out. But before Ike had the chance to confirm that, no, he had no idea who she was, they arrived up on the main deck of the ship. Sigrun and Tanith, who had been commanding the search for the apostle, both went still at the sound of Sanaki’s voice. The recognition in their eyes was enough to tell Ike everything he needed to know. 

“Oh, Ashera,” Ike muttered. 

Soren sighed, pinching at the bridge of his nose. “Oh, Ashera indeed.”

Chapter Text

“Oh, Ashera” turned out to be perhaps the greatest understatement of Ike’s life. 

Ike did not know much about Begnion, all things considered. He knew about as much as Soren had been able to tell him over the years. Soren, apparently, didn’t know anywhere near enough about Begnion either, something that became all too clear when they found the apostle for the first time. Ike had imagined the head of Begnion’s government would be an older noblewoman, someone closer to his father’s age than his. Instead, the apostle was younger than even Mist, and she could barely walk around the massive cloak she wore. 

Apostle Sanaki of Begnion was ten years old, and Ike had to wonder how any of this was a good idea. He didn’t know much about the affairs of nobility or royalty, and even though he was Soren’s bodyguard, that remained true. Soren knew much more about politics than Ike, and not even Soren could seem to fathom why the apostle was a ten-year-old girl. Ike would have expected someone else to be in charge until she was old enough to take over the government, but apparently, he was wrong to ask for that much. The people of Begnion wanted Sanaki to be in charge, and so she was. 

Ike soon learned why Sanaki had been put in charge even when it seemed like such a poor idea on all fronts. Her parents had both died soon after her birth, and Sanaki was their only living successor. As such, Sanaki had been forced to step up and take over the position from a very young age. She was assisted in her rule through the help of the senators of Begnion, though Ike had to wonder if that help was really as pure as they tried to make it sound. 

Ike had heard many times that the senators of Begnion were less than stellar people. Soren had warned him about the corruption of the Begnion senate long before they arrived at the border of the country, and Ike was still worried about it. The few senators Ike had met up to this point were stiflingly obnoxious and beyond frustrating. They had a sense of self-importance that vastly outweighed their positions as aids to Sanaki. They were not in charge of the government, and they seemed actively upset that they were not the ones leading the country. Sanaki had the final say, and Ike could feel just how much all of the old men in the senate resented having to listen to the orders of a ten-year-old girl. 

When the group arrived in Begnion, Ike worked with Elincia to ask Sanaki for all the help she could offer. Sanaki could significantly change the course of the war against Daein so long as she was willing to give Elincia a few troops to back her attack on the Daein capital… But Sanaki didn’t agree to anything. It didn’t matter that the Crimean rebellion had helped to find her during the scuffle on the sea. She was not going to help them unless they were willing to do a few favors for her first. 

Ike found it beyond insulting to be dragged around as Sanaki’s errand boy, but he supposed he had little choice. Begnion was the only option any of them had for an alliance right now, and if Sanaki needed them to continue doing work for her, then Ike had little room to object. He certainly wanted to, but that wasn’t an option for him. 

If nothing else, Ike was glad to be back on solid ground for the first time in weeks. He wished he hadn’t been forced into combat again so soon after they arrived in Begnion, but no one seemed to give a fig for what Ike wanted, and that unfortunately included Sanaki. She sent them off on a mission in the fog, though she was hilariously vague about what it was they were supposed to be doing while they were there. Ike didn’t know what he was meant to be searching for at the center of the chaos, and he didn’t know if he would stand a chance of unraveling it at this rate. 

The army had been given something nice in return for helping Sanaki though. She wasn’t backing their war against Daein just yet, but she was giving them the chance to stay at the Begnion palace while they planned out their next moves. That meant they were the safest they had been since the conflict began. No one would dare to go after Elincia as long as she was being kept in Daein, and Ike appreciated the safety. 

There was an extra bonus too: the library of Sienne. Soren had jumped headfirst into all the research he could stand after they arrived, though he was pulled away from it much sooner than he would have liked on account of the mission distracting him. Soren was clearly agitated when they went out on their mission into the fog, and Ike stayed close to him to try and soothe his nerves. It felt like the least he could offer. 

Ike shuffled through the mist as slowly as he could so as to not lose sight of any of his allies. It was difficult to see anything beyond a few paces in any direction, and Ike didn’t want to be caught off guard by any of his allies. Soren was happy for the extra excuse to stay close to Ike, not that he really needed a motivation to remain with his friend. Soren was every bit as attached to Ike now as he had been after they first arrived on the ship from their excursion in Goldoa, and Ike wasn’t shocked by that at all. He would have been too if he had been as worried about the future as Ike after an encounter of that nature. 

“Hey, Soren,” Ike whispered, doing his best to split his attention between the fight to come and everything Soren was fighting through internally. “Are you alright?”

Soren’s grip on his tome tightened. “I want to get back to the library to continue my research.” 

Ike hummed with a nod. He knew exactly what Soren was hoping to research too: the dragons of Goldoa. Soren hadn’t stopped thinking about Kurthnaga since they saw each other, and Ike doubted there was much of anything anyone would be able to say to keep Soren from thinking about him now. This mission was ultimately just a distraction in Soren’s mind, and it was most certainly not a welcome one. Ike found the work upsetting, but Soren had far more crass words for it, and Ike was glad Soren had enough composure to not let his agitation show in front of the apostle. 

Before Ike had the chance to push too much harder at Soren’s anxiety, new figures appeared within the mist. It was clear that the battle had arrived whether he was ready for it or not, and Ike’s only option now was to prepare and hope it was much less painful than he feared. Surely everything would be fine as long as he simply stayed focused. Ike didn’t want to think of the alternative, so he simply did not let himself. 

Everything would be fine. He could handle this. They all could… Even if it felt like nothing but a bitter distraction from everything they should have been doing. 

~~~~~

For the most part, the fight in the mist was an uneventful one, and Ike couldn’t be asked to care much for the details. Marcia apparently found the brother she had been searching for all this time. His name was Makalov, and he had somehow found himself fighting on the other side of the battle. Marcia managed to convince him to join the army in the end, though Ike knew it had not been a pretty conversation. Marcia had to practically scream at him to get him to come along, and Ike could hear her shouts from all the way across the battlefield. He was glad he wasn’t on the receiving end of it to put it simply. 

The objective of the battle was fairly simple: Ike and the rest of his company was set to uncover some cargo being delivered by a band of brigands. That was all Ike was allowed to know apparently, and when he arrived at the end of the battlefield, he was met with crates covered up by large tarps. He was tempted to peel the fabric back and take a look under the surface, but there was nothing to be found as far as he could tell. The crates were wooden, but the surfaces were all heavy duty and thick, so even if Ike had wanted to see what they were hiding, he wouldn't have gotten far. Ike figured that was for the best. He wouldn’t be tempted to look at something he wasn’t supposed to as long as he couldn’t look through the wood in the first place. 

That did very little to help Ike’s curiosity though, and he found himself eyeing the cages all throughout the journey back to the apostle’s castle. He wanted to know what they were hiding, but he knew no one would be satisfied with him if he looked at something that was meant to be private. Soren shot Ike glances out of the corner of his eye to make sure Ike didn’t press the point further, but that did little to calm Ike’s concerns when he spoke with Sigrun and Tanith on the matter. Ike tried to push them into telling him what the boxes were hiding, but neither one of them said a word about it, instead simply saying that their mission was finished. It was hard to feel accomplished about anything when Ike barely knew what was going on, but he supposed it could have gone worse. 

After the mission ended, Ike and the rest of the army was given yet another chance to rest at the castle. Ike could only assume they would be needed for yet another errand soon enough though. Sanaki didn’t want to give them the help they needed just yet, and if she could drag them through all sorts of hoops before she approved their aid, then she was going to do it. Ike didn’t know how she could live with herself knowing she was putting so many people through so much, but he had given up on trying to understand it. 

If Ike had learned one thing so far, it was that he knew very little about the upper class and everything they could have wanted out of life. He had tried to unravel their secrets on many occasions, but he fell short and wound up with a headache whenever he pushed it too far. He had been spoiled by only ever knowing Soren and Almedha growing up, he supposed. The two of them were notably normal when compared to the senators of Begnion or the apostle who was meant to lead them. Ike was tired of everything all of them had done so far, and he was nowhere near close to finding the help he knew they needed in order to ensure Ashnard was stopped. 

Soren peeled away from Ike to go to the library to continue his investigation into Goldoa, and Ike had been more than happy to let him go. If Soren was having a good time, then Ike had no reason to complain. Now that they were off the ship, Ike could enjoy himself in other ways like training his sword arm. He spent nearly every minute he could in the training grounds of the Begnion castle. The rest of his allies seemed happy to follow his lead, and Elincia watched them all from afar with an almost sad look in her eyes. Ike had to wonder if perhaps Elincia had been in a similar situation to this one before. She seemed nostalgic for the sight of the mercenaries training, and Ike found himself thinking about approaching her to ask just what was on her mind. 

Ike shook his head and focused his attention back to his swordplay. He was going to need to get stronger if he was going to see all of this through. Ashnard wasn’t going to fall on his own, and Ike had to make sure he was at his best if he was going to win this battle. He could do that. They had made it that far, and Ike refused to lose his grip now. No matter what it took, he would see all of this through. He had to. 

Even if he was getting an increasingly worse feeling about what it all could have meant for him. 

~~~~~

Soren wished there was more to learn about Goldoa. 

He should have expected this. He had known for many years that the dragons of Goldoa were reclusive beings, and it was rare for them to venture beyond the boundaries of their homeland. The very few that did were not excited to open up about their culture and customs. The library in Sienne was one of the best in all of Tellius, but there was only so much it could share when there was very little information to gather in the first place. Soren could feel his patience running thin, and he could only hope he was able to find something helpful soon. 

Soren had thrown himself headfirst into any research he could do about the prince of dragons. Kurthnaga was still pressed against the back of his mind firmly, and Soren was beginning to think that was never going to change. There had to be something around there that would tell him just who Kurthnaga had referred to when he said the name Rajaion. Soren had to wonder if that was a coincidence given that it was the name of his father’s dragon mount, but he had no evidence to back anything up. The country of Goldoa was only mentioned in brief summaries, and the passages that did bring it up didn’t give him anything new that could help with the search. 

Soren let out a sigh and leaned his head back so he was staring up at the ceiling. He couldn’t grow disheartened just yet. He was getting closer to the truth. He had to be. If Soren didn’t focus his attention on investigating now, then he was going to end up regretting it. Another battle was just around the corner, he was sure, and he couldn’t give up his time when it was so precious. Sanaki was going to ask for his help with another fight in the near future, and Soren had to be ready to rush off and handle whatever ridiculous task she wanted help with this time. Until then, he needed to keep searching. He had to be getting close. 

Soren tilted his head forward once again and looked at the countless books spread around him. He had to start somewhere no matter how daunting his research seemed right now. He had made it this far, and he wasn’t going to lose his grip as long as there was something he could do to keep digging. He would be fine. He had to be. 

And so, Soren reached for another book and flipped it over before starting to read. 

~~~~~

Ike wasn’t surprised when he learned there was another mission waiting for him a few days later. If anything, he was shocked it had taken Sanaki so long to tell him to go out and do more of her dirty work. Ike’s nerves were practically on fire from all of the waiting, and Ike had grown tired of just standing around and waiting for the apostle to send him off to do something else. By the time the order finally came through, it was almost a relief to be able to leave all of this in the past in favor of something new.

However, the relief did not last for long when Ike ran into Soren again. He had been seeing the prince less and less lately since Soren decided to work on his research into Goldoa with practically every waking moment he had at his disposal. Ike stood with him sometimes just to make sure he was doing his bodyguard duties properly, but Soren always waved him away when it grew clear that he was becoming restless. No one in Begnion seemed to know who Soren was. None of the leaders of the country had recognized him, and if they had, then they were smart enough to keep that detail to themselves. Soren was as safe as he could have been, and Ike didn’t need to worry anywhere near as much about looking after him as he would have thought. 

When Ike ran into Soren just before their next battle–one set to take place in the desert–the first thing he noticed was how pale his friend had become. It looked as if Soren hadn’t been sleeping well for ages, though Ike couldn’t say he was shocked by that. When Soren got particularly caught up in his research, it wasn’t out of the question for him to stay up too late and neglect his needs. Ike had been forced to drag him back to his room many times over the years to make sure he was getting at least a few hours of sleep a night. 

But none of that seemed to compare to just how pale and anxious Soren looked now. Ike frowned down at him, finding himself struggling to summon the words he needed for the first time in ages. Ike liked to think of himself as a blunt person, and he was the type to get right to the heart of a situation the instant he was given the chance. Even so, none of that seemed to matter as he looked down at Soren now. He just felt like he was missing something, and he could only hope he brought it all into clarity soon. 

“Soren?” Ike asked softly when he was able to get a bit of time away from the prying eyes of the rest of the army. “Are you alright? You seem… Exhausted.”

Soren didn’t seem to realize Ike had fallen into pace beside him until after he spoke, and the mage snapped out of his trance all at once. He looked up at Ike, blinking rapidly in an attempt to bring his mind back into his body. After a few seconds more of thought, Soren nodded. “I… I’m fine,” he managed to say. “I’ve just had a lot on my mind lately. That’s all.”

Ike’s lips creased into a frown. “That certainly doesn’t seem like all it is. It’s not like you to be so… Out of it. If there’s something going on, then you can tell me. I’m not going to judge you if you need a break. If you don't want to participate in this fight, then–”

“You need my help,” Soren cut in, and Ike found himself wincing because he knew Soren was right. They were fighting in the desert, and the sands were the best possible place for mages to fight. As long as Soren and Ilyana were the only members of their company who could use magic, both of them were crucial to winning the battle at hand. Their foes would be much more experienced in a fight than them, and they had to take any advantage they could get their hands on. 

Ike looked down at Soren for a few seconds more before he let out a heavy sigh. “You would tell me if there was something wrong, right?” he found himself asking. “I don’t want you to feel like you have to bottle everything up if there’s something you want help with. Seriously. No matter what it is, you can talk to me.”

Soren refused to look Ike in the eyes, instead finding the grains of sand just in front of his shoes far more interesting. Ike wondered if Soren had ever been this evasive with him, but he already knew the answer was no. Ike and Soren had never been the type to keep secrets from each other, and the fact that Soren was starting now… It hit Ike far harder than it had any right to, and he struggled to keep himself from writhing uncomfortably on the spot. 

“Yes,” Soren finally managed to say, though Ike had to wonder if he really meant it. “I do know that.”

Before Ike had the chance to press it, Titania’s voice broke through the sands. “We have company!” she called out, and Ike winced. Right. They were out on a mission right now, and if they wanted to get Sanaki’s help, then they were going to have to fight through this battle as soon as possible. Ike would have time to talk to Soren after they finished with everything that needed to be addressed there. 

Ike nodded and readied his blade. He shot a glance at Soren out of the corner of his eye. “Be careful,” he instructed. “We have a lot to talk about once all of this is over.”

Soren nodded stiffly, and Ike wondered if Soren was planning on talking to him at all. “So we do.”

~~~~~

Ike never got the chance to follow up on that conversation with Soren. 

The fight was a chaotic one to put it simply. The Crimean forces had been put up against both bird and beast laguz, and they were much more experienced with using the desert sands to their advantage. Ike gave it his all though, and the rest of his army did too. They did their best to subdue the laguz nonlethally, and Ike found that they were willing to back down when they were defeated. Ike was glad to be able to walk away from the battle while taking as few lives as possible, though that only opened up more questions he needed answers to once this was all over. 

Soren did a remarkably poor job of staying focused during the fight, wandering off on his own to the northeastern corner of the desert. Ike wasn’t sure of what drew him in that direction, but it seemed all ended well. A man with green hair decided to join the Crimean forces because of Soren’s presence. Ike had a million and one questions racing through his mind when he caught a glimpse of the man, but he didn’t even get the chance to ask for a name before his attention was diverted by the commander of the laguz forces. Ike decided he would get to the bottom of it once this was over. He still had a fight to finish, and he couldn’t forget that now. 

After the defeat of the enemy commander, Ike and the rest of the army closed in to finish the job… But instead, they were met with the arrival of a young mage with red hair. His name was Tormod, and he identified the leader of the laguz forces–Muarim–as the father figure who was taking care of him. Muarim and Tormod were the heads of a laguz resistance within Begnion, and they fought in the recent battle because they were hoping to do something to change the tides in their favor. They had been in horrible circumstances for quite some time, and they thought Ike’s party was there to get rid of them. 

Ike was seeing red by the time the explanation had come to a conclusion. Sanaki was the one who had sent them on this mission. She hadn’t elaborated much on what she wanted out of it or what their goal was supposed to be, but as far as Ike was concerned, she didn’t have to. The truth was clear as could be. Sanaki had wanted him and the rest of his allies to clear out the laguz resistance, and there was only one reason Ike could think of that she would want to do that. She wanted to get rid of the laguz who were trying to fight back against slavery in Begnion. Why else would she be doing all of this?

Ike fumed throughout the entire journey back to the castle. He wanted to understand what Sanaki was trying to accomplish with all of this, and he was going to hear it from her lips. He doubted that her explanation was going to help him much with his sour mood or everything he knew she was putting his army through, but it was all he could think of to do now. Ike didn’t think it would soothe him in full, but he had to talk to her anyway. 

“Do you really think she could be doing all of this to hurt the laguz?” Mist asked softly as she fell into pace beside Ike. “I don’t know if I would say that the empress has been the nicest to us, but… I don’t know… I can’t help feeling like there’s something else to all of this.”

“She wanted us to go to the hideout of the laguz resistance and get rid of them. I think it’s fairly clear what she wanted to get out of this,” Ike muttered crossly. “I don’t know why she wanted to outsource it to us though. Surely she has enough of an army on her own to be able to just send them out to take care of it.”

“That’s the part that I can’t stop thinking about,” Titania agreed from Ike’s other side. “None of this makes any sense. If Empress Sanaki has all the power in the world, then she should be able to convince people who are loyal to her to take care of a problem like this. Instead, she made sure we were the ones who did it. If you ask me, something about this is strange.”

That was enough to give Ike pause, and he opened his mouth to counter the point before falling silent. Could Sanaki have had another plan in mind by doing all of this? If so, then Ike had no idea where he was even meant to start with unraveling it. Sanaki had acted for a reason. Every person in the world acted because they had something motivating them… So what was motivating Sanaki to insist on Ike’s army going after the laguz rebellion instead of her army?

Ike hadn’t come up with any answers by the time he arrived at his destination of the palace. If anything, the time spent thinking about his circumstances had only left him more confused, and anxiety rattled against his ribcage, waiting and anxious for a chance to burst free. Sanaki was up to something, but Ike didn’t know what it could have been. Did he even want to know if she was willing to do something like this? Surely the apostle would simply be able to resolve a matter like laguz slavery on her own. She had all the power in the world, and it would have been easy for her to get to the bottom of this if she wanted to.

But that wasn’t entirely true, was it? Ike had learned all too well recently that the Begnion senate was not to be trusted, and it seemed like almost all of Sanaki’s actions had to be censored through them first. If the senate was getting in the way, then they would be able to ensure her words did not reach the people they needed to. That would keep them in charge of the laguz slave trading ring, and Sanaki wouldn’t be able to do much if the people who were meant to be helping her were interfering with it instead. 

Regardless, Ike couldn’t say he liked the idea of being treated like a pawn. Even if Sanaki was trying to get some outside eyes on a situation out of her control, she could have done it in a way that wouldn’t weaponize Elincia’s desperation against her. The entire reason Ike was there with the rest of his company was because of the war between Daein and Crimea, but it didn’t feel like they were going to get much help with getting to the bottom of it at this rate. If Sanaki didn’t want to help them until they fulfilled her goals, then they could be stuck there for ages. They were safe as long as they were in Begnion, but Ike didn’t know if that was going to remain true for ages. 

Ike barely noticed Soren had appeared beside him until after the sage brushed a little too close to him. Ike glanced down and realized the dark and stormy expression on Soren’s face instantly. “Are you alright?” Ike asked softly, trying to temper his rage for the sake of this conversation. He could go back to cursing his circumstances and Sanaki’s strange behavior after he had checked on Soren. He hadn’t been given the chance to earlier, but he had at least a few minutes for it now. 

Soren blinked rapidly, snapping himself out of his thoughts to the best of his ability. It only halfway worked, but he didn’t let it show, instead nodding up at Ike. “I’m fine,” Soren said, though Ike couldn’t bring himself to believe it. “I’ve just got a lot on my mind.”

Ike was on the verge of asking about the strange man with green hair that Soren had found during the fight, but before he could, the doors to the castle of Begnion opened before him. He wouldn’t have the time to press the truth out of Soren, especially since it didn’t seem like Soren was in much of a mood to share it. Ike would stand no chance of getting to the bottom of it at the moment, so he would simply have to be patient. Ike let out a thin sigh and turned his attention to the path ahead. “We’ll talk later,” he vowed. 

Soren did not move for a long moment, but when he did, it was to let his eyes fall shut. “If you say so.”

Chapter Text

The truth came out in an instant… Or at the very least, the truth came out to the extent that Sanaki was willing to let it. 

Ike and Titania had been right to be suspicious of Sanaki and everything she was doing; she did have another plan at play, and she was pushing for it however she could. Her goal was to ensure Ike and the rest of his forces found out about the laguz slave trade. The simple ‘training’ missions and ‘errands’ she was sending them on all had a purpose, and her aim was to expose the slave trade and all of the Begnion senators that had been involved with upholding it.

That didn’t make the entire affair any less frustrating. In fact, Ike found himself struggling to fight off a headache even after Sanaki explained herself. She still wasn’t being entirely honest with them, and Ike could feel it. Perhaps it was because she was hesitant to trust those who she feared could have somehow ruined her plans. Ike wasn’t entirely sure, but he felt like there was a major piece of this puzzle he was missing out on somehow. 

And just like that, he was sent on yet another mission. By now, it was starting to feel less and less like Ike was a bodyguard for the prince of Daein and more like he was meant to act as an extension of the apostle of Begnion. He was getting tired of it, especially since there was still no guarantee that they would get the help they sought from the apostle. The senate didn’t seem to want to do much to help them out, but Sanaki… Surely she would see reason soon enough. That was what Ike was hoping for if nothing else. 

He could feel his head pounding in full as he arrived at the outskirts of the Tanas estate. Duke Oliver Tanas was said to be involved with some… Unsavory activity, and Sanaki wanted Ike and the rest of his comrades to find a way to get to the bottom of it. If Ike had to guess, he would have said that Oliver was involved with the laguz slave trade somehow, and he was likely a major player in it as well. Sanaki wouldn’t target him specifically unless she thought he was going to give up the information she was searching for. 

Ike wished he could have thought about the mission and turned his full attention to seeing Oliver stopped. Instead, he found himself constantly sneaking a glance at Soren out of the corner of his eye. Soren was every bit as quiet now as he had been when he started his research in Begnion, but there was something… Different about him these days. He had been unhealthily pale for far too long, and Ike was beginning to fear that Soren would never open up about what he had been through unless he was pressured into it. Ike knew that sometimes a bit of pushing was all it took for Soren to open up, but this… He couldn’t say for a reason why it bothered him in a way Soren’s past secrecy had not, but he was deeply unsettled by just about everything that happened with Soren these days. 

As Ike continued to approach the Tanas estate, Ike fell into pace beside Mist, and she looked up at him from her conversation with Jill. The stay in Begnion had been helping Jill to overcome the prejudice she held toward the laguz, and she was coming a long way in starting to treat them as the people they actually were. Ike was glad for that; it was nice to know they had managed to change at least one mind over the course of this nightmare. For now though, Ike had something else to discuss. 

“Do you think something is bothering Soren?” Ike asked without waiting for Mist to question him on why he had come to her. “I feel like there’s always something on his mind these days, but I don’t know what to do to get him to open up about it.”

That was enough to give Mist pause, and she pressed one hand to her chin. “I admittedly haven’t noticed. I guess there’s just been too much going on, and I don’t know Soren as well as you do. I don’t think anyone would be able to get to the bottom of his emotions quite the way you can.” After a moment more of silence, she tilted her head in Ike’s direction. “Have you tried talking to him about it?”

“I haven’t had time,” Ike sighed. “Between the recent battles and the research he’s been focused on in the capital, it feels like we haven’t been given a moment to ourselves in ages. Every spare moment he has is spent reading more books about Goldoa. What happened there really bothered him.”

“Then you should try to find a time to force him to talk to you about it,” Mist suggested. “I know he can’t resist you, so if you tell him that you’re really worried and want to be able to do something to help, then I’m sure he would talk to you. He’s not going to avoid you forever. I mean, the two of you have been friends since forever.”

Ike nodded along, but he couldn’t help the mounting sense of dread in his stomach. He still didn’t know the reason for the arrival of that green-haired man from the desert. All he knew was that the man–Stefan, or so Ike had heard through the grapevine–spent a lot of time with Soren when he could. Ike was going to have to get to the bottom of that mystery as well as the one currently plaguing Soren sooner or later, but he had no idea of where to start. Somehow, it felt like all of his words were insufficient. Maybe it was because he had left it for too long, or maybe there was something more to it. 

Deep down though, Ike knew this was the longest he and Soren had ever gone without being able to talk to each other extensively. They processed a lot of things about the world and the circumstances found within it through speaking with one another, and Ike could feel himself sorely missing it now. He wanted to be able to close the distance between them, but nothing like this had ever happened before. How could he know where to begin when he hadn’t ever thought he was going to have to do this in the first place?

“You know Soren better than anyone,” Mist reiterated. “If anyone is going to be able to get through to him, then it’s going to be you. I think you should stop thinking about it and just do it.” She nudged Ike in the side with her elbow. “Don’t think. Just do.”

Ike couldn’t help but feel that this was a subtle jab at his tendency to act before he thought, but he couldn’t bring himself to care. “You’re right,” he agreed. “I’ll try to talk to him as soon as I can.”

“It’ll have to wait until after this battle ends,” Mist said, and Ike realized they had arrived at the front entrance of the Tanas estate. “You’ve got a lord to talk to, don’t you?”

Ike let out a heavy sigh. He was not looking forward to this, especially given what he knew about the senate. They were prone to extravagance, and judging by the gaudy appearance of Lord Tanas’ estate, he was certain Oliver was going to be no different. Ike missed the days when Soren and Almedha were the only royals or nobles he knew. At least they had the decency to be something close to normal. 

Ike quickly learned that he was right to think Oliver was every bit as frustrating as the other members of the senate. Not only was he obnoxiously dramatic, but he was a liar too, something that became abundantly clear when Ike saw a flash of something white from one of the upper windows. Sanaki’s suspicions had been correct about there being laguz there, and now, Ike was going to have to finish this. 

The battle was a fairly quick one, but it didn’t feel like it was fast enough. Each time Ike felt like he was getting close to the end, something seemed to happen to push off the conclusion of the fight. Oliver’s reinforcements were many and strong, and even though Rolf was able to convince one of the enemy soldiers to turn against Oliver, it didn’t make as big of a difference as Ike would have liked. Every other soldier in the army was loyal to Oliver, and they were willing to do whatever they were told in order to defend the honor of their liege. Ike didn’t know how anyone could stand by knowing that someone they trusted was responsible for such horrible things, but he supposed he didn’t understand a lot of things about the Begnion aristocracy. At least they were consistent. 

By the time the fight ended, Ike was completely sick of everything he had been forced to do. The anxiety from not talking to Soren before the battle felt like it was swarming him now, and it took every ounce of restraint he had to not go and speak with his friend then and there to get all of this off his chest and out of his head. First though, Ike knew there was something else that needed to be done. He was going to have to investigate the laguz he had seen in one of the upper windows. Even if Ike was desperate to think about anything but the fight, he couldn’t do that just yet. 

Ike opened the door to the room carefully, and he was met with the sight of a man in white on the other side. The man was notably pale, and his hand was shaped strangely like at least a few bones had been broken. The most important detail about the man, however, was the fact that he was not beorc at all. Ike had never seen a heron laguz before, but he had heard that they were incredibly beautiful. He couldn’t deny those allegations in the slightest, and he found himself staring for a long moment at the heron laguz. Ike tried to talk him down, but in the end, it did little to help his circumstances. The laguz took off out the window before Ike could convince him to calm down, and Ike was left staring at the spot where he had last seen him. 

As the army shuffled out of Oliver’s mansion and back on the path leading to the castle, Ike felt like his head was so full it was about to burst. Something had happened with the Serenes Forest. That was the main detail he had learned during his mission that day, and he was determined to get to the bottom of it no matter what it took. Ike was going to ask Sanaki about it whenever he had the time. Surely she would be willing to fill in the gaps for him… Assuming she was really willing to do much of anything for him. Ike really couldn’t tell with her, and he was starting to give up on asking for any help from her. 

Ike kept an eye on Soren all throughout the first part of the journey back to the castle. He wanted to say something, but he didn’t know if he would be able to convince Soren to open up as long as there were so many people around. Soren was a secretive person by nature; he had to be given his status and bloodline. No one there knew the truth of who he was aside from Ike, Mist, and Gawain. It was natural that Soren would want to keep to himself as much as he could. 

But Ike had never been excluded from Soren’s inner circle before. He had always been there by his friend’s side, always listened whenever he needed someone to get his thoughts out to. Ike was going to find a way to settle back in that place in Soren’s heart. He hated the distance that had grown between them more than anything, and Ike would have done everything in the world if it would close that gap. 

Maybe it would have been wiser to wait until after Ike was able to dull the raging tempest in his mind by talking to Sanaki. Ike couldn’t bring himself to care much for patience though, and he walked beside Soren on the path back to the Begnion castle. “Soren,” Ike started, and he already knew his friend was going to struggle to meet his gaze when he spoke his name. “Can we talk?”

Sure enough, Soren found himself looking at some middle distance just over Ike’s shoulder instead of at his eyes. For reasons he could never hope to put to words, Ike felt sick at the mere sight, and he hoped that one day, he would be able to forget something like this had ever happened between them at all. “What is it?” Soren questioned, his voice strained like there were needles waiting around every corner. 

“I’m worried about you,” Ike burst out without any further thought or consideration to his words. “You haven’t been talking to any of us the way you should, and… I don’t know. I’ve just been feeling like you’re avoiding me. If there’s something on your mind, then you should share it. I’m not going to pressure you into it if you don’t want to talk about it, but… I want to be there for you. In order for me to do that though, you have to tell me what’s on your mind.”

That was enough to give Soren pause, and the mage stared at the path ahead as it led back in the direction of the Begnion castle. After a few seconds of thought, Soren sped up, gesturing for Ike to do the same so they could get a bit of distance between themselves and the rest of the army. “I found something,” Soren said softly. “When we first arrived in Sienne, I started to do a bit of research into something, and I… I haven’t known what to do with any of it.”

“What is it?” Ike questioned. “You don't have to keep it from me no matter how worried you are. You know that whatever it is, it won’t change the way I feel about you.”

Heat flushed Soren’s cheeks for a few seconds before he looked away to keep Ike from noticing it. Soren reacted much too late to fully keep Ike’s eyes at bay, but neither one of them dared to admit it aloud. “It’s about what happened in Goldoa,” Soren went on, choosing each word carefully. “I thought something about that exchange was strange, so I decided to dig into it.”

Ike nodded slowly. He had expected this to be the subject, but he didn’t know any of the details beyond that. “So what did you find?” Ike prompted, the suspense growing strong enough to suffocate him. If he didn’t hear the truth soon, he felt like his chest was going to collapse in on itself and leave him picking up the shards of whatever stability he had left. 

Soren hesitated for a split second, his gaze finding the horizon. When he caught a glimpse of the Begnion castle in the distance, he let out a heavy sigh. “We’ll talk after we speak with the apostle,” Soren told him. “We’ll have more privacy then anyway.”

Ike bit down on his bottom lip and worked the skin between his teeth. He had to wonder if this was really what Soren wanted to agree to or if he was hoping to hold this off for as long as he could until the pressure finally burst. Regardless, there was a reason he was saying it. Ike was going to have to talk to Sanaki as soon as possible. They would have more privacy if they spoke after hearing what Sanaki had to say about all they had uncovered over the course of the day. Ike was just going to have to wait a little bit longer. 

“Alright,” Ike finally relented. He looked to the path ahead before sneaking a glance down at Soren. “You promise you’ll talk to me about this?”

Soren looked up at Ike for a long moment, and something intimate and beautiful seemed to spark in the space between them. Ike had missed it, and he knew he would treasure it for the rest of his life. “I promise.”

~~~~~

Ike heard a lot more than he had expected from Sanaki. 

She shared with him the story of the Serenes Forest and the massacre that had taken place there. All of a sudden, the strange behavior of the heron laguz at Oliver’s estate made a lot of sense. He resented humanity because it had been humanity that took away his home and family. There was a reason Ike had heard so little about heron laguz. There were barely any left, and the few survivors who managed to escape the burning forest were forced to hide and wait until they forgot about all the pain they had been forced to endure. 

Ike liked to think people could be kind. He wouldn’t have made it this far if the world was brutal and had no kindness to offer… But he found himself losing faith in grace when he heard the story of the Serenes massacre. The herons of Serenes were peaceful, and they had never hurt anyone. The world did not believe their innocence though. It didn’t matter how little sense it made that people thought the herons would hurt the previous apostle. The world turned on them in an instant and destroyed them in but a single night of chaos and bloodshed. 

And now, Ike’s next mission was to go to the forest and see what he could find within it. To say he was unsettled by the thought was a grave understatement, but he knew it had to be done. The heron laguz who had fled from Oliver’s mansion was going to need help, and even if he didn’t want it, Ike was going to be there to offer it. No one deserved to be doomed to a life of slavery, and if the Begnion senate wasn’t going to save the laguz, then Ike would do what he could to help them instead. 

The expedition into the Serenes forest promised to be a long one. Oliver had ventured deep into the forest in search of another heron laguz he could claim as his own, and he wouldn’t give up his chance for anything. Ike didn’t know how Oliver could sleep at night knowing the pain he was visiting on others, but he supposed he would never understand. Oliver was determined to hurt and kill whoever he had to as long as it would bring him the luxury he sought. The laguz were not human to him. Instead, they were simply inconveniences, and he would continue to chase them for as long as he could. 

Since the fight was going to be long, Ike had been given a full day to prepare before he had to set out again. Ike couldn’t say he was fond of being dragged all over Begnion on these missions, but this one was urgent, and he was happy to do it as long as he thought he would be able to help at least one person. At least he was being warned before the mission this time. He couldn’t say the same for the other summons he had received from Sanaki. 

The brief break served a second purpose though: it was the perfect chance for Ike to speak with Soren at long last. This was the last chance they were going to get until after they managed to defeat Oliver and rescue the heron laguz in the forests of Serenes, and Ike intended to take the opportunity and run with it. Soren needed him whether he wanted to admit it or not, and Ike would be there by his side to help him however he could. 

Ike and Soren met one another in their room within the Begnion castle. Ike wondered how many times they had been able to enjoy each other’s company since their missions in Begnion began. It seemed like their different circumstances drove them apart during their waking hours and only brought them together when they were in need of sleep. Ike was glad to have finally been given the time to speak with Soren. He had missed it more than he could ever hope to words, and he needed this in ways he could never hope to put to words. 

“Alright,” Soren started as he checked the door to make sure it was locked. There was a chance someone would come there and try to get Ike’s attention in preparation for the battle to come, but Soren couldn’t bring himself to care. Right now, he needed Ike, and he had been too selfless over the last few weeks. He needed time to speak with his closest friend, and the rest of the world could wait until he was finished if it wanted to pull him away. 

“So what’s going on?” Ike questioned, unable to ease his bluntness. He didn’t see much of a point. He wanted to know what was bothering Soren, and there was only one way to do that. “Why have you been so anxious lately?”

Soren took a long moment to measure his breaths as he took them, and the air between him and Ike was heavy and thick. Soren sighed slowly and crossed the room to sit beside Ike. “It’s about my mother,” he started. “Ever since we left Goldoa, I’ve been thinking about what Kurthnaga said to me. I have to wonder if… If maybe my mother could be from Goldoa.”

Ike’s eyes widened. “You mean…”

Soren nodded. “I thought she had to be a beast laguz when your father charted our course for Gallia. When a laguz has a child with a beorc, they lose their laguz traits. I assumed my mother’s ears and tail faded away when that happened and that she had to be a cat of some kind. Now though… I’m wondering if maybe she could have been a dragon all along. It would certainly explain why she looks so much like Kurthnaga, wouldn’t it? I’m not the only one who looks a lot like him. I get my hair and eyes from my mother, so if Kurthnaga looks like me…”

“Then he would look like your mother too,” Ike finished for him. Ike’s mind called upon the image of Kurthnaga, and when he thought of the dragon prince next to Almedha, he found the similarities innumerable. Kurthnaga and Almedha both had the same dark green hair that bordered on black. Their eyes were the same piercing crimson, and their skin was a warm brown even when Soren did not share that piece of resemblance. Ike had been shocked by Kurthnaga looking just like Soren when he met the dragon prince for the first time, but somehow, the comparison to Almedha was even more accurate. 

“It makes a lot of sense, doesn’t it?” Soren pressed, realizing that Ike was going through the same train of thought that he was. “They look so similar, and there’s no way that doesn’t mean something. Besides, you saw the way Kurthnaga was looking at me. It felt like he knew something about me that I don’t even know, and… It really bothers me. I know there has to be a reason for it, and I wish I had been able to ask him about it when we were there in Goldoa. Now, I don’t know if we’re ever going to be able to go back there, but… I really feel like there’s a chance my mother could be a dragon laguz.”

“But she wouldn’t just be a dragon laguz if your theory was correct,” Ike pointed out. “She doesn’t just look like a dragon laguz. She looks like the prince of Goldoa specifically. That would mean that the two of them are related somehow, wouldn’t it?”

“That’s what I’ve been thinking too,” Soren nodded. “I was trying to do as much research as I could into Goldoa, its history, and the members of the royal family. I was hoping I would find at least something in the library, but so far, I haven’t found anything that would prove my mother is related to the prince. I feel like I’m so close to getting my hands on the evidence I need, but it’s just barely out of my reach. All I can say for sure is that there’s more than meets the eye to the reason I look like Kurthnaga, and I have to figure out what all of it means.”

Ike nodded slowly, pressing one hand to his chin in thought. He had to admit that Soren’s theory made sense. Kurthnaga looked at Soren like he recognized him from somewhere, and it was easy enough to guess where the connection had come from just by looking at their appearances. Still, the thought that Almedha could have been a dragon laguz… It struck Ike deeply in a way he couldn’t quite put a finger on. He had known Almedha for years, and while he was aware that she was a laguz, the exact details had always eluded him because of how naturally secretive she was. Ike would have expected to see a sign or two of Almedha being a dragon laguz over the years, but he knew of nothing. Then again, laguz lost the ability to transform after they gave birth to a child with a beorc. Perhaps all of Almedha’s laguz features had melted away when Soren was born. It would explain any gaps in the story, at least on a surface level. 

“Goldoa has always been really isolated though, right?” Ike asked next. “For the most part, the dragons there never leave the country. I have to wonder what would prompt your mother to want to leave her home behind, especially if she had other family members there to rely on.”

“I’m not entirely sure about that part,” Soren admitted. “But I learned through my research that sometimes, dragon laguz will leave Goldoa. It’s fairly rare, but it does happen sometimes when dragons want to see what the rest of the world has to offer. My mother could have decided to explore the world for herself one day, and that would justify why we know her outside of Goldoa and in Daein instead.”

“That would make sense,” Ike nodded. “Though I don’t know how she found her way to Ashnard of all people.”

“I don’t know either, and quite frankly, I don’t want to think about it either,” Soren said. “I can say for sure though that Kurthnaga saw something in me when we met. I look just like him, but he’s a little shorter with darker skin. I’ve always been told that I look just like my mother but with my father’s paler skin. As long as Kurthnaga looks just like my mother, I feel like there’s a lot of evidence to back up the idea that my mother could be a dragon laguz…”

“But she wouldn’t just be a dragon laguz, would she?” Ike asked, his stomach twisting into knots. If your theory turned out to be true, then she would be a dragon laguz royal specifically.”

“That’s the part that has me uncertain, I will admit,” Soren told him. “I can’t tell if I’m reading too much into this, but if I am, then… There wouldn’t be as much evidence for this as there is. The royalty of Goldoa consists of black dragon laguz, and they are the only family of black dragons in the world. If Kurthnaga is a royal of Goldoa, and by extension, a black dragon laguz, then that means my mother would have to be as well.”

Suddenly, Ike had the overwhelming need to sit down. Processing all of this was too much for him right now. He hadn’t known what to expect when he first entered this conversation with Soren, but this… It was well beyond what he had thought would happen, and Ike had no idea how he was meant to handle any of it. He could certainly understand now why Soren had grown so quiet over the last few weeks. If it had been his heritage called into question, Ike probably would have had a crisis over it too. 

“I can see why you’ve had a lot on your mind lately,” Ike found himself saying. “I wouldn’t know how to handle all of this if I had been in your position either… Just be careful to not push yourself too hard, alright?”

“I’m doing my best,” Soren assured him. “The best way to get to the bottom of all of this is to simply talk to my mother… But that won’t be possible until after the war ends. We’re just going to have to keep fighting for as long as possible.”

Ike sighed. “Once we’re able to focus on fighting Ashnard again, that is…”

“We’ll get there,” Soren vowed, and Ike couldn’t tell if he was trying to reassure himself or Ike more. “We have to. We can focus on the current fight and then see what will come next. The apostle is bound to give us her help after all of this.”

Ike nodded, and the tension in his chest intensified to the point that it felt like it was going to suffocate him. “I hope you’re right,” he murmured, suddenly feeling like the world was too much for him to bear looking at. “I really do.”

Chapter Text

If Ike had to describe the battle in Serenes Forest in a single word, he would have said long. 

That wasn’t the only word he would have used though. Monotonous also came to mind. Frustrating was another. Ike hadn’t known what to expect from the battle to pursue Oliver and rescue Reyson, the prince of the herons, from his clutches. Ike knew that he hadn’t thought the battle would be a massive slog marked by multiple waves of reinforcements and even more irritations from Oliver as he fled through the trees. The Serenes Forest was a tiny dot on a grander map of Tellius, but it was massive when Ike was there, and it wasn’t getting smaller any time soon. He was convinced that by the time the fight was over, he had combed through just about every corner of the forest and seen all the gnarled, burned trees there were to see. 

Ike knew why he was getting so agitated by having to be there. He could still feel the grief and pain in the air from the night the Serenes Forest burned all those years ago. He wasn’t the only one; all of his forces seemed to feel the sting. The instant they were given the chance to breathe in between major battles against Oliver’s forces, the darkness of what they were doing seemed to close in around them. Oliver was there to get his hands on the last living heron so he could make him into a slave. Oliver didn’t care at all for the ashes he was having to walk through, and he didn’t give a second thought to the corpses he could have been stomping over in his pursuit of Reyson. Nothing seemed to matter as long as he was able to get the prince he was searching for once all of this was over. 

Ike had come to know one thing well over the course of the war: people were a lot crueler than they wanted to let others believe. The fact that Daein had invaded Crimea and destroyed its royal line in a matter of minutes was proof. Countless Crimeans had been left as refugees, struggling beneath the weight of what Ashnard did, and the rest of the world didn’t seem to care. Just like in Toha, no one minded what was going on as long as it was not on their doorstep. The apathy hung even heavier in the air in Serenes, and Ike had the deep, unsettling feeling that he was not meant to be there. None of them were. They should have never had a reason to come to Serenes in the first place, but as long as they had to, they would need to push through the uncertainty. 

Ike couldn’t stop thinking about everything that must have led to the fall of Serenes. The herons were peaceful, and none of them would have ever thought to hurt the apostle of Begnion… But no one seemed to care about that. As long as they had someone to blame, they were fine with pinning their hatred on anyone. The herons were simply a convenient target, and all of them had paid in blood for it. The herons could barely throw a punch without getting hurt according to Soren, and Ike could only assume that was what had happened to Reyson back at Oliver’s estate. The people of Begnion should have known there was more to it than met the eye, but because they had not thought to investigate what they were hearing in more detail… 

Ike felt like the ghosts of the herons were watching his every move. He did not think of himself as being particularly in touch with the forces of order as the laguz called them. Lethe and Mordecai had mentioned before they arrived in the Serenes Forest that there were two dominant forces in Tellius: chaos and order. The laguz were in touch with both in a way that most beorc were not. Even so, the worst of places could bring out the chaos of the past, and the ghosts of Serenes carried far more chaos than anyone else in all of Tellius. It made sense, but Ike still struggled to swallow back the anxiety that came with it all. 

As the fight wore on, all of them were getting tired. The endless black and gray of the burned trees only grew harder to push through when the sun vanished on the horizon. There wasn’t even daylight anymore, and it was a miracle any of them were able to push on through the darkness. The moon could only offer so much light to the battlefield, and Ike found his eyes drooping from exhaustion and desperation by the time he neared the end of the fight. He would have done anything to close his eyes and then wake up far from Serenes and the pain that had been forced upon its people. He doubted he was the only one. He was sure the rest of his army felt the same way. 

Ike was snapped wide awake though when he saw something bright among the darkness. The smear of white and pale yellow was similar to Reyson, but there was something different about the figure at the same time… And Ike understood why the instant he got closer. He had been told there was only one survivor of the Serenes massacre. Reyson had gotten out of the forest in time to keep his life, but he was the only one… 

But if that was the case, then why was there a girl with the same golden hair and white wings standing before him?

Ike didn’t get the chance to question the point before the girl collapsed, and Ike rushed forward to ease her to the ground. She was light as air, and Ike barely felt her weight when he began to test it on his back. He couldn’t simply leave her there, unconscious and unguarded, as long as Oliver was in the area. Somehow, Ike doubted Oliver would care much if he got his hands on the heron prince or… Princess? The resemblance between the girl and Reyson was uncanny, and Ike could only assume the two of them were related somehow. He could ask about it another time, he supposed. Hopefully, Reyson would be willing to hear him out once the battle was over and they had a bit more time to breathe. 

The moment to breathe did not arrive quickly though, and when reinforcements from the Tanas estate poured into the area, Ike had no choice but to fall back and let the rest of his allies handle it. He couldn’t simply leave the girl on her own when there were so many dangerous people around, so the fighting would have to fall to the others. The girl was light, and Ike could fight well even with her on his back, but his motions were inaccurate when he had to accommodate for the awkward shape of her figure pressed against his. The rest of the army was able to pick up the slack he left behind by having to retreat, and Ike was glad for it, but he couldn’t help feeling restless and anxious at not being able to do much more to help. 

As the third encounter of the night drew to an end, Ike found himself wondering just where Oliver was able to get his hands on so many soldiers. It seemed like he had more fighters on his side for this one rush to claim a heron laguz than Daein had sent after Elincia in ages. Ike would have been impressed by it if he wasn’t so overwhelmingly frustrated with everything Oliver was putting them through. Killing Oliver at the end of this mess of a battle was going to be incredibly nice. Ike didn’t think of himself as bloodthirsty, but Oliver changed his tune completely, and he thought it was for the best. If anyone he knew deserved to die for everything they had done, it was Duke Oliver of Tanas. 

And eventually, Ike managed to see to his end. It was hardly easy, and he had to fight for a lot longer than he was comfortable in order to make it there, but Oliver fell soon enough. On top of that, the hawks of Phoenicis appeared to help make the fight a little bit easier. Tibarn would have torn the entire Tanas army to pieces if he was given the chance, but he backed off as soon as Oliver went down. Reyson stuck close to his side for the sake of safety, though Ike could tell he wanted to be with his sister more than anything. 

Speaking of Reyson’s sister, her name was Leanne. She had seemingly been laid to rest during the fall of the Serenes Forest many years prior. She survived because she had been forced to sleep through the horrors that unfolded around her, and her slumber was only disturbed when the army arrived in the forest. Reyson was not the only heron laguz alive; Leanne was the second, and together, they were at peace at last. 

Ike watched with a smile on his face as Reyson and Leanne sang to return the forest to life. Mist was just beside him, her face gleaming with an excitement unlike anything else… But there was something more to it than that. Something about the song Reyson and Leanne sang together felt familiar to Ike. He didn’t know how to put a finger on it, but he felt like he had heard some variation of that song before. It wasn’t the exact same one, and he was strangely sure of that, but he knew he had heard it somewhere else. 

Mist seemed to feel the same way, but she did her best to push the thought away in favor of dancing and laughing in the newfound light of the Serenes Forest. The sun was finally pushing its way over the horizon, bringing an end to the seemingly eternal night. Now that Oliver was gone and the forest had been brought back to life, all in Serenes was peaceful just as it always should have been. Ike was glad there was something joyful to return to at the end of it all. He would have hated to think that the forest was doomed to remain in perfect misery for the rest of time. 

The exhaustion of the night was both very present and not a concern at all as Ike made his way back toward Sienne. He hadn’t slept at all overnight, and Ike knew he should have been tired, but something about him was simply at peace. Before he had the chance to question it, he felt a hand slip into his own. Ike looked down with a start and found that Soren had taken his fingers in his own. Soren remained there by Ike’s side throughout the rest of the journey, not saying anything but not needing to either. As long as they were together, they knew everything they could have wanted to ask one another. Their relationship went well beyond the need for words, and even if no one else understood it, Ike was safe in the knowledge that he knew he did. No one else needed to know what was going on between him and Soren aside from them. No one else was as important as they were to each other. 

Perhaps it was Soren’s presence that brought Ike peace all throughout his journey to Sienne. He couldn’t say for sure. All he knew was that he was glad to be back in his old routine with Soren again. They were fighting perfectly well again, making up for every weakness the other had. They had lost their rhythm when Soren began to pull away from Ike, but they were back to it once again. Perhaps the song of the herons had healed any distance that had grown between them too. Ike couldn’t say for sure, but he knew that he was going to treasure Soren’s fingertips in his own for as long as he was able. 

Sanaki was waiting by the time the army arrived back at the castle in Sienne. Ike was certain she had slept in between his last appearance there and his return now. She was simply too sprightly not to have rested. Sanaki wasn’t alone though, and that was perhaps the greater shock. Elincia was by her side, and the two were speaking softly with one another. Elincia had been finally relaxing since the group arrived in Begnion, but Ike could tell something about it was stilted. Elincia didn’t know if it was right to rest as long as her people in Crimea were suffering without her. The army’s time in Begnion had essentially put their business of defeating Ashnard on hold, and Elincia had no idea how she was meant to handle any of it. 

Elincia’s face lightened when she saw Ike and the rest of his close allies arriving around him. Ike found himself returning the favor even through his exhaustion. Despite it all, the long night had ended, and day had arrived at last. Something felt different about this morning too, and the sensation only grew stronger when Ike turned to look at Sanaki. Somehow, he already knew this was going to be his last mission for her. He had finally earned her favor, and in doing so, he had gotten Elincia on his side. 

And sure enough, Ike was right. Even though it took a bit of pushing, he was able to win just what he had sought all that time ago when he first set his sights on Begnion. Sanaki was going to give him and Elincia the help they needed to defeat Ashnard. Begnion was allying itself with Crimea, and the Begnion army would fall under Elincia’s command… Or more accurately, Ike’s command. 

Ike didn’t know how he had found himself in a position like this. When he first set off on this journey, it had been with Soren, Mist, and Gawain first and foremost. He had helped Elincia as a result of that, of course, but it hadn’t been for her, at least not from the beginning. Ike had fallen into the leadership position naturally. Gawain and Titania would have been better choices, and yet, it was Ike who was told to kneel before Elincia and be dubbed a lord. Ike found himself swallowing back every doubt he had ever had as he sunk to one knee. The proud smiles of his friends and family surrounded him, but Ike couldn’t bring himself to look up at any of them or Elincia. 

Ike hadn’t realized just how overpowering his guilt had the power to be until after it felt like it was going to swallow him whole. Elincia tapped a blade against either one of his shoulders, giving him the position of lord she had always believed he deserved… But Ike didn’t feel like he deserved it. Elincia didn’t know that he had been keeping secrets from her since the beginning. Ike wasn’t just a refugee from Daein who had been forced on the road because of the war. If not for Ashnard’s attack, Ike would have still been working as a retainer to the crown. In many ways, that position had not been yielded; he had simply been forced to hide it. 

And yet, there Ike was, being named the leader of the army of Crimea so it could fight to reclaim itself from the clutches of Daein’s tyranny. It didn’t even feel real, and it didn’t make much sense in Ike’s mind either. Elincia trusted him enough to want him to lead the army to victory so she would be able to reclaim her home. Ike was honored, but at the same time… She didn’t know who he truly was. She had no way of knowing because Ike had never given himself the chance to tell her. How was he going to do something like that? Elincia didn’t need to know that she had put her faith in someone from the same country as the man who murdered her family. 

But she did need to know that. Ike had been given a reason to not think about it when he and the rest of the army had to concentrate on the missions Sanaki gave them in Begnion, but now… He had no more excuses. None of them did. He was going to have to be honest sooner or later, and Ike had no idea what he was meant to do about any of it. How could he break news like that to Elincia? He didn’t know how she would react, but he knew she had a right to know. 

Ike returned to his room that night with a heavy sigh on his lips and an even heavier heart. Soren had been watching him carefully ever since he was dubbed a lord of Crimea, but Ike couldn’t seem to relax. Having Soren there should have helped him to feel better, but nothing was working. Ike knew he wouldn’t be able to alleviate the pressure on his shoulders until after he was honest with Elincia, Titania, and the other heads of the army. They deserved to know who they were working with. The truth was going to come out one way or another. Ike wanted to have control over when it came to light though. 

“I would expect you to be a bit happier given what we were able to win today,” Soren remarked with a frown. “The apostle has agreed to give us all the help we need to ensure Ashnard is slain. We should be able to finish the war soon enough. That’s a great sign.”

“But I was given the opportunity because Elincia named me as a lord of Crimea,” Ike countered as soon as the door was closed in his wake. “I’m not from Crimea. I can’t keep this up forever. None of us can.”

Soren’s expression sobered, and Ike could see that Soren had been expecting this conversation from the instant Elincia gave him his new position. It was simply a matter of when Ike decided to bring it up, and the moment had come much sooner than Soren knew how to prepare for. “You’re afraid she’s going to find out.”

“I think we’re going to have to be the ones to tell her,” Ike said with a shake of his head. “I understood why we had to keep this secret at the beginning, but now… I didn’t think it was going to get this far. I thought she would want Titania to take over this position for her. Titania was the one who helped her all that time ago. What have I done?”

“You rose to the leadership position naturally. I would say that Titania gladly gave it to you when she realized just how capable you were,” Soren replied. “You’ve been handling this admirably well. I don’t think the princess could ask for a better leader of her army.” He didn’t say aloud that he couldn’t ask for a better commander either. They both already knew it, and Ike didn’t want to bring it up in case it somehow led to something crumbling beneath his fingertips. 

“But this… This isn’t right. She doesn’t know the truth, and at this rate, she’s never going to find out either… At least not from us,” Ike sighed. “It’s just a matter of time before the truth comes out, and I would rather it come from us instead of the enemy forces. Elincia deserves that honesty.”

Soren remained silent for a long moment, his gaze finding the window at the far side of the room. “I didn’t think it would go this far either,” Soren admitted. “I’m proud of you for being named as the commander of the army, but I know this is far beyond what any of us could have seen coming when we first left Daein behind.”

“Elincia deserves the truth, and I want to tell her who we are as soon as possible, but… I don’t know where to start without destroying everything we’ve been fighting toward,” Ike muttered. He didn’t think Elincia was going to outright hate him for lying to her… But the chance was still there. He didn’t have a frame of reference for something like this. Elincia was a kind young woman, but she had never been put in a situation to expect a betrayal on this scale. Ike didn’t know if he would ever be ready to tell her even though he knew he was going to have to. Elincia deserved the truth after all she had done to help him. She may not have seen it as her aiding his own goals, but Ike knew the truth for what it was. He had to tell Elincia one of these days even if he had no idea how to go about it. 

“I understand why you feel this way, but… I don’t know how to go about it,” Soren admitted. “If we tell her, then we could put everything we have worked toward in jeopardy. We had to fight through countless battles to make it this far, and if we say something now, then we could lose all of that progress.”

“But if we don’t say something, then we could end up losing all of that progress anyway,” Ike finished for him, and Soren offered him a stiff nod in response. “If the truth comes out at a moment when we’re not ready for it, then it could lead to people hating us. They’re not going to want to trust us with something as important as the resurrection of Crimea. Elincia may want nothing to do with us, and I wouldn’t even blame her if she said she wanted us gone.”

“She needs us in order to see her goals to life… But I suppose she has more resources now than ever before,” Soren hummed. “And I can’t imagine she would be eager to turn to the son of the man who destroyed her life and murdered her parents.”

Ike nodded around the knot that had risen at the back of his throat. The longer he thought about this, the worse he felt. He didn’t know what he was meant to do to set this right… Probably because there wasn’t a solution to speak of at all. Ike could hope all he wanted that there was a path out of this that wouldn’t end with Elincia hating him and the rest of the people he held dear. Even so, he could hardly blame her for reacting badly when the truth finally came to light. She had been lied to for a long time, and she didn’t even know it. 

Soren thought for a long moment, and the silence between him and Ike grew heavier and thicker. Soren sighed and shook his head when he finally felt ready to shatter it. “I don’t know how we would go about telling her. The truth is going to come out sooner or later, and there’s nothing we can do to stop that. Either we can find a way to be honest with her on our own, or someone from the Daein army is going to attack and make it harder for us to tell the truth.”

“We’re going to run into the Four Riders soon, aren’t we?” Ike asked with a frown. “I know your birth was always a secret even in Daein, but I feel like there’s got to be at least someone there who knows who you are.”

“The Black Knight probably would if nothing else,” Soren snarled, and Ike bit back a wince. Neither one of them had thought much of the Black Knight ever since their close call in Port Toha, and Ike couldn’t say he was eager to think about facing him again. It was bound to prove to be necessary, but that didn’t mean he had to like it. “And when we face him, he’s bound to say something. Even if he doesn’t speak out, I know he’s going to hint at it or something, and that’s going to be a problem.”

Ike sighed and pressed his hands up to his eyes, only pulling them away when stars exploded against his eyelids. “Damn,” he muttered. “We’re going to have to figure out some way to make this right, but… I don’t know how we could go about doing it at this point. We’re in too deep.”

“We can talk to your father about it,” Soren suggested. “I can’t say he’ll have any easier of a time than we are right now, but he may have at least one idea of how we can break the news to the princess.”

“I feel like Mist is going to agree with us about this too,” Ike said. “She won’t want to bottle this up for too longer than we already have… Not that we’re going to have an option in the matter when push comes to shove.”

“After the war ends, someone is going to need to step up and take control of Daein… And I believe the control of the country is going to fall to the son of the king even if no one knew he existed,” Soren muttered. “So even if we can manage to get through the war without being honest, everyone is going to figure it out right after it ends. That might just lead to another war between Crimea and Daein because some people are going to see it as us stabbing them in the back.”

Ike’s head fell into his hands, and he bit back an angry sigh. All of this would have been much easier if they could have told the truth from the start, but he understood why they had to hold out on it. At the time, they hadn’t known if they would be able to trust Elincia, Titania, or the rest of their party. They had to keep the secret because they didn’t know what would happen if they shared the truth with someone who was going to stab them in the back. It didn’t matter how many times Ike tried to remind himself this was for the best though. It felt like everything was spiraling far out of his control, and he feared that wasn’t going to change until after he was able to be honest at last. 

“We’re going to start the charge into Daein soon. Now that we’ve managed to make an ally of Begnion, our next destination is going to have to be the capital of Daein,” Soren frowned. “We can find out some plan that will work on the road. I know that doesn’t seem like a great solution, and I’m not going to say it is… But we’re going to figure this out. We don’t have much of a choice at this point.”

“You’re right,” Ike agreed. He wished he could have reassured himself through all of this by saying that he knew how Elincia was going to respond, but he had no clue. She could end up taking it with a smile and be glad to have the help of people who were so important to Daein… Or she could turn on them in an instant, and Ike wouldn’t be able to blame her for doing that in the slightest. He would probably consider doing the same if he had been put in her situation. 

“But for now, we should try to get a bit of rest,” Soren went on. “We can worry about how we’re going to tell her after we’ve had one night of rest. We don't know what to do right now because we’ve been up for so long trying to think about everything going on with the Serenes Forest. We can consider our options after resting for a while.”

Ike found himself nodding, and he remembered a bit belatedly that he had been up for far longer than he had any right to deal with. He had fought his way through the Serenes Forest to kill Oliver earlier that night, and Elincia giving him the position of a Crimean lord was just one small piece of that greater puzzle. “I almost forgot how exhausted I was,” Ike admitted. “With everything I thought we were going to have to put up with right after the fight, I got distracted.”

“It’s fine. I don’t think anyone could blame you for that,” Soren shrugged. He laid down on the bed, staring up at the ceiling and clearly fighting to keep his eyes open to speak with Ike for just a little bit longer. “This was a fine distraction, but it’s time for us to get back on the road to taking out Ashnard. Tomorrow is the first day of the rest of our lives. I hope you’re ready to face it.”

Ike wanted to say that he had never been less prepared for anything before. He hated having to think that the end of the war against Ashnard was going to have to come with telling Elincia about how long he had been lying to her. She deserved better than all of this, but it was much too late for him to go back and prevent the pain he was bound to put her through. At this point, his best option was to simply try to weather the storm and hope it all ended well enough in the end. 

“I’m as ready as I can be,” Ike finally replied thickly. Once he got comfortable on the bed, Soren rolled over and pressed his head against Ike’s chest. Ike pulled Soren in close, and he wished that all of his problems could be solved by simply sitting there in the silence with the person he cared for most. 

He was just going to have to settle for telling the truth… Whenever in the world he felt ready to do that. 

Chapter Text

Ike still didn’t know how to tell Elincia. 

He had been hoping inspiration would strike while he was on the road to Daein, but he was wrong to believe any part of this was going to be simple. Ike couldn’t say he was shocked that he had no idea how he was meant to break all of this news to the person who least deserved a betrayal like this. And yet, it still stung far more than it had any right to, and Ike seemed to spend nearly every waking minute he had free thinking about how to handle this. 

Granted, Ike didn’t have as much free time as he would have liked. Being promoted to the leading position over an army was a massive responsibility. Even having Soren, Titania, and Gawan around to lighten the load still left him with a lot more work than he was used to. Gawain was proud of his son for all he had done, but Ike didn’t feel like any of it was enough. He wanted to find a spare moment to talk with his father about everything that had happened, but he just couldn’t do it. There were always too many people around for him to have the privacy he sought. 

That was another thing about leading an army: there were a lot more people around than Ike was used to. He shouldn’t have been shocked by this. He wasn’t just looking after the rebellion trying to usurp Ashnard anymore. Sanaki had placed the Begnion troops in his hands as well, and Ike was going to need to look after all of them too. Of course it was a lot for one person to handle. It was even more daunting because Ike had never imagined he would become the commander of an army. Everything just felt like it was too much moving far too quickly. 

The army was nearing the border of Daein on this particular night, and after dinner was over, Ike found himself sitting near the edge of the camp looking out at the wilderness around him. He couldn’t believe he was this far from home. In fact, he couldn’t believe he had left home at all. Ike had thought growing up that the biggest job he would ever have to handle was taking over the guard responsibilities at the villa when his father retired. Gawain prepared Ike for it every day he could, and while Ike hadn’t felt ready yet when he was last there, he knew he would be ready one day. Everything would happen at the pace it was supposed to, and Ike was willing to be patient for that. 

Instead, Ike was sitting just outside the camp of a massive military force. He was preparing for a battle unlike anything he had ever imagined he could be involved with. Ashnard was going to die soon, and Ike was going to be one of the people involved with his downfall. Ike was going to stand there and watch as Ashnard took his final breath. Ike had never liked Soren’s father much just from his limited knowledge of the man, but he hadn’t thought he was going to kill him one day. Now, Ike couldn't stop thinking about it because he knew it was going to be his life soon enough. He had bitten off much more than he would ever feel ready to chew, and Ike could only hope he was able to get a grip on all of it soon. He didn’t even want to think of what could happen if he fell short during the moment of fate. 

“You’re awfully far from camp.”

Ike jolted out of his thoughts at the sound of Gawain’s voice from behind him. “Oh,” Ike greeted flatly. “Hey.” He wanted to say something else, but he couldn’t seem to find the words. His tongue wanted to explode with every paranoid thought he had been trying to hold back recently, but he couldn’t bring himself to say it just yet. For all he knew, there could have been people out there listening in on what he was saying. It seemed like Ike could barely escape the strange shopkeep that had joined the army alongside Ilyana ages ago. Aimee was strangely obsessed with him, and avoiding her had come to be just another stressor to tack onto the end of Ike’s already long list of fears. 

If Gawain noticed the tension in Ike’s eyes, he chose to not call it out immediately. “Something on your mind?” he asked instead. “You’ve seemed stiff for a while. You can’t risk that on the battlefield, you know. You never know when an enemy is going to come out of the woodwork to take advantage of it.”

“I know,” Ike assured him with a sigh. He snuck in a glance over his shoulder at the rest of the camp. The soldiers were getting ready for bed. Everyone wanted to turn in early so they would be ready for the battle waiting for them in the morning. It was bound to be a difficult fight, and Ike knew he needed to get some rest soon if he wanted to perform even somewhat decently in it…

But he wouldn’t be able to sleep as long as his head was this full. Ike looked over to Gawain, trying to fight down the tension that had mounted around his heart. “Are you worried about all of this?” Ike finally asked. “About being here with the Crimean army.”

Gawain considered it for a moment, but in the end, he didn’t respond the way Ike was hoping. “You’re worried about telling the princess the truth.”

Ike nodded. “I don’t know if we’re going to be able to hide it from her for too much longer. I don’t think we should have hidden it from her for this long anyway. We should have done something to tell her what’s going on ages ago. Now, I… I’ve been put in charge of the army meant to take her home back from Daein’s tyranny, and she doesn’t even know who I am.”

“She wouldn’t have trusted you if she knew who you were,” Gawain said. “Though you won't be able to keep it hidden for too much longer. The truth is bound to find its way into the light when we start to attack Daein. Whether you say it or one of our enemies does, someone is going to tell the truth.”

“And she deserves to find it out from us instead of her enemies,” Ike insisted. “I know that might seem hypocritical after all we’ve done to keep the truth away from her up to this point, but… I don’t want to leave her in the dark for any longer than we have to. I need her to know the truth.”

Gawain remained silent for a long moment, suddenly finding the trees in the distance far more interesting than Ike beside him. “It won’t be an easy conversation to have,” Gawain started carefully. “I don’t know how she’s going to react. The princess seems like a kind person, but I can’t imagine she would be ready to learn about something like this.”

“I don’t want it to feel like a betrayal to her, but I guess we’re too late for that,” Ike sighed. “She deserves the truth, but I don’t know how to tell her without it going wrong. I don’t know if there’s even a way to tell her at all without it blowing up in my face. I want her to know who she gave this chance to. I wouldn’t feel as anxious about it if she had given this position to, say, Titania, but… She chose me. She wanted to place her trust in me even after all that I’ve hidden from her. She doesn’t even know how much I’ve been lying to her.”

“You’re right when you say that the truth is going to come out eventually. It would be best if you were the one to tell her,” Gawain agreed. “If you ask me, it might be best to find a time to talk to her privately and share everything.”

“I don’t know if it’s entirely my story to tell though,” Ike muttered. He was going to need Soren to be there by his side when he finally let all of this out. Ike knew that better than anything else now. He wouldn’t be able to push Soren away when all of this revolved around him and his connection to the situation at hand. Ike wouldn’t be seen as a traitor to Elincia without his close connection to Soren. 

And Soren was floundering just as much beneath the weight of the truth as Ike was. If Soren didn’t know what to say, then Ike was as good as doomed. After all, Soren was much better with words than Ike could ever hope to be, and both of them knew it. Ike had no idea if there was even a solution to get out of all of this if even Soren struggled with how to handle it. 

“Then get him with you and go to talk to her whenever you can find the chance,” Gawain said. “I don’t think there’s any other advice to be given out. You’ll have to play the situation by ear, and you won’t know how it’s going to go until after you talk to her about it. The best way to handle it is to be tactful but swift. You wouldn’t want the truth to come out when you’re not ready for it, and the closer we get to Daein, the higher the chances of that happening become.”

Ike nodded, forcing himself to remain calm around the knot in the back of his throat. “I’ll figure something out.” He wasn’t going to do it that night. That much he could say for sure. Maybe he would find some magical combination of words to make all of this easier when he turned in for the night. Perhaps he just needed to bounce ideas around with Soren. There had to be a solution out there for this problem as long as Ike was willing to search for it. 

“I’m wishing you the best on it,” Gawain told him. “And if you want me or Mist there, then we’d be more than happy to help.”

That was right. Ike had been so caught up in his own paranoia about how he was going to tell Elincia that he had forgotten to think about what Gawain or Mist would be able to offer the situation. Maybe one of them would make this easier in a way he hadn’t anticipated. He doubted it, but it wouldn’t hurt to at least ask Mist for advice when he had the chance. 

“I’ll remember that,” Ike promised. “Thank you, Father.”

Gawain nodded, and he pushed himself to his feet. He extended one hand down to help Ike stand next. “You should try to get some rest soon. We’re bound to have a long battle ahead of ourselves tomorrow, and it wouldn’t do if you went into it too exhausted.”

“I’ll come back to camp soon,” Ike promised. “I just need a little bit more time to think through everything first. I won’t stay up too late though. I promise.”

“It’s your capability in a fight that you’ll be putting on the line if you push yourself too far,” Gawain reminded him. “I trust you to make the right choice.” With that, he started back toward the camp, leaving Ike there alone at the edge of the firelight. 

Ike sighed and leaned his head back against the tree he was sitting beside. The more he thought about all of this, the worse he seemed to feel. That was barely surprising given the circumstances, he supposed, but he still wished there was a better way to resolve all of this than just sitting and waiting it out. 

Well, that wasn’t entirely true. There was a way to solve the problem, and it was to go to Elincia right now and tell her everything he had been hiding from her for months on end. Over half a year had come and gone since the charge to liberate Crimea began, and Ike still hadn’t told her the truth. With each night that came and went, he was making it harder for himself to be honest about. He hadn’t realized how much the weight was building until it was too late for him to carry it on his own. Ike wished he had pushed harder for honesty back when he first had his reservations about it. That certainly would have made all of this much easier now. 

“There you are. I was wondering where you had gone off to.”

Soren’s voice cut through the tension like a knife, and Ike looked up to see his liege moving to sit just beside him. “You should head back to camp,” Ike told him. “We’ve got a long battle ahead of ourselves tomorrow. I wouldn’t want our tactician to be too tired to handle it.”

Soren shook his head. “You need someone to talk to right now. I can tell just by looking at you. You’re exhausted.”

Ike arched an eyebrow. “What makes you say that?”

“Your eyebrow always twitches when you grow exhausted, and I know exactly what you’ve been tossing and turning about lately,” Soren answered, and Ike would have winced if Soren didn’t move the conversation along as swiftly as he did. “You’ve been worried about how you’re going to tell the princess everything that we’ve been up to.”

“She deserves to hear it from us instead of the enemy forces,” Ike insisted. “I don’t want the people who ruined her life to be the ones who break the news to her. We’ve been her allies for ages, and we have to act like it by telling her the truth.”

“I suppose so,” Soren hummed. “I’ve been thinking a lot about what all of this is going to lead to after the war is over… But I’m doing my best to not get too far ahead of myself. No matter what happens at the end of all of this, we have to focus on the present for the time being.”

“Are you anxious about any of it?” Ike asked even though he felt it was a ridiculous question to ask. It would have been more shocking if Soren wasn’t anxious about everything to come. “If the war ends with Ashnard’s death–and at this point, it feels like it has to–then you’re going to end up on the throne of Daein.”

“I can’t say it’s what I ever expected would happen, and I’m not fond of the idea… But I’ll do what I have to,” Soren answered, though Ike could tell by the stiffness to his tone that Soren had a lot more to say on the matter than just that. “For now, I’m doing my best to think about my mother first and foremost.”

Right. Ike had been so distracted with worrying about Elincia that he forgot about Almedha. She was still being held captive by Ashnard, and she was going to remain hidden away from the world until after the war ended. Soren had finally unraveled what he thought to be the truth behind her history and his heritage as a Branded, but there was no way to say for certain if he had struck gold until the war was over. Almedha was the only one who had the information he sought. Beyond that, Almedha was the only family Soren had left. Ashnard had established his position through force at the start of the war, and Almedha and Soren only had each other… Not that it seemed like it as long as there was such a great distance between them. 

“We’re going to get her back,” Ike assured Soren even though he knew it was wrong to promise something that was so far out of their reach. One day, that wouldn’t be true though, and Ike was going to fight for as long as he had to in order to see mother and son reunited. That was where all of this had started, and Ike wasn’t going to forget it no matter what. 

“I know,” Soren whispered, though there was a slight waver of fear to his voice. Ike reached out toward Soren, wrapping an arm around his shoulders. Aimee would lose her mind if she saw Ike getting this close with someone other than her, but Ike didn’t care. As far as he was concerned, he wanted to chase Aimee off, and if this was the best way of doing that, then so be it. 

“Are you ready for the next battle?” Ike asked since it was an easier question to pose than anything about Elincia. “It’s going to be our first time back in Daein since…”

“Since we left,” Soren finished for him, not trusting the shadows to keep the secrets of all they had been forced to obscure. “I’m as ready as I can be… And as long as this promises to be the start of the path that will take us back home, I’m willing to do what I have to.”

“Good,” Ike concluded. There were a million other words he could have offered, but he didn’t volunteer any of them. “We’ll win this fight. I know it.”

“We have no other choice,” Soren hummed, leaning a little bit closer against Ike’s chest. If anyone knew who Soren was, then this was going to be the start of a scandal far bigger than they could have ever calculated. Ike didn’t know what people would have had to say about Ike getting this close with Soren, the prince of a country, even if he was his liege. Ike didn’t care for it either. He knew what he was to Soren, and the rest of the world’s opinions meant nothing compared to what he knew they shared. 

Ike closed his eyes, pulling Soren in a little bit closer. He wanted to say so much, but he couldn’t seem to find the words he needed, so he didn’t push them. Instead, he fell silent and let out a thin breath through his nostrils. “We never have.”

~~~~~

For all of Ike’s paranoia, the next battle went incredibly well. He had been terrified of something finding a way to go horribly wrong, but his fears wound up amounting to very little. It was certainly a change of pace to enter the frigid snows of Daein for the first time in so many months though. Ike hadn’t realized how unused to the cold he had become in his time away from home, but all of it came crashing back into his mind when he crossed the border. Daein’s climate was notably colder than most of the rest of the continent, and it was a sharp shift from the heat of Begnion’s deserts. 

Aside from the shift of temperature though, Ike could say that the battle went exactly as he had been planning. He and the rest of his forces attacked a fortress near the border, and just like that, they were in Daein. On top of that, Ike was finally able to take advantage of the benefits he had won in Begnion. Janaff and Ulki were given permission to stay with his army, and Reyson decided he wanted to travel alongside Ike too. Tanith stepped away from her position at Sanaki’s side to join the army as well. Just like that, Ike’s main faction of fighters was stronger than ever before. He didn’t even need to calculate the armies of Begnion when it came to noticing just how much better his elite team had become. 

The only notable part of the battle was from the enemy forces. There were a few raven laguz there with the Daein fighters… Though Ike couldn’t say he understood why. He had come to know the raven laguz as opportunists, taking advantage of whatever chances they could to make themselves known, but fighting with Daein felt… Bizarre. Daein was hardly a nation known for being kind to the laguz, and Ike would have expected the raven laguz to want to stay away if anything. His assumptions were proven wrong though, and Ike had to fight through far more bird laguz than he was comfortable with in order to win the day. 

After the fight was over, Ike finally felt himself breathe easily again. Conquering the first major battle on the road to Daein’s capital was an important first step. It had to be a good sign of everything to come… Though it did little to assuage Ike’s fears about the thing he was actually anxious about. He had been wrong for thinking the solution to his dishonesty with Elincia would come up if he just gave it some time. He was every bit as lost for a solution now as he had been when all of this started. The only difference was that now, he knew something was going to give sooner rather than later. 

Ike found himself lingering near the back of the army when he had the chance. He told everyone of their plans for the rest of the day’s worth of marching, and he sought out his father. Soren remained close to his side, refusing to breathe a word of what he was thinking regardless of the pressure that was placed on his shoulders. Ike wanted to see if Gawain had anything else to offer him when it came to finding a solution to this problem. He doubted Gawain had any other words for him to share with Elincia now since he had been at a loss the night before too, but it wouldn’t hurt to ask. 

Ike never got the chance to pose the question though. Instead, he found Gawain distracted and refusing to keep his attention on the path ahead. Gawain was constantly looking over his shoulder like he was afraid of something jumping out of the shadows to get him. Ike looked up at Gawain with a heavy frown on his face, but his father didn’t even seem to notice he was standing beside him. “Father?” Ike asked, trying to keep the urgency out of his voice. “Is something the matter?”

Gawain only focused again after he heard Ike’s voice, and even then, it still took him a few seconds to get a grip again. Gawain nodded, but the motion felt weighty and unsure. “Yes… Everything is fine,” Gawain assured him. “You have nothing to worry about.”

Ike’s frown grew deeper. The brief stop in Begnion had distracted him when it came to his worries about his father too, but now that he was back on the road… Ike couldn’t help but remember Volke. It had been ages since he was last forced to acknowledge Volke’s existence, but his mind refused to let him forget entirely. Gawain had grown stiff when Volke first appeared, and he refused to let the truth of who he was slip even when he was seemingly out of the picture entirely. 

Was that what was bothering him now? Had Volke returned? Perhaps Gawain would be more familiar with Volke’s tricks than the rest of the army, and he would be more sensitive to knowing he had appeared… But that still didn’t explain why no one else had noticed him. Ulki and Janaff had the best ears and eyes in all of Phoenicis. Surely they would have noticed it if someone was following them… Though they were concentrated on keeping the army marching forward. Maybe it wouldn’t have caught their attention just yet. 

Ike wanted to push the point, but before he had the chance, he heard his name being called from somewhere near the front of the group. Titania was the one who had tried to get his attention, and Ike found himself wandering in her direction even as he yearned to get to the bottom of what his father was hiding. Ike jogged to catch up with her, and he looked up at her with a muted frown on his face. “What is it?”

“We’re getting closer to the spot we wanted to settle down for the night,” Titania explained. “Do you still think this is a good area for us to rest for the night? You know Daein better than the rest of us.”

Ike bit his lip to keep from saying everything he knew then and there. He wasn’t as familiar with Daein’s terrain as others wanted to believe. He was sure there were a few whispers circulating through the army and the rest of the world about how odd it was that a man from the aggressor nation was leading the rebellion to overthrow Ashnard and liberate Crimea. Ike didn’t know if he would ever be able to silence them. There was nothing honest he could say to bring it all to quiet. 

But he couldn’t bring himself to be honest. Ike looked into Titania’s warm eyes for a bit too long, wondering what was going to happen when she found out. He wouldn’t even be able to blame her for hating him for keeping the secret. There was no way to gauge her response either, and she was every bit as much of a factor in this as Elincia was. “Yeah…” Ike finally found himself saying. “This area seems fine.”

If Titania noticed the crisis racing through his mind, she chose to not acknowledge it. Instead, she turned her attention to the path ahead and nodded. “Alright. I look forward to seeing what we can do tomorrow. I imagine we’ve got a lot of great battles ahead of ourselves as we get closer to the capital.”

Ike nodded, and the tension in the back of his throat seemed to stifle any air that made its way into his lungs. The closer he got to the capital, the closer he got to having to tell everyone the truth of who he was and how much he had been keeping from them. There wouldn’t be a way to avoid it for too much longer. He knew that. Either he was going to tell the truth, or someone else would tell it for him. If he managed to get away with hiding it for long enough for the army to reach Ashnard, then the king of Daein would gladly reveal the truth about his son, and that would leave Ike to fall to ruin right alongside Soren. 

He was more sure of it now than ever before. He had to find a way to tell the truth as soon as he could. Ike didn’t know where he was going to find the words, but he needed to make progress on it as soon as possible. Elincia deserved that much. All of the central members of the army did. They didn’t know the truth of who they were fighting under, and it was wrong in more ways than he could describe. 

That night, he was going to get closer. Ike didn’t know how he was going to find the words he was searching for, but one way or another, he was going to make sure he came out about what he knew. Everyone deserved that much, and Ike couldn’t keep them from it forever. He could talk to Soren and Mist about it, and they could go to Gawain once they had a plan. 

By the time they arrived at the scene of their next battle, the truth would be out. Ike just hoped it didn’t lead to too much calamity and catastrophe, though somehow, he doubted he would have any control over that. 

~~~~~

A few hours later, the army finally came to a stop, and they decided to make camp for the night. Ike found himself pacing the length of the camp with a frown on his face. He was doing his best to not let his stress seep out and infect the people around him, but it wasn’t working in the slightest. He was being incredibly obvious about it, and he knew it. No one knew what he was so afraid of, but he knew it had to be something bad. 

Soren was sitting beside Ike as he walked around and tried to soothe his nerves. Soren had a book in one hand, but Ike doubted he was reading it as closely as he wanted to pretend. Instead, he was looking up over the top of his book every once in a while to see if Ike had calmed down yet. The answer was always no, and Ike wasn’t sure if that was going to change until well after this entire incident had been left in his past. 

A new source of motion caught Ike’s attention out of the corner of his eye. The deep yellow cape Gawain wore everywhere was flashing through the darkness, proof that he was off to investigate something in the woods. It didn’t take long for the memory of Gawain’s odd behavior from that afternoon to resurface, and Ike stopped pacing, his frown deepening. What if Gawain was in trouble? His anxiety hadn’t seemed to soothe itself even after he dismissed Ike’s concerns for him. Maybe he needed Ike’s help and just didn’t know how to go about asking for it. 

That was all Ike needed to know. He wasn’t sure if Gawain would want his help, but Ike was still going to offer it as much as he could. “I’ll be back soon, Soren,” Ike promised, not even bothering to see if the prince followed after him. Ike was already jogging into the darkness after Gawain, following just far enough behind him that he wouldn’t be caught. 

Soren stared after Ike for a few seconds before his mind was made up. He closed his book and tucked it into his bag. With that, Soren pushed himself to his feet and followed after Ike, leaving the camp’s firelight flickering behind them both. 

Chapter Text

“Ike!”

Soren knew even before he could call his companion’s voice a second time that it wasn’t going to reach his target. Ike had started moving faster than he expected, and it was going to take a while before Soren caught up with him. Soren shook his head and urged his legs to move a little bit faster, kicking up into a jog.

“Soren! There you are!”

The sound of Titania’s voice pulled Soren out of his thoughts, and he came to a pause a few seconds later. He turned to see the head of the mercenaries approaching him with a relieved smile. “I was wondering where you had gone off to,” Titania went on. “We’re getting ready to come up with our next set of strategies. I think the rest of the mercenaries could really use your guidance. You know more about Daein than any of us, and we’re going to need that expertise for the next few battles.”

Soren stammered for a few seconds, looking off in the direction of the woods once more. He didn’t know why Ike had darted off when he had, but the only way to figure that out was to follow him… But how could he get away with it without Titania noticing what he was up to? Ike seemed to want privacy, and Soren didn’t want to bring the entire camp in his direction when Ike was struggling enough with the sudden dread of being constantly seen by so many people. 

“I…” Soren swallowed dryly, trying to convince himself that Ike would be fine without him. Arguably, Ike would be better on his own than Soren would be since Ike could handle himself in a fight without having to fear his own lack of defenses. Soren let out a heavy sigh and looked back up at Titania. “Alright. If you really need my help.”

“I’d like it,” Titania replied with a smile. “You’ve done a lot to help us out since we started traveling together, and I thought it was only right that you helped us with the next set of strategies too. We wouldn’t have made it this far without you.”

Soren felt something hot rise in his chest, but he forced it to stay hidden to the best of his ability. He wasn’t as prone to bouts of unease as Ike, and he didn’t think anywhere near as much about the dishonesty he had shown to the rest of the army. Still, something about Titania’s words made him feel nauseous. She wouldn’t have been saying those things if she knew anything about who he was. The only reason she was being so kind was because she had no clue, and it was going to stay that way… 

But not for too much longer. Soon, everything was going to come out, and Soren was going to have to be ready for it. As long as the truth was not in the air tonight though, he knew he could do something to help. Maybe it would be enough to make up for his inevitable betrayal. He doubted it, but he could hope. 

“Alright,” Soren said thickly, and he pretended he didn’t taste blood on the back of his tongue. “If you say so.”

~~~~~

Ike had to fight through far more branches than he should have in order to keep up with Gawain… Though he supposed that saying he had ‘kept up’ was a strong word. Gawain was far out of his reach by now, and Ike had no idea which direction he had gone off in. The only indicator Ike had was the distant sound of voices, but he couldn’t even make out what they were saying, much less if one of the voices belonged to Gawain. Ike could only hope he was on the right path. He didn’t know what he would have done if he got lost in the woods when his father could have needed him. 

Ike’s path proved to be the correct one before he could grow to doubt it too much, and Ike came to a slow stop near the edge of a clearing. Gawain was standing in the center of it across from another figure. “What are you doing here?” Gawain asked, and judging by the bite in his voice, it was far from the first time had posed the question. 

“I believe we both know why,” came the muffled sound of the other voice. Ike’s blood ran cold as soon as he caught a glimpse of the person speaking… It was the Black Knight. Somehow, he had managed to catch up with them. No, that couldn’t have been it. The Black Knight had been waiting for the right moment to strike ever since the Crimean army escaped his grasp the last time. He may not have been able to do anything while they were in Begnion, but now that they were back in Daein… 

“No, I don’t know why,” Gawain responded with a shake of his head. “I don’t know why you of all people are doing this either. I was under the impression you had left Daein behind years ago.”

Ike felt his eyes widen. Gawain wouldn’t have said that unless he knew who the Black Knight was… But that couldn’t have been possible, right? Not even Soren knew who was hiding behind the Black Knight’s mask, and he was the prince of Daein. Gawain… How could he have known? Ike supposed that his father had been a member of the Four Riders at one point, but that was years ago. How could the truth still be in his reach?

The Black Knight raised one blade, leveling it at Gawain. He had another sword by his side, but he didn’t reach for it just yet. “I want to know where it is,” the Black Knight went on. “I know you had something to do with its disappearance. I’m sure you can understand just how valuable it is.”

“Is that the reason Ashnard waged this war?” Gawain fired back, and Ike’s mind began to spin. What in the world was the item the Black Knight was there for? Gawain seemed to know what it was, but Ike couldn’t say he had a clue. Not for the first time, Ike found himself wondering just how many secrets his father was keeping… And he doubted he would ever be able to get to the bottom of it. 

The Black Knight did not respond to Gawain for a long moment. The silence was the only answer Gawain needed, and he shook his head. “You’re better than this. You have to know you are,” Gawain went on. “You don’t need to put so much effort into a man who isn’t worth your loyalty… Not that I think you’re actually loyal to the king of all people. You’re too smart for that. So I want to know… Who is really pulling the strings behind all of this?”

Ike could feel his jaw dropping and his eyes going impossibly wider. There was someone else behind all of this… Or if nothing else, that was what Gawain thought. Gawain seemed to know much more about the war than anyone else involved with it. He hadn’t been acting like it though. Gawain had been happy to let Ike take control of everything going on, and he hadn’t intervened when Elincia gave Ike his promotion either. How could Gawain just stand back and watch it all happen if he knew something more was at play?

The Black Knight didn’t rise to the bait of Gawain’s accusations. Instead, he revealed the other sword at his side, but he didn’t strike with it. Instead, he threw it into the dirt, and the golden blade shone like a beacon even in the dimness of the moonlight. Gawain stared at the sword for a long moment before reaching forward, pulling it from the ground and testing its weight in his hands. He seemed oddly familiar with it, and in an instant, he sunk into a defensive stance. 

The Black Knight only gave Gawain a few seconds to prepare before he rushed forward. The Black Knight’s silver blade clashed with the golden one he had given to Gawain. Their movements were intense in a way Ike hadn’t ever seen before. Ike was no stranger to combat, not anymore, but all of this felt different somehow. He wasn’t sure of how he was so confident in his conclusion, but Ike knew Gawain and the Black Knight had fought before. Ike wasn’t sure of how many times it had happen, but he was sure something like this had happened multiple times. They were too familiar with each other and the way they fought for them to have only crossed blades once or twice. 

Ike didn’t knwo what he was meant to do when faced with all of this. He itched to rush out and help his father however he could, but he didn’t know what he would be able to do against the Black Knight… But a lot of time had passed since he last saw the Black Knight during a fight. For all he knew, Ike could have grown strong enough to hold his own and then some. Gawain was handling himself just fine for now, but how long would that remain true? How much longer would he be able to keep himself afloat in the face of such a powerful opponent?

The Black Knight delivered a harsh slash that should have cut Gawain’s chest in half, but Gawain adjusted his sword in his grasp, turning the momentum around onto the Black Knight. Each time it seemed like the Black Knight was going to truly deal a killing blow, Gawain managed to turn the tides of the fight around so he had the upper hand again. The battle was a dance, and it was a terrifying one… But Ike was glad Gawain had control over it. He didn’t know what he would have done if his father lost his grip in such a crucial moment. 

The Black Knight refused to let up though, and Ike felt his chest go tight as the seconds passed by. What if something happened? Would he be able to do anything to defend Gawain before it was too late for him to help? This couldn’t go on forever. One of them was going to have to come out on top, and while Ike thought Gawain was the better fighter of the two… He couldn’t shake the fear that perhaps his assumptions were going to prove to be wrong in the end. Ike couldn’t face that. He couldn’t lose Gawain when they had come so far together. 

Gawain and the Black Knight didn’t seem to realize they had an audience at all. They were so focused on one another that the rest of the world may as well have not existed. Ike was glad Gawain was focused on the battle, but the thought frightened him as well… And his fear multiplied itself once more when Gawain managed to get in a good enough swing that sent Gawain staggering. 

Ike’s body moved on its own, and he rushed out of his place between the trees with one hand outstretched. “Father!” Ike cried out in desperation. 

Gawain finally realized that Ike was there, and he looked up to see his son rushing closer. Gawain’s eyes went wide, and he tightened his grip on his blade. “Ike! Stay back!”

But before Gawain could issue another warning, the Black Knight surged forward, taking advantage of the distraction to wedge his blade…

Directly into Gawain’s abdomen. 

The world seemed to freeze, and Ike felt like the sky was going to collapse on top of him. He saw the blood seconds before he smelled it, and Gawain went still on the edge of the Black Knight’s sword. The blade had come to rest snugly within his side, hopefully away from any organs that would have led to a fatal injury, but it was difficult to be sure. The Black Knight was in control, and he was the one who decided if Gawain was going to live or die. No one could say for sure what his choice was going to be either, and the thought made Ike want to be sick. 

Somehow, the thought that he was going to lose Gawain was only the second worst thing that was going on then. The worst thought Ike was having was that all of this had been his fault. If he had just held back, if he had just trusted that his father would be able to handle this, then… Then… 

“I’ll ask you one more time,” the Black Knight said, his voice distorted due to the mask on his head. “Where is it?”

“I don’t have it,” Gawain snarled back, surprisingly able to speak even around his injury. There was sweat beading across his forehead, but other than that, he didn’t seem to care for his wound at all. “You wouldn’t be getting your hands on it even if I did.”

The Black Knight let out a small scoff, and with a single fluid motion, he tore his blade out of Gawain’s side. The force of the shift was enough to send Gawain staggering backwards. Ike rushed forward to try and ease his collapse to the ground, but it wasn’t enough. Gawain was far heavier than Ike was, and there was only so much Ike could do to help him. 

“You have no other choice now,” the Black Knight went on, stepping toward Gawain and Ike. His shadow was heavy and imposing, somehow worse than the stark darkness of the rest of the night around them. “Where is it? I can ask someone else for it if you would like… Perhaps your son or daughter would know.”

Ike felt his eyes go wide. He didn’t know what they were talking about, but he couldn’t find the words to say that. Instead, he fumbled with his father’s cape, trying to use it to stem the blood flowing from Gawain’s injury. It didn’t seem to be enough though, not that Ike could have expected it to be. An injury like that was going to take a lot more to heal than just a single cape, and Ike didn’t have the healing abilities he needed to fix it. He would need Mist’s aid for that, but she wasn’t there. No one was there but him, Gawain, and the Black Knight now, and if this kept up, then–

“Stay back!”

A sudden gust of wind erupted through the clearing, and Ike looked over his shoulder to see two shadows rushing toward him. Soren and Titania were sprinting through the darkness, and Soren had a wind tome at the ready. The blast of wind didn’t seem to have hurt the Black Knight at all, but it was enough to distract him for a few seconds. Titania swept in and helped Ike to lift Gawain a short distance away, and Ike felt the pressure in his chest start to alleviate ever so slightly. 

But that wasn’t enough. None of it was enough. The Black Knight was still there, and he stared down at Soren through his mask. “I was wondering when we would be seeing each other,” the Black Knight remarked simply. “I had thought we would cross paths far before this… Prince Soren.”

And just like that, the world ended for a second time that night. 

“Prince Soren?” Titania echoed, pausing where she was helping to move Gawain near Ike. “What in the world are you–”

“Silence!” Soren interrupted before the Black Knight had the chance to continue. He unleashed yet another wind spell, and while it did nothing to pierce the Black Knight’s armor, it distracted him for a few seconds more. Titania managed to retrieve the fallen golden blade from the ground, sliding it into a sheath at her hip even though it barely fit. From there, she continued the journey back toward the camp alongside Ike and Gawain. 

The Black Knight took a step after them, but Soren refused to let him by, stepping in between Ike, Gawain, Titania, and their pursuer. “What are you trying to do with all of this?” Soren demanded. “Why are you here? You didn’t come for the princess of Crimea. So why?”

The Black Knight did not respond, but he didn’t lift his blade either. Soren knew he was dangerously close to being cut in half, but he didn’t back down, continuing to glare up at the Black Knight with all the venom he could summon. The Black Knight’s grip on his blade tightened ever so slightly, but he did not move his hand. “Your father has requested your presence at his side,” the Black Knight responded instead. “I believe it would be in your best interests to come along quietly.”

“As if I would come with you after you nearly killed the man assigned to protect me!” Soren bit back. He didn’t want to entertain the idea that the Black Knight had succeeded in killing Gawain. He couldn’t do that just yet, not with so much on the line. “You have no right to ask anything of me after what you have just done! If you want to take me with you, then it will have to be by force… And I won’t let you do that so easily!”

The Black Knight remained still and silent for another few seconds more. He shook his head and turned away, his cloak rippling in the midnight air. “So be it. Until we meet again.” In an instant, light flashed around his feet, consuming him entirely. Moments later, the Black Knight was gone. 

Soren didn’t realize how much he was thriving off his adrenaline until after the Black Knight was gone. He let out a slow, rattling breath before turning on his heel and darting after Ike, Titania, and Gawain. They had gotten much closer to the camp while Soren distracted the Black Knight, but as the seconds passed by, more and more blood was falling from Gawain’s injury onto the darkened grasses. Soren couldn’t bring himself to look at the wound. There was nothing he could do about it right now. He didn’t have a staff with him, and he wasn’t good enough with one to justify trying it anyway. They needed Mist and Rhys right now. One of them would be able to save Gawain. They had to. 

“How is Gawain?” Soren asked against his better judgement as he fell into pace just beside Ike. “Is he…?”

“Gawain?” Titania echoed, and Soren only realized his mistake after she had turned to look at him with treachery in her eyes once more. “I was under the impression his name was Greil.”

Soren winced, and he bit down on his bottom lip to make sure he didn’t say anything else damning. Unfortunately, there was nothing he could do to stop the avalanche of the truth now. Titania took only a few moments to put the pieces together, and her eyes widened. “Gawain is the name of one of Daein’s Four Riders,” Titania realized. “Or at least one of the Four Riders from years ago… Is he–”

“Father!”

Mist’s voice cut through the conversation, and Soren looked up to see that a small crowd had gathered at the edge of the camp. Mist and Rhys rushed forward first, and Soren found that Gawain had gone fully unconscious and limp at some point during the journey back to camp. Rhys got to work first, waving his staff high to try and stitch the wound closed. Mist was too rattled at first, and she looked up at Ike and Soren with tears in her eyes. “Is he alright?!” she cried out. 

“Your father is Gawain, a former member of Daein’s Four Riders,” Titania repeated, her voice louder this time. She didn’t let go of Gawain, instead looking around him at Ike, Soren, and Mist. “What in the world is going on?!”

“Ike?”

Elincia’s voice broke through the chaos, and Soren looked over to find the princess standing a few steps away. Her face was pale, and her hands were pressed against her chest and trembling. “What… What is going on?” Elincia questioned softly. “What happened to Sir Greil?”

“Gawain,” Titania corrected. “His name is really Gawain, and he… He was one of Daein’s Four Riders years ago.”

Elincia stared at Ike for a few moments more in perfect shock, and for a moment, the world froze. She swallowed dryly, and her fingers clenched on her chest. “What is going on, Ike?” Elincia whispered. 

“He was one of Daein’s Four Riders,” Titania explained, unable to believe the words now just as she had been unable to believe them when she first heard the truth. “All this time, he… You’ve been lying to us about who you really are. You hid who he was from all of us. I want to know… Just who are you? What are you doing here?”

Ike and Mist looked at one another for a single moment that seemed to last an eternity. “You… You’re right,” Ike choked out. “We’re from Daein, and our father is a former member of the Four Riders. We’ve been on the run ever since the war started because…” Ike looked up at Soren, and the prince felt as if ice had been poured down his spine. He knew he needed to say something to explain himself, but he couldn’t find the words he was searching for. Not anymore. 

“We can talk about this later,” Rhys suddenly interrupted, and all eyes shifted in his direction. “We need to get him to the medical tent. He needs immediate healing, and I can’t do that here. Come on.”

Rhys took off before anyone could question him, not that they would have in the first place. Ike was the first to start moving, dragging Gawain in the direction of the medical tent even when Titania was too shocked to move. “Come on!” Ike instructed, and Titania finally snapped out of her trance. Even with the betrayal fresh on her mind, Titania trailed after Ike, carrying the rest of Gawain’s weight on the way to the medical tent. 

Ike’s mind remained buzzing and noisy throughout his entire journey to the medical tent. He couldn’t believe it had all come out this way. Why did it have to end like this? Ike had been planning on telling everyone the truth, but none of it had mattered in the end. The truth was dragged from him when he least expected, and it was all because of the Black Knight. 

The Black Knight had come after his father. Gawain knew who the Black Knight was. Ike was the reason his father had been stabbed nearly to death. If he hadn’t rushed out when he did, then none of this would have happened. 

Ike’s mind only came back into focus after he and Titania eased Gawain onto the ground. Gawain let out a clipped groan, but he didn’t stir from the unconsciousness he had drifted off into. Ike stared down at Gawain’s wound in shock for a long moment, unable to bring himself to focus on much of anything else. He should have been smarter. He shouldn’t have tried to interfere. 

“It’s true then,” Titania whispered, her voice hollow. Ike looked up at her slowly, but she refused to look back at him. “You said you were from Daein when we first met, but you never said anything about your father being one of the Four Riders.”

“That was before Mist and I were born. He hasn’t been one of them for years,” Ike retorted weakly, though he supposed it was a poor way to cover for everything he knew Titania had a right to resent him for. 

“And the reason you’re here…” Titania clenched her fingers into fists, and Ike could see a million questions racing behind her eyes. She didn’t let herself explode with her rage just yet though. Instead, she let out a slow sigh. “We’re going to talk about this. Don’t think you can escape it.”

Before Ike had the chance to push her on the point even more, Titania turned and left the medical tent. In her place, Elincia came rushing in with a healing staff in her hands. Ike hadn’t even realized she was learning how to use a staff until after she waved it above Gawain to try and mitigate the damage from his wound. Ike looked at Elincia in mild concern, waiting for her to glare at him for lying to her for all that time… But Elincia couldn’t muster anything more than a frown of vague betrayal. Ike couldn’t tell if that was better or worse than the alternative, and at this point, he didn’t think he wanted to find out at all. 

Ike slowly eased himself to the ground, sitting down beside his father as his fingers twitched restlessly. He wished there was something more he could do, but he had never been any good with magic. Mist was much better at it, something she seemed to have inherited from their mother. It was ironic; Ike had their mother’s hair color, but he was sorely missing in her magical abilities. He would have done anything to be able to do something more, but–

“Why did you lie?”

Elincia’s voice had Ike looking up at her. She still wasn’t meeting his gaze directly, instead looking down at Gawain and his injury as Rhys took the lead in healing the wound. “You… You have been keeping this a secret from the start,” Elincia went on. “But if you were going to kill me for the sake of Daein, then you would have done it ages ago.”

“I don’t want to hurt you,” Ike confirmed. “I want to do what I can to see Ashnard defeated. There’s just… There’s just a bit more to it than helping you alone, I guess.”

Elincia nodded, and the utter defeat in her eyes was enough to make Ike feel like his heart had frozen. Elincia struggled to find her words for a few moments more before sighing and shaking her head. “We can discuss this more after Sir… Gawain has been healed,” Elincia finally said. “How does that sound?”

Ike’s mind was still buzzing with a million thoughts, but he couldn’t bring himself to voice any of them. He didn’t know where to start, and he didn’t want to try and unravel it either. Instead, he simply nodded. “That’s fine with me.”

Though right now, it felt like nothing was ever going to be fine again. 

~~~~~

Soren hadn’t moved from his spot at the edge of the camp. 

He knew he should have been doing something more to help Gawain and keep the rest of the camp afloat, but he just couldn’t do it. He was staring at the ground where he had last seen drops of Gawain’s blood seep into the lifeless gray grasses. Soren’s secret was part of the reason for all of this, wasn’t it? It just had to be. And now… Soren had let the truth slip to Titania at perhaps the worst possible time he could have told her. She was going to react poorly to it when her mind caught up with what she had heard, and Soren wasn’t even able to blame her. 

Soren’s body moved long before his mind realized what was going on, and he left the chaos of the camp’s edge behind. He needed some idea of peace somewhere else, though he wasn’t sure of where he was going to find it. Soren just couldn’t stand there. Someone was going to figure out who he was soon enough. He was sure of it. 

“Going somewhere?”

Soren felt himself freeze at the sound of Nasir’s voice of all things. Nasir shouldn’t have been there at all. Nasir should have left when the group stopped in Begnion… But he was still there, and Soren wished he had the mental capacity to try and get to the bottom of that mystery. Right now though, all Soren could do was let out a thin breath through his nose and look up at Nasir. “What do you want?”

“I’ve heard a lot of things in the last few minutes,” Nasir commented vaguely, and Soren’s stomach sank into his feet as he realized exactly where this was going. “Some pieces of information have spread throughout the entire camp by now… Like the leader of the Crimean liberation being the son of a former member of the Four Riders. Your entire little party is loyal to Daein, isn’t it?”

“If we still were, then we wouldn’t be here right now,” Soren bit back, moving to step away from Nasir to get some alone time away from him. 

“Then why is the prince of Daein of all people here?” Nasir asked, and Soren froze. He couldn’t even bring himself to look up at Nasir, instead staring at the ground in shock. “That little piece of the truth hasn’t made its way through the camp yet, but it’s just a matter of time before it does… But I know the truth.”

“You’ve always known the truth, haven’t you?” Soren muttered crossly. 

“Perhaps,” Nasir hummed. “I was wondering when you were going to finally tell everyone… Though I suppose we’re past the point of you having the choice to share it now.”

Soren felt his heart race in his chest, and he feared the world was going to cave in on him the instant he gave it the chance. That night had already gone poorly enough, and now… He didn’t know what Nasir was trying to get at, but he was able to put enough of the pieces together to know that it was nothing good. Soren had no idea how to push back against it, but he knew he was going to have to try. 

Soren looked up and met Nasir’s gaze. “What do you want?”

Chapter Text

By some miracle, Gawain was holding on. 

Mist had felt like her world was going to collapse in on her head when she saw Ike and Titania return to camp with Gawain propped up between them. He didn’t even look alive, but he was, albeit only barely. Mist felt her blood run cold, and she was sure the sensation was going to haunt her for the rest of her days. She should have reacted as soon as she saw that something was wrong, but she couldn’t do it. Nothing seemed to matter in that horrifying moment, and it would never matter again as long as Gawain’s story ended then and there. 

Rhys moving first had been enough to spur Mist into action. That was right. She was a healer, and she could do something about this. She just had to reach out and do something. Rhys couldn’t do it alone. Mist had to help him. She was perhaps the only hope her father had at surviving, and she couldn’t give up on him. He would never give up on her if she had been the one to nearly die in some unknown battle. He would want her to keep fighting, and Mist was going to do everything in her power to make sure Gawain could keep fighting. 

According to Rhys, it was necessary that Gawain managed to survive the rest of the night. If he could get through the first few hours after he was wounded, then he would be in the clear and would likely make a full recovery. There was no way of saying for sure if he was going to last that long though. Rhys was out gathering other supplies to make sure they had what they needed if a stitch broke. That left Mist there in the medical tent to look after her father and hope nothing about his condition changed to the point of concern. 

She wasn’t the only one there either. Ike was sitting across the room from her, and Jill stood near the edge of the tent. Jill clearly wanted to approach Mist and say something to cheer her up, but she didn’t know where to start. Mist couldn’t blame her for it at all. She would have known what to say to comfort her either. The only real thread Mist had to cling to now was the knowledge that Gawain was alive right now. There was no guarantee that would last for too much longer, but what else could she think of when the world felt like it was ending?

“Are the rumors true?”

Mist looked up slowly at the sound of Jill’s voice, and she turned to face the wyvern rider. Jill wasn’t meeting her gaze directly, instead looking at the ground just in front of her boots. “The entire camp is saying that he was a member of the Four Riders,” Jill went on. “Is that true?”

“It is,” Mist confirmed, her throat constricting on her when she tried to push for something more. “He… He was a member of the Four Riders before Ike and I were born. He was then assigned to work at another villa, and… He acted as the captain of the guard there.” Mist was on the verge of explaining just who Gawain was supposed to protect, but she saw Ike shake his head out of the corner of her eye, and she knew it was something she was meant to keep hidden. Soren would be the one who revealed that information when he was ready, and the moment had not yet arrived for Mist to speak out. 

“I see,” Jill said simply, unable to find any other words for a long moment. Silence fell in the medical tent once more, and Mist looked back to Gawain. She tracked every subtle movement of his chest, up and down in a rhythm she begged would continue to repeat even after she had to turn her gaze away. “It’s hard… To have to fight against your home nation. I know that. I still don't know what we’re going to do when we reach Daein, but… I believe in our cause. I’m sure you have a good reason for fighting against Daein too.”

“I do,” Mist nodded. All she wanted now was to burst out with the truth, ugly and hidden as it had been for so long. She was there because she was working with the unknown prince of Daein. Crimea and Daein were more similar than they were different, and Mist couldn’t stand by Ashnard after what he had done. This wasn’t just for Elincia; it was for Soren too, and that had been true even though no one was able to express it aloud. 

Jill stared at Mist for another few moments, and she uncrossed her arms. “What is the reason?” Jill pressed carefully. “I’ve changed a lot since I was last home, and I think this is where I’m supposed to be. You though… You’ve been here for longer than I have. I can’t help but wonder… Just why are you here? Why are you fighting against Ashnard? If your father was one of the Four Riders, then it would be easy to assume you would want to be by his side, but… You’re not.”

“We’re on the run from Ashnard,” Ike replied, too tired and drained to bother with explaining much more than that. He wouldn’t have gone into more detail even if Jill asked. After all, that piece of information had already slipped once that night, and Ike wasn’t going to be the one who revealed it again. The Black Knight had said enough, or so Ike had told Mist when they finally had a moment alone. 

“Why?” Jill asked, her eyes going wide. “What could any of you have done to end up as enemies of the king?”

“That’s none of your business.”

Soren’s voice was harsh and jagged when it cut through the conversation, and Mist turned to see that he had entered the tent. “Soren,” Ike whispered, his voice raw in shock. Ike and Mist had known Soren for a long time, but Mist didn’t think they had ever seen him looking this… Angry. Soren had always struggled with expressing his emotions, but there was something different about the cast of his features tonight, and it frightened Mist almost as much as the glint of the Black Knight’s blade in her imagination. 

Almost. 

“How is he?” Soren asked, crossing the tent to stand over Gawain’s sleeping form. Some of the color had returned to his face, but the shift was slight. Mist wouldn’t have even noticed it if she hadn’t already been sitting in the medical tent for hours watching him for any signs of improvement. 

“Rhys says his chances will improve if he can make it through the night,” Mist answered. She curled over herself, pulling her legs in tight like she thought the gesture would never be enough to soothe her aching heart. If anything, it only made her feel worse. When she curled up like that, Gawain did what he could to soothe her by putting a hand on her shoulder or pulling her in for a hug. He couldn’t do that now. He was unconscious, and Mist needed to hope with everything she had that he would pull through. There was nothing else she could do. Not anymore. 

“That’s… That’s good,” Soren murmured, though Mist could tell he had other words to apply to the situation. Soren’s eyes hardened into a glare, but Mist knew better than to think it was directed at anyone in the tent. Eventually, Soren pressed his eyes shut in rage and shook his head. “We’re going to have to keep moving. I wouldn’t want the Black Knight to catch up with us and ruin what little we have left right now.”

“But we can’t keep moving right now,” Mist argued. “Father is… He’s going to need time to recover, and we can’t afford to move him as long as he’s in such a precarious position.” She snuck a small glance down at Gawain’s sleeping form, and the tension in her chest grew strong enough to nearly force the air from her lungs. Soren may have had a point about needing to keep moving to avoid the Black Knight, but Mist didn’t know if that was possible right now. They had to look after Gawain too, and if they moved him before he was fully recovered from his wound, then… 

But would they even have the time to wait until Gawain had recovered from his injury? At this rate, Mist was thinking the answer was going to be no. The Black Knight was a very present threat, and none of them stood a chance at all of fighting back against him. Mist hoped that if nothing else, they would be able to wait until Gawain was on his feet again, but there was no room to make promises about waiting for his full recovery at this point. The army was trapped between a rock and a blade, and the Black Knight would not hesitate to kill anyone else who got in his way. 

Just as he had not hesitated to nearly murder Gawain. 

“I’m sure Father will be fine,” Ike said weakly, but Mist could see the fear brewing in his eyes. Ike was terrified in a way he never had been before, and he couldn’t even voice it when Soren was there before him. “He’s a strong man, and… If anyone will be able to recover from this, then it would be him.”

“When we get back on the road again, I’m going to continue coming up with as many strategies as necessary to ensure we can make it to the capital,” Soren went on, and Mist felt her eyes go wide as she looked up at him. “We have to tighten our defenses and make sure our secrets stay that way. We can’t afford to let any information slip right now.”

Ike and Mist exchanged worried glances at that. All of a sudden, the strange aura around Soren was very recognizable… As deep, striking paranoia. He was terrified of something, but neither one of them could find the words to figure out just what it was he feared so much. Mist would have ventured a guess that it was the Black Knight, but there seemed to be something beneath the surface beyond that. She wanted to find the words to say as much, but nothing seemed to be sufficient now. Instead, she reached one hand out toward Soren, ignoring the way her fingers seemed to shake from the effort. 

“Soren, are you alright?” Ike asked, mustering together the words even when they failed Mist. “You look awfully pale.”

“I’m fine,” Soren suddenly said, his voice rough and low. He spent only a few seconds more looking at the floor of the tent before he turned on his heel and left the medical tent just as quickly as he had arrived. Mist reached after him once again, but nothing seemed to happen the way she needed it to, and all she could do was stare. 

Mist forced herself to look back to Gawain again a moment later, and she let out a slow breath. Everything was going to be fine. It may not have seemed like it just yet, but she would do anything and everything in her power to make sure it was alright. Right now, that meant looking after Gawain and making sure he made a full recovery… Well, as full of a recovery as it could have been. 

Mist couldn’t help but fear just what had Soren so tense and anxious. If it was the Black Knight, then that was a horrible sign in many ways… But she wondered if there was something more to it than that. Regardless, the Black Knight was frightening enough to her, and she didn’t know if she would ever be able to escape his daunting shadow as long as he was still out there. He was a danger to everyone in the army, and Mist wished she knew what would chase him off. 

Somehow though, Mist doubted she would be getting any answers even after her father woke up and the night gave way to day. 

~~~~~

The night was as agonizing as it was long. 

Ike stayed with Gawain for the entire night, and when he drifted off, he stayed there in the medical tent. He woke up with a pain in the base of his neck, but Ike didn’t bother with rubbing it away. There was something far more important for him to focus on right now, and it was his slumbering father on the ground before him. 

“He should make a full recovery.”

Mist’s voice cut through the haze that had settled around Ike, and he looked up to see her standing on the other side of the tent. “I talked to Rhys and Elincia,” Mist explained. “They said that he should recover in full with time. He was injured really badly, but the worst of it is over now. He won’t be able to fight for quite a while, but… That’s fine. Everything is going to be fine.”

“Good,” Ike whispered, the word coming out as a vulnerable wheeze that faded away on the breeze. “That’s good.” It wasn’t going to be easy to pull everything together after what had happened the night before. The damage of the encounter with the Black Knight was going to be long-reaching, and Ike could only hope he was able to make something of it. 

Ike knew without a shadow of a doubt that Gawain wasn’t going to be able to help with any fights for quite some time… Assuming Gawain was able to fight again at all with what had happened. The attack he had sustained had been catastrophic, and regardless of how strong Gawain was, there was only so much he could do when he had been sewn back together with healing magic. Ike would have to find a way to strategize around losing Gawain in such a horrible way, but he would be fine. They would all be fine. As long as Gawain was still alive, Ike would find a way to make it all work. 

Mist let out a slow breath as she sat down across the tent from Ike, and she began to fiddle with the hem of her skirt. “The princess said that she wanted to come in and talk to us,” Mist went on. “She didn’t know what to do about it last night, but now that she’s had a bit of time to think it all through… She said that she wanted to hear the truth from us.”

Ike’s throat seemed to close up on itself, but he forced himself to nod. Right. He still had to talk to Elincia about all of this. The truth about who he was had come out the night before, and somehow, that had only been the second most devastating thing to happen the previous night. Ike had known this was coming, but that didn’t make it any easier to face. He owed Elincia an explanation of the truth though, and Ike wasn’t going to back down just because it was going to be hard to deal with. 

“Alright,” Ike said. “Is she coming here?”

“Here I am.”

Elincia’s voice drifted in from the entrance of the tent, and Ike slowly looked up to see her wringing her hands together anxiously just in front of her chest. She refused to meet Ike’s gaze, not that he blamed her in the slightest. Ike knew he wouldn’t have been able to stand looking himself in the eyes, much less staring at someone who he knew he had hurt so badly. Ike found himself watching the space just over her shoulder so he didn’t risk looking directly at her even if she gained the courage to try and look first. 

“Elincia,” Ike whispered, the word coming out as a wheeze more than a statement about her arrival. He wanted to push himself to his feet, but his body refused to move, and all Ike could do was stare at the empty space between her cheek and shoulder while waiting for her to speak up about everything he dreaded most. She was the one who had been hurt, so it only made sense that Ike gave her the chance to start the conversation… Not that he knew how he was going to handle it when she finally found the words. 

Elincia remained still for a few seconds more, and Ike watched in his periphery as Elincia’s focus shifted from directly on Ike to Gawain’s sleeping form on the ground of the tent. She stared at him for a long while before letting out a heavy sigh. “Can we talk?” she asked. Her gaze caught on Mist for a moment. “I would like you to be here as well, Mist.”

Ike nodded. “Of course. Have a seat.” There weren’t really any places to sit in the medical tent, but Elincia didn’t seem to mind that. Instead, she sat down near Gawain’s feet, leaving her at an equal distance away from both Ike and Mist. She was just close enough to be able to hold a conversation with them, but she wasn’t so close as to betray what she was thinking. It made sense, but it still stung to think about how anxious she had become since arriving in the room. 

For a long time, silence reigned over the tent, and no one could find the words they needed to start the conversation they were dreading most but knew they needed to have. Ike forced himself to sit up a little bit straighter, not that it would help his case, before choking the words out. “So… About last night…”

“You are from Daein,” Elincia concluded, and Ike nodded slowly. “When we first met, you said that you were refugees who had been forced on the run because of the war. I assumed that to be a cover up for something greater, I will admit… It felt odd to think that you were being forced to run because of something your king did. It felt like a sign of a bad relationship with him that went beyond that you were willing to share openly.”

“There was something more going on,” Ike confirmed. “Our father… His name is actually Gawain. He introduced himself as Greil so he didn’t end up earning anyone’s suspicion, though… That didn’t really do much for us in the long run, did it?”

“He was once a member of the Four Riders,” Elincia went on, and Ike nodded once more. “But according to what you said yesterday, he has not held that position for a long time.”

“No. He left the Four Riders before Mist and I were born,” Ike told her. “Instead, he moved away from the capital to become the captain of the guard for a smaller castle elsewhere in the country. That was where he was before the war broke out. It was where all of us were working and living, as a matter of fact.”

Elincia nodded slowly, and Ike could see her mind trying to put the pieces together about what the smaller castle could have been meant to hide. After all, massive palaces only existed for the sake of keeping secrets, and Elincia was one of many hidden pieces that had been masked from the world in Crimea. “I see,” Elincia whispered. “What were you doing there? Why was he assigned to that castle?”

“There were a few nobles there that needed protecting,” Mist chimed in before Ike had the chance to fumble for his words. Mist had seemingly thought about how she was going to keep Soren’s secret ahead of time, and the excuse of there being other nobles in the villa was the best way of brushing it all under the rug. “There were a few important nobles at the villa before the war began, and they were attacked by Ashnard just before he went after Crimea. That was when the villa was seized, and we were forced to flee so we didn’t end up being captured. We went on the road, and Father decided to travel to Gallia so he could meet with the king of the beasts. The two of them were apparently old friends.”

“I see… That makes sense,” Elincia nodded. She stared down at Gawain for another few seconds and let out a thin breath. “I do not blame you for keeping the secret from me. I understand that you must have had your reasons for it. I know Titania and the rest of the mercenaries would have done something similar if they thought it would protect me. You were trying to keep anyone from chasing after you, and I cannot blame you for keeping the truth hidden so you could protect yourselves.”

“Then… You’re not upset?” Ike asked, his eyes going wide. He hadn’t known what to expect from Elincia’s reaction, but he had imagined that she would be upset with him for going so far to keep all of this hidden. He wouldn’t have been shocked by it, and he wouldn’t have been angry with her for it either. He would have been angry if he had been put in her position too. 

But Elincia didn’t seem upset at all. She confirmed it when she shook her head. “I trust all of you. I know that you are fighting in the name of Ashnard’s defeat and the restoration of Crimea. If you were truly planning to betray all of us and kill me, then you would have done it ages ago. The fact that you have stayed here by my side is proof enough of your loyalty.”

“We never wanted to hurt you,” Mist assured her. “We wanted to make sure everything was alright, and… We’ve really enjoyed having this chance to fight alongside you and the rest of the army. I know that probably doesn’t mean much coming from the children of a general of the enemy nation, but…”

“It means more than you think,” Elincia said. “You had countless opportunities to hurt me and end the war without any need for other conflict… But you never did. Ike, I named you as the leader of this army because I knew you were a good person for the job. Even now that I know where you come from and who your father is… I stand by my decision. I know I made the right choice, and if you would be alright with it… I would like you to continue to lead us to the end of the war. There is no one I would rather have commanding this army. There is no one I would rather trust the fate of Crimea with.”

Ike looked at Elincia for a long moment, and while he could still see the hurt in her eyes, he knew she was telling the truth. She wanted to move past this and continue to work with him. It wasn’t going to be easy, but Ike was willing to help her however he could. It was the least he could do after everything he had put her through. “I won’t make you regret this,” Ike vowed. “I’ll help you to make sure the war ends as soon as possible, and we’ll make sure Ashnard never hurts anyone again.”

Elincia nodded, her smile softening and growing vulnerable. “Good… I knew you had a good heart, Ike. Thank you.”

The entrance to the tent was pushed open a moment later, and Ike turned to see Titania had arrived in the medical area. She seemed considerably calmer now than she had been the night before, and Ike was glad for it. He couldn’t blame her for feeling hurt by everything that came to light the night before, but he hoped she would feel better going forward. “Ike,” Titania greeted. There was still a slight edge to her voice, but it wasn’t anywhere near as stilted or enraged as it had been the night before. Titania had appreciated being given the time to cool off, it seemed. “Mist. Princess Elincia.”

“Hello, Titania,” Elincia returned, bowing her head deeply. She was the most comfortable with Titania at the moment, and it showed in her relaxed posture. “I assume you have come here to talk about… Everything that happened last night.”

“I am,” Titania confirmed. “But before I get into my own thoughts, I need to know, Princess… What do you think of all of this?”

“I trust them,” Elincia told her. “I believe they are willing to fight for the best interests of Crimea. If they were going to betray us, then they would have done it ages ago. I believe we are safe with them.”

Titania nodded along slowly, and she let out a careful sigh. The tension melted out of her chest in an instant. “I’m glad to hear you say that,” she admitted. “I… I wanted to be able to trust them. I was just… I was hurt by everything that came out last night. I should have heard you out when you said you weren’t affiliated with Daein anymore.”

“I can’t blame you for reacting the way you did,” Ike told her. “We wanted to tell you the truth ages ago, but we didn’t know how we were supposed to do it. By the time we started to think about it in more detail, it… It felt like it was too late for us to reach out to you. I hope there’s something we can do to make this easier going forward. I hope we can make it up to you from now on.”

“If the princess trusts you, then I think that’s enough for now,” Titania said with a fragile smile. “I’m sorry for blowing up at you last night. I think it would be best if we turned over a new leaf and tried to focus on the future instead of the past from here on out.”

“We’d like that,” Mist beamed. “I’m glad you’re willing to listen to us… I know this isn’t easy, but we’re going to fight with you from here on out the same way we have been before.”

Titania nodded, and she snuck a glance at Elincia out of the corner of her eye. “I… I will admit that I have more questions about all of this, but… I get the feeling that will come out when the time is right. The moment is not right now though,” Titania said carefully, and Ike realized just what she was thinking about. Titania had heard the night before that Soren was the prince of Daein. Ike appreciated her not going out of her way to reveal the truth to the world just yet, but he knew they were going to have to talk about it sooner or later. Something like this wouldn’t be able to stay hidden forever. 

A few seconds passed in tense silence, and Elincia cleared her throat. “If you do not mind my asking… Where is Soren?” she asked. “I assume he was involved with all of this, but… I haven’t seen him around the camp at all today.”

“I… I’m not sure,” Ike admitted. It had been a while since Soren last came through the medical tent. He had come by the night before, but after that… Ike supposed that he wouldn’t have known it if Soren had come by while he was asleep, but he figured someone would have at least seen Soren if he did that. The only conclusion Ike could draw was that Soren hadn’t come by at all, and Ike had to wonder why he was isolating himself so much. 

“I wonder where he is too,” Titania frowned. “I… I have a lot to talk about with him when the moment is right.”

“I have a plan.”

Soren’s voice cut through the conversation, but he didn’t acknowledge at all that the others involved had been talking about him before he arrived. Instead, Soren burst into the tent, practically pushing Titania out of the way in his pursuit of the floor. Soren sat down and dropped a stack of papers on the ground in front of him. Everyone was too shocked by his sudden outburst to properly react, instead staring down at him in muted surprise. 

“I have our next strategy for when we can keep moving,” Soren announced. “We’ll be cutting through the Talrega territory of Daein to make it to the capital a little bit sooner. It’s going to be dangerous at this time of year, but we should be able to get through it.” Soren didn’t look up to meet anyone’s gaze, but he paused just long enough to measure how they were going to respond in the silence. “Assuming there are no objections to that, of course.”

“I… I guess that’s alright,” Ike said, admittedly unsure of how he was meant to respond to something like that. Soren was frazzled, and the paranoia from the night before seemed to have grown deeper and greater than Ike had ever thought possible. “But are you alright, Soren? You seem to have a lot on your mind… If something is wrong, then you can tell us, you know.”

“I’m fine,” Soren cut in a bit too quickly. “We should just stay focused on everything to come. We’re going to have to keep moving soon. Be ready for everything we have to do. We wouldn’t want the Black Knight or anyone else unsavory to catch up with us because we paused.”

Soren left the medical tent a moment later, and Ike reached after him with a futile hand. He didn’t understand what was bothering Soren… And somehow, he doubted he would understand any time soon. 

In but a single day, Ike’s world had crumbled, and he wished he knew how to put it back together.

Chapter Text

Ike had known everything was going to have to move on, but that didn’t mean he was ready for it. 

He had been ready to stay there in the same spot for as long as he had to in order to make sure Gawain was alright. There was the risk of the Black Knight catching up to him and the rest of the army, yes, but Ike figured he would be able to fight him off with the rest of the army there to back him up. They could band together to make sure the Black Knight didn’t get the chance to hurt Gawain or anyone else. Ike knew that was a foolish thought since the Black Knight had blessed armor that would block out most blows, but he was still willing to hope that everything was going to be alright. It felt like all he could cling to anymore. 

Even so, Ike wasn’t able to stay where the battle between the Black Knight and Gawain had happened. Soren was firm that they would have to keep moving to keep the Black Knight from catching up to them, and while Ike knew he was right, the thought still scared him. Rhys assured him that Gawain was finally well enough to be moved, and if they were careful, they would be able to keep him moving forward. 

Still, Ike couldn’t really feel confident in what he was hearing as long as Gawain was still unconscious. Rhys said that his body was recovering in the best way it could after everything that happened, but Ike was still worried. He would have given just about anything to hear his father’s voice and see him smiling the way he had before all of this happened. Ike yearned for Gawain to scratch at the top of his head with his massive hands… But Gawain’s fingers never moved, and he remained stubbornly unconscious. Ike wanted it to change, but nothing ever shifted when he went to visit his father in the medical tent. 

Soren’s plans for the next few battles went off without any issues. Ike had known Soren’s strategies were strong, but he was glad to see everything unfold the way he had hoped. Soren’s strategy guided them toward Talrega, but first, they had to fight through a faction of Daein forces that was partnered with the king of Kilvas. Ike still couldn’t say he understood Naesala in the slightest, but he supposed he didn’t need to. Naesala had been convinced to leave the field by Reyson, and that meant the raven laguz all left Daein behind as well. Ike had a headache just thinking about Naesala’s involvement in all of this, but at least he didn’t have to think about it anymore. Reyson vowed that Naesala wouldn’t be intervening in the war effort from then on, and Ike was choosing to trust him. He couldn’t afford to have anything else to worry about. 

After all, Ike had something else he was forced to spend all his time thinking about: Soren. When Ike wasn’t worrying about keeping the army afloat or Gawain’s injury, Ike was worrying about Soren. Somehow, Soren’s insomnia had gotten worse, and the sage had never really had a strong sleep schedule to begin with. Soren chose to sleep whenever he wanted to, and most of the time, that kept him up late into the night working on anything that caught his interest. Ike had grown used to it over the years, but something about it felt different. Nothing had quite been the same since the night Gawain was struck down by the Black Knight, and Ike wished he knew what to say or do to make it easier. 

That wasn’t to say Ike hadn’t been trying. In fact, Ike had tried to discuss the subject with Soren a few times, but it never seemed to go anywhere. Soren just wanted to keep him out, and Ike hated it more than anything. He wanted to be there for his friend, but he couldn’t figure out how to close the distance that had grown between them. It reminded him too much of Begnion for his liking, and Ike knew without a shadow of a doubt that he couldn’t go back to the way things had been in Begnion. He deserved better than that, and so did Soren. They needed to be honest… 

But how could Ike press Soren into honesty? Something about Soren’s silence felt paranoid now in a way it hadn’t been before. Back in Begnion, Soren had been antsy and worried about his position in the Daein nobility and his potential connections to Goldoa. Now, he seemed afraid of just about everything that could have moved in his direction. Even Ike was enough to make Soren jump if he was in a bad enough headspace. Ike didn’t understand any of it, but he didn’t know what he was meant to do to make it easier either. Soren just wasn’t letting him in, and Ike couldn’t spend every hour of every day pressing him. 

Ike was fully aware that Soren knew he was worried. Of course Soren knew. Nobody knew Ike better than Soren did, and Soren was fully aware that Ike was going to push him for the truth if they shared space for any longer than a few minutes. Soren stayed up late and kept away from their tent until he was sure Ike was asleep so he could avoid any conversation he wasn’t equipped to handle. It made sense, Ike supposed, but it didn’t make him feel any better about the situation. 

After the battle with the Kilvas forces ended, the next destination for the army was Talrega. Ike had grown sick of the nauseating routine of starting to march, talking about the plans for the war, ending the march for the day, checking in on Gawain, failing to help Soren out of his shell, and then going to sleep. Ike wanted something to change whether that be through Gawain being pulled from his unconsciousness or Soren finally telling him what was going on behind his eyes. Ike would have even taken Titania deciding she finally wanted to talk about what she heard on the night of Gawain’s fight with the Black Knight. She hadn’t mentioned yet that Soren was the prince of Daein to anyone, but Ike knew it was just a matter of time. Titania didn’t know how to approach the subject since she had no idea how to reach out to Soren right now. Ike could certainly relate even if he wished more than anything that he didn’t understand her fears in the slightest. 

When the day of the Talrega battle came, Ike saw Mist and Jill talking about everything to come. Talrega was Jill’s home, and she wasn’t going to have an easy time returning to her home as an enemy. Ike would have understood if she decided to step away from the army and return to Daein, but she was firm in her resolve to keep fighting for Crimea. Jill believed this was for the best, and she wasn’t going to be deterred by returning to her old home… Or so she claimed. There was only one way to really say for sure, and the truth waited on the other side of floodwaters that grew higher as the minutes crawled on. 

Through some miracle–or perhaps simply Soren’s genius strategies–Ike and the rest of the army managed to pull through. Jill’s father was waiting for them at the other end of the Talrega territory, and he fell in battle just as he had lived: by remaining loyal to the nation he had come to love so deeply. Jill crumpled into despair after his passing, but she did not betray the Crimean army. Instead, she simply sobbed into Mist’s arms. Mist was there to comfort her however she could, but nothing ever felt like it would be enough as long as Shiharam was no longer there. Both father and daughter had chosen their paths, and they would not dare to betray them now. 

Seeing Jill grieve for the loss of her father made Ike miss Gawain even more. He was recovering, and Rhys was even sitting out of their major battles to make sure he healed as much as possible. Ike knew it was just a matter of time before Gawain woke up, but he was getting impatient. How could he not be? They had been on the run from the Black Knight for quite some time, and Gawain hadn’t so much as stirred. 

Though Ike supposed he could be grateful for that much: the Black Knight hadn’t come after them again. He left the field when Ike and Soren confronted him that night, but he hadn’t returned since then. Ike knew better than to rely on that as a sign of peace rather than a sign of his good luck, but he still yearned to feel secure in the situation. Maybe the Black Knight wouldn’t come after them again. It was a vain hope, Ike knew, but it felt like all he was really able to do right now. 

After the fight in Talrega, the army settled down for the night to prepare for their next stretch. They were getting closer to the capital of Daein. In a perfect world, this was where they would find Ashnard waiting for them, and the war would be over before he realized there was danger at all. Ike didn’t know what Ashnard was thinking at the moment, but he was willing to wager a guess that Ashnard didn’t realize how dire his circumstances had become. There was no way a man like Ashnard, who believed in his own strength above all else, would ever think a small ragtag army would be able to threaten him… Not that the army was really small anymore. With the entire force of the Begnion troops behind them, Ike’s team had grown immensely in strength and size, and they were going to grow strong enough to consume Ashnard’s bloodlust soon enough. He was sure of it. 

Soren’s stress only seemed to ramp up the closer they got to the capital. Ike couldn’t say he was shocked by that, but it still stung to know that his close friend was struggling so much when there was nothing he could do to help him. Soren deserved to have someone there by his side to help him through all of this, but he didn’t know where to start when it came to opening up to others, so he simply didn’t bother. 

Ike wanted to find a way to change that, but Soren never stuck around for longer than a few minutes at once. His strategies were still strong, but Ike figured that was because Soren stayed up all night trying to work out any of the potential problems they held. It left a pit in his stomach, and he wished he knew what he was meant to do to chase it all away. 

Balancing everything was getting harder to manage as the days passed by, and two days after Talrega, Ike settled in his tent for the night. Soren wasn’t going to be coming back for a while, Ike assumed. Ike wished he knew where to look to find him, but Soren wasn’t relying on his regular hiding spots. Soren knew Ike would try to find him if he gave him the chance, so he was hiding in a spot he knew he wouldn’t be found. Soren was great at thinking through everything he did, and Ike wished he found it charming rather than frustrating at the moment. 

Just as Ike started to consider going out to search for Soren, the flap to his tent was pushed open. He recognized the pale hand peering out through the fabric before he could wonder why they hadn’t called out for his permission to enter. Ike froze and looked up at Soren, and the sage froze when looking at him in return. Ike wondered when the last time they had stared at each other like this had been. He hated just how rocky and complicated everything had become. He would have done anything to set it all back to the way it had been before all of this spiraled out of control, but Ike knew that wasn’t going to be possible. Instead, all he could do was stare up at Soren and hope that his wordless shock was enough to convey how desperately he wanted to help. 

“Ike,” Soren managed to say, the word coming out soft and vulnerable. Soren blinked a few times to try and drag himself back into his body, but it only halfway worked. He was still shaken after looking at Ike so suddenly, and it was clear as could be. “I should be on my way. I have a strategy to work out before we make it to our destination.”

“We haven’t run into any threats for a while though,” Ike corrected him. Technically, they had known they were going to fight at Talrega, so that wasn’t really them ‘running into’ it by accident. They hadn’t been caught by surprise because their reports were accurate enough to keep them out of danger from any Daein ambushes. “You don’t need to worry about it.”

“But we could be attacked at any moment. We’re in enemy territory now,” Soren told him. He didn’t bother to elaborate that their home had turned against them so completely because they had turned against it first. Ike blinked up at him, but Soren didn’t give him the chance to say what he hadn’t first. “I need to be ready for anything that could come. I’ll see you another time. I just needed to grab–”

Soren reached one hand down to pick up a map where it was resting beside his bedroll, but Ike was ready for it. He grabbed Soren’s wrist, and the sage froze like this was the first time he had been touched in days. It wouldn’t have shocked Ike at all if that was the truth, and it sent fresh terror racing through his mind and body. “What are you doing?” Soren whispered, fighting to keep his voice even. “Let go. I have to go and keep planning for our next move.”

“I know you do, but… I’m worried about you, Soren,” Ike told him. “You’ve been pushing yourself constantly for ages. I can’t just sit back here knowing that you’re going beyond your limits. Ever since the night the Black Knight attacked my father, it seems like you’re focused on something else at every moment of the day.” Ike’s grip relaxed slightly, but he still didn’t leave enough room for Soren to pull away from him. “I don’t want you to feel like you have to hide all of this from me. You can talk to me about anything. You know that. I don’t want you to isolate yourself anymore. Please, Soren… Just talk to me.”

For a long moment, Soren looked like he was considering it. Ike looked at Soren closely, and he winced at the sight of the dark skin tearing at the space just beneath Soren’s eyes. He hadn’t been sleeping well for ages, and his body was starting to feel the full weight of that pain. Soren’s hand was shaking slightly where Ike was holding it, and Ike had to wonder if Soren would have given way beneath his stress completely if he was rubbed even slightly in the wrong direction. Soren had never looked this deeply exhausted and afraid before, and it terrified Ike. 

“I… I can’t talk about it,” Soren finally settled on saying, though that only made the weight in Ike’s chest feel heavier. “I don’t know where he’s at right now, but–”

“He?” Ike cut in, and Soren immediately froze, realizing just what he had said a second too late to hold the word back. “Who are you talking about? Is it the Black Knight?”

“I-I… It’s not…” Soren said, realizing once again that he had said the wrong thing as soon as he denied it was the Black Knight. Soren winced and relaxed in Ike’s grasp. The fight had left his eyes in an instant, and Soren fell bonelessly to the ground of the tent. He wanted to keep pushing for Ike to let him go, but he simply couldn’t do it anymore. 

“If someone is trying to threaten you, then you should talk about it,” Ike insisted, his heart starting to race in his chest. “You can’t expect it to get better without talking about it. I don’t know who is trying to keep you from talking, Soren, but I’m not going to let them get away with it. Just give me the word, and I’ll handle it.”

“I don’t want the truth to come out,” Soren whispered, his voice weak and shaking. “If I say something, then he’s going to tell everyone who I am and the reason you’re here. I don’t know if I can stand facing that. It’s going to ruin things even more than things have already been ruined by the Black Knight. If anyone realizes who I am, then they’re not going to trust us at all.”

Ike’s eyes went wide. Someone was trying to keep Soren quiet by using the truth of his heritage as leverage over his head… But who could it have been? Titania was the only one who knew the truth to Ike’s knowledge, and she didn’t seem to be the one responsible for this. Soren felt at ease around Titania, at least to an extent, and Ike would have been able to tell if she was the guilty party. 

But if that was the truth, then had someone else figured it out without Ike realizing it? If someone else knew the truth, then why were they keeping it a secret? What reason did they have to keep Soren from talking? There was confusion in Soren’s eyes when he spoke of what was happening, and Ike felt dread rise in his stomach at the thought. 

“Everything is going to be fine,” Ike found himself saying. “I know you’re afraid of talking about it, but we’re going to be fine. Everyone here already knows about who I am. They know about Mist and my father too. That didn’t completely break everything we’ve been building toward. It might have been complicated, and things are harder now than they were before, but… We can find a way to fix this too. We can find a solution to it. I’m sure of it.”

“But there’s something different about your secret compared to mine,” Soren pressed. “You’re the child of a former member of the Four Riders. I’m the prince of the enemy nation, and if too many people figure that out, then they’re going to trust you even less. I can’t let that happen, Ike. We’ve fought too hard to make it this far, and I can’t let this fall apart. This is our chance to stop Ashnard, and it’ll all go up in smoke the instant the truth comes out.”

“But we can handle it together,” Ike reiterated. “We’ve made it this far, and I know we’re going to be able to fix it going forward too. I need you to have faith in me, Soren. I wouldn’t be saying all of this unless I believed it, and I really think we’re going to be alright.”

Soren remained quiet for a few moments longer, and when he next moved, his entire body shook with a small sob. “I… I can’t tell everyone who I am,” Soren whispered. “I can’t risk them reacting badly. This isn’t just about the war, you know. I feel like this is the best place I’ve ever been. People don’t hate me or have other feelings about me because of who I am. I can just be normal for once, and I… I can’t go back to feeling like I’m always on a pedestal. I can’t go back to not feeling like people think of me as human. This is the best support system I’ve ever had, and I don’t want to lose it. I can’t lose it, Ike.”

Ike found himself falling still as Soren continued to speak, and as much as he wanted to reassure Soren that everything would be alright… He couldn’t blame him for being anxious. After all, Ike would have been anxious about this too if he had been in Soren’s position. He had been anxious about talking about the truth behind his history, and he didn’t even have the baggage attached of being the ruler of the enemy nation. That was another bag of worms entirely, and it wasn’t one Ike knew how to handle. He didn’t know if he ever would be able to face it the way Soren needed him to. 

Instead, Ike let out a slow breath. “I’m not going to force you to tell me anything you don’t want to,” he relented. “But when you feel like you’re ready to talk, then you can come to me. I don’t want you to forget that just because you’re afraid. You don’t need to be terrified of this forever. You can come and talk to me about anything. I’m here for you. I promise.”

Soren stared at the spot where his hand met Ike’s in a gentle touch. Ike was still holding Soren’s wrist, the grip not tight but still enough to keep Soren rooted to the spot. “I… I appreciate it,” Soren forced himself to say. He continued to watch Ike’s hand, waiting for him to release him. When Ike finally let his fingers uncurl, Soren pulled away with another heavy sigh. “Thank you, Ike.”

Ike stared after Soren when the sage retreated from the tent and out into the rest of the camp. Ike had a million things he wished he had said and a million ways he wished he had handled the situation… But he knew there was no way to undo his mistakes now. He was going to find the truth behind what was bothering Soren soon enough. He didn’t care how long he had to fight or how much effort it took. Any fight was worth it as long as Soren was waiting at the other end of the battlefield. 

Ike just wished Soren was just as willing to talk to him in return. 

~~~~~

Against all odds, the army arrived at the palace of Daein. 

Ike hadn’t ever seen the castle itself. He had heard about it many times, but he hadn’t ever been given the chance to see the palace with his own two eyes. The villa had always been his home, and he vastly preferred it to the castle stretching out before him. The castle felt unknowable in a million tiny ways, and Ike could only hope he was ready to face them. 

“This is it.”

Soren’s voice cut through Ike’s thoughts, and he turned to see that his liege had come to stand beside him. Soren still looked completely exhausted, his eyes narrowed with determination and barely hiding a rage that boiled beneath the surface. He had no plans of telling Ike just why he had been so distant recently, and it was written all over his face. Ike wanted to push the point, but he already knew there would be nothing to show for it. Soren was incredibly stubborn when he wanted to be, and right now, all Soren wanted to do was make sure nobody could get to the bottom of his secrets. 

“Inside the castle… We should finally find my mother,” Soren went on. “The rumors we heard at the start of the war said that she was being held hostage by Ashnard. If all goes well, then we’re going to find both her and Ashnard within this castle… And just like that, everything is going to come to an end.”

Ike felt electricity surge beneath his skin. That was right. This was the end of the war as a whole, assuming all went according to plan during the battle. They would find Ashnard, kill him, and lay all of this to rest. It barely felt real, and Ike didn’t know if he believed it. They hadn’t run into any of the Four Riders yet aside from the Black Knight, and that barely felt like it counted because of how the Black Knight hadn’t really fought them so much as attacked Gawain and then disappeared as quickly as he showed up. It was strange to think that the king was going to fall before the rest of his commanders, but Ike supposed that was fine. Cutting off the head of the beast at the heart of Daein’s cruelty was as good a way as any to end it. 

Even beyond the thought that none of the Four Riders had been involved up to this point, Ike struggled to think of this as the end as he knew he should have. If this was really the end, then he would have felt like he had gotten more closure from the situation with Elincia. Ike would have felt better about the fact that Elincia didn’t know for sure who Soren was. Ike wouldn’t have thought constantly about his father still being sound asleep because of the damage he had sustained during the fight against the Black Knight. This didn’t feel like the end Ike needed it to be because there was so much that had yet to be resolved. It may have been the end of the war, but it was not going to be the end of the fight. 

“There won’t be any more hiding this after the war ends,” Soren murmured, something like fear creeping into his voice. He was gripping tightly at one of his tomes like he thought grasping it would be enough to pull him out of the terror he knew was waiting for him on the other end of this conflict. “Everyone is going to know the truth of everything we’ve been hiding.”

“Are you alright with that?” Ike asked, turning to look at Soren in full. “If you want to talk about who you are before we go in, then I’m sure the princess will be willing to listen to you. She would probably be happy to hear that you’re willing to discuss it, as a matter of fact.”

Soren’s fingers tightened where he was grabbing at the tome. “Let’s go.” He didn’t give Ike a moment to think about what his bluntness could have meant before he started walking toward the castle briskly. Ike could hear the snow crunching beneath Soren’s feet to prove that he was stomping in rage, but he didn’t know how to reach out and close the gap between them. 

Even if he wanted to, there was no time for it now. Ike would have done anything to sit Soren down and talk about it, but he would have better luck after this fight ended… Or so he was hoping. All of them wanted to make sure Ashnard was taken care of before he had the chance to hurt anyone, and Ike was one of the people who was most excited to see Ashnard fall. Almedha would be found and set free if all went well, and Ike would finally be able to reunite his friend with the mother he had sought for so long. 

The truth about who Soren was would end up coming out then too, wouldn’t it? Almedha was the only one who would be able to fill Soren in on the truth of his heritage as one of the Branded, and if she was there in the castle, then that would be it. Everything was going to come rushing out. Ike didn’t know if Soren would have called himself ready for it right now, but it was too late to stop the situation from pushing ever forward. They were going to have to see this battle through. 

And Ike was ready. He was determined to finish this war as soon as he could. He would return to his father as a hero of war even if it felt like he had fallen painfully short of accomplishing what he truly sought. Gawain would wake up into a world of peace, and Ike would be able to say he had ended a war. He didn’t know what would happen after Ashnard was killed and eliminated from the continental stage, but Ike would cross that bridge when he got to it. 

For the time being, Ike had a battle to win. He reached for his blade and turned to look at the rest of his army behind him where they were all preparing their own weapons for the battle to come. He never would have made it this far without their support… And now, he would support them to the end of this war. Ashnard had to be waiting within the castle, and as soon as he was found, Ike would find a way to kill him. He wasn’t entirely sure of how he was going to get through Ashnard’s impenetrable armor, but that was a problem for another time. Ike would find a way to slay a man who had been thought to be unkillable. If it was for the sake of defending Tellius, then Ike would do just about anything. 

And once the war was over, Ike would find a way to track down the Black Knight and every other general of Daein that had made this possible. He would be declared a traitor by some, but he didn’t care. If this was what it took to bring the world to peace, then it was worth it. Almedha would be there to guide the country down the right path, and Soren… Soren would do what he had to. 

Ike would not let himself regret a moment of it. He was in far too deep for regrets anyway. 

Chapter Text

The castle was full of enemies. 

Ike hadn’t expected anything else. If there was ever going to be a battle filled to the brim with foes, it was going to be the one that would end the war once and for all. Ike had known this was coming, and he was ready for it. It didn’t matter what any of these Daein soldiers did. He was going to win the battle, and they would be cast aside if they decided to not retreat. 

Ike couldn’t shake the feeling that something about it was odd though. As he made his way through the halls of the castle, he found himself searching for any signs of the Four Riders of Daein. Surely at least one of them had to be there. Ashnard was a powerful fighter, and he was more than capable of holding his own in a fight, but he had to realize just how foolish it would be to face an entire army without any of his best generals there to stand by him. Any of the Four Riders being there would have made sense, and yet… Ike saw none of them. He didn’t recognize the green hair of Petrine, the stoic frown of Bryce, the strange phantom of the Four Riders’ newest member, or the terrifying dark armor of the Black Knight. He would have known it if he had fought them, right? It didn’t matter that he had never met them before. Soren would have said something, and he would have been able to pick them out from a regular soldier anyway. Surely they would have announced who they were before they charged off to fight?

But no. Instead, the only notable soldier Ike found in the enemy forces was a general by the name of Tauroneo. He was a former member of the Four Riders, and as soon as he saw the Crimean army, he laid down his arms. He did not want to continue fighting for Daein as it was now. Tauroneo believed that the nation had fallen apart because of the recent battle, and Tauroneo refused to fight in the name of a country that could do better than this. If Ike had to guess, he would have said that Tauroneo could have been the one who had been pushed out of the group by the arrival of the newest member who Ike still couldn’t put a name to. 

Once Tauroneo had been convinced to join the Crimean army though, there was only one thing left to do: go after Ashnard. The doors to the throne room were locked tight, but Ike was fine with that. If Ashnard wanted to put an extra barrier between himself and the attacking army, then so be it. Ike was more than fine with tearing the doors apart. He and Titania worked together to slash the doors apart, and the wood splintered before collapsing onto the ground as a bitter memory. Once the entryway to the door had been opened in full, Ike looked up, fully prepared to see Ashnard on the throne. “Ashnard! Show yourself!”

But he saw no such thing. 

Instead, Ike was met with the sight of a Goldoan dragon. She was pink in color and fully transformed. She was massive, taking up nearly the throne room vertically where she stood in front of the throne. Ike had to crane his neck back to see her in full, and he felt his eyes go wide. Ashnard wasn’t there at all. Of course he wasn’t there. He wouldn’t have just given the Crimean army the chance to fight him without having to go through any of his strongest generals first. This had all been a setup from the beginning. Ashnard was long gone, though Ike had no idea where he was meant to be. 

That would have to be a question for after the battle though. The dragon spoke before Ike had the chance to wonder too much about what was going on. “I’ve been waiting for you,” she said, her voice echoing throughout the throne room. “You are General Ike, are you not?”

“How did… Who are you?” Ike demanded, his knuckles growing white from the force with which he was gripping his sword. His mind was racing for a million reasons, but he couldn’t bring himself to voice any of them. Ashnard had set them all up, and he felt like a fool for not seeing it sooner. 

“My name is Ena. By the orders of the king, I am the protector of this capital,” the dragon replied simply. There was something resigned about her voice, and it struck Ike strangely. He felt almost like he wasn’t meant to be hearing her speak at all, and he couldn’t even begin to fathom why. 

But now wasn’t the time to ask questions. Frustration boiled up in Ike’s stomach before spreading up to his chest. “Withdraw. I’ve no desire to fight a useless battle with you. It’s Ashnard I’m after.”

“I regret to inform you that the king is not here,” Ena answered. “The king and the main body of the Daein army remain in Crimea, where they have been since it fell.”

“What are you saying?” Ike demanded. “The king has abandoned the capital?”

Ena remained quiet for a long moment, taking in a deep breath before letting it out. The very air in the room seemed to shake from the force of the movement. “I share your desire to see this conflict end. So rather than see you travel to Crimea to fight Ashnard, I felt it would be much faster for me to defeat you and your army here. Don't you agree?”

“That’s one way to look at it,” Ike hummed. He leveled his blade in her direction, but Ena didn’t seem bothered by it at all. She looked down at the sword, but nothing like fear ever blossomed in her gaze. “The problem is that I’ll never let you do as you please with Crimea!”

Ena’s eyes fell shut. “We cannot have it both ways. We both want what is in our own interest, and that is why we have conflict. If neither one of us will yield, our conflict will continue until only the stronger of us remains. I have my own reasons for fighting… And I will see you fall.”

The battle sparked anew with those words, and each member of Ike’s main force spilled into the throne room as quickly as they could. There were a handful of soldiers stationed there alongside Ena, but Ike didn’t see as many as he would have expected. All of this had been set up for a reason. The Daein forces were stationed tightly throughout the castle with the hope that they would be enough to stop the Crimean liberation as it marched toward the throne room. If the other soldiers of Daein failed, then there would be a trap waiting for the Crimean forces at the end of their journey. None of them had ever been forced to fight against a dragon of Goldoa before, and they likely never would again after this battle ended. Ena was the perfect way to surprise them and make sure this battle ended swiftly. 

Ike refused to let Ena be the one who stopped all of this though. He had been fighting for too long to give anyone the chance to keep him from ending the war. Ike had been right to think that battle in Daein’s capital wasn’t going to be the end of the war in full. He would have other steps to take to ensure peace returned to Tellius, but first, he had to finish this battle. If Ena insisted on standing in his way, then Ike would make sure she met the fate she had to. 

Ena didn’t seem to want to fight as much as Ike would have expected though. He supposed he shouldn’t have expected anything from a battle like this, especially since Ashnard had seemingly abandoned his own capital city, but it shocked him. Ena was fighting more out of obligation, and he could see it in her eyes. Ena wasn’t trying as hard as she could have been. There was something about her that seemed almost… Tired. She had been exhausted since long before she stepped on the field, and there was nothing anyone would be able to do to bring her back from it. Her fate had already been sealed. 

Even when it seemed like Ena was holding back, she was no slouch in terms of combat. Ike could say without a shadow of a doubt that he hoped he never had to even think of fighting another dragon from Goldoa again. Ena was already making this battle far harder than anyone else had before she appeared. She was challenging to face, and it didn’t seem to matter how many hits she took. The fact of the matter was that Ena was a massive dragon, and most attacks seemed to bounce off her scales ineffectively. Ike had heard that the dragons of Goldoa stayed out of most conflicts, and he was glad for that now. He didn’t think he would be able to fight off another dragon if it ever came to that for some reason. 

Ena’s energy wore down with time though, and after more close calls than Ike was comfortable with, she was defeated. Ena slumped over in her dragon form before her body began to glow. In a matter of seconds, she returned to her humanlike form. She barely managed to stay on her feet, holding herself up on the throne with gritted teeth. Ena had taken a particularly brutal hit to her abdomen, and blood was starting to seep out between her fingers. She was still on her feet, but it was clear that wouldn’t be true for too much longer. 

Ike took a step toward Ena to speak with her, but he didn’t get the chance to push the words out. Instead, something dark darted in and out of his periphery, and Ike realized it was Soren. The sage came to stand just in front of Ena, his eyes narrowed with determination. “I need you to tell me,” Soren began. “Where is my mother?”

Ena looked up at Soren slowly, pressing her hand a bit closer to her injury to try and stem the flow of blood. “The queen is not here,” Ena told him. “She is in the castle of Crimea alongside Ashnard.”

Soren’s eyes widened, and Ike felt fresh dread rush through him. Of course Almedha wasn’t there. Why in the world would Ashnard leave her there if he was planning on spending all of his time in the castle of Crimea? Almedha wasn’t just any old prisoner; she was important to him, and Ashnard was going to want to keep an eye on her after she had made sure of Soren’s escape. “Why?” Soren asked, desperation seeping into his voice. “What does he need her for?”

Ena looked past Soren, her eyes falling on the door. She seemed to see something that she had been looking for, and a moment later, she took off running. Ike was impressed with her speed given her injury, but he was too shocked to go after her. 

Soren was even more surprised, and he whirled around to face Ena as she retreated. “Hey!” Soren yelled, his voice echoing in the cramped space of the throne room. “Get back here! Answer me!”

Ike was the first to remember to move, and he ran for the door to see if he could find Ena. He looked in every direction, but he couldn’t see her at all. She had been waiting for the right moment to run off and try to escape. Ike didn’t know how she was certain she would be able to get away, but he could only assume that had been part of her plan. If everyone was in the throne room, then she just had to worry about running out of a single room before she was able to put some distance between them. Ike didn’t understand any of it, but he could say with almost complete certainty that this was what she had wanted. 

“We have to go after her!” Soren barked at anyone who was willing to listen. “She has to be around here somewhere!”

Titania hadn’t moved at all since the end of the battle. Instead, she was staring at Soren in shock, and Ike could already tell what she was thinking. Titania hadn’t asked about Soren’s identity since the Black Knight first came after Gawain, but she had most certainly been wondering about it. His words to Ena only confirmed her suspicions. Soren was Ashnard’s son even if it seemed impossible, and his mother–the mysterious queen of Daein–had been taken for the sake of Ashnard’s ambitions. 

Titania finally snapped out of her trance when Oscar asked for her orders. She nodded and gestured to the door with the tip of her axe. “See if you can find her,” Titania instructed. “We should search the rest of the castle too to see if we can find anyone hiding in the shadows.”

That suggestion lit a new fire in Soren’s eyes, and he wasted no time in darting out into the hallway. Ike trailed after him, already guessing where Soren was headed. Soren needed to know if Ena was lying, and if he couldn’t find Ena directly, then he was going to search the prisons to see if Almedha truly was gone. Ike knew the chances of Almedha being there were slim, but he didn’t bother with saying this to Soren. He was just as sure that Soren knew the truth, and hearing it from an outside tongue would only make him spiral more. 

Ike followed Soren down into the prison beneath the palace. Soren blended into the darkness, but he didn’t care at all for the lack of light. Soren looked behind every set of bars and around every corner to see if he could find even a trace of Almedha’s presence. Slowly but surely, Soren’s adrenaline rush seemed to wear off, and the force with which he had been pushing himself died away. He knew he was going to find nothing. He simply wasn’t ready to accept that this reality was going to keep him from seeing his mother for even longer. 

“I’m sorry,” Ike whispered when Soren finally came to a stop in the middle of a hallway. Soren tilted his head up toward the ceiling, trying and failing to keep his tears from rushing down his cheeks. “I wish there was something I could do, but… We know where she is now. Ena said she’s in Crimea’s castle. That means we’re going to find her when we go after Ashnard. That’s where we’re going next. We’ll find her there. I know it.”

“But I…” Soren trailed off and looked over to Ike, and the two met eyes. Soren looked less like the tactician of an army and more like a scared child all of a sudden. Soren just wanted to see his mother again, but the world was fighting to make sure he wasn’t given that chance. This entire time, he had only wanted to reunite with Almedha, but the trip to the Daein palace had been for nothing. She wasn’t there, and neither was Ashnard. They had thought this would be the end, but it had turned out to be only the beginning. 

“We’re getting closer now,” Ike reminded Soren gently. “We know what we’re doing, Soren. We’ve made it this far, and we’re not going to let anyone stop us from seeing this through. I promise you.”

Soren took a few long moments to think through Ike’s words before he allowed himself to nod. It was clear by the tension between his eyes that he didn’t entirely believe what he was hearing, but Soren didn’t say it aloud. Instead, he let out a thin sigh. “Alright,” he agreed thickly. “Whatever you say.”

~~~~~

The rest of the castle was just as empty as the prisons had been, and there were no signs of any enemy forces still lingering in the shadows. Ashnard truly had abandoned the palace a long time ago. All of his personal effects were long gone. Ike should have known this was how it was going to end. Of course Ashnard was going to want to spend his time in the empty husk of the kingdom he had just taken over. What reason did Ashnard have to stay in the same nation that he had been in for the rest of his life? He would vastly prefer to enjoy everything that waited for him in his new home… The shell of Crimea that he had made his. 

Since the castle was so empty though, that left the Crimean resistance with a special place to rest for the night. They were going to stay in the palace while they came up with their plan for how they were going to proceed. The rest of the war would be waiting for them when they started their march toward Crimea. Soon, they would have to worry about getting closer to Ashnard and taking him down all over again. Ike was ready for it even if he didn’t feel like he was happy with the arrangement. He would have vastly preferred to think about just about anything else, but he didn’t have much of a choice. At least this would lead to the end of the war. He was glad with that even if the rest of the world was frustrating now. 

Ike let out a heavy sigh as he sat down on the bed in the room he and Soren were splitting for the night. Soren wasn’t there, off pacing outside the castle while he tried to think through his thoughts now that he knew Almedha was still with his father. Ike was tempted to go after Soren and try to talk to him again, but Ike figured Soren needed a bit of time to cool off. Once Soren’s rage had been eased a little bit, Ike was going to talk to him again and see if there was something he could do to make him feel better. Maybe Soren just needed someone to listen to him when he talked about how wound up he was. It was as good an option as any, Ike thought. 

Ike stared up at the ceiling overhead with a frown. He was going to have to go and visit his father that night too. He had made a routine of checking up on Gawain to see if he was feeling any better each night. Ike was starting to wonder why he even bothered with it. Gawain’s situation and condition hadn’t changed in a long time, and Ike still went to see how he was doing each time. Ike hoped today would be the night that something finally changed, but he couldn’t be sure. He would have to be patient, he supposed. 

Ike quickly grew tired of just thinking about going to see Gawain though, so he pushed himself to his feet and shuffled off to the infirmary. Rhys was still looking after Gawain, and the priest continued to insist that Gawain was getting better with each passing day. Soon enough, Gawain would wake up, and he would make a full recovery. He wouldn’t be able to fight for another few months, but he would return to his full strength one day. Ike was glad Rhys could find it in his heart to believe that this was all going to be alright. Ike couldn’t help but doubt it each time he thought about the situation for too long at once. 

Gawain was still asleep when Ike arrived. Rhys had stepped out for a few minutes, meaning Ike was largely alone with his father. Titania and Mist were both there though, and it seemed like they had been looking after Gawain in Rhys’ place. Titania’s eyes were distant, and Ike could tell she was assessing the logistics of talking to Soren about what he had told Ena. Soren wasn’t in a mood to talk with anyone right now though, and Titania could see it, so she was keeping her distance for a little while longer. The moment to speak with him would come soon, but it had not arrived just yet. 

Ike wanted to ask Titania and Mist how they were feeling about the situation with Ashnard being in Crimea, but he couldn’t find the words he needed to speak up. Instead, he settled on simply looking at Gawain’s sleeping form. Gawain would have seen it coming that Ashnard had moved to settle down in the castle of Crimea instead of waiting for an attack in the Daein palace. Gawain knew the king better than any of them on account of having once been one of the Four Riders. He would be able to explain everything to them if they asked… But nobody could ask him anything right now. 

And yet, Ike found himself selfishly wanting to ask Gawain for more support. He wanted Gawain to wake up and help him with the burden that had been placed in his lap. Ike wanted to ask his father for advice about what he had been forced to share with the rest of the army. Everyone knew that the hero of the Crimean liberation was in fact the son of a Daein general who had been working for the enemy nation until very recently. Ike knew that was going to cause problems after the war, but he didn’t know how he was meant to set it all right. The only person who would have been able to console him and his fears was Gawain, and yet, that was the one person Ike couldn’t talk to at the moment. Life was a miserable thing, and it was more than happy to make Ike’s life even worse right now. 

Ike lost track of how much time he spent there in the chair just beside Gawain’s bed. He finally pulled himself out of his thoughts though when he heard a clipped groan. Ike snapped to awareness in an instant, sitting up straight and looking down at Gawain once more. That was more noise than he had heard from Gawain in a long time. Could that have been a sign? Did that mean it was finally time for–

Gawain’s eyes fluttered open slowly. He did not move beyond that, simply staring up at the ceiling for a long moment. Ike jumped to his feet in an instant, leaning over his father eagerly. “Father!” Ike called out. Mist and Titania were at his side a second later, both examining Gawain for themselves. “Father, can you hear me?!”

Gawain took a few seconds to come back into his body again fully, blinking slowly as he reminded himself how to function for the first time in so long. “Ike,” Gawain finally managed to say. His voice was softer and weaker than Ike had ever heard it before, but it was still the sweetest sound Ike could have ever asked to listen to. “And Mist… You’re alright…”

“Yes, we’re right here, Father!” Mist exclaimed, taking his hand in her own. Her fingers were trembling, and tears were flowing freely down her cheeks, but she couldn’t bring herself to care. “Everything is alright now!”

“Does anything hurt?” Titania questioned. “If so, then we can call Rhys back in here to help.”

“I’m alright,” Gawain assured her. “Nothing hurts too much… Though it seems as if my combat career has ended permanently.” 

“Rhys said you should make a full recovery, but… It’ll probably take a while before you’ll be able to fight again,” Mist told him. “Still, I… I’m so relieved that you’re awake again! I was so afraid you were never going to wake up after what happened that night in the woods!” Mist took only a second to think before she leaned in close to him once again. “What happened the night you were attacked? Who came after you? Do you know who the Black Knight is?”

Gawain didn’t respond immediately. Instead, something like exhaustion glazed over his eyes, and Gawain let out a slow sigh that seemed to shake his entire body. “It was an old student of mine. That’s all you need to know,” Gawain said, and Ike suspected he would have the chance to press more information out of him when he felt better. Until then, Gawain shook his head. “He was after something he thought I still had, but I don’t have it anymore. It vanished years ago, and I can only assume he figured that out after that night.”

“What is it?” Ike asked, something hot blooming in his chest. The Black Knight had gone after Gawain because he thought he had something? But what in the world could have been worth a high price like that? The Black Knight could have easily killed Gawain, but he didn’t seem to care about the damage he had done. If the Black Knight was going to care for the people he hurt, then he wouldn’t have ever gone after Gawain in the first place. “What could he have thought was worth potentially killing you over?”

Gawain shook his head once again. “That’s something we can talk about another time. For now… What happened?” He looked at Ike, Mist, and Titania for a few long moments. “It seems as if a lot has happened since I was last able to speak with the three of you.”

Ike couldn’t help but wince at Gawain’s words. That was certainly one way of saying it. Gawain had last been conscious in the woods just after the army arrived at the border of Daein. Since then, the army had made its way all the way to the capital, and they were spending the night in the palace while they came up with a plan for how they were going to attack Crimea. Saying that a lot had happened since Gawain was last awake was a grave understatement, and yet, it was the only set of words that seemed sufficient given the circumstances. 

“Yes… A lot has happened,” Titania finally settled on saying. “There’s a lot that has happened since you were last awake… The army has made progress in winning the war. We made it all the way to the castle of Daein, but the king wasn’t here. He has been in Crimea’s palace ever since the nation fell. We came all this way for nothing.”

“We’re near the capital?” Gawain echoed, his eyes going wide. When Ike nodded, Gawain hummed to himself. “In that case, I believe it would be best if we made a stop near here… I can explain why the Black Knight came after me when we arrive. I think it would be best if we dedicate a bit of time to making the stop.”

“You want us to make a stop?” Ike asked. “But why?” He could only assume the item that the Black Knight had pursued Gawain for was waiting somewhere near there, but that didn’t make any sense. What important item could have been hiding that close to the capital? More importantly, how hadn’t the Black Knight found it if it was right there within his grasp? Surely the Black Knight would have figured out that the item he was searching for was waiting so close to where he operated most of the time. 

“I can explain everything when we arrive there,” Gawain assured him with a shake of his head. He let out a shaky cough that made his entire body lurch, and Ike cringed. “Perhaps it would be best for Rhys to come in here after all. I imagine he would want to look me over as soon as possible.”

“I’ll go get him,” Titania declared, darting from the room in an instant. Ike watched as her red braid flickered over her shoulder and then vanished around the nearby corner. He only felt himself breathe again when he was sure she was out of ear’s reach. 

“She knows,” Mist said before Ike had the chance. “The night you were attacked, we messed up. Everyone in the camp knows now about who we are. You were one of the Four Riders years ago, and they know that we’re your children. They… They don’t know about our mission though. None of them know about Soren yet.”

“That is likely for the best,” Gawain nodded. “I cannot imagine it would go over well if they heard about that… Especially since it was no doubt enough of a shock for them to hear that we were not who we said we were initially.”

“Titania knows the truth about Soren though,” Ike told him. “She was there when the Black Knight first said that Soren was the prince. She hasn’t brought it up since then though. I think she’s waiting for us to feel like we can tell her everything for ourselves.”

“We’re going to get there soon,” Mist assured Gawain, though Ike was sure she was trying to tell herself that just as much. Soren hadn’t really been in much of a talking mood for a while, and trying to get him to discuss something without it being his idea first was like pulling teeth. He would open up about his history and heritage when he was ready, but that moment would not come through anyone else putting the pressure on him first. 

“You’ve done well in my absence,” Gawain said suddenly, and Ike looked down at his father to find him smiling. “I’m proud of both of you… You’ve fought well. I can see it.”

Ike couldn’t hold back for a second later, and he leaned down before throwing his arms around Gawain’s chest. Mist did much the same on his other side. They did not say a word for an eternity afterward, simply sitting there together as a family for the first time in weeks. 

Ike never wanted that moment to end… But he knew it would, and the war would be waiting for him when it did. 

Chapter Text

Gawain waking up was enough to change the course of the Crimean army’s path. 

When Ike declared that Gawain wanted them to make a brief stop near the capital, Elincia had been happy to agree to it. The rest of the army was more than fine with it as well. Since Gawain was still recovering, very few people had been given permission to speak with him personally. Ike suspected the widespread agreement to follow Gawain’s orders was drawn from a desire to know what was going on with him without needing to speak to him individually. Nobody knew why Gawain had made the choices he had, but they were determined to get to the bottom of it as soon as possible. 

Gawain’s guidance took the army in the direction of a small church not far from the capital. There were enemy soldiers waiting for them there, but the army was able to take them out with relative ease. Ike was even able to ensure the priests that had been coerced into fighting by the Daein army were spared, and they were able to escape in the aftermath of the battle. All things considered, the fight had gone as well as it could have, and Ike was glad to have yet another victory in the books. It was nice to feel like he was making progress again after the war hadn’t ended where he had thought it would. 

Gawain was unable to fight in the battle as was to be expected. He had to hang back and wait for the enemy forces to be cleared out. Gawain clearly hated having to hold back though, and he wore a frown whenever he was forced to remember the fact that he needed to take care of himself. He wanted to take to the battlefield and make sure his enemies knew to fear his blade work. Unfortunately, such a thing would not be possible until he recovered in full, and there was no way of saying when he would be back to his old self again. Ike was more than happy to fight on his father’s behalf in the meantime. He knew he was getting stronger, and while it didn’t make up for Gawain’s loss, Ike liked to hope it was at least doing something. 

After the battle ended, Gawain led the army to a small chapel not far from the church the fight had taken place in. The temple was tiny, looking more like a cottage than a site of any religious significance. Vines were overgrown all across the exterior of the building, and Ike had to wonder when somebody had last been there. If he had to guess, he would have said that it had been ages ago, but he couldn’t say for certain. 

And Ike’s assumption was swiftly proven wrong. Volke rounded the corner to come into view just outside the building. He wore the same frustratingly sly smile on his face that he had back when Ike first met him. Ike found himself staring in shock, his eyes so wide they seemed ready to burst free of his skull. What in the world was Volke doing there of all places? Ike supposed he didn’t know Volke well enough to be able to guess where he would be at any given moment, but Volke didn’t seem to belong in a place like this at all. 

“I was wondering when you would be coming by,” Volke said, pushing himself away from the nearby wall. “I heard about the chaos from the war… And I’m glad to see that you were able to get out of your last few battles in one piece.”

“Something along those lines,” Gawain replied, pressing one hand to his chest. Volke didn’t seem surprised by the shift of Gawain’s posture and the lack of a sword in his hands. Ike was sure that Volke had heard about what happened to Gawain somehow, but he didn’t know how he could have. Volke had seemingly been here ever since he parted ways with the army all the way back in Crimea. His information networks must have been strong, though Ike didn’t know how any information could reach him all the way out here. Most people didn’t even know this little pocket of Daein existed. There was no other reason it would be so isolated and overgrown. 

Gawain looked at Volke again with a bittersweet smile. “I owe you a great deal of thanks for everything you’ve done here. I don’t know what we would have done if you hadn’t been there.” He passed Volke a small bag full of money, and Volke gladly accepted it. 

Volke didn’t open the bag to check how much coin was inside, instead simply tucking it into one of his pockets and out of view. “You pay well. I don’t think I’ve ever had a better client than you.”

Ike could only stand to think about it for a few seconds before his impatience got the best of him. “What exactly is going on here?” Ike questioned, looking back and forth between Volke and Gawain. “How do the two of you know each other?”

Volke and Gawain looked at one another once more before the strange thief’s smile shifted in Ike’s direction. “How about we just show you?” Volke didn’t wait to see if Ike would agree to it, instead starting off toward the temple and pushing his way in through the front door. Ike followed slowly. Mist, Soren, and Titania were behind him on either side, not saying a word but sure their questions would find answers soon enough. 

As soon as Ike set foot inside the temple, he felt his entire world change in an instant. 

There were two women standing inside the temple, speaking with one another in hushed tones. One of them was a heron woman, her hair long, pale, and beautiful. Her wings shone white in the afternoon sunshine, and her smile was radiant. It seemed like she had stepped right out of a painting and into the world, and she was now taking in its beauty for the first time. Reyson and Leanne had both been beautiful to look at, but this heron felt older than them by at least a few years. She had been hidden away for a long time. Ike was sure of it. There was no way another heron of Serenes could have lived without being forced to do it in secret. 

The other woman with the heron was the one who made Ike’s heart shatter in an instant though. Her hair was a deep blue color and tied together at the base of her neck. Her smile was kind, and her eyes shone like the brightest of stars in the night sky. It wasn’t just her overwhelming love that caught Ike by surprise though… It was the fact that he had seen her face before. He remembered her smile from a million dreams he had woken to over the years. He could never forget it even after all the time that bled through his fingers like sand in an hourglass. 

Ike would never be able to forget the smile of his mother even after he believed her to be dead. 

And… She was supposed to be dead. Ike had been told for years that she was long gone. Gawain had never explained how she died or what happened, but Ike had been sure of it. How could she be alive after all that time if her children didn’t even know of her fate? She wasn’t supposed to be there… And yet, she very clearly was not a ghost. She was made of flesh and blood, and she was smiling at Ike in a way she hadn’t been able to in more than a decade and some change.

“Elena,” Gawain greeted, his face relaxing into a soft smile. “I’m home.”

Elena’s face melted into pure affection, and she rushed forward before pulling him into a tight embrace. She wanted to say something in response to him, but she couldn’t find the words, instead letting the silence speak for her. Elena let out a shaky breath, and the very air around her seemed to tremble with the grief of everything she had wanted to say over the years but had never been able to. Elena only pulled away from Gawain after she had enjoyed his presence as much as she could in the span of a few seconds. It would never be enough to make up for the years that she had been forced to spend away from him, but it was a start, and that was all she could ask for now. 

Elena looked over to the rest of the group next. She stared at Ike and Mist for a few seconds, trying to figure out how she was supposed to greet them. In the end, Mist didn’t give her the chance to make up her mind, instead running toward her mother and pulling her in close. Elena was only caught off guard for a few seconds before she relaxed into the hug as well. Ike found himself walking toward them as if he was possessed, and in a matter of seconds, he was pulled into the embrace. Gawain joined in once again, and for the first time in countless years, all four members of their family were together once more. 

Elena’s breathing was shaky when she pulled away from the embrace in full. Beside her, the heron girl tucked something away into the pocket of her dress, but Ike didn’t get the chance to see what it was. Elena didn’t give him the chance to ask either. “It… It’s been so long,” Elena whispered, her voice catching on itself in her grief. She rubbed at her eyes, trying to breathe through her tears and failing completely. “I don’t… I don’t know what to say…”

“You don’t need to say anything about it,” Gawain assured her. The understanding of that perfect moment went far beyond what words could ever hope to express, and no amount of clumsy explanations would ever quite fill the silence the way Ike felt it needed to. The quiet was more than enough, and Ike was in love with it in a strange way he couldn’t define. “We’re here again, and…”

“You’re here to talk about something important, aren’t you?” Elena questioned, finishing the thought before he could. Gawain hesitated for a brief moment before nodding. Elena let out a thin breath of her own, forcing all of her tears away to the best of her ability. “Then what is it you would like to know?”

“The truth,” Gawain said for her as he turned to look at Ike, Mist, and Soren. “They have a lot they need to hear as soon as possible.”

“How is any of this happening?” Ike found himself bursting out, and every eye soon fell on him. “I… I don’t understand how you’re still… We were told you died a long time ago. How are you here? How are you still alive?”

Elena winced at his words. “It’s real,” she started even though that was hardly the explanation Ike was searching for. “I… I wish I could have been there for you and Mist. I really do, Ike. Now though… I want to tell you everything. You have a right to know the reason I disappeared.”

“She was never dead,” Gawain chimed in. “We faked her death when you and Mist were children. It was safer that way… Because of the secret we’ve been forced to keep.”

Ike felt his eyes go wide. This had to have something to do with the item the Black Knight had gone after Gawain to try and find. He couldn’t think of any other explanation… But what object could possibly be important enough for his mother to go into hiding for so many years? What item would make the Black Knight want to go after someone he had seemingly known a long time ago? Why would he be so desperate to find something even if that meant he was going to have to kill someone to get his hands on it? Ike didn’t understand any of it… Though he supposed that was why he was there. Everyone was going to help him to unravel the truth so long as he was willing to listen. 

“It was many years ago now,” Elena explained, leaning her head back so she was looking up at the ceiling sadly. “There was… A tragedy within the forests of Serenes. All of the herons were accused of being involved with the murder of the apostle of Begnion, and they were attacked by the people of the capital. The entire forest was destroyed in a matter of days, its people killed and its trees burned. Now, the forest is little more than a shell of its former self.”

“That’s right,” Ike murmured. He had heard about that back when the group was in Begnion… But what in the world could it have had to do with the situation now? He looked over at the heron standing just beside Elena, and his heart skipped a beat. There was only one way a heron could have been there, and that meant there had to be a survivor from the attack other than Reyson and Leanne. If there had been two herons who lived through the attack, then there could have been others… Though Ike had never heard of this one at all. 

Elena noticed Ike’s curiosity, and she let out a wet laugh. “My apologies. I completely forgot to introduce you. Ike, Mist… Allow me to introduce you to one of the princesses of the Serenes Forest, Lillia.”

The heron woman, Lillia, bowed her head with a deep smile spreading across her face. “It is an honor to finally meet you… I have heard much about you from Elena.”

“During the attack on the Serenes Forest, the king of Daein decided to strike,” Elena went on. “He wanted to get his hands on something hidden within the Serenes Forest… Lehran’s Medallion. It is said to have the spirit of a dark god hidden deep inside of it, and the spirits of order and harmony within the herons of Serenes make them the perfect guardians for it. They are not tempted by the chaos that brews within the medallion, and so, they have looked after it for more years than anyone could ever hope to count.”

“To get his hands on it, he took me as well,” Lillia added. “He wanted me to unleash the dark god that was hidden within the medallion, but I did not have the power to do it. Ashnard did not believe me, so he kept me captive until I did it. I could never do it though, and… That was when I met Elena.”

“At the time, I was working as a priestess within Daein, and your father was still a member of the Four Riders,” Elena went on. “She was being kept in a prison beneath the castle of Daein. I met Lillia as part of my work, and we began to speak. She could not speak the modern tongue, but we did our best to communicate despite the barrier. I was soon assigned to take care of her in between her meetings with Ashnard. The things she endured in those days were horrible, but I… I did my best to bring light to her life. It felt like the least I could do.”

“Together, we began to formulate a plan of how we were going to escape from Ashnard’s clutches,” Lillia said next. “Elena and Gawain faked my death by starting a fire in the area I was being kept in within the Daein castle’s dungeons. Elena was thought to have died in the incident as well, but in truth, she survived. She ran away from the capital with me, and we settled down here. Gawain was going to join us, but…”

“I received… A special request,” Gawain added in, and Ike felt his chest go tight. “Lady Almedha was leaving the Daein castle around the same time due to a recent incident. She didn’t want to go on her own, but she didn’t trust most of the soldiers under Ashnard’s command. She requested that I accompany her to the villa where she would be moving, and I agreed to it. I thought that would be safer for you two, Ike and Mist. It would be better if you were raised somewhere away from the constant danger here. On top of that, it would keep Ashnard from investigating where I went after I resigned from the Four Riders.”

“Since he couldn’t be here, Gawain hired one of his old contacts in Daein to help us here,” Elena smiled, her eyes catching on the shadow in the corner that was Volke. “He has been looking after us ever since then, defeating any who try to pursue us. We wouldn’t have made it for this long without him standing by our sides.”

Ike could hear his heart racing in his ears, and he didn’t even know where to begin when it came to calming it down again. He could barely believe what he was hearing. Not only had Elena been alive all along, but her death had been deliberately fabricated to ensure Ashnard and others who stood by him didn’t pursue her. Lillia had been captured by Daein after the fall of Serenes to do something with Lehran’s Medallion… And Lehran’s Medallion had to be what the Black Knight was after. That was the reason he had gone after Gawain. The medallion disappeared after Lillia and Elena fled from the capital of Daein, and the Black Knight wanted to get his hands on it, no doubt so that he could take it back to Ashnard. The medallion played a major role in the war. Ike was sure of it even if he knew very little about it specifically. 

“Hold on for a moment,” Titania cut in, raising one hand to get everyone’s attention. She turned to Gawain with a small frown. “You left the Four Riders after your wife faked her death… And you decided to go with the queen of Daein after she decided to leave the capital. That’s…” Her gaze fell on Soren, and Ike’s chest went tight. This was going to have to be the moment where the truth came out. He could feel it. 

Soren seemed to sense it too. He had been eerily silent throughout the conversation up to that point, but he finally stirred by letting out a heavy sigh at Titania’s words. “Yes… I suppose you’ve been waiting a long time to hear about this,” he murmured. “I am the prince of Daein and the son of King Ashnard. I am the heir to the throne of Daein.”

“I never knew Daein had a prince,” Titania confessed. “Though I suppose I didn’t know Crimea had a princess either… Never would I have imagined that two nations would be keeping the same secrets without ever realizing it was happening in another nation.”

“I thought it would be safest to keep it hidden,” Soren went on. “You had no reason to trust us when we first met you, and I thought that me revealing that I was the prince of Daein would give you even less of a reason to work with us. Believe me when I say that we’re in this war for very similar reasons. We may not have started this journey for the sake of liberating Crimea, but we do want to see Ashnard laid low. He cannot be allowed to continue his rule over Daein or Crimea for any longer than he already has.”

Titania nodded slowly, and she let out a slow sigh. “Princess Elincia has a right to know about all of this,” she pointed out. “I take it you’re planning on telling her at some point in the near future. Is that correct?”

“I am,” Soren admitted, though he hesitated for a moment too long before saying it. “I didn’t mean for the secret to be kept for this long, but I suppose it’s too late now… When all of this began, we were on the run from Ashnard. He attacked the villa we were all living in alongside my mother, Almedha. She left behind the capital when I was a young child, and she requested that Gawain come with her to the villa she had selected to live in. He acted as the head of the guard there. When Ashnard was about to wage his war, he attacked the villa, hoping to get me to fight by his side in the battle… But we refused. That prompted us to flee from Daein, and we went to Gallia because Gawain was friends with the king there.”

“We ran into all of you along the way, and the rest is history,” Gawain finished for him, and Soren nodded. “We will be telling the princess the truth when we get the chance. This secret has been kept for far too long, but everything will come out soon.”

“I didn’t want to give Ashnard any more ammunition to come after us,” Soren said, though Ike could tell by the dark sheen in his eyes that the truth was a lot more complicated than that. “I’ll tell the princess everything when we go back to the camp… So long as it won’t endanger us any more than it already has.”

Titania nodded her agreement at that, and Ike turned his attention back to Elena and Lillia. It was partially to take the attention off Soren for a short while, but he was just as curious to learn more about the secrets they had been holding onto for so many years. “I don’t understand though,” Ike told them. “You’ve been here all this time, and you have something really important… You went so far keeping it a secret, but why? What’s so important about the medallion?”

Lillia pulled the small medallion out of her pocket, revealing it as the item she had hidden away in her dress earlier. “Lehran’s Medallion is perhaps the most important item in all of Tellius,” Lillia explained. “It is said that it contains a slumbering dark god. Ashnard wanted me to release the dark god when he took me captive, but I could not do it. We went so far to protect it because… We do not know what Ashnard could want to do with it once he releases the dark god, but we cannot give him the chance to hurt anyone with its power.”

“We believe it to be the reason Ashnard waged this war in the first place,” Elena supplied. “He was unable to find the medallion on his own, so he decided to wage a war and find another way to get his hands on it. He didn’t realize Lillia and I had it so close to the capital… And that was for the best. I don't even want to begin to imagine what would have happened if he realized this was where it has been hiding all this time.”

“The medallion is dangerous, but there are those who are able to handle it without issues,” Lillia went on. “Most who touch it are tainted by the spirit of chaos that lives within it. However, heron laguz are able to handle it without fear. If Ashnard were to get his hands on it, then the medallion would likely drive him to madness and then even further beyond it. I know how to soothe the medallion, and Elena is able to touch it without its dark power consuming her. I may not know how to release the dark god, but I can keep it from growing too strong.”

“I don't entirely know how I wound up with the power to look after the medallion,” Elena confessed. “But as long as I have this ability, I have to use it for the good of us all. Lehran’s Medallion is dangerous, and I will not let a man like Ashnard take control of it and bring the world to ruin. So long as there is something I can do to help keep it calm, I have a duty to do it.”

“You’re going to stay here even after we leave, aren’t you?” Soren questioned, and Elena looked over at him with a small frown. “You can’t just walk away from the place you’ve been hiding in for all these years. You don’t know where Ashnard has guards stationed, and he could try to come after you without you knowing it. If he realizes where you are through a spy, then…” Soren trailed off, and his eyes went wide. One of his hands came up to cradle at his head, and he pushed his hair away from his forehead roughly. “Gods above.” Soren remained silent for a second more before whipping his head up to look at everyone else in the room. “Nasir. Where is he?”

“Nasir?” Titania echoed, her eyes going wide. “I… Well, he wasn’t supposed to stay with us after we arrived in Begnion, but he decided he was interested in seeing what else we had to do. I thought it was harmless if he came along with us after all he did before. I thought it was a little odd that he wanted to stay with us instead of going back home, but…”

“We have to find him,” Soren announced. Everyone in the room stared at him in confusion, and Soren shook his head wildly, sending his hair into a frenzy all around him. “Nasir and I spoke briefly the night Gawain was attacked by the Black Knight. I admittedly was starting to grow suspicious about him staying with the army, but he… He told me that I was going to stay quiet about it. He was threatening to reveal the secret about who I am, and I couldn’t… I couldn’t let the truth come out then. It was too much. Now, I have to wonder if he could be a spy for Ashnard.”

“A spy for Ashnard?” Ike echoed, his face losing all its color in an instant. “Are you sure? He was helping us for so long back when we needed a ship to take us to Begnion. Why in the world would he be working for Ashnard of all people?”

“I think he was at least spying on us for the sake of the laguz of Tellius,” Soren said. “It wouldn’t surprise me if at least one of the laguz nations decided to step up and join the war now that we have a clear path to getting rid of Ashnard. I think Nasir was feeding information to them about our progress so they knew if they would be able to help us… And it wouldn’t surprise me at all if he was working with Ashnard on the side.”

Ike floundered for a few long seconds, trying to come up with the words he needed to explain his shock. In the end, he let out a shaking breath instead. “Why didn’t you tell me?” Ike found himself questioning, his voice verging on pleading. “I could have helped you if you thought Nasir was up to something.”

“I… I didn’t know what to do,” Soren admitted, his cheeks growing red from a combination of embarrassment and rage. “But there’s no time for that now. If Nasir is still with the army, then he could be feeding information about this back to Ashnard. I’m willing to bet that since Gawain didn’t have Lehran’s Medallion, the Black Knight assumed that he hid it somewhere, and here…”

“We may have led him right to the spot where it is being kept,” Gawain finished for him, and Soren nodded. Gawain swore under his breath and shook his head. “I’m going to stay here then. Volke and I can handle any enemies that try to come here to take the medallion by force. The rest of you should go back to camp as soon as possible and see if there’s anything you can do to stop things from spiraling out of hand. I don't know for sure if Nasir is involved with all of this the way Soren thinks, but…”

“There’s a chance, and we should stop him before he can take advantage of it,” Soren nodded. He started toward the door, only pausing when he was almost out of the cottage entirely. He looked up to Elena and Lillia, bowing his head to them both. “It was nice to meet you… Perhaps next time we can speak under better circumstances.”

Elena offered Soren a shaking smile and a matching nod. “I hope so too… It has certainly been long overdue.” She turned to look at Ike and Mist next, and she smiled a bit wider at her two children. “This isn’t the last time we’ll see each other. You’ll be able to come back, and we can talk more then. I want to know what the two of you have been up to in all this time… It won’t make up for lost time, but it’ll at least help me to understand the wonderful people I know you have both become.”

Ike felt heat sting at the corners of his eyes, and he nodded. “Yeah… We’ll talk all about it when we next come by. I promise.” With that, he took a step back and darted out of the cottage, Mist, Soren, and Titania hot on his trail. Ike’s heart was racing as he ran back to the camp, and he couldn’t even begin to pinpoint which part of the day terrified and thrilled him the most. It was all simply too much, and Ike felt like he was going to collapse if he thought about it too much. 

But he couldn’t give in yet. He had to make sure everyone else was safe… Even if that came at the cost of fighting against someone he had long thought of as his ally. 

Chapter Text

Gawain watched as Ike, Soren, Mist, and Titania darted out of the cottage. He stared after them with a small frown on his face. He hadn’t realized there was anything to question regarding Nasir at all… Though he supposed it was natural that he didn’t know about it. After all, Gawain had been unconscious up until very recently. He had missed a lot of the happenings within the army, and it would take a while for him to catch up with all that had happened in his absence. 

For now though, Gawain was just happy to be in the presence of Elena again. He had visited her a small handful of times over the years when he was able to throw out an excuse about going out on business. He had never been able to see her for long though since he couldn’t say for sure if Ashnard was following his every move or not. The fact that Ashnard hadn’t found the cottage yet was a good sign, but Gawain didn’t know if he would be able to put his faith in that for too much longer. If Nasir really was a spy, then the news of Elena and Lillia’s place there was going to make its way back to Ashnard very quickly. 

“What are you going to do now?” Gawain asked, turning to look at Elena. “You know the medallion better than I do. Do you think you should come with us and join the army? Or would you rather stay here just in case Ashnard doesn’t know what’s going on?”

“I…” Elena and Lillia exchanged a glance that made them both look guilty, and Elena sighed a moment later. “I don’t think I can join you just yet. We don’t know for sure if that man told Ashnard the truth, but I know for sure that if we joined you, then the medallion would fall right into Ashnard’s hands. We cannot come out of hiding until we are sure that Ashnard is gone. After the war, we’ll be safe, but…”

“Not until then,” Gawain finished for her, and Elena nodded her agreement. “I understand… But I don't want to leave you as things are right now. I know I won’t be all that much help in a fight, but…”

“You’d be best off staying in one place while recovering,” Lillia pointed out. “You can’t expect yourself to be able to return to your full strength while marching across the continent. It would be better for you to rest here until you feel ready to fight back on your own.”

“I can make sure you both stay safe,” Gawain agreed with a nod. “Volke has been handling the job just fine for the last decade and a half, but I can only imagine it gets a bit lonely around here.” He cast Elena a sad smile at that. They had both been feeling lonely for longer than they could ever hope to put into words. It came with the territory of being forced apart for so long, and they knew it well. The haunting isolation followed them everywhere they went. Even when they were surrounded by friends, it never felt like enough because they were forced to be apart from one another. 

“Perfect,” Elena smiled. She walked over to Gawain and took his hand in her own, rubbing her thumbs across the calluses that had built up from years of swordplay. “I’m glad to have you back, Gawain… I’ve missed you more than I could ever hope to say.”

“I’m glad to be back,” Gawain returned with a small smile of his own. He leaned down and pressed a kiss to Elena’s forehead, and when he looked up, he found Lillia watching them both with a bright grin. As soon as he saw her though, Gawain’s eyes went wide. “That’s right. I’ve got some information that you’re going to want to hear about, Lillia.”

“Oh?” Lillia tilted her head to the side. “What is it?”

“It’s about the Serenes massacre,” Gawain said, and Lillia visibly deflated. “It’s good news, I promise. We fought in the remnants of the forest during our time in Begnion, and we learned a lot while we were there… Like that there are more survivors of the massacre than we originally thought.”

Lillia’s eyes went wide, and her hands flew to her mouth. “You… You cannot mean…”

Gawain nodded. “Your younger brother, Reyson, and your younger sister, Leanne, are both alive,” Gawain told her. “Reyson has been with the hawk tribe of Phoenicis ever since the massacre, and Leanne was laid down to rest in the forest. She woke up when we arrived there to fight off the Begnion soldiers pursuing her brother. The two of them are currently in high spirits. Leanne is in Phoenicis, and Reyson is fighting alongside our army. I didn’t think to bring him because of how much of a daze I was in when we decided to come here, but…”

“You don’t have to apologize at all,” Lillia assured him with a firm shake of her head. “Just knowing that the two of them are safe is more than enough for me… I didn’t realize Leanne had survived. I heard Reyson managed to make it through the attack, but I… I didn’t think there would be anyone else.” Tears rose to her eyes all at once, and she rubbed the fluid away with the heels of her hands. “After the war ends, I’m going to have to see them both again. I can’t even begin to express how much I have missed them.”

“They’ll be happy to see you too,” Gawain promised her with a smile. “I’ll do what I can to make sure that happens as soon as possible after the war ends. That might not mean much since I’m planning on staying here with the two of you, but…”

“It means more than enough,” Lillia told him. “Thank you for everything. I don’t think I could ever say it enough.”

Gawain’s smile widened. “I’ve been more than happy to help.”

~~~~~

Soren didn’t know what to expect. 

His mind felt like it was on fire as he raced through the trees toward the place where the
Crimean army had made camp for the night. He felt like he was going to collapse if he stopped thinking about his mission for even a second. All of this was just too much. He needed to get to the bottom of what Nasir was up to, but he was terrified of it all the same. For all he knew, it was already too late. He wouldn’t know for sure until he arrived at the camp. 

Soren was kicking himself for not bringing it up sooner. He hadn’t known why Nasir stuck around, but he hadn’t thought to push the point when Nasir pressed him first. Soren should have told at least someone that he thought Nasir was up to something nefarious. It didn’t matter what Nasir said to reveal his true identity. Soren would be alright as long as he had Ike by his side… Or so he kept telling himself. The fact of the matter was that he still didn’t want to lose the Crimean army. He knew that was inevitable if things went down the same path they were right now, but Soren couldn’t let the world fall to ruin just yet. He wanted to enjoy the company of his friends. He wanted to be with them for as long as possible, and if that meant lying, then… 

It wasn’t worth it. None of this was worth it. If Soren keeping quiet had led to Nasir getting his hands on the medallion or leading Ashnard right to it, then none of it had been worth it. There were more important things to consider than simply Soren’s yearning to belong somewhere. He should have seen that. He was normally so good at thinking logically, but he had failed in the moment when he needed to have the clearest head. What was wrong with him? Why couldn’t he just look at the situation objectively as he had so many times before? Why had he let his own insecurities make sure he brought the rest of the army to ruin without them even knowing it was coming?

When Soren arrived at the edge of the camp, his chest felt so full it was about to burst. He glanced around furiously for any signs of Nasir or everything he was going to do, but he came up short. No matter where he looked, Soren couldn’t see even a trace of the blue hair or tanned skin that marked Nasir’s presence. He seemed to be entirely gone, or at the very least, he wasn’t anywhere near the front area of the camp. 

During his search though, Soren found something else unfolding before him. Everyone who saw him was watching him with unease. They couldn’t seem to decide if they wanted to stare at Soren with harsh rage or not look at him at all. Soren desperately searched for even a single person willing to meet his gaze, but even that was hard to come by. The scorn he was receiving felt darker than anything Soren had ever experienced before, and it made his stomach sink into his feet. Something had happened while he was gone, and he could feel it. 

Soren didn’t give himself the time to pick through what he thought everyone could have heard to change their opinions of him so drastically. He already knew where that was going to lead, and he couldn’t let his paranoia get the best of him now. “Split up,” Soren instructed of Ike, Mist, and Titania instead. “If he’s still around here, then we have to find him as soon as possible. Let’s get moving.” 

Soren didn’t wait to see if the other had any objections to that thought. Instead, he just took off running through the camp. As he made his way deeper into the camp though, Soren found that even more people were staring at him with that scorn he had been met with upon his arrival. Nobody was speaking to him openly, but Soren could tell they were all trying to figure out what they wanted to say to him. He wasn’t going to like it when they finally spoke freely about what they knew either. Soren couldn’t stop to think about that for longer than a few seconds, and he knew it, but his mind kept drifting in directions he couldn’t control. He needed to stop all of this. He needed to keep the world from spiraling beyond his reach. Even if it felt impossible, Soren had to keep fighting. 

Soren nearly tripped over his own feet as he came to stand just in front of Mia, Kieran, and Danved. The three were speaking quietly, but they fell silent as soon as they saw Soren there. “Nasir,” Soren forced himself to say. He hadn’t realized just how heavy his chest had become until after he tried to speak. He felt like he couldn’t breathe, but Soren forced himself to push through it. “Where is he? Is he around here anywhere?”

Mia, Kieran, and Danved shared an anxious glance at that, and it said far more than their words could ever hope to. “No,” Mia finally replied. “But–”

Soren didn’t wait to hear what she was going to say after that. He turned on his heel and took off running once again. His lungs were burning from the exertion, but he didn’t care. Even if he was pushing himself too far, Soren knew it would all be worth it if he was able to find Nasir. He couldn’t let Nasir tell Ashnard about where the army was now. That would lead Ashnard right back to the medallion, and Soren didn’t even want to consider what would have happened if he got his hands on it. Ashnard had been seeking Lehran’s Medallion for almost as long as Soren had been alive. It was too dangerous to even entertain the idea of him getting it and using it for whatever nefarious purposes he had in mind. 

And Nasir… Nasir was going to lead him right to it. Soren didn’t know for sure if Nasir was working with Ashnard, but it was the only possibility in his mind that made sense. Maybe his paranoia was getting the better of him and spiraling his thoughts in directions that would not feel realistic when he got a grip on his thoughts again. Soren didn’t care. If there was even the slightest chance that this would lead the army to calamity and chaos, then Soren had to find a way to fix it. 

This was his home. Soren hadn’t ever thought he would have a place to belong outside of the villa, and yet, there he was now. He was happy there with the army in a way he hadn’t ever thought possible for himself. He couldn’t lose this. He couldn’t let entire nations fall to ruin because of his mistakes. If he had just spoken up about Nasir sooner, then maybe all of this could have been prevented. If Soren had just been a little bit less selfish, then–

“I can’t find him anywhere!”

Titania’s voice cut through the haze of Soren’s mind, and she looked up to see him walking over to her. Ike and Mist came in from other corners of the camp, and the quartet gathered at the center of the army’s base. Soren knew practically everyone in the base was staring at them, but he couldn’t bring himself to care. None of their opinions mattered as much as what Nasir could have been up to at that very moment. “Everyone seems distracted with something else,” Titania said next. “Do you guys know what that could be about?”

Soren shook his head, but he already knew the truth was far uglier than that. He knew that all of the eyes following him throughout the camp were there for a reason. He could even guess what was going on with them too. If Nasir was nowhere to be found and everyone in the camp suddenly seemed to fear him, then… Nasir could have done something horrible. It seemed like the only outcome that made any sense. Soren didn’t want to face it, and he would have done just about anything for it to not be true, but–

Soren didn’t realize he was starting to cry until after his cheeks grew warm and wet. He let out a frustrated yell, and his right hand came up to slam against his temple. Nasir was gone. If none of them could find Nasir anywhere and no one else in the camp had seen him anywhere, then… Soren had been responsible for all of this. Nasir had been laying the pressure onto Soren for the last few weeks so he didn’t say anything about his strange activity within the army. It was all building up to this moment. Of course it was. 

“Hey, Soren,” Ike whispered, moving like he was going to wrap an arm around Soren’s shoulders. He didn’t commit to touching the sage just yet, instead leaving his fingers close enough to be a promise but not so close as to feel dangerous to Soren’s racing mind. “We’re going to be alright. I don’t know where Nasir is now, but we’re going to find him. We’re going to figure out what he did, and everything will be alright. I’m sure of it.”

“Soren.”

Elincia’s voice cut through Soren’s racing thoughts like a knife. Soren turned to face her slowly, feeling his heart try to stop in his chest. He already knew how she was going to be looking at him when he saw her, but not even that knowledge could have prepared him for the grief spread through her eyes. Soren didn’t think he had ever seen someone look at him with such betrayal on their face, and he felt as if he had been stabbed. Elincia hadn’t known the truth. Titania had, but Elincia most certainly did not know who Soren had been before the war sent it all crashing down again. 

“You…” Elincia swallowed around the knot in the back of her throat, pressing her hands closer to her heart like she thought that would make it stop racing. “You are the prince of Daein, aren’t you?”

Soren felt the world end all over again. He froze for a long moment, staring at Elincia as his lungs expanded but took in no air. He had been right to think Nasir had revealed the truth to everyone. That was the reason no one in the camp trusted Soren anywhere. They realized that they never should have placed their faith in him in the first place, and Elincia… Elincia had the least reason to trust Soren out of anyone. They were in the same position but from rival nations. Elincia had first presented herself to Soren as the orphaned princess of Crimea, and Soren had helped her without her ever realizing that he was the forgotten prince of Daein. It was almost miserable how similar they were, and Soren couldn’t blame Elincia at all for feeling like her world was crashing down just like his as they stood there and stared at one another. 

“Is it true?” Elincia asked when Soren took a little too long to respond to her. Soren tried to muscle up the words to answer her, but he couldn’t find them. Elincia didn’t wait for too long for him to explain though, instead taking another step toward him. She was drawn in by their similarities but pushed away by their differences, and something like fear and understanding blended together in her irises. “Are you the son of Ashnard?”

“I…” Soren’s mind was both overwhelmingly full and frighteningly empty, and he gave up entirely on planning out what he was going to say. He just let the words tumble from his tongue even though he knew they would do nothing to save him. “It’s true. I am… I am the prince of Daein.”

Another indescribable hurt blossomed across Elincia’s face. “Why… Why didn’t you tell us?” she asked, her voice rubbed raw and vulnerable. “I thought… Why didn’t you talk to me about who you were? I would have understood.”

“I couldn’t take the chance,” Soren choked out. He was going to die standing there and talking to Elincia, or so he felt, but he couldn’t let that happen just yet. He had to hold himself together for a little bit longer. “But we can talk about it later. Right now, we have to find Nasir.”

“Why do you need to find Nasir?” Elincia pressed, tempted to close the distance between them but not taking the initiative to do it. “What happened? Is everything alright?”

“He was the one who told you about who I am, wasn’t he?” Soren asked even though he already knew the answer. Elincia blinked once and then twice, but the paleness that settled into her cheeks told Soren all he needed to hear. “I had a feeling.”

“He… He told me just before he left,” Elincia explained. “He said he had something to do, but he wanted me to hear the truth before he left the camp for the foreseeable future. I do not know where he went, but…”

“It has something to do with Ashnard,” Soren cut in, and Elincia’s eyes went wide. “That’s all I can say right now. Spread the news that if Nasir is going to come back, then we can’t trust him. I don’t know what he’s going to try next, but we have to stop him. Just trust me, alright?”

Soren didn’t wait to see if Elincia had any protests against that idea. Instead, he turned around to find Ike, Mist, and Titania all watching him with wide eyes. They didn’t know how to respond to Soren revealing something so vulnerable in a way he hadn’t wanted, and it was clear as could be. Soren didn’t let them get a grip on their words enough to respond either, instead shaking his head. “Come on,” he told them. “We don’t have any time to lose.”

Soren took off again moments later. He could think about everything that had happened once it was over. Right now, he had to stop Nasir. There was too much on the line, and Soren couldn’t give up now. He would find a way to get to the bottom of this. He had to. 

Even if he felt like he was going to die when he thought about it for longer than a few moments at a time. 

~~~~~

Nothing. 

Soren had been searching through the camp with the rest of his small group, but their hopes of locating Nasir and finding a way to push him into silence fell short. Nasir was long gone even though no one knew where he had gone. He had left the truth about Soren behind as a parting gift just as he had told Elincia, and nobody had a hope of pursuing him anymore. 

Soren’s misery ran deep as he started the journey back to the small cottage Elena and Lillia had made into their home. His shame felt like it was going to eat him alive. He had run out on them declaring that something had gone horribly wrong, and he was forced to shuffle right back without any way of stopping Nasir. He was gone, and the truth about Lehran’s Medallion was gone along with him. 

Lillia opened the door after Ike knocked at it, and Ike filled the silence before she could ask what was wrong. “He’s gone,” Ike explained. “Nasir is long gone, and no one knows where he went. He revealed the truth about who Soren is and then disappeared.”

“The timing is incredibly suspicious,” Titania frowned. “He wouldn’t have done it now if he hadn’t gotten what he wanted. If Soren’s theory about the medallion being his target is correct, then that means we have to get out of here as soon as possible.”

Elena and Gawain exchanged anxious glances. Elena and Lillia had been there for years for the sake of staying away from danger, and it hadn’t amounted to much in the end. The world was crumbling around them, and Elena and Lillia were going to have to move to find another spot to hide. They had to keep Lehran’s Medallion out of Ashnard’s hands, and this was their only choice now. 

“Maybe you could go to Gallia,” Ike suggested. “I’m sure you would be able to find safety with the king there. It would be a long way to travel, especially if Ashnard is on your trail, but it’s the best safe spot I can think about.”

Gawain and Elena looked at one another again, and a million words seemed to pass between them in the span of just a few seconds. “If Nasir really told Ashnard where we are, then we have to move quickly,” Gawain finally settled on saying. “You can travel with the army for the time being while we figure out a better place for you to hide. It would be too dangerous for you to stay here even if you had me and Volke there to watch over you. The safer option is for you to come with us.”

“Safe is relative though, isn’t it?” Lillia murmured. “If we’re traveling with all of you, then we could end up leading Ashnard to the medallion anyway. If he doesn’t know that we have it now, then he’s going to find it through us coming out of hiding.”

“That’s a chance we’re going to have to take,” Gawain replied with a shake of his head. “Come on. Let’s go. We can’t wait here for any longer than we already have. I can’t give him the chance to catch up to us after all of this.”

Elena hesitated for a long moment before nodding. “Give us a few minutes to pack the essentials. We’ll be away from this place within the hour. I doubt Ashnard will be able to strike at us on such short notice, but we shouldn’t push the limits of it too much.”

Soren’s chest remained tight as he watched Elena and Lillia begin to dash around the cottage to pack up everything they could. If he had just acted sooner, then maybe none of this would have happened. He should have spoken up about Nasir… But there was no way he could change it now. His only option was to look to the future, and he would do his best to see Nasir stopped. 

If he couldn’t reverse the damage of the past, then Soren would have to change the future, and he wouldn’t let anyone stop him from doing it. 

~~~~~

The rest of the day passed by in a blur. Ike felt like he was being dragged along for the ride without any way of truly controlling his life. Everything had happened so quickly, and with the revelation about Nasir, Ike hadn’t been given any time to truly process what was happening. It was all too much, and he had no idea what to say or do about any of it. 

His mother was alive. She had been all along. Gawain had been keeping the secret of Elena’s survival for longer than Ike could ever hope to calculate. Everything had been building up to this moment, and the revelation hadn’t even been meant to happen just then. If not for the war and Gawain’s injury forcing them into it, then the secret would have held firm for a while longer. Ike still wouldn’t know that his mother was alive. 

Ike wanted to reach out to Elena and hear everything he could from her. She had joined the army not as a fighter but as a peaceful ally alongside Lillia. Right now, Elena was in the infirmary helping Gawain to heal from his wound. Elena was a much more proficient healer than Rhys and Mist, and she knew how to help him in ways they couldn’t ever dream of. Ike was glad she would be able to do something to help Gawain even if it was just a small push in the right direction. Ike couldn’t stand the thought that Gawain would never be able to fight again, and with Elena’s help, he would be strong enough to recover and keep moving forward. 

“You should go and talk to her.”

Soren’s voice pulled Ike out of his thoughts. They were sitting on the floor of their tent, desperate to speak both to one another and many others scattered throughout the camp. “I can tell you want to talk to her,” Soren went on. “So don’t spend any more time here. You should go on and see her.”

Ike nodded slowly, but he didn’t move just yet. “Are you sure?” he asked. “Do you want me to stay with you?”

Soren hesitated for a long moment. This was the best time they had shared with one another in ages because of Soren’s recent tension around everything going on with Nasir. Now that all of that had been resolved in perhaps the worst way possible, they could speak freely, but they didn’t know where to begin. 

“I’ll be alright,” Soren assured Ike with a shake of his head. “Besides, I should be going to talk to Elincia at some point soon. I didn’t mean to leave her behind for this long, but with everything going on…”

“We can both go and talk to them then,” Ike suggested. He pushed himself to his feet before extending one hand out to help Soren stand as well. Ike cast Soren a smile, and the sage returned it and accepted the hand. “We can come back together and talk about everything once we’ve been able to discuss what happened. Does that sound alright with you?”

“Of course,” Soren nodded, and Ike wondered how long it had been since he saw his best friend looking so resolute. Something warm bloomed in Ike’s chest at the sight of it. He could have pulled Soren into his arms forever just so he could enjoy that gleam in his friend’s eyes. It brought heat to his cheeks too, but Ike didn’t know what it meant. He just felt like this moment was important, and he knew he would remember it even in the midst of far more terrifying events happening all around it in his memory. 

Soren’s face had grown pink too as the two stared at one another, and he cleared his throat to alleviate the pressure. “Then let’s get to it. We should go and talk to them, and we’ll come back together once we’re finished. I’ll see you soon, Ike.”

Soren didn’t wait for Ike to confirm that he was alright with that, instead nodding and turning toward the entrance of the tent. Ike watched him go for a long moment and sighed once he was certain he was alone. Even though the day had been a disaster in more ways than he could ever hope to articulate, Ike felt like everything was going to be alright. Maybe it was an unstable belief, but Ike was willing to cling to it with every ounce of energy he had in his body. 

But he couldn’t let hope consume him just yet. Right now, Ike had an important conversation to get to, and it was more than a decade in the making. Ike was going to learn the truth behind his mother’s disappearance and supposed death, and everything in his life was finally going to slap into place the way it should have years ago. Ike could feel it deep in his stomach. 

The day had gone in a million unexpected directions, but Ike was going to be alright. He would make sure of it however he had to. 

Chapter Text

For as long as he could remember, Ike had wondered what this was like. 

His memories of the past were limited, and they always had been. Ike had yearned to pull his mother’s face into focus in his mind, but instead, all he was ever met with was the haziness of her smile only in dreams. Ike wanted to know what kind of woman she had once been and the person she would have wanted him to become. He had yearned to understand who Elena had been, and even though it felt impossible, Ike wanted it more than anything. 

And now that he had the chance, Ike didn’t know what he was meant to do. He had never been the best with his words, and he was fully aware of it. He spoke bluntly, and his tendency to get right to the point caused problems in spaces where people didn’t want to hear the truth upfront. Ike knew that he struggled with articulating himself in a way that felt right. He had a lot to say, but he could never find the words, tripping over them when he was given the chance to express himself. 

Even so, Ike would have preferred tripping over himself to sitting in silence. Mist had the same idea as him, and she had gone to the infirmary along with Ike to see if he could speak with Gawain and Elena. Mist was at a loss for words though, and the same applied to every other member of the family. They had been quiet for what felt like an eternity, each of them trying to say something but failing to offer what was necessary. They were a family, and they loved each other more than anything, but finding a way to expand upon that felt impossible, and Ike didn’t know how he was meant to fix it. 

“Where should we start?” Ike found himself asking. He wasn’t sure if it was going to do much of anything for him, but it was all he could think of to say, so he decided to go along with it. “We have a lot to talk about, don’t we? Where should we start with getting into all of this?”

“What do you want to know?” Gawain countered. He was laying on his cot in the infirmary, exhausted after everything he had done that day. It was the most activity he had seen since he was injured by the Black Knight, and it was clear now that he had pushed himself harder than he should have. Elena was doing her best to help him though, pressing healing magic into his body both with her elaborate staff. She truly was a powerful healer, and Ike could see where Mist got her skills with healing from. 

“Everything,” Ike finally said. He didn’t know what details were waiting for him around the bend or where this story was going to lead, but he knew he had to be ready for it. He sat up as straight as he could and stared at Gawain with determination gleaming in his eyes. “Tell me everything.”

“I’m sorry,” Elena burst out, and Ike looked over to find her bowing her head with a shameful frown on her face. “I know you were lied to about what happened to me for a long time, but I… I couldn’t stay with you. It would be too dangerous for me to stay with you as long as we had the medallion. We couldn’t risk putting you or Mist in danger as long as the medallion was there to put you in peril. I needed to hide it as soon as possible, and the best way to do that was to hide with Lillia.”

“I was planning on telling you,” Gawain told Ike, his face set in a heavy frown. “I wanted to tell you everything you needed to know about this, but there was never a good time for it. I needed to wait until after Ashnard had been removed from the throne, and that… That didn’t end up happening because of the war breaking out.”

“Why did you decide to go with Lady Almedha?” Mist asked. “That was your choice, wasn’t it? 

Gawain paused for a long moment, pressing his lips together into a thin line. “Something significant happened between Lady Almedha and the king,” he said slowly. “She needed to get out of the castle as soon as possible, and when she planned to leave, she asked if I would be willing to join her. She wanted me to act as the guard for the villa after she departed. We were originally planning on all coming together as a family for the sake of the medallion. We weren’t going to tell you two kids about it until the moment was right, but…”

“When Lady Almedha declared that she was leaving the castle, we decided that it would be safer to have you go with her so that you could stay safe away from the medallion,” Elena finished for him. “She wanted Gawain’s help to raise Soren away from Ashnard, and he agreed to it after the two of us talked to one another.”

“I truly was going to tell you what happened when the moment was right,” Gawain reiterated. “But the right moment never came. After I almost died in that battle with the Black Knight, I knew I couldn’t hold out on the truth anymore. I had to tell you to make sure the truth made its way out before anything else could happen to me.”

Mist began to fiddle anxiously with her thumbs, and she let out a slow breath. “How bad is the situation with the medallion?” she asked softly. “The way you were talking about it before made it sound really serious.”

“It is really serious,” Elena confirmed. “The herons of Serenes can keep the dark god within it contained. They cannot set it free, but they can make sure the dark god is at rest. I don’t know what will happen specifically if the dark god is released, but I don’t want to find out either. We can’t let Ashnard try to release the dark god. That was why Lillia and I faked our deaths and then fled from the castle. We couldn’t let Ashnard get his hands on it.”

“Lillia said one time that great calamity would come if the entire continent was engulfed in war, but we don’t quite know what that means,” Gawain said. “She doesn’t even seem to know what it means, but that message was passed down through her family for years. Lehran’s Medallion responds poorly to war and conflict, and if I had to guess, I would say that as more chaos consumes the land, the harder it becomes to contain the power of the medallion.”

“So Ashnard wants to release the dark god by creating a massive war across the entire continent,” Ike concluded, and Elena nodded at him somberly. “Then we have to stop him not just to save Crimea and Daein but to make sure he can’t start a large enough conflict to set the dark god free. It would be the end for us all if he was able to release the dark god from the medallion.”

“Lillia and I will do anything in our power to keep it out of Ashnard’s hands,” Elena vowed. “If we can make it to Gallia, then we can speak with the king about coming up with a plan to keep the medallion safe. I believe King Caineghis will be able to help us if we ask him for it.”

“Goldoa hasn’t gotten involved with the war yet. That’s a good thing for us, and it means the medallion likely won’t spark,” Gawain declared. “As long as the dragons stay out of the conflict, then we have a bit more time to fix this. We have to be careful, of course, but we have a slight safety net for now.”

“But we won’t be able to rely on that forever,” Mist finished for him. “I mean, Goldoa hasn’t joined any major wars in the past, but we don’t want this to be the time that changes when we’re not able to prepare for it… I hope we can find a way to set all of this right before we have to worry about that.”

“Me too,” Ike murmured. All of this was so much to face at once. His mother was alive and had been all along, but she had been forced into hiding because of a medallion that could have brought the world to ruin. Ashnard knew of the medallion’s power and was more than happy to drag the world down to hell with him so long as he thought he would be able to pull something from it. Ashnard had always been a monster, but he seemed to get worse as Ike thought about him now. He couldn’t even enjoy the opportunity that came with being able to see his mother again. Not with so much on the line. 

Uncomfortable silence fell over the infirmary for a long moment before Elena let out a shaky laugh. “I know this isn’t the situation we all thought we would find one another in, but I… I really hope that we can make the most of this going forward,” she murmured. “I really wanted to be more present in all of your lives, and now… I can’t go back into hiding again. I know it’s not what we thought it would be, but we can still do something with this. I want to get to know you all. I want to know what your lives have been like when I haven’t been there to see them. I’m sorry I wasn’t there for you the way I should have been, and… I hope there’s something I’ll be able to do to make that up to you one day.”

Ike blinked at that, and he realized that tears had sprung to life in his eyes when he wasn’t paying attention. “I… Yeah,” he agreed softly. “I really want the chance to get to know you too.” He had thought for years about what it would be like to finally get to know his mother. Back then, he had thought it impossible on account of her being said to be dead, but now… Ike was glad he had been proven wrong. He was glad he had been given the chance to know her in ways he had never thought possible. This was where he was meant to be, and Ike couldn’t have asked for a better person to be hiding the truth behind the war. 

“I want to hear everything you’re willing to share,” Elena said with a wide smile. “I know I’ve been gone for a long time, but I want to hear everything. Tell me what life was like at the villa. Tell me what you’ve wanted to do with yourselves after the war ends. I know you’ve been thinking about your futures with everything going on. Please… Tell me. I want to hear about it. I want the chance to get to know you.”

Ike nodded around the sudden knot that had risen in the back of his throat. He felt like a child, sitting there in the infirmary and nearly breaking down entirely because of the kind words of his mother… But he couldn’t bring himself to care. This was where he was meant to be, and he knew it in a way he could never hope to put to words. “Yeah… I’d like that.” He glanced over at Mist to see if she would speak up first, but she was every bit as torn up by Elena’s kindness as he was. In the end, Ike nodded and forced himself to speak again. “Let me start from the beginning. I’ve been working in the villa for a long time, and I’ve come to be assigned as the personal bodyguard for the prince.”

“That’s amazing, Ike,” Elena beamed. “I noticed that the two of you were close with one another. I assume that you’ve been friends with each other for a long time.”

“Yeah. Soren and I grew up together,” Ike said. “I couldn’t ask for a better friend.” His heart went tight at the idea of calling Soren a friend. Somehow, that word felt insufficient, and Ike had only come to realize its shortcomings after he was forced to step away from the one he cared for most. Soren was everything to him, and Ike needed Soren in order to feel secure in himself. He wanted to be with his friend more than anything, and when Soren pulled away from him, Ike felt like he didn’t know how to stand anymore. They needed one another. They were each other’s worlds. Friends may have been an accurate descriptor for them, but it didn’t feel like it was enough. Ike didn’t know if it would ever be enough. He hoped he was able to find another word for it that felt fitting, but he didn’t know where to start. Maybe he could get to the bottom of it after he told Elena everything she wanted to know. Her eyes were sparkling, and Ike knew he wouldn’t be able to leave her hanging for too much longer than he already had. 

“Soren and I first met when Father moved us out to the villa. Back then, we were really young, but we immediately got along,” Ike explained with a smile. “And ever since then, I’ve been by his side. I vowed I would protect him from anything and everything that could have hurt him, and I meant it when I said it.”

“He’s lucky to have you by his side,” Elena smiled. “Tell me more about him. I’m curious now.”

Ike’s chest seemed to lighten, and he nodded. “He’s… He’s everything to me. Soren is smart, charming, witty, creative, curious… He’s so many things, and I love every part of him.” Love. As soon as Ike said the word, he felt its truth strike him to the core. That was what this was, wasn’t it? Ike hadn’t acknowledged it with that word in the past, but it was the only one that fit here. Friendship wasn’t enough, but love most certainly was. 

Ike loved Soren, and he knew now that he said it that he had for a long time. 

Ike didn’t let that stop him from talking though. He would be able to work through that revelation and everything that came with it after he was finished talking to Elena. “It was a few years ago that I was assigned as his bodyguard. He was getting tired of being followed by others everywhere in the villa, so I decided to step up and take the job over for him. That was when we started to get even closer, and…”

~~~~~

Soren wished he knew what he was meant to do. 

He had been standing near the edge of the camp for a while, watching Elincia from afar but unsure of how he was meant to approach her. Soren normally planned out his words carefully, his tongue eternally sharp and ready for any verbal sparring match that could have come his way. Now though… This was a situation Soren was going to have to approach with a gentle touch, and he didn’t know how to do it. Elincia deserved to be treated with care after she was betrayed so deeply, but Soren didn’t know where to start. He doubted he would ever find an answer he was truly satisfied with as long as these circumstances were unfolding around him. 

Soren forced himself to move forward around the dread that had nestled in the pit of his stomach. He wasn’t going to be happy with the way this conversation went no matter what. He had hoped he would be able to tell Elincia everything she wanted to know when he wanted to say it and not a moment sooner. As long as that chance had been stolen from him though, he wanted to give her the truth. No one understood her better than him right now, and she hadn’t known it for ages. She deserved better than that. Soren was going to prove it to her even though he had done a poor job of it in the past. 

Soren moved quietly as he settled down beside Elincia at the edge of the camp. She jolted when she realized he was beside her, and she blinked rapidly to remind herself to come back into her body. “Soren,” she whispered, her breath coming out a wheeze from her surprise. She thought about it for a moment before offering him a smile that barely felt genuine. “Or should I be calling you… Prince Soren?”

“Just Soren,” Soren assured her with a shake of his head. “I don’t feel much attachment to my history or heritage right now. I’m sure you can understand the reason why fairly easily.” If I was connected with Daein, then I wouldn’t be here in this camp. I would be with my father… But I’m not. 

Elincia nodded slowly, processing his words for everything they could have ever been worth. “I see,” she murmured. She went quiet once again, staring out at the wilderness around the edge of the camp. There were lights dancing in the distance behind them, but neither one of them turned to let their faces fall beneath the firelight. All that mattered now was the darkness spread out before them, and it was all-consuming. Soren almost wanted it to swallow him then and there even though he knew that was a selfish thought he couldn’t afford to indulge. 

“Do you think you could… Explain it all to me?” Elincia questioned. “The full story of how you found yourself here. I know a lot must have happened in order for you to flee from Daein and join the rest of us in fighting against your father. Could you tell the story from the beginning?”

Soren nodded. “You… You’ve already heard a lot of it from Ike and Mist. The only detail they didn’t share with you was the fact that they were in Daein because of me. Their father was once a member of the Four Riders, but he left the position years ago when my mother asked him to. She left the castle behind and settled down in a villa elsewhere in Daein. Gawain decided to go with her, and he raised his children alongside me for all that time.”

“And the reason the villa was attacked… It was because of your father,” Elincia concluded, and Soren nodded once again. “I do not understand… Why would he do such a thing? If he wanted to get to you, then why couldn’t he simply speak with you? There was no reason for him to attack his own country.”

“He and my mother don’t get along all that well these days,” Soren explained. “I haven’t ever known the two of them to get along, as a matter of fact. For as long as I can remember, they’ve been separated. Something must have happened between them when I was a young child, but I don’t know what it could have been. The point is that my mother wanted nothing to do with him, and I only saw him maybe once or twice a year during planned visits. He wanted me to join him in the war, but he knew that my mother would never allow me to do something so dangerous. He thought the only way to handle a situation like that was to attack the villa and force me to come with him. I didn’t do that though, and Gawain fled with me, Ike, and Mist in tow.”

“You decided to make your way to Gallia after that, and that was when you ran into the rest of us,” Elincia said next, and Soren nodded. “That makes a lot of sense… Though I never would have guessed that you were there because you were on the run from your own nation. I… I cannot believe Ashnard would be cruel enough to lead an attack on his own family.”

“He’s a dangerous man. He always has been. I’ve known that for as long as I can remember,” Soren told her. “He wanted to have the upper hand over everyone. I was kept a secret from Daein for that reason. As far as I know, he wanted me to be unknown to the world just in case he ever decided that he wanted to use me for something. He was desperate to have the upper hand wherever he could. I was born years ago, but nobody knew that I existed at all. My mother left the castle, so nobody who came to work there knew that I existed either.”

“Then… The two of us are a lot alike,” Elincia whispered. “There was never a major schism like that between my parents, but it was deemed for the best if the world did not know I existed. That way, there would not be a war over the inheritance of the throne. My uncle was already set to step up and take charge of the country after my father’s passing, and… I was something of a surprise to everyone.” Elincia’s face grew dark with the tides of grief, but she did her best to press it down again as soon as possible. “You asked for your mother when we arrived at the castle of Daein. Is that correct?”

“Yes… I did,” Soren confirmed. “I heard that she was still alive, and Ena confirmed it when we spoke. My mother was taken back to the castle of Crimea after the war broke out. She stayed behind at the villa to distract Ashnard and keep him from coming after Gawain and I when we fled. I thought Ashnard would just kill her, but he didn’t do that. Instead, he took her captive and took her back to the castle. Maybe that was his way of trying to get me to come back to him. He likely intends to use her as bait since I turned against him.”

“I’m sorry for all of this,” Elincia suddenly burst out, and Soren stared at her with wide eyes. “You deserved better than to be dragged into a war like this. Your own father attacked you, and now… You do not know what happened to your mother. It’s awful.”

“No worse than what you went through,” Soren retorted. “You lost your parents, uncle, and kingdom the day Ashnard attacked. If anything, I would say that I got off easy… But it doesn’t change my decision at the end of the day. It doesn’t matter what Ashnard is to me. He can be my father by blood, but he will always be my enemy. No matter what it takes, I will see him slain. That much I promise you.”

Elincia’s face relaxed into a smile, and she nodded at Soren. “Thank you… I’m glad I have you by my side.” She fell silent once again, and she let out a slow breath as her smile melted away. “When I learned the truth about who you were, I… I was frightened. I’ll admit that freely. At the same time though, I wanted to know more about you. I wanted to feel like I could rely on you no matter what. I did not want to lose you the way I feared I would. Now that I have spoken to you, I know that you will not turn on us. I know I can trust you, and I am glad I can. I would never have made it this far without you, and… I hope that we will be able to stand together well into the future as well.”

“Of course,” Soren assured her. “For as long as you need me, I’ll be standing by you. I’m going to make sure the war ends as well as it possibly can, and right now, that means fighting to see the war brought to an end. I promise.”

“And I will be standing by you,” Elincia vowed. Soren felt his eyes go wide, and Elincia’s smile returned. “I have thought about it extensively as of late… You have all fought so hard for my sake. You want to bring the world back to peace, but you are doing so because of the threat that came to Crimea when Ashnard first laid siege to the capital. Now… I want to do what I can to make it up to all of you. I have been learning how to heal for a while, and I want to fight alongside all of you.”

“You don’t need to do that,” Soren told her. “The rest of us are more than alright with fighting the way we have been. We wouldn’t be here if we weren’t alright with it.”

“Still, I have learned a lot, and I want to put all of my knowledge to good use. That begins with taking to the battlefield with the rest of you. I have been training for a while, and I will keep pushing for as long as I must to see this through,” Elincia vowed. “Tomorrow, I will be reassuring everyone in the army that you will be staying with us as well. I know that quite a few people have worried that the truth of your heritage coming out is going to mean that you must leave us. I do not want anyone to believe that for even a moment longer though. I’ll make sure they all trust you as much as they can given the circumstances.”

“I… Thank you.” Soren’s chest felt lighter with her words, and he felt all of the pressure in his posture starting to unwind and then disappear. He had feared more than anything else that he would lose his support system when the truth came out, but Elincia was happy to make sure that was not the case. It was a greater relief than Soren could ever hope to put to words, and he felt like he could breathe for the first time since the truth found its way out. “That really means a lot.”

“Of course.” Silence fell between them once more, and Elincia tilted her head to the side in confusion. “If you don’t mind my asking… What was it like to grow up in the villa you called home in Daein?”

“It was… Different from what most would expect of a prince,” Soren answered, and he saw Elincia nod in understanding. No one would understand this quite like she would, after all. “It was lonely at times, not being able to leave, but I had Ike and Mist there by my side. I wouldn’t have made it this far without them. Both of them mean a lot to me, and I’m determined to do whatever I can to help them after all they have done for me.”

“That’s really sweet,” Elincia smiled softly. Her eyes grew dark and overcast, and she looked down at the ground with an unhappy sigh. “I grew up with two of my retainers: Geoffrey and Lucia. The two of them were there for me even when my own parents were unable to be there. A lot of people had to die for me to make it where I am now, and… I have heard nothing of their fates. I hope that they are still alive, but… I will not know for certain until after the war is over, I suppose.” Elincia forced herself to breathe through her grief, and something resolute rose in her eyes. “I’m going to do everything I can to bring Crimea back to life after all that has happened. My kingdom needs me, and I will not let it down.”

“And I’ll be right there by your side through it all,” Soren vowed. “I don’t know what’s going to happen within Daein after my father dies, but I’m going to do what I can to make sure this never comes close to happening again. I can’t say if I’ll be allowed to sit on the throne or not, but… I want to do what I can to keep us from being lost to the cycle of bloodshed.”

“If you are able to sit on the throne, then I think Daein will be in fine hands,” Elincia smiled. “You have already made for a fine tactician within this army, and I know that you will be a fine leader for your people as well. I look forward to being able to work with you regardless of what that means once this war has come to an end.”

Soren felt warmth spread throughout his chest, and he nodded. “So am I.” He had feared this moment for so long, believing that it was going to be the end of the world as he had come to know it, but he could not have been further from the truth. Elincia still wanted him there, and Soren wanted to stay by her side as well. They were going to be alright so long as they were together. No one understood them quite like the other did, and Soren was glad to have somebody by his side who could comprehend the darkness of his situation so perfectly. 

This was only the beginning. Soren had fought long and hard to make sure the army made it this far, but they were not finished yet. One way or another, they would sit all of this right, and that began with seeing Ashnard slain. Soren did not know if he was ready to be a prince or even a king, but he would have to find a way to put the pieces together. 

After all, this was far greater than him. This was about Crimea and Daein, and Soren would not fail either one. 

Chapter Text

When the morning arrived, Soren woke slowly. He didn’t entirely remember falling asleep, but he knew he had talked to Elincia the night before. He must have made his way back to his tent after he finished speaking with her about everything going on. The truth had finally come out, and Soren spoke with her about everything it entailed. Elincia had accepted him too. He had feared her reaction for ages, but it had all been for nothing. Elincia wanted him to stay, and she was going to stand by him no matter what happened next. 

Soren’s chest felt tight at the thought, but he knew it was a good thing. He smiled to himself, pressing one hand against his heart. He had feared more than anything that the world would crumble when he finally revealed who he was, but it had all been for nothing. Maybe people were going to look at him differently after learning the truth about who he was. Soren didn’t care about that anymore. He knew he would be safe as long as he was there in the army. Elincia was going to make sure he was alright no matter what it took, and Soren was glad for it. He wanted to stay, and he couldn’t express his relief for Elincia’s kindness enough. 

Ike was already out of the tent and getting ready for the day. Soren knew that was a sign that he had slept well the night before. Nearly every morning, Soren woke first since he was generally an early riser and preferred to get a jump on the day to the best of his ability. Ike had woken first today though, and Soren didn’t know what time it was as a result. He could at least say that he had needed the rest if nothing else. He must have needed it if he had fallen asleep so completely without even registering it. 

Soren pried himself out of bed and got ready for the day as quickly as he could. He was a bit behind schedule, but he could work out a solution soon. Soren left the tent behind with a slow breath, trying his best to prepare for the battle to come. It wasn’t even really a fight involving combat; Soren just had to fight through the ways other people were going to stare at him. He could do that. He had handled worse before. 

Much to Soren’s surprise though, he found the majority of the camp empty and lacking in activity. Soren stared at the empty camp in surprise before forcing himself to look around for everyone. The rest of the army must have been around there somewhere. Maybe they were getting ready for the day’s march. They were set to start the journey back toward Crimea that day, and–

Speaking of Crimea, Soren saw the army gathered together in a different area of the camp. Elincia was standing in front of the army as everyone spoke quietly. They were clearly confused about why Elincia had brought them all there, and Soren felt his chest go tight. That was right. Elincia had said that she wanted to make an announcement to the rest of the camp about Soren’s heritage. She still wanted him there, and she was going to prove it however she could. 

Titania was the first to spot Soren through the crowd, and she gestured for him to come over to the spot where she was standing beside Elincia. Soren pushed his way forward to the best of his ability. He couldn’t tell if the rest of the army was talking more or less when he pushed through the crowd, but Soren ultimately decided to not ask the question. Instead, he settled into place just beside Elincia. 

Titania slammed the hilt of her axe against the ground, and the noise echoed throughout the area sharply to force everyone into silence. The army turned to look at Titania before their gazes settled on Elincia. The princess stepped forward, her hands pressed against her chest. She always did that when she was anxious, but there was a strength about her today. She was ready to face whatever consequences may have come from this conversation, and she would not back down simply because she was told. 

“Thank you all for gathering here today,” Elincia declared, and the remaining buzz of the crowd vanished in an instant. “I wanted to speak about the recent developments within the camp over the last few days. I understand that a lot of new information has come to light, and I would like everyone here to know that I am aware of it. The prince of Daein has been fighting in our army since the beginning, and I know the truth now. He obscured his identity in the past, but we are aware of who he is now. With all of that in mind… I would like you all to know that he will be staying with us going forward. He has been our tactician since the start, and he will remain our strategist to the end of this war as well. I trust him completely, and I would ask that you all place your faith in him as well. His strategies will deliver us to victory against the forces of Daein.”

“Is this a good idea?” some voice within the crowd asked. “He’s the prince of the enemy nation!”

Elincia shook her head. “I have spoken with him personally about this. He has not been allied with the king for many years. He was raised away from the king and has no intention of working with him now or any time within the future. He has been a valuable ally in the past, and he will not be leaving us in the future either. I trust that he will stand by us until this war is over, and I would ask that you all place your faith in him as well.”

Soren took a step forward, and he felt the attention of the crowd shift in his direction. “I know that some of you are hesitant to trust me given what you have learned. There is nothing I can do to stop you from feeling that way about me, but I want to do what I can to prove myself trustworthy. I will fight for your trust, and I hope you will give me the chance to earn it. I intend to see the king of Daein brought to his knees, and that will not change. I am loyal to the Crimean liberation before I am loyal to Daein. That much I swear to all of you.”

Uncertainty continued to buzz in the crowd, and Titania took that as her cue to speak up. “I understand why you are all doubting him. However, I would like to point out that if he was going to betray us, he would have done so ages ago. He could have destroyed the army months ago, but he never did. He has fought for the sake of the Crimean liberation, and I know he will hold true to that purpose to the end.”

“It may take time for you all to trust me again, but I will give you everything I have to help you understand my perspective,” Soren vowed. “This will be the beginning of the end of Ashnard’s rule. I will not let him tear any other nations apart after what he has already done. No matter what, I am standing with you. If that means I must fight against my flesh and blood, then so be it… I do not believe Ashnard is deserving of that title anyway. Consider me not as the prince of Daein but instead as the strategist for the army, and that position will not change. That much I swear to you.”

Soren could feel the atmosphere in the area change, and he knew his voice was being heard. Even if the others in the army had been afraid of him after learning who he was, they were willing to hear him out now and give him the chance to prove his allegiance. Soren would not let this opportunity go to waste either. He knew what he had to do, and he would see this through to its end. Ashnard would die, and Soren would be the one who created the strategy that brought him to the ground. 

Soren glanced around the crowd as everyone began to shift in other directions to prepare for the day’s march. He couldn’t find Ike or Mist anywhere in the crowd. Soren frowned to himself and started to walk away, hoping he had simply missed them. In the end, he saw no traces of either one of the siblings in the crowd that had gathered around him and Elincia, but he noticed a flash of familiar color in the infirmary tent. Of course Ike and Mist would be there. They were bound to want to look after Gawan however they could before the army had to get moving again. 

Ike and Mist were standing nearby as Elena helped to ease Gawain to his feet. Gawain was looking better now than he had the day before, but he was still a bit on the pale side. He wouldn’t be able to fight or anything, but he was getting closer to recovering his strength. Soren smiled at the sight. He was glad things were finally starting to come together again. He couldn’t have asked for anything better after the world had done so much to try and push him to ruin as of late. 

“Soren,” Ike greeted when he realized the prince was standing in the entrance of the tent. “What’s going on? I heard a bunch of noise outside. Is everything alright?”

“The princess had an announcement to make. She wanted to let everyone know that I would be staying with the army regardless of what everyone thought of me,” Soren explained. “It seems to have been received well. They are all willing to hear me out even if they are wary of me being the prince of Daein. I intend to take their trust as far as I can and prove my loyalty to the cause. They will have nothing to fear.”

“I’m glad they were willing to hear you out,” Mist smiled. “I don’t think the army would stand any chance if you weren’t there to help us out… Especially since we’ve got another major battle waiting for us soon.”

Soren nodded. In a few days, the army would be arriving at the border between Crimea and Daein. The nations were divided by a bridge, and Soren would be directing the army in moving across it toward the fallen kingdom. There were bound to be Daein soldiers stationed there to try and stop the Crimean liberation from reaching its home nation again. Soren couldn’t say he was looking forward to the battle, but he knew without a shadow of a doubt that he was ready for it. He wouldn’t let anyone stop him from seeing this through. He had fought to make it this far, and Soren was ready to make sure the world was ready for everything to come. 

“You’re all doing good work,” Gawain remarked from his place elsewhere in the tent. He pressed one hand against his wound like he thought that would be enough to stop the pain from flowing out from it. “I’m proud of all you’ve done. I know the liberation is in good hands.”

“Thank you, Father,” Ike smiled. “We’re going to see this through no matter what it takes. I promise.”

Gawain nodded. “I have faith that you will finish it… This is only the beginning, and I trust that the war will end well.”

“I’m glad you’re willing to trust them. I know we can’t let you out onto the battlefield right now, and I’m fully aware of how much that’s killing you,” Elena said with a weary smile of her own. She had been pushing as hard as she could get away with to ask that Gawain take care of himself, but that was much easier said than done with how much he wanted to return to combat. Gawain knew it was a poor idea, and he wasn’t going to do anything that he thought would make his situation worse, but he still yearned to do more. 

But Soren knew that everything was going to be alright. Gawain had placed his faith in them, and Soren wasn’t going to let it go to waste. As long as there were people who believed in him–and even after they stopped caring–Soren was going to keep fighting. He had made it this far, and nothing would stop him from seeing this through. 

And that included the nation that he had once thought of as his birthright. 

~~~~~

The battle on the bridge went as well as it could have. 

At last, things were starting to feel like they were going to end for real. Ike had thought before that it was strange that he and the rest of the army hadn’t run into anyone from Daein’s Four Riders… But that was not true of the march into Crimea. There may not have been any significant generals stationed in Daein, but Petrine was waiting on the bridge that led into Crimea, and she had an entire army at her back. She was determined to stop the Crimean liberation before it could reach the soil it sought, and she was willing to give the battle everything she had to do so. 

None of it amounted to much though. Not only was the Crimean liberation able to defeat her, but they claimed a few other victories in the battle as well. Jill was able to convince the leader of some Daein wyvern riders to stop fighting and ally with the liberation instead. Apparently, Haar was an old friend of her and her father, and after Shiharam’s death, Haar decided he wanted to fight alongside Jill instead. 

The far greater triumph, however, came in the form of the people who arrived at the edge of the battlefield to watch the fight unfold. Two strange figures arrived near the seize point at the far side of the bridge, and Ike soon learned who they were from Elincia. Lucia and Bastian were two of Elincia’s closest friends and retainers from before the war began. They had survived the attack on the capital and wanted to do everything in their power to reclaim their nation from Daein. To that end, they had been pulling together a revolution of their own, though it was nowhere near as the one Elincia had asked Ike to lead. Crimea’s own people were fighting back against Ashnard, and that offered a massive boost in morale. 

Ike’s spirits wound up being dampened, however, by the next choice Lucia and Bastian tried to make. They directed the army back toward their base of operations, but when the army arrived, they found it overrun with Daein soldiers. Lucia wanted Elincia to leave behind her final retainer–Geoffrey–and fight for the sake of Crimea’s future. Ike refused to listen to something so horrible though. All people deserved a chance at life, and he needed to give Geoffrey a chance too. 

And so, another battle began. It was hardly an easy one, but Ike knew it was a fight worth enduring. He stood by his convictions, and he managed to see it through alongside the rest of his allies. Geoffrey was a little worse for wear by the time the army rescued him, but he was alive and in one piece. Ike was glad he had been willing to stand up and do what was right even when the people around him doubted it. If he hadn’t rushed off when he had, then they never would have made it in time to rescue Geoffrey. Just like that, the Crimean liberation reunited with old allies from Elincia’s past, and Elincia was able to make peace with the people she had missed most since the downfall of the villa. Everything was truly looking up again, and Ike was glad for it. 

And yet, Ike couldn’t bring himself to think this victory was complete. Throughout the battle to rescue Geoffrey, he couldn’t shake the feeling that he was being watched. At first, he thought he was just paranoid and letting his anxiety get to him… But as the battle wore on, he knew there was more to it than that. Ike looked out into the distance a handful of times, and he could have sworn he saw someone watching him on the horizon. He already knew exactly who it was going to be too. It made sense that he would be there now whether Ike wanted to admit it or not. 

The Black Knight wasn’t going to just walk away and leave the army alone after everything that had happened that night in the forests of Daein. The Black Knight had been after them for a reason, and he wasn’t going to give that up without a fight. Gawain may not have had Lehran’s Medallion, but there was something else to the Black Knight’s presence there too. Ike couldn’t say for certain since he wasn’t his father, but he almost felt like there was something… Personal to the Black Knight chasing after the army. There was more than Lehran’s Medallion driving the recent choices of the Black Knight, and Ike was sure of it. He hated having to admit it, but at the same time, Ike knew it to be true. The Black Knight wanted something more than just the medallion, and the Crimean liberation was the only place he would be able to find it. 

Ike wasn’t entirely sure of what to do when he first noticed the Black Knight was watching him and the rest of the army from afar. He wanted to say he had a plan, but the fact of the matter was that he didn’t think he would ever be able to plan for a thing the Black Knight did or did not try to do. The man was a mystery, and even after waking up, Gawain hadn’t said a word about who he was beneath the mask. Ike was almost tempted to ask him about it after the battle wound down, but he didn’t surrender to the idea. Gawain had been through more than enough at the hands of the Black Knight, and the last time Ike got involved with an encounter between the two of them, Gawain nearly died. Ike couldn’t put him in a position like that a second time. 

As much as he tried to avoid thinking about it, Ike knew that he would carry the guilt of that night with him for the rest of his life. He was glad Gawain had survived since it meant he wouldn’t be forced to carry the burden of knowing he was responsible for the death of his father… But it had still been a close call. Gawain had been handling himself just fine right up until the moment Ike appeared to distract him. That was when the Black Knight managed to turn the tides of the fight, and Ike knew it. Gawain was still recovering from that attack, and he would be for quite some time to come too. Ike was the reason his father was unable to fight these days, and he couldn’t let his fear do something to hold Gawain back again. 

So when he finally decided to confront the Black Knight, Ike did so on his own. The rest of the army was settling down in the makeshift base Geoffrey, Lucia, and Bastian had set up, so they would have a roof over their heads for the night. Ike was glad for that; it meant fewer people would ask questions and then come after him when they realized he had strayed so far from the heart of the party. Ike just needed a few minutes, and hopefully, this would buy him the extra time he was searching for. 

Just as Ike expected, the Black Knight was waiting for Ike at the edge of the battlefield. The grasses were still stained red with blood, but Ike did his best to step gingerly so he didn’t end up soaking his boots in anything scarlet. The Black Knight did not move. He had his blade in his hand, but he wasn’t using it for the sake of defense yet. Instead, the tip of the sword was turned around so it was embedded in the dirt, and the Black Knight’s hands were resting on the hilt. He would be ready to tear the sword free at a moment’s notice, but he was not at that point yet. He was waiting for Ike to make the first move. Ike could feel it in the way the Black Knight watched him from beneath his helmet. 

“I didn’t expect to see you here,” Ike began simply, though there were a million other thoughts racing through his head and demanding to be screamed out. “Why are you following us?”

The Black Knight remained quiet for a long moment. “You do not have it.”

“No, we don’t have it,” Ike replied. He didn’t owe the Black Knight even the slightest implication of the truth, not after what he had done to Gawain. “I hope you thought it was worth it to go after my father for the sake of finding it though. Are you satisfied?” Ike still didn’t understand a thing about the Black Knight after all this time. Gawain seemed to know who he was beneath the helmet, but he hadn’t shared that information with anyone. Ike was curious about it, but he also knew better than to think he would be able to force his father to talk about it before he was ready. If Gawain wanted to keep this quiet, then Ike was more than willing to go along with it, at least for the time being. 

The Black Knight had no plans of revealing who he was either, and he remained quiet for a long moment, simply studying Ike in the silence. Ike felt like he was being looked right through, but he didn’t back down beneath the Black Knight’s unwavering gaze. “Did you hear about who I truly am?”

Ike shook his head. “He never told me… Though I don’t think it matters all that much. You decided to attack him, and as soon as I get the chance… I’m going to make sure you go down for it.”

The Black Knight said nothing for a long while once again, simply watching Ike like he expected the young general to leap at him with his sword at the ready. When Ike did not move, the Black Knight turned away. In a flash of light, he was gone, and all Ike could do was stare at the spot where he had last been. He let out a slow breath and shook his head. He should have known the Black Knight wasn’t going to say anything to him if he could at all avoid it. Ike was just going to have to find another way to learn more about him. 

Since talking to the Black Knight had failed, Ike turned back toward the castle and set his sights on finding his father. Mercifully, he was not interrupted in his journey to find Gawain in the room that had been marked as the infirmary. Gawain was speaking with Elena when Ike arrived. This didn’t surprise him at all; Gawain and Elena had a lot to catch up on after all the years they had spent apart, and as long as Gawain couldn’t fight, now was as good a time as any to do it. 

Ike knocked against the doorframe, something like guilt clawing at the back of his throat since he knew he would be interrupting them. Gawain and Elena went silent immediately, both turning to face him. “I hope I’m not interrupting anything,” Ike began. “But, Father… I want to know more about the Black Knight.”

Gawain’s eyes went wide, and Ike took that as his cue to continue. “He was following us. I saw him outside the castle after the battle ended, and I went to talk to him. He didn’t say anything about why he was here or who he was. You know who he is beneath the mask, don’t you? I’m sure of it. The way you were talking to him that night in the Daein forests really made it sound like it.”

Even Elena seemed shocked by that, and Gawain let out a slow sigh. “The Black Knight was a protege of mine years ago… But it doesn’t matter much who he is anymore. The two of us aren’t fighting on the same side anymore. I recognized him from the way he fought years ago. I think he has always been interested in fighting me again now that his skills have improved, but he’s not going to get the fight he craves. That was part of what he wanted that night in the woods too, but now…” Gawain let out a low rumble of a laugh, and Elena looked away from him sadly. “That’s not going to be happening for a very long time.”

Ike nodded slowly, the guilt in his chest growing stronger than before. Gawain didn’t give him much time to sit in it though, instead adjusting his position on his bed ever so slightly. “The Black Knight wears armor similar to that of the king of Daein. Both he and Ashnard have armor that was blessed by the goddess a very long time ago, and that blessing remains strong. In order for anyone to injure them, then they’re going to need a weapon that has also been blessed by the gods… Do you remember the sword the Black Knight gave me that night in the woods?”

Ike blinked and nodded. “Yes… I do. I took it with us after you were attacked. Something about it just felt important to me, and I thought it would be best if I brought it along.” After a moment of silence, Ike’s eyes went wide. “Hold on a moment… Is that one of the weapons that can hurt him?”

Gawain nodded. “He wanted to fight me at his full strength and at my full strength. He can only be hurt by a select few weapons, and the blade he gave me that night is one of them. I believe it will be crucial to defeating the Black Knight and Ashnard both. I know it might not be what you’re used to fighting with, but it is crucial that you learn how to wield it.”

Ike’s eyes went wide. “You… You want me to use it?”

“Of course. I can think of no finer swordsman in the army. It only makes sense that you would be given the blade after all you have done to see this rebellion to its end,” Gawain said as if it was the most obvious thing in the world. He glanced through the infirmary before his gaze caught on a select few of his belongings leaning against the wall. Elena seemed to understand what he was trying to get at, and she walked across the room before picking up the blade. It was heavy for her, and she struggled to carry it for more than a few seconds, but Ike was there to take it off her hands. 

Ike couldn’t help but stare at the blade once it was in his grasp. He felt stronger just holding it, and he could only imagine that its strength would increase once he learned how to use it. In many ways, using the sword felt wrong somehow. The Black Knight had given it to Gawain, and Ike knew he had intended for Gawain to be the one to use it in any future battles they may have shared… But that was not what would happen. Gawain was too injured to fight, so the mantle would have to fall to his son, the one who had been given so much since the start of the war. 

“I won’t be able to fight until well after this war is over. I know you’ll be able to use the sword well though,” Gawain went on, seeming to see the hesitation in his son’s eyes. “If you ever face the Black Knight in combat, then you can fight with this blade, and it will help you to pierce his armor. I have no doubt he will be coming after our army again, and when that time comes… I would ask that you be careful. He will not be an easy foe to overcome, but I have no doubt that you will be able to do it. Ragnell will help you see this through. I am sure of it.”

Ike nodded, something resolute shining in his eyes. He wasn’t sure if he was ready for everything that was going to come with using this blade–the Ragnell as Gawain had called it–but Ike was determined to do what he could to fight back. He had made it this far, and he refused to let himself crumble now. If there was a chance this sword would help him to end the war, then Ike had to try and use it. The entire world was counting on him, and Ike refused to fail it now. 

“Thank you, Father,” Ike said softly. “You can count on me. I promise.” As soon as he left the infirmary, he would start to train with it. The sword was different from what he was used to, but Ike wasn’t going to let that stop him. One way or another, Ike would be ready for the battle against the Black Knight. He would use this sword to exact his vengeance and defeat the Black Knight once and for all. 

And after that, Ike would use it to lay Ashnard low too. 

Chapter Text

The Crimean liberation had to march ever forward. 

Ike couldn’t entirely say he felt ready for what was to come, but he knew what he had to do. The future was depending on him, and he wasn’t going to lose his nerve now. He had already overcome impossible odds to make it this far. He had helped Elincia to flee from Crimea. He had guided her toward Gallia even before he knew who she was. He had gotten the army to Begnion. He had learned the truth about the Serenes massacre and the secrets behind the Begnion’s actions. And finally, Ike was named as the leader of the Crimean liberation army. 

That didn’t even begin to factor in everything Ike had accomplished after that. The idea of Begnion felt so distant now, like a memory he wasn’t quite able to bring to the surface. The army had gone to Daein and wound up finding the Black Knight hot on their heels. Ike had been the reason for his father’s fall from grace, but he had saved Gawain’s life all the same. Perhaps it was an equivalent exchange, but it wasn’t one Ike could say he felt great about. That hadn’t been the end either. Ike reclaimed the Daein castle, and as soon as the war ended, he would be able to travel there and perhaps to do something to set all of this right. It would be too little too late, and it would not bring back those who had lost their lives in the past, but it would be something. Ike was determined to see all of this through, and he would make sure he defeated Ashnard no matter what it took. 

It felt strange to think about. Ike knew he had to keep moving even after the army finished its business at Castle Delbray. They were getting closer than ever before to seeing Ashnard defeated. With each battle they won, they would be a little bit closer to the end of all of this. It was really feeling like the end too now that Ike had managed to face off against a member of the Four Riders in combat. He had won too, and that left only three of Ashnard’s strongest generals left for him to defeat. This was exactly the way it was all meant to go, and Ike was sure of it in a way he had never been sure of anything else before. 

But none of his thoughts about his progress even compared to the shining moment in his mind that had come when his father gave him the blade Ragnell. Ike didn’t know how he was meant to go on with his life after he was given the chance to wield a legendary blade… But that was just what he had to do. He had to use this sword to help those who were unable to help themselves. Ike may have struggled to reconcile that this was his reality, but he was going to have to figure out a way to make it work. The blade in his hands was special, and it would be the instrument that brought both Ashnard and the Black Knight down. This was the blade that would end the war, and Ike was the one who had been given the chance to wield it. 

The first battle Ike faced with Ragnell in his hands was… An interesting one. Ike had never imagined he would be met with enemies willing to roll boulders onto his head, but he supposed there was a first time for anything. In a way, it was a symptom of the desperation of the Daein army. It was nearing its end, and the fighters under Ashnard’s command had to see what was coming. They needed to hold strong, because if they failed, their nation was going to crumble. Their choices were growing fewer and farther between, and right now, the best one they could think of was to fight. 

Ike surprised himself with how easily he was able to handle fighting with Ragnell. The blade was certainly different from what he was used to, but it wasn’t anywhere near as unwieldy as he had feared. In fact, it wound up being the perfect tool to help him see the fight through. The enemy forces were strong, but Ike was able to handle every foe that came his way. Using Ragnell gave him a confidence unlike any other, and Ike felt like he really would be able to do this. He hadn’t ever thought he would stand a chance against Ashnard in a fight back when he was growing up in the villa. Now though, everything was about to change. Ike was going to make sure it changed through his own actions too. That was the position he had been granted as a leader, and Ike wasn’t going to let it leave his grasp now. 

The end truly was in sight. Ike had been hoping he would be able to face off with at least one other member of the Four Riders during the battle pushing up the Crimean hillside toward the capital, but he was still fine with the way it had ended. He knew he was getting closer to where he needed to be to see this through. Gawain may have been unable to fight, but Ike was handling everything in his stead. It was a point of pride Ike hadn’t realized he sought until he was given the chance to enjoy it. He had never thought himself capable of being the leader of an army, but now, Ike was proud to say that he had grown to fit the position well. He may have faced more doubts than he could ever hope to count along the way, but he was there. That was all that mattered. 

“What are you thinking?”

Soren’s voice cut through Ike’s thoughts, and he looked down beside him to find the sage had settled into a place at his side. Soren’s eyes were locked on the horizon ahead of them, and Ike knew that he was imagining all the potential futures waiting for them on the other side of their next few battles. They had fought to make it this far, but they still had their most challenging opponents ahead of them. Ike had yet to defeat the Black Knight or Ashnard, and having a blade that could damage them would not be enough. There was no guarantee he would be able to win against them simply because he had Ragnell in his hands. 

Ike let out a slow breath. “I’m wondering what’s going to happen when all of this is over,” Ike admitted. For so long now–over a year, in fact–Ike’s life had been consumed by the war. He had been given no choice but to think about it all day every day. There was no time for him to step back or concentrate on himself. The war between Crimea and Daein was significant, and it begged for Ike to pay attention to it with every moment he could spare. “We’re getting closer than ever before to finally defeating Ashnard, and after that…”

“You don’t know what’s going to happen,” Soren finished for him, and Ike nodded. Ike had been excited by the idea of seeing the war through to its end for a while. He couldn’t say he particularly enjoyed having to fight for his life every day. The stakes were much higher than they  had any right to be, and it was all because of Ashnard and his greed. Ike wanted to see the war to its end and to save all the innocent lives that would come with its conclusion… But he had no idea what to expect once he laid this conflict to rest once and for all. None of them knew. 

“Yeah,” Ike confirmed. Silence fell between them, and Ike let out a slow breath. “But there’s no way to see it through other than to face it.” 

Soren’s fingers wove their way into Ike’s hand, and the two stared down at the spot where their fingers were laced together. The war had changed their relationship significantly in ways they would never quite be able to put into words. It felt like they understood one another in a way that nobody else could ever match up to. They didn’t need to explain or explore it. They understood each other too well for that. 

If Ike was being honest though, he knew he should have said something. He didn’t know where his words were supposed to come from, but he had to tell Soren how he was feeling. The war had been consuming much of his attention, but he had still been given enough time to think about something else. He had still realized that he felt strongly toward Soren when explaining their dynamic to his mother to make up for the years they had spent apart. Ike cared for Soren more than he could have ever imagined, and it almost made his chest ache to think that he didn’t know how he was meant to define that care. He and Soren belonged together. They were more than just friends, and even if Ike couldn’t find the strength to say it, he knew the truth lived in every silent moment they shared. 

“We’ll get through this together,” Soren insisted, and Ike had to wonder if Soren meant for those words to come off as charged with more weight than he would be willing to share with anyone else. No matter what, they would endure together. There was no way of saying what the future would have in store for them, but they were going to push through as a team. Ike’s loyalty to Soren ran deeper than he could describe at the moment, and he hoped Soren could feel it. He hoped Soren thought of something more when they held hands in the silence. It was selfish, but it was important to Ike in a way that made his throat feel like it was going to tighten on him. 

“Yeah,” Ike finally settled on saying. That word alone felt painfully insufficient in describing his feelings, but it was the best one he could think to share. Once the war was over, he was going to do what he could to tell Soren how he felt. His words were insufficient, but Ike would do what he could in order to make sure they rang true for the first time. Soren would understand, and their silence would be important to them but not everything. Ike could make something more, and he was determined to do what he could to prove it. 

After the war ended, the world would fall into an unpredictable chaos that came with the fall of a king. To Ike though, it was going to be the start of something new.  He would do everything in his power to prove it. Soren deserved that much, and Ike wouldn’t let it go for anything. Now that he knew the truth of how he felt–how he had always felt–he had to find a way to say it. If the world was going to prove its terror, then Ike would prove his love even if it was one of the last things he did. 

But for now, Ike remained quiet, and he walked ever forward, his fingers still laced with Soren’s all the while. This was where he belonged, and he loved it even if he couldn’t find the words to say it. 

~~~~~

Elena had never been fond of combat. 

There were a wide variety of reasons for this. The first and perhaps most obvious was that she was a healer. It was her job to look after people when they were at their lowest. When others needed the strength to keep going, Elena was there to provide it. She could help those who needed it most, and Elena was more than happy to do it. There was love to be found in healing others, and Elena vastly preferred it to using a tome in battle. She knew how to fight, of course, but she did not want to. Elena knew she did not have the hardened spirit needed for combat. She was not like her beloved, and she was fine with that. If the world needed someone to heal it, then Elena would heal it however she could. She felt better mending wounds than she ever would delivering them. Fighting could be peace, but Elena did not want to be the one to bring a tranquility like that. 

Even though Elena did not like fighting, she found herself growing restless when thinking about it these days. She wanted to do something to help the war effort, but she couldn’t do it. In this situation, it wasn’t just that she didn’t want to step up and fight. She couldn’t do it without risking anyone finding out where the medallion had gone. Nasir had likely revealed the location of her and Lillia’s cottage near the capital of Daein, and Elena couldn’t stay there. She had to run and keep the medallion secret however she could. That was the vow she had taken years ago when she vowed to look after Lillia, and Elena intended to hold true to it. 

Still, she found herself hating it each time everyone else in the army left to fight in another major battle. Elena was out of the line of fire, kept safe due to her distance from the battlefield, and she knew she should have been happy with that. Instead, Elena felt useless. She knew how to fight with light magic, and she could have done something to aid in the war effort if she was given the chance. Instead, Elena felt she had far too much energy rattling around beneath her skin, and she had to hear about the battles secondhand. Elena wanted to be there with her children, to make sure they were kept safe in the heat of a fight, but she couldn’t do it. She had a duty to Lillia and the medallion first and foremost, and Elena knew that, but she wasn’t happy with it in the slightest. 

After the battle on the hillside came to an end, the army marched ever forward. It settled down for the night within the Crimean countryside. They were getting closer and closer to the capital, and Elena knew the final battle was fast approaching. It would only be a matter of time before Ashnard fell from grace. Elena could hardly believe it was happening. She had feared she would never be free of Ashnard and his tyranny. Even if Ashnard died, there would no doubt be someone else willing to step up and take his place. Elena had thought it would be Ashnard’s son for a time, but now, she knew that to not be true. Soren was on her side, and he would not be carrying on the torch of bloodshed carried by his father. Everything was looking better than ever before. Elena would finally be able to come out of hiding, and Lillia would be able to return to her home. The Serenes Forest had been reconstructed by Reyson and Leanne, and Lillia could go back with them to see the world on her own. Much had changed since she was last allowed to roam the world freely, but Lillia was ready for it. Elena knew she was looking forward to it too. The end of the war brought with it the promise of peace, and Elena and Lillia both yearned for it. 

After the army made camp, Elena found her restlessness consuming her once again, and she knew she needed to go for a walk to clear her thoughts. She knew better than to stray too far from the camp though. Elena knew the army of Daein was still after her, and it would be until after Ashnard had been defeated once and for all. Lillia saw her leaving the camp, and she offered to go along with her. Elena was glad to have the company. After all, if anyone was going to understand her recent restlessness, then it was bound to be the woman who had shared it with her for so many years. 

For a time, Elena and Lillia walked in silence. The weather of Crimea was very different from what they were used to in Daein, but Elena liked it that way. She had always wanted to travel, but she hadn’t been able to take the chance as long as Lillia was thought to be dead by the world. Even now, Lillia wore a massive robe to cover up her wings. It was hardly comfortable, but it was a necessary evil to keep anyone from asking too many questions about who she was. Only those who absolutely had to know about her identity had been told of it. 

“I never imagined I would go to Crimea,” Lillia confessed a few minutes into their walk. “I never thought I would have a reason to leave the Serenes Forest, and once I did… I feared I would never have the chance to break free of Daein.”

“I didn’t think I would get this chance either,” Elena admitted. “But I think it’s nice. The fact that we’re here is proof the world is getting closer to peace at last.” She paused for a few seconds before smiling. “I can’t believe the war is almost over. Everyone has really been giving it their best. I don’t know what we would do without them.”

Lillia nodded her agreement, but she didn’t get the chance to respond in words. Her shoulders went stiff, and she glanced around anxiously. Elena was on the verge of asking her why she was suddenly so alert, but Lillia never gave her the chance to speak. “Someone is following us,” Lillia whispered. “I am sure of it.”

Elena opened her mouth to call out for whoever it was, but the words never properly formed. Instead, a hulking shadow of black appeared from the space between a few trees, and Elena knew immediately who it was going to be before she could ask his name. After all, there was no one who would wear armor quite like that save for the legendary and horrifying Black Knight. 

An unholy rage rose in Elena’s stomach, and it threatened to consume her completely. This was the man who had nearly killed her husband. She never would have reunited with Gawain if the Black Knight’s blade had cut even a little bit deeper that night. Elena wanted to scream and throw out a flare of light magic in his direction. He wouldn’t be hurt by it though. His armor would protect him from any pain that the spell would have otherwise caused. Nothing could hurt the Black Knight save for the blade Ragnell, and the sword was back at the camp by Ike’s side. 

“The medallion,” the Black Knight began simply. His voice was slightly distorted by the helmet he wore, but it still struck Elena as slightly familiar. She knew him, or if nothing else, she had known him once upon a time many years ago. “You have it with you. I know you do.”

“We won’t be handing it over to you,” Lillia cut in, taking a step in front of Elena and spreading her arms wide in a show of defense. “You’re making a mistake. There is nothing you can stand to gain by taking it.”

“There is nothing we can do to help you or Ashnard,” Elena chimed in. “Even if you take the medallion, we don’t know how to set its power free. I know that is what you want, but you won’t find that gift here.”

The Black Knight remained silent for a moment, and Elena knew immediately that he did not believe her. Of course he didn’t believe her. Ashnard had told him that Lillia was able to set the dark god free of the medallion, and the Black Knight was bound to believe him over the people who had been set out as his enemies. The Black Knight did not speak before he moved, pulling his blade free and leveling it at Elena and Lillia. “I would advise you to come along quietly, Princess Lillia,” the Black Knight went on. “If you join me willingly, then I will not hurt either one of you. I will make this a fight if I must… But I trust that you are smart enough to not do that.”

Lillia’s gaze flickered between the Black Knight and Elena. Recognition settled into her eyes, and Elena felt wave after wave of nausea slam into her. She already knew what Lillia was going to say before she spoke up, and it was perhaps the last thing she ever wanted to hear. “If I come with you, then you will not hurt her,” Lillia instructed of the Black Knight. She was bold to make commands of a man as strong as him, but Lillia did not flinch even when faced with the blade that she knew had nearly cut Gawain in half with but a single blow. 

“Lillia, please,” Elena begged. She knew there was nothing she could do to fix this. The Black Knight’s armor made him immune to all damage she could have tried to hurl in his direction. Elena’s only hope was to send out a flare that would blind him for a few seconds, but that was unreliable, and if it failed, then she would no doubt pay for her mistake with her life. The Black Knight thought he needed Lillia alive, but he could have decided to believe them when they said she could not set the dark god free. If that was the case, then he could simply kill her, and Elena would have the blood of her friend on her hands regardless of if she lived or died. 

The Black Knight nodded. “Of course.”

Lillia did not waste even a moment more thinking about what to do next. She took a few steps toward the Black Knight, and he took hold of her arm in one armored hand. Lillia glanced over her shoulder at the teary-eyed Elena and cast her a smile. “It’ll be alright, Elena,” Lillia assured her. “We’ll meet again… One day.”

A flash of light sparked up at the Black Knight’s feet, and in the blink of an eye, both he and Lillia vanished. Elena finally remembered how to move, and she reached out for the spot where she had last seen Lillia. She couldn’t hold her tears back any longer, and with an ugly, enraged scream, she began to cry into the night. How could she have let that happen? How could she have brought Lillia to her own destruction? How could she have failed her mission so completely?

Elena’s body moved on its own as she navigated her way through the trees and back in the direction of the camp. She had to tell someone about what had happened. If she had failed to save Lillia, then the least she could do was make sure everyone else knew about the way it had ended. Elena would rescue Lillia, but she would need the rest of the army’s help to do it. 

Elena just hoped she wasn’t too late somehow. She would never forgive herself if Ashnard found a way to unleash the dark god while she was too busy caught up in the bad way everything had ended. She couldn’t afford it. None of them could. 

~~~~~

Ike settled down in his tent with a small sigh. He and Soren didn’t get all that much time to themselves these days, so Ike was more than happy to enjoy any chance he did get to spend with his friend. Soren was reading a short distance away. His posture had relaxed significantly since he exposed Nasir as being there for nefarious reasons. Soren still wasn’t fully calm, but he was much better off now than he had been for a while, and that meant everything to Ike. He could only hope Soren continued to feel better after the end of the war too. Soren deserved all the peace he could get after everything he had already endured. 

The sound of overlapping voices elsewhere in the camp pulled Ike out of his thoughts, and he perked up with a frown. “What in the world is that about?” he murmured. He had thought most of the camp had gone out to sleep for the night. When Soren didn’t have an answer for him, Ike pushed himself to his feet and left the tent behind, Soren trailing after him by a few steps. 

A small crowd had gathered around a pair of figures who were speaking in hushed tones. Everyone was straining to hear what they were discussing, but Ike couldn’t even see them with how many people were gathered there. “Excuse us!” Soren declared, forcing the crowd to part. Even if people weren’t sure of how they felt about Soren, they were able to recognize him as the army’s tactician, and they had to stand back as long as he was giving them the order. 

The crowd pulled apart enough for Ike and Soren to reach the center of the calamity. Elena and Gawain were the ones talking, and Mist and Titania were gathered on either side of them nervously. Elena was inconsolable, crying and struggling to choke out even a few words at once. She tried to speak a handful of times, but it never seemed to work, the syllables catching in the back of her throat and then dying away. 

“What happened?” Ike asked, feeling his heart start to race from raw terror. “What’s going on?”

“Lillia,” Elena somehow choked out. “She and I left the camp to t-take a walk, and while we were o-out… The Black Knight… H-He… He threatened us, and he… He took Lillia and the medallion!”

Ike felt his heart skip a beat in his chest, but he wouldn’t have been shocked at all if it simply stopped then and there. “No…” Ashnard did know where the medallion was, and he had sent his strongest soldier out to take it back for him. Nasir had told Ashnard the truth, and now… Lillia was right back to where she had started before all of this fell apart. She was being held captive by Ashnard all over again. She had tried to escape him more than anything else, but none of that had mattered in the end. 

“We’re going to get her back,” Gawain promised, but Elena didn’t seem to believe it, still struggling to speak around her tears. “When we get to the capital of Crimea, we’ll fight through everything we have to in order to save her. If nothing else, I can say that Lillia will survive. Ashnard thinks she’s the key to unleashing the power of the medallion, and that means he needs to have her alive for as long as possible. We can use that to go and save her. We won’t be fighting for too much longer if everything goes according to plan. We can use that to save her. Everything will be fine. I promise.”

Elena forced herself to nod, but she was still shaking from the fear of what had happened. She practically collapsed into Gawain’s arms, and he pulled her into his arms for a tight embrace. Elena gladly hugged him back, letting his shoulder stem the flow of her tears as they flooded out of her eyes. 

Titania looked like she wanted to say something to make the situation even a little bit easier to stand, but she couldn’t find the words. She let out a slow breath and stood up as straight as she could stand. “I’m going to do everything I can to set this right,” she declared. “You’ll have my power by your side no matter what happens next.”

“I’ll do what I can to help too!” Mist cried out. “Regardless of where they’re keeping Lillia, we’re going to find her and bring her back home. We won’t let Ashnard do anything to hurt her. You were able to get her back once, and we’ll make sure we can save her again.”

Ike nodded, and he let one hand come to rest at Ragnell where it waited at his hip. “No matter what it takes, I’ll defeat them both.” Ashnard had started this war, but Ike was going to do everything he could to finish it. The Black Knight had gladly cut through anyone and everyone in his way to reach his goals, and Lillia had been just another victim of many laid out in his path. If saving the world from the war meant defeating them, then Ike was ready for it. He didn’t know if he was strong enough yet, but he was more than happy to fight with everything he had to gain the power he needed to defeat them both. 

“That man doesn’t deserve anything,” Soren muttered, and even though Ike didn’t know who Soren was referring to, it didn’t matter. Both Ashnard and the Black Knight would be torn down and defeated as long as the army had something to say about it. They had fought this far, and Ike was determined to fight to the end of the war too. 

Elena continued to cry from her place in Gawain’s arms, and Ike felt his determination grow stronger and stronger. He didn’t care how many battles were waiting for him or how hard they were going to be. Ashnard’s war spiraled further out of control with each passing moment it stretched on, but Ike would stop it all by destroying the problem at the root. Ashnard had too much power, and for his misuse of strength, he would die. 

And Ike knew he would be the one to claim his life. 

Chapter Text

The army continued to push through Crimea even after the Black Knight took Lillia. It was the only choice any of them had left, and Ike was determined to see it through. He had vowed he would do everything he could to bring Lillia back, and he meant it more than anything. Elena was still torn up over losing the woman who had been her sole friend for so long. She had decided to join the battles waiting in the rest of the war though, meaning there would be one more healer on the field to ensure the army could keep fighting for as long as possible. 

Ike spent nearly every spare minute he had training for the battles he knew he would have to face soon. Ashnard and the Black Knight were both dangerous foes, and Ike was going to make sure they both fell. He was the only one who could surely kill them after what they had done. Ike was going to make sure he was deserving of Ragnell, and that meant pressing on with everything he had. He swung the blade through the air whenever he could find a spare moment, and Ike felt like he was getting better at fighting with it. Ragnell may have been different from what he was used to, but Ike didn’t care. He was getting used to it, and soon enough, he would be ready. 

Ike led the rest of this army into another battle in Crimea when he saw the Daein army on the horizon. The battle was set to take place on an open field, and Ike glanced around the area for any signs of the enemy forces long before he saw them. Daein’s army was massive, and he knew it would be arriving soon. Ashnard knew he was nearing the end of his time. Right now, Ike was certain Ashnard felt that either the Crimean army would defeat him or it would fight up to the capital of Crimea and then fall beneath his blade. Ashnard seemed to be counting on it, or so Ike was theorizing. It was difficult for him to really say what Ashnard was saying or thinking now. Ike supposed it didn’t matter much anyway; he was going to have to kill Ashnard no matter what, and he didn’t care what his enemy had to say about him. He just wanted this to end as soon as possible. Ashnard could not be allowed to survive, so Ike wouldn’t give himself the chance to consider Ashnard’s life for any longer than he absolutely had to. 

Just as the reports had said, the next battle took place in an expansive field. There were a few trees here and there, but other than that, Ike found that it was a fairly standard fight. Even though the Daein army had more than twice as many soldiers as the Crimean liberation, that didn’t end up mattering much. Ike and the rest of his allies had grown so strong that they were more than capable of handling everything the battle had to offer. Daein stood no chance against them anymore. It was just a matter of time before Ashnard fell, and every person in all of Tellius seemed to know that it was coming. 

At the end of the battle, Ike was met with the newest member of the Four Riders. As far as Ike could tell, he had replaced Tauroneo around the time the war began. Ike didn’t know much about Bertram, but he could say that everything he saw about the man felt… Unsettling. Bertram barely seemed to be able to speak, his words all coming out slurred together and hazy. Bertram fought like a man possessed, but he struggled to control his body, making some of his major attacks miss. Ike had to wonder why Bertram was fighting with a helmet on if he struggled to see what was happening. Fighting Bertram was both unpredictable and simple, and Ike delivered the finishing blow to end the battle. Bertram’s words remained slurred and uncertain even as he closed his eyes, his horse having run off at some point during the battle. 

Bertram had been guarding a towering building at the edge of the field, and Ike looked up at it with a small frown. Elena pushed past him when the battle ended, and Ike trailed in after her. Elena called out for Lillia into the darkness, her voice desperate with the desire to find her friend again. Ike somehow already knew that Lillia would not be waiting for them in any of the rooms of the tower. He was proven right in the end, and there were no traces of Lillia to be found. The tower was a military base, and it hadn’t been used for much else. Lillia was still being kept as a captive by the Daein army, but she wasn’t there. 

Elena didn’t seem too shocked by the fact that Lillia was nowhere to be found. She was disappointed though, and her face fell into a heavy frown as her dread rushed in around her. Ike reached one hand out to try and soothe her, unable to find the words he needed. Elena cast Ike a smile, and he could see something like guilt in her eyes. He couldn’t quite say why she felt so guilty, but he had a few guesses. Elena didn’t want to burden her child with her own grief, and she hated that she had found herself so vulnerable that she couldn’t hide it anymore. Beyond that, Elena wished she could have done something to help Lillia and prevent all of this before it could fall apart. She would have loved to travel back in time and do all she could to keep Lillia from being taken by the Black Knight. It was impossible to stop the Black Knight without Ragnell, but Elena still wished there was something she could have done to try without risking her and Lillia’s lives. 

The army had to press on though, and Ike was happy to keep moving closer to the capital. If he couldn’t find Lillia before they reached Melior, then Ike would be comfortable in the knowledge that Ashnard was keeping Lillia as close by as he possibly could. That meant Lillia would probably be held somewhere in the castle’s dungeons alongside Almedha. Ike hoped they were able to find Lillia before then, but he knew she would be alright even if she was in the palace. Almedha may not have had much power, but Ike was certain she would have done something to take care of Lillia if they were being held together. It was a poor comfort, but it was the only one Ike could think to turn to. It wouldn’t reassure anyone else, but it was what Ike needed to keep himself held together. 

As the next battle drew nearer, Ike heard countless rumors and reports of everything to come. The next battle would be in a tower within Crimea, and the Black Knight was said to be waiting within the building. It made sense that the Black Knight would be one of the final members of the Four Riders that Ike would see defeated. He had already killed both Petrine and Bertram, and that left only the Black Knight and Bryce. The Black Knight was guarding the capital, an army in himself, and he would slay all those who dared to cross him in or out of a fight. 

But Ike wasn’t going to let that discourage him. He had Ragnell by his side, and while the blade alone was not going to be enough to defeat the Black Knight, Ike refused to give up. He had been training for this battle for years without even realizing it. The war’s end was finally in sight, and Ike was going to fight for it with everything he had. 

The battle was largely a simple one, Ike had to admit. There were many rooms in a large building, each occupied by a new wave of Daein soldiers. Ike kept his eyes peeled for the one he really wanted to fight though. The Black Knight was stated to be within that building somewhere, and Ike was determined to find him no matter what it took. He knew the others in his army would alert him as soon as they realized the Black Knight was there. The message would come back to him even if he wasn’t the first person to spot the Black Knight. Ike would be fine. 

But that didn’t shake the fear that something could happen before he was able to arrive on the scene. Ike had already heard of others suffering because he hadn’t been there to protect them. There was nothing Ike realistically could have done to help Elena and Lillia when they went on their walk and then were discovered by the Black Knight. He didn’t realize the Black Knight was there to stalk them in the first place. Still, Ike couldn’t help but feel that perhaps everything would have ended differently if he had been there. Maybe he could have kept Lillia safe and fought off the Black Knight. Maybe he would have been able to stop this mad dash to find the medallion before Ashnard could find a way to unleash its power. 

Ike knew there was something else fueling his desperation to find the Black Knight though: vengeance. Ike was smart enough to know that letting revenge fully control him was a poor idea. It would only end with him getting hurt and no doubt dragging others from his army right down to hell with him. Still, Ike couldn’t just stand back after everything the Black Knight had done to hurt Gawain. Ike’s father wouldn’t be able to take to the battlefield for a long time because of what had happened to him during his battle against the Black Knight. Ike wasn’t going to let revenge fully control his actions, but he felt he was justified in letting revenge push him forward at least a little bit faster. It was the least he could do on behalf of the man who had taught him so much. It was the least he could do for the sake of those who had helped him to make it this far in the first place. 

No matter how many rooms Ike searched or how defensive he tried to be, he never caught a glimpse of that obsidian armor though. He knew it had to be somewhere around there, and yet, the Black Knight was seemingly nowhere to be found. Ike swore under his breath each time he entered a room to find that he was not there. The Black Knight was surely around there somewhere. He had to be… But if that was the case, then why was he gone? Why couldn’t Ike find him anywhere?

The battlefield had been entirely cleared out by the time Ike’s nerves reached their highest point. He had been so ready to face the Black Knight, and he would have done anything to win the battle… But the Black Knight wasn’t there. The strongest member of the Daein army wasn’t out there on the main part of the battlefield. Ike had looked everywhere, but he came up short each place he tried to search. Either the reports had been wrong or there was something else at play regarding the Black Knight’s location. 

At the far edge of the building, Ike found a door leading deeper inside. He looked down the hallway, and he narrowed his eyes in search of any movement from the other end of the corridor. The Black Knight had to be there. If he hadn’t been anywhere else in the rest of the building, then the only explanation was that he was waiting deeper within the building. Ike was ready to face him too, and he wasn’t going to back down now that he was faced with the chance to win this battle once and for all. 

A million motives fought for the strongest position within Ike’s mind as he started toward the hallway. He was going to get revenge on the Black Knight for tearing Gawain down and nearly killing him that night in the woods. Ike was going to defeat the Black Knight to bring the army ever closer to the end of the war. He was going to win this battle so that he would be strong enough to tear Ashnard down after this fight was over. He was going to end all of this so that he would be able to bring Lillia back home and undo the pain the Black Knight had visited upon her. It was set to be the hardest battle of Ike’s life up to that point, and yet, it was one that only he would be able to fight. He had to win it. There were no other options laid out before him. 

“I hope you’re not thinking of going in there on your own.”

Ike snapped out of his thoughts when he heard Soren’s voice just beside him, and he glanced over to see that Soren and Mist had come to stand next to him. Soren was holding tightly to a tome, and Mist had her staff in her hands. “You can’t think that we’re going to let you go alone,” Soren went on. “This isn’t just your fight. This is a battle for the sake of us all, and you’re kidding yourself if you think that we’re going to leave you to it on your own.”

Ike felt his chest grow tight. He wanted to accept their help more than anything, but he didn’t know if he would be able to bring them with him in good conscience. What if the Black Knight decided to attack them? Ike would never forgive himself if something bad happened to his friends while he was fighting the Black Knight. He would never forgive himself if they wound up getting hurt, or worse, killed, because they had come with him to a battle this dangerous. 

“There could be other enemies in there,” Mist pointed out. “If you end up overwhelmed, then you’re going to end up losing this fight. We can take care of anyone else who’s with him. You’re going to need some healing too. The fight isn’t going to be easy, and you’ll need our help. We’ll be careful. I promise.”

Ike wanted to push for them staying behind so that he could handle this… But he knew there was nothing he could say or do to change their minds. They were going to come regardless of if he wanted them to accompany him or not. He was just making the choice between them walking in at his side or sneaking in after he had gone through the corridor. 

It wasn’t really much of a choice at all, was it?

Ike nodded. “Alright… Just stay close and be as careful as possible, alright?” He started through the hallway, and Soren and Mist trailed in after him. The rest of the army would wait for them just outside, and when the battle was over, they would return together as victors. Ike wouldn’t let this be the end. It didn’t matter how challenging the fight was promising it would be. Ike had too much to fight for to lose his grip now. 

Titania watched as Ike, Soren, and Mist all disappeared into the corridor and deeper into the building. A part of her yearned to chase after them, but she already knew there was not much she could do to help them now. They had figured out that the Black Knight was waiting for them on the other end of that hall, and destiny dictated that they make sure he was stopped before he had the chance to lay a hand on anyone else. Ike had trained for this moment, and he was the only one who would be able to finish this fight. Titania couldn’t say she liked the idea of leaving him to handle it on his own, but she knew she would not be able to do much to assist him at this point anyway. Ike was the one with Ragnell, and as such, he would have to handle this alone. 

But he wouldn’t be on his own. Mist and Soren would both stand by his side to the bitter end, and none of them would let anything happen to one another. Their bonds were stronger than any steel could ever hope to be, and that included the blessed metal that made up the Black Knight’s armor. Titania was afraid for all three of them, but she knew that they would not fall here. They would find a way to return, and they would be victorious the way they had always been meant to be. She simply had to have faith in them until they arrived back in the main part of the castle once again. 

“Do you think they will be alright?”

Elincia had come to stand just beside Titania, her hands pressed against her chest the same way they always were when she grew anxious. “I… I would like to follow after them, but I fear I would be only a distraction,” Elincia told Titania. “That is where the Black Knight is waiting, yes?”

“That seems to be the case,” Titania nodded. She was halfway tempted to tell Elincia that she was nervous too, that she didn’t know how any of this was going to end, but she didn’t let the words form. She wasn’t going to speak anything terrifying into the world. She knew they would be able to handle this, and Titania knew the best thing she could do for any of them now was have faith that they would be able to do it. They had made it this far, and they wouldn’t fall here either. “They’ve been preparing for this for a long time though. I know they’re going to be able to handle it. If they made it this far, then they’re going to come out of this on the other side in one piece too.”

Elincia nodded distantly, though Titania knew her heart was still full of fear in more ways than she could ever hope to put to words. Titania couldn’t blame her for feeling that way in the slightest, but now wasn’t the time to dwell on it. Titania knew she had to stay behind. If something happened to Ike, Soren, and Mist, then she was going to have to take their position in leading the army. Titania doubted it would come to that, but she knew being realistic was the best choice she could have made in the midst of such a crucial moment. She could trust them. She had to. 

“They will return,” Elincia suddenly said, her voice far firmer than it had been a few seconds prior. She had changed her attention from pressing her hands to her chest to gripping at the hilt of the Crimean royal blade, Amiti. The weapon was a strong one, and Elincia had been wielding it well… But it was not Ragnell. Right now, Elincia’s best choice was to place her faith in Ragnell and its wielder, and somehow, she seemed even surer of her choice than Titania was by her side. “One way or another, I know they will be back… And I can trust that the Black Knight will fall before the day ends.”

Titania nodded. This was the final true test before they reached Ashnard. If Ike was able to defeat the Black Knight, then that would mark him as even stronger than he had ever thought possible for himself. Ashnard was going to be wearing the same blessed armor as the Black Knight, and defeating one made it much easier to take down the other. If Ike could do this, then the final battle for the fate of Crimea, Daein, and the rest of Tellius would fall right into place the way it was meant to. Titania could feel it. 

She realized a bit too late that she hadn’t responded to Elincia despite intending to, and she forced herself to nod. There was a knot at the back of her throat, but Titania forced herself to pull it apart. She didn’t know what was going to happen next, but she knew that worrying about it was not going to change the outcome. The war would end soon, and Ike would return to be the one to put it to rest for himself. “You’re right,” Titania agreed. “This is where Daein’s downfall truly begins… And the Black Knight will just be the first step of many.”

~~~~~

News spread quickly after Ike, Mist, and Soren left to handle the Black Knight in close combat. Titania and Elincia were overheard, and soon enough, the rumors of what the army’s leadership had done was everywhere. Elena had known this was coming, and she shouldn’t have been shocked to hear it at all. She knew that Ike was the only one who stood a chance of defeating the Black Knight because he had been the one to wield Ragnell in the last few fights. Still, fear flared in her chest at the very thought of Ike, her son, going off to handle something so dangerous. Gawain was the best fighter Elena had ever known, and he had still fought and struggled with the Black Knight only to lose. Ike was still working his way up to Gawain’s level. Would he be able to do something so important? The entire world was counting on him, but would he be able to hold firm?

Elena resisted the urge to let her fear swallow her. She wouldn’t be able to do anything if she chased after Ike, Mist, and Soren, and she would probably only serve to distract them. This was something Ike was going to have to handle without her. Elena’s mind wasn’t satisfied with that though, and it kept pressing images of her encounter with the Black Knight into her head. She had nearly lost everything during that conversation, andi the Black Knight hadn’t even been trying to fight her. Ike was going to be in far greater danger, and Elena could only hope he would be able to rise to the occasion. 

“Ike will be fine. I’m sure of it.”

Gawain’s voice finally snapped Elena out of her thoughts, and she looked down at where her husband was sitting against one of the walls of the fort the army had just fought in. “Ike has been training for this for a long time. If anyone will be able to handle the Black Knight, I know it would be him,” Gawain assured Elena. “I know why you’re afraid, but you don’t need to be. Ike will be able to take care of this. I trust him.”

“It’s not that I don’t trust him,” Elena told him. “It’s that I don’t trust the Black Knight to not take this too far and hurt him. We wouldn’t know it if Ike was hurt until it was far too late for us to be able to save him. I wish we could be there with him. I know we would probably only end up distracting him at this rate, but…”

“Ike will be fine,” Gawain reiterated, and Elena was glad to know that he was able to believe that even as she felt like her doubts were going to make her unravel entirely. “He has been getting ready for this for a long time. Even before the war began, Ike wanted to get stronger for the sake of protecting those he cares for. I’m sure he will make it through this. He’ll come back to us sooner or later. I promise.”

Elena’s throat felt tight from her fear. She wanted to disagree and say that she didn’t think she would be able to stand it if something happened to Ike… But she supposed that Gawain knew their son far better than she ever could. Elena hadn’t been there for more than a decade as Ike grew up and became a stronger fighter. Gawain had a far better grip on the progress that Ike had been working to make in Elena’s absence. The only true choice she had now was to trust him. 

“Alright,” Elena finally relented. She had a million other things she wanted to say, most of them skewing toward the negative, but she didn’t let them take control of her tongue. Instead, she sat up as straight as she could stand. She didn’t know how she felt about all of this, but she wasn’t going to let her despair get the better of her just yet. Ike was going to find a way to do this. He wasn’t in it alone. Mist and Soren were both there with him, and they wouldn’t let anything happen to him. The three of them had been looking after each other for years, and Elena couldn’t even say that she had been given the chance to do that with everything else she had been forced to do. The trio would be able to face this. They had to. 

Stay safe, Elena thought, pressing her hands together in a silent prayer. Come back to me… All of you. 

~~~~~

Anticipation made Ike’s heart beat faster as he pushed his way through the halls of the castle. The Black Knight was waiting for him just a short distance ahead, and Ike was going to finally bring him to his knees. He was going to find a way to win this. He had to. Ike didn’t know how sure he was of his own skills, but he was determined to see it through. He had made it this far, and Ike would make sure the Black Knight was defeated before he had the chance to hurt anyone else ever again. 

The stench of blood hit Ike’s nose all at once, and he had to fight to keep from gagging from the enormity of it. The Black Knight’s back was turned when he arrived, his silver blade stained crimson from recently delivering a fatal wound. A figure wearing blue had collapsed against the ground in front of the Black Knight, and much to Ike’s surprise, he found himself recognizing the person who had been brought to a moment of such dire weakness. “Ena…?!” Ike found himself choking out, his chest tight with something ghastly. He thought Ena and the Black Knight were supposed to be on the same side. They were both fighting for the sake of Daein, weren’t they? But if that was the truth, then why was the Black Knight standing over Ena’s fallen body with her blood staining his blade?

The Black Knight still did not move, and that was enough to inspire a dark rage deep in Ike’s stomach. He tightened his grip on Ragnell to the point that his knuckles went pale from the force of it. “Turn and face me, Black Knight!” Ike demanded. 

The Black Knight did as Ike commanded, but the movement was slow. Ike was suddenly very aware of all the tiny little pieces that made the Black Knight’s armor function the way it was meant to. The steel fit together perfectly, showing no signs of weakness for anyone to ever think of exploiting. If Ike did not have Ragnell, a blade meant to push through the blessed steel that protected him, he never would have stood a chance in this fight. 

“Hmph,” the Black Knight scoffed, his voice just as distorted as ever through his helmet. “I’ve been waiting for you, child.” His gaze fell on Ragnell. “You brought the sacred sword Ragnell.”

“I did,” Ike confirmed. “And I intend to use it to defeat you once and for all. I won’t let you get away with hurting or killing anyone ever again.” He knew it was a poor promise to make when Ena was still there on the ground a few steps away, but it was all Ike could think of saying. Much to Ike’s surprise though, Ena was still breathing. The movement of her chest rising and falling was slight, a shift so tiny that Ike wouldn’t have even realized it was happening if he hadn’t been searching for it deliberately. Somehow, she had managed to live through the attack she endured, but she wouldn’t survive for too much longer. 

“Stand aside and let us heal her!” Mist suddenly burst out, pointing past the Black Knight at Ena. “If you won’t step back, then we’ll just have to cut right through you, and you’re not going to like that outcome!”

“I would ask that you not interfere,” the Black Knight told Mist evenly, though his gaze did not leave Ike for even a moment. Ike could feel the Black Knight staring at him through his helmet even though his eyes were not visible for him to see the proof of it for himself. “This fight is between the two of us.”

“I have not been able to defeat you in all the time we have seen one another, but that will not remain true for even a moment longer,” Ike declared. “My skills in combat were given to me by my father. He lost his ability to fight because of his last battle with you, and it was my fault that he fell from grace. The least I can do now is try to set all of this right… And that begins with defeating you.”

The Black Knight shifted his position ever so slightly, flinging his blade to send a small splattering of Ena’s blood dancing across the floor. The Black Knight continued to stare at Ike as he raised his sword and leveled it in Ike’s direction. Ike followed the Black Knight’s gesture, mirroring it with his own sacred blade. “If you wish to fight… Then let us begin.”

Chapter Text

Ike wasted no time in rushing at the Black Knight, his anger burning hot enough to nearly consume him completely. Every emotion that he had ever felt toward the Black Knight–and toward the war as a whole–rushed up in the blink of an eye. Fighting the Black Knight was the best way to end this fight as soon as possible, and Ike wasn’t going to let anyone or anything stop him from seeing it through. Ashnard may have been the one to start this war, but the Black Knight had helped him to push it even harder and farther, and that was one crime Ike would never be able to forgive. 

Ike called upon each and every lesson he had ever received from his father over the course of his life as he swung his blade. The Black Knight had been taught by Gawain too many years ago. They were both the students of the same man, and their fighting styles felt similar to prove it. Ike knew he had much less experience than the Black Knight, but he didn’t care. He would still give it his all in order to make sure this battle ended the only way he could let it. 

Nearby, Mist darted past the Black Knight and over to where Ena was collapsed on the ground. “I’ll help her,” Mist began, her gaze catching on Soren. “You look after Ike.” Soren nodded, his grip on his staff tightening. He had been training in the healing arts for a short while, and he knew how to handle looking after others when they truly needed him. Ena was the far more pressing injury at the moment, so Ike would have to fall into Soren’s hands. Mist could help once she was certain Ena wasn’t going to bleed out from her injury, and there was no guarantee she would ever even reach that point. 

Mist raised her staff high above her head, pouring as much magic into it as she could. Ena’s breathing had grown weak, but she was still alive, and that was enough encouragement for Mist. She couldn’t save those who were actively dying, but she had arrived on the scene just when Ena collapsed. Surely that meant she must have gotten there soon enough to help Ena and save her life. If nothing else, Mist knew that she had to try. No one was there to do this but her, and she wouldn’t back down simply because it looked intimidating. 

Even as Mist worked to mend Ena’s wound though, she found herself wondering just why she was doing all of this. Ena was from the enemy nation. Ena had fought against the army however she could to make sure they never reached Ashnard. She had fled the instant she was pressed about the truth of what had happened to Almedha. She was a member of the enemy army… And yet, Mist couldn’t stand to let her die like this. Maybe Mist would come to regret it, but she wasn’t going to let her regrets control her just now. She would do what she could for as long as she had that power, and she could think about the implications of it later. 

Slowly but surely, Ena’s wound began to stitch itself back together. It took time, but with each new twirl of her staff, Mist found herself getting closer to bringing Ena back from the brink. The fact that the wound was responding to a healing staff at all was a massively good sign. That meant her body still had the energy to be healed in the first place. It wasn’t much, but it was something Mist could work with. “Come on,” Mist whispered even though she knew Ena wouldn’t be able to hear her. “You’re going to be alright. I just need you to stick with me for a little bit longer.”

Nearby, Ike avoided one of the Black Knight’s swings, but it was a close call. If nothing else, Ike could say that he was able to avoid the Black Knight’s attacks a bit easier than the Black Knight could evade his. The Black Knight’s armor was heavy and clunky, and while it protected from any other injuries that could have been delivered to him by other weapons, it made him slower than he would have been otherwise. That was a tiny advantage Ike was more than willing to exploit, and once he was sure he was out of the line of fire from the Black Knight’s most recent hit, he swung his blade in a wide arc to try and catch his opponent across the chest. 

And much to Ike’s surprise… It worked. Not only did the Black Knight stagger backward from the force of the blow, but there was a notable dent in his armor from where Ike had hit him. The Black Knight’s armor may have made him impossible to damage by all other means, but Ragnell was something special. Ike swung his blade once again, this time catching the Black Knight across the lower part of his torso. For the second time, a cut opened across the steel, proof that Ike was doing something. The Black Knight may have seemed like an immovable force, but he was not entirely powerful, and Ike was making progress in knocking him down for hopefully the final time. 

Soren had his staff at the ready so he could use it the instant Ike needed him to… But he never got the chance. Instead, he saw a door near the back edge of the room open, and a few soldiers from Daein’s army spilled into the battlefield. Soren’s eyes went wide. He supposed that even though the Black Knight wanted this to be a one-on-one fight, the other soldiers of Daein saw this as a chance to prove themselves. They thought they had to fight back against the enemy forces however they could, and that meant toppling Ike, Mist, and Soren as soon as possible. 

Ike had to focus all of his attention on the Black Knight at the moment, and he was going to need to be careful going forward too to make sure the Black Knight never got the better of him. That meant the other soldiers in the room were going to have to fall to Mist and Soren. So long as Mist was focused on saving Ena’s life though, that left only Soren to take care of the attackers. Soren traded out his healing staff for a powerful wind tome, and he darted over to the first of the three soldiers that had arrived in the room. He unleashed the strongest spell he knew, and the soldier fell in a matter of seconds, unable to withstand the onslaught. One of the other soldiers came after Soren next, but the wind sage avoided the attack effortlessly. His small size worked perfectly to his advantage when it came to evading major blows since he was so fast. On the counterattack, Soren was able to take out the soldier that had come after him, leaving only a single foe left on the field. With that, Soren rushed over to take them out next and keep Ike as safe as possible from the reinforcing attackers. 

Ike tried to avoid another attack from the Black Knight, but he miscalculated the speed with which it was coming toward him, and he wound up being caught in the left arm. Ike swore under his breath from the pain, but he did his best to let it embolden him. He swung his blade at the Black Knight once again, catching the general across the chest. The Black Knight did not stumble backward, but Ike didn’t stop with that one attack, following it up with yet another brutal blow. This time, it was enough to push the Black Knight back, distracting him for a split second. 

Ike took advantage of that forward momentum, and he stabbed at the Black Knight one last time. The Black Knight wavered once before he fell to one knee. The air in the room went perfectly still, and Ike heard nothing but the heavy rasping of his own breathing. Had… Had he truly done it? Had he defeated the Black Knight? Ike looked closer at his foe, and he found that the Black Knight had gone still. Ike waited for him to move, but he never did. 

Ike had done it. He defeated the Black Knight. 

The ground began to shake a moment later, and Ike bit back a swear. The Daein soldiers in the room were scrambling to try and escape, and if Ike had to wager a guess, he would have said that they had activated some kind of trap that was going to make the building cave in. Ashnard was nothing if not ruthless, and he was willing to bury both his own forces and his foes beneath a crumbling building if it would end things a little bit sooner. Ike should have known that. 

“We have to get out of here!” Soren declared. He looked across the room to where Ena was still on the ground. Mist was raising her staff above her head once again to try and mend her wound. “If we can’t get her on her feet right now, then we may have to leave her!”

Ike was on the verge of running over to Ena and picking her up for himself, but he never got the chance. A smear of blue darted in and out of his periphery, and Ike looked over to see Nasir running to Ena’s side. Soren’s face contorted with rage at the sight of Nasir. “You–!”

“I’ll explain everything shortly,” Nasir cut in, hauling Ena’s unconscious body into his arms without even sparing Soren a second glance. The prince of Daein tried to protest, but Nasir once again did not give him the time. “After we leave this place! Come!”

Ike stared at Nasir in bewildered silence for a long moment, but he didn’t have long to watch Nasir. Mist grabbed his wrist and pulled him toward the door, and Ike remembered the danger they were in. They had to escape from the tower as soon as possible. Asking about Nasir and Ena could wait until after they were certain they were in the clear. 

Ike’s lungs burned as he sprinted out of the tower and then out of the rest of the building. The other members of the army had all started to flee when they felt the ground begin to tremble, and through some miracle, they all managed to get away. Ike’s lungs heaved with massive, shaking breaths once he was outside, and he watched as the building fully caved in on itself. If the Black Knight had still been alive after their battle, then he was most certainly gone now. Nobody could survive something like that. 

The thought of what he had done finally seemed to catch up with him, and Ike felt like he was going to collapse beneath the weight of it all. Once upon a time, he had thought he would always be loyal to Daein and the people who lived within it. Now, Ike was standing outside a castle that had buried one of Daein’s most important generals. Ike had defeated the Black Knight in a battle against all odds. He had proven his worth and his strength, and it had come in the form of betraying his nation. Ike had never imagined it would come to this… But he knew he had done what was necessary. He would do it again too so long as it proved to be necessary. 

“Ike! I’m so glad you’re alright!”

Elena’s voice pulled Ike out of his thoughts, and he looked up to see his mother rushing to his side. Titania and Elincia were standing on either side of her, and Ike smiled weakly at all three of them before Elena threw her arms around her son in a tight embrace. “I was so worried about you,” Elena whispered, the words coming out hurried and anxious. “I thought you wouldn’t be coming back!”

“You won the fight, didn’t you?” Gawain asked as he slowly came up behind Elena. Ike nodded, and Gawain’s face softened into a smile. He was doing a better job of hiding it than Elena, but Gawain had been worried about his son too. “I’m proud of you, Ike.”

Ike offered his father one last smile before Elena tightened her grip on his body. “Don’t you ever do that to us again!” Elena cried out. “I was so scared for you, and I… I’m so glad you’re alright.”

“I’m fine,” Ike assured her even though he doubted anything would be enough to persuade Elena that all was well right now. He would have been anxious if he had been in her position too, but Ike knew he couldn’t stand there and let her concern overrun him forever. Ike pulled away from the hug, his gaze falling on Nasir where he was sitting on the ground nearby. Ena had been set on the soil, and Nasir was brushing a few threads of her pink hair away from her face. 

A few steps away, Soren was watching Nasir, a heavy frown on his face. Soren had been enraged with Nasir for a long time, and Ike doubted that anger would dull any time soon. Nasir had promised he would tell the story of why he acted the way he had once they had managed to get away from the collapsing tower. Now that the building they had just fought in was nothing but rubble, all that remained was to hear what he had to say, and Ike couldn’t leave it for even another moment longer. 

“I need to talk to Nasir,” Ike said. Gawain’s eyes went wide at the mention of Nasir’s name, and Ike silenced him with a shake of his head. “I know how that sounds, but… I need to hear the truth from him. If anything bad happens, I’ll be sure to let you know. I promise.”

Gawain hesitated for a few moments before nodding. “Alright. Let us know if you need our help.” He took a step back and gestured toward Nasir. Titania and Elincia gave Ike space as well, leaving only Elena to fully detach herself from her son. Elena gave him a nod before she turned her attention instead to Mist nearby. Mist gladly embraced her mother, and the two began to talk about the battle extensively. 

Ike approached Nasir with a heavy frown on his face. Ena was still asleep… Or at least, she remained that way for a few seconds. By the time Ike arrived beside her, Ena was starting to stir. There was still blood smeared across her abdomen, staining her clothing and skin brutally. Her face was far too pale, but her eyes fluttered open despite how deathly she looked. Ena’s eyes started off distant and glassy, and it took a few seconds for her to remember how to focus her sight again. “Nasir…?”

Nasir’s face melted with pure relief, and he resisted the urge to pull her into a tight hug. He couldn’t push her too hard right away when she had just sustained such a significant wound, but he yearned to cradle her in his grasp for as long as she could stand. “Ena… I’m so glad you’re alright,” he whispered, each word coming out soft and sacred. “Does anything hurt? Is there something I can get for you? All you have to do is give me the word, and I’ll–”

“I’ll be alright,” Ena assured him, though her voice remained faint and lacking in confidence. She offered a weak smile to Nasir that seemed to make the rest of her body tremble. “I can’t give up when I’m so close to the truth. I can’t let go of it now.”

“The truth?”

Soren’s voice pulled Nasir and Ena out of their quiet moment, and the two looked over to find the prince of Daein standing just beside them. Ena’s face was dark, but Nasir’s was somehow darker. Soren didn’t have a tome in his hand nor was he reaching for one, but his resentment remained clear in his eyes. “I want to know the truth,” Soren said even though he had no way of saying for sure if the truth he sought was the same one they were dancing around now. “I want to know why you betrayed us… And I want to know why you’re here right now.”

Nasir let out a sigh and turned away, grabbing a concoction off the ground and moving to tip it into Ena’s mouth. “Not right now. You can’t push her so soon after she sustained a wound like this. Give it a little while longer.”

“I don’t think I’m under any obligation to give you what you’re asking for,” Soren retorted, his eyes narrowing. “You didn’t exactly comply with what I would have wanted from you. Instead, you revealed a secret to the rest of the camp. You wanted me to stay quiet when you returned to the army. I hadn't even done anything against you yet, but you were still determined to make sure I didn’t say anything before I could suspect that something strange was at play. I want to know the reason for all of that, and I want to know it now.”

By that point, Ike had come to take Soren’s hand in his own, and he gave it a gentle squeeze to try and reassure him that everything would be alright. Soren didn’t back down from his demands though. He let Ike hold his hand tightly, and he clung to it in return, but his resolve remained firm. He would not be walking away until after he understood the full story behind Nasir’s actions, and he was going to hear it then and there. 

Nasir seemed to be able to sense that there was nothing he could say or do to convince Soren to back away either. He hesitated for a long moment before letting out a sigh. Ena’s features had relaxed significantly as if she was trying to tell Nasir that everything was going to be alright. Nasir nodded slowly, but he still refused to look Soren in the eyes. “Ena is my granddaughter,” he began to explain. “She is the one I have been working with all this time. I wanted to collaborate with the Daein army for her sake.”

“So you weren’t just working with the laguz royalty… You were working with the Daein army all along,” Ike concluded. He had already figured that much out ages ago, but it was still nice to have a bit of confirmation if nothing else. “I’m willing to guess that you were telling all sides of the war about what we were up to while we were on the road to the capital of Daein.”

Nasir nodded. “I needed to help Ena to…” He fell quiet for a long moment, looking down at Ena–his granddaughter, apparently–and waiting for her to tell him if it was alright for him to continue. Ena did not respond immediately though, her eyes distant and glassy like she was thinking about something that went far beyond the limits of their conversation. 

Soren took advantage of the silence, and he let out a thin breath through his nose. “You’re a dragon laguz,” Soren declared. “You must be if Ena is your granddaughter. And yet, you left Goldoa behind so that you could work as the captain of a ship… And then, you somehow wound up working with the king of Daein. I’m willing to hazard a guess that all of these strange pieces of the puzzle come together somehow.”

“They do,” Ena confirmed, her voice soft and sad. She struggled to find her words for a long moment before giving up on trying to plan everything out. Instead, she simply let her tongue control her. “Roughly twenty years ago, my partner, Rajaion, was the heir of the Goldoan royal family. He was the crown prince, and he was set to inherit the throne should the king ever pass on. However… He received a summons to help someone he cared for deeply out of grave danger, and he went to answer their call. He never returned to Goldoa after that. Ever since then, I have been doing everything I can to find him and… And learn the truth about what happened to him.”

Ike nodded along with a heavy frown. He hadn’t known the dragons of Goldoa to leave their homeland all that often. The few that did were difficult to track down since dragon laguz were the hardest to pick out from a crowd out of all the laguz types. Ena and Nasir had both left Goldoa not because they wanted to do so on their own but because they were following after someone else who had left Goldoa first. Ena’s partner, Rajaion, had stepped away from Goldoa because he knew someone he cared about was in danger, but he never came back after that. Ever since then, Ena and Nasir had been working to try and track him down and bring him home. 

“But I don’t understand what that has to do with you working with the king of Daein,” Soren cut in. “If you wanted to find him, then I’m sure there are far better places to search other than the Daein royal court. I don’t think a dragon laguz would have been able to get away with being in Daein of all places without being caught.”

Ena hesitated for a long moment, and she stared at Soren with bittersweet grief in her eyes. “We knew that he was in Daein,” she told him. “That was the only place he could have been. After all… Daein was where he went to answer the summons. The person he wanted to save was in Daein, and they were being put in danger by the Mad King himself.”

Soren’s eyes went wide. “What?” Something like that certainly wasn’t out of the question for Ashnard. If any of the royals of Tellius were going to take hostages and threaten others to get something, it was bound to be him. Still, Soren didn’t understand how something like that could have happened without him ever hearing the truth. Surely he would have at least heard the rumors of something this significant. Soren was raised away from the palace, but the gossip around something like that would have escaped the castle. 

Nasir nodded hesitantly. “The Mad King took a hostage, and Prince Rajaion responded accordingly to rescue her. He couldn’t have refused as long as her life was on the line. He simply cared for Almedha too much.”

“Almedha?” Soren echoed. “What in the world does she have to do with this?”

Neither Nasir nor Ena responded to that question for a long time, instead simply looking at one another quietly. Soren could feel his mind starting to spin with the thought that they knew Almedha of all people. Soren certainly hadn’t ever heard of Nasir or Ena before the war began, and he was the prince of the nation they had been fighting alongside all throughout this war. How could Almedha know either one of them?

And more importantly, what did Almedha have to do with this Rajaion character? As soon as that question hit Soren’s mind though, he found himself remembering something he had not acknowledged in ages: Kurthnaga’s questions to him when they first met back in Goldoa. Kurthnaga had asked if Soren knew anything about somebody named Rajaion, and Soren had said no because the name had never come up to him before. Now… Soren had an awful feeling that the Rajaion both Nasir and Ena were talking about was the same one that Kurthnaga had been asking after. That would make sense, wouldn’t it? Kurthnaga was the prince of the land of dragons, and that meant he must have been the younger brother of Rajaion. Kurthnaga was the younger brother of Ena’s partner. 

But what did Almedha have to do with all of this? That was the one part that Soren couldn’t seem to understand. He already felt he knew where this was going deep down, but that didn’t mean he felt ready to acknowledge it. In fact, the idea of talking about it filled him with dread. He hadn’t thought about his Branded history in ages… But he wasn’t going to be able to escape that secret forever. He was getting closer to the capital, and by extension, getting closer to reuniting with his mother again. Almedha was the only one who would be able to shed a light on everything that had led up to Soren’s birth. He knew that. 

But he didn’t think he was ready for it. He didn’t know if he was going to want to hear about it if it had something to do with an unknown tragedy befalling this Rajaion character. Soren was terrified of where all of this was going to lead, but he knew that his burning curiosity wasn’t going to leave him alone until he was able to get to the bottom of this. He needed to know even if he had no idea what he was going to do once he got the response he was searching for. 

“What do you know about my mother?” Soren questioned, adjusting his inquiry with the hopes that it would be enough to press an answer out of Nasir and Ena. “She has something to do with what happened to Rajaion. You wouldn’t have brought her up otherwise. So tell me… Where does she factor in with all of this?”

Once again, neither one of them responded for an uncomfortably long time. Soren wanted to put on even more pressure, but before he had the chance, Nasir held up a hand to silence him. “The only one who can answer that question is your mother. I would suggest that you ask her about it when you can find the chance to talk to her directly. It wouldn’t be right of us to tell you anything before she was ready to talk to you about it.”

“But she isn’t here,” Soren retorted. “She’s not going to be here until after we can kill Ashnard, and the two of you can give me your responses right now. What do you know about my mother? How does she factor in with all of this?” Soren didn’t ask how he fit into this puzzle, but he knew that was a question that held far more weight than he was willing to acknowledge right now. 

“She can tell you when the time is right,” Ena told him. “It would be wrong of us to explain it to you prematurely. If you do not know the truth, then I am certain that there is a reason for it… And I would ask that you be careful with handling it going forward.”

Soren let out a heavy sigh, pinching at the bridge of his nose and shaking his head. He wished he could have said he was surprised by Nasir and Ena not wanting to talk to him about this, but in truth, it felt like it fit in perfectly with everything else he could expect right about now. Nasir and Ena had been holding onto the truth of who he was to Daein, and now, they were holding onto another secret about who Rajaion was meant to be to him. Of course they weren’t going to want to talk about it without a fight. 

If Soren wasn’t going to be able to convince them to open up and tell him about it though, then he was just going to have to take matters into his own hands… And Soren was certain he knew how he was meant to do it. There were only a few battles left of the war, and then, he would arrive at the capital of Crimea. Melior would not remain under the control of Daein for long, and when Soren arrived, he would be able to reach his mother again. There had been no reports of her being killed, and that meant she must have been alive. Ashnard was still holding her captive, but if she was alive, then that was enough for Soren. 

“Fine then,” Soren bit out, not looking Nasir or Ena in the eyes. “I’ll hear the truth from my mother once all of this is over.” He let his hands fall back down by his sides, and he clenched them into tight fists. He would even ask Ashnard for more information during the final battle if that was what it took to learn more about everything going on. Soren wanted nothing to do with his father, but he was willing to do what he had to in order to understand this. 

Soren was strangely sure of what he was going to find though. He was involved with whatever happened to Rajaion all that time ago. Kurthnaga thought that Soren looked just like him, and that was the reason for his strange behavior back when they first met in Goldoa. Almedha had something to do with all of this too, and her secret was not just one from Daein. It was a secret that would consume Goldoa as well. 

Soren didn’t know why he had never been told the truth of his laguz heritage, but he figured that there was a reason for it. One way or another, he would get to the bottom of it. The war would not be the end of this. He wouldn’t let it be. Soren was going to learn who Rajaion was, find his mother, and make sure his father was killed before he had the chance to hurt anyone ever again. 

That was what he had been fighting for all this time, and Soren refused to back down now or ever. 

Chapter Text

After the fall of the Black Knight, only one battle stood between the Crimean army and the end of the war. The fight was set to take place in Gritnea Tower, a spot that had once been a watchtower to see if invasions were coming for Melior. Since then, it had been made something else by Ashnard, but it was difficult to say for certain what he was using the tower for. Very little information had made its way out of the tower since then, and Ike couldn’t help his curiosity on the matter. 

Ike would have liked to gloss over Gritnea Tower entirely and continue on toward Melior, but he knew there was one reason he couldn’t ignore it: Lillia. If there was even the slightest chance that Lillia could have been there in the tower, then the Crimean army had to see if they could set her free. Ashnard had to be keeping Lillia somewhere, and Ike would never have been able to forgive himself if he missed the chance to save her because he was so determined to reach the capital. Melior would still be there a few days later, but Lillia’s life was something far gentler that could be taken in the span of an instant. They couldn’t afford to take the chance so long as she was in danger, and Ike wasn’t going to let anything else happen to her. Lillia had been through more than enough. 

The battle at Gritnea Tower was terrifying in more ways than Ike could ever hope to put into words. The enemy forces consisted largely of laguz even though it made no sense for laguz to fight there on their own terms. Daein was an enemy nation to the laguz because of its deeply racist tendencies, and no laguz with knowledge of their circumstances wanted to put themselves in danger by going there. None of that seemed to matter though, and the enemy laguz raged after the Crimean army without so much as a second thought. 

No… That wasn’t true. There wasn’t any thought being put into their actions at all. That was the point of it. Ashnard had been responsible for horrors untold by sponsoring the creation of the Feral Ones, laguz who had been forced into their animal forms permanently so they could fight mindlessly. Ashnard wanted to take advantage of the strength of the laguz, and he twisted them well beyond what they had ever been capable of before for the sake of his army. Nothing mattered as much as strength did, and Ashnard was more than fine with harming innocent laguz if it would bring him greater glory. 

Ike had already thought of Ashnard as a monster, but as he drew nearer to the end of the battle with the Feral Ones, he knew Ashnard went well beyond that word alone. Ashnard had brought unspeakable horrors upon the world, and he justified it because he thought it could be considered strength. The thought made Ike nauseous, and that was before he even set foot in the tower. 

The commander of the enemy forces had fled by the time the battle drew to an end. Ike wished he could have been able to kill the person responsible for all of this though. It would have certainly brought peace to the laguz even if it was much too late to stop the suffering the Feral Ones had been put through. Ike wanted to chase after the enemy leader and then destroy them for what they had done, but he wasn’t given the time to consider the thought in full. 

Lillia emerged from the back of the tower with a guard close behind her. She had a relieved yet tired smile on her face, and she rushed toward Elena as soon as she caught a glimpse of her friend. “Elena!” Lillia cried out, surging into Elena’s arms and holding her tightly. “I’m so glad you’re alright!”

“I should be the one saying that to you!” Elena exclaimed, clinging to Lillia in return. She buried her face in Lillia’s shoulder to make the reunion feel even a bit more real. Elena and Lillia only pulled away from each other after they had enjoyed their embrace for a few seconds, and Elena began to check Lillia from head to toe for any signs of injury. “Did anything happen to you? I hope they didn’t hurt you. If Ashnard did something to hurt you, then he’s going to–”

“I’m alright,” Lillia replied with a shake of her head. “Though I didn’t expect to see the person who saved me here of all places.”

Ike finally had the mind to glance past Lillia at the person in the guard uniform just behind her. Ike blinked once and then twice, sure that he was seeing things. There was no way it was actually Naesala, the King of Ravens, who had rescued Lillia. Ike had been under the impression Naesala turned tail and fled from the war after Reyson told him to stop fighting alongside Daein. If Naesala had been the ally of Daein at one point, then why in the world was he there outside the tower now? Why had he been willing to rescue Lillia from danger? Ike knew Naesala had a history with the herons of Serenes, but he hadn’t thought it would extend to this situation of all things. 

“What are you doing here?” Ike questioned, unable to help the rage that started to creep its way into his voice. Naesala hadn’t done much to earn Ike’s approval up to that point, and Ike had thought that he was much more likely to run into Naesala as an enemy instead of an ally. Naesala had sold Reyson out to Oliver and then led to the massive battle in Serenes Forest. Naesala had stood with the Daein forces when they were chasing Elincia on the sea. Naesala was the king of the crows that had swarmed the boat when the army was passing through the waters near Goldoa. Ike had been hoping he would never see Naesala again, but if he did, then he would cross paths with him as an enemy. 

“That’s… A bit of a long story,” Naesala began, but before he had the chance to explain, a streak of white and gold darted across Ike’s vision. Leanne and Reyson had arrived on the scene, and they were both rushing toward Lillia to pull her into a tight hug. Naesala may as well have not been there so long as the three heron siblings had the chance to reunite with one another. 

“I’m so glad you’re alright,” Reyson murmured, his voice barely audible above the chaos of the moment. “When I heard you had been taken, I…”

“I’m alright,” Lillia assured Reyson with a shake of her head. “You have nothing to worry about. I’m right here, and everything is okay.” She glanced around to the rest of the circle, her eyes growing hard and determined. “I don’t have the medallion with me though. The Black Knight took it from me shortly after he brought me here. If I had to wager a guess, I would say that Ashnard is keeping it in the capital.”

Ike felt a shiver sprint up his spine. Ashnard had realized Lillia would not be able to unveil the power of the medallion, and he decided instead to hold onto it so he could use its power for himself. “Then we’re going to have to find a way to get it from Ashnard during the final battle,” Ike concluded. That was going to be a dangerous game to play and a thin line to walk. Ike didn’t know what would happen if the wrong person touched the medallion by accident, but he didn’t want to find out either. 

“We’ll find a way to do it,” Elena declared before Ike had the chance to express his concerns. “I don’t care what it takes or how long we have to fight in order to get the medallion back from him. I’m not going to let Ashnard run the world into ruin because he wants the power of the medallion. We’re going to find a way to stop him. We have to.”

Lillia nodded at Elena’s words, but there was something shaky about her smile that had not been present before she was taken by the Black Knight. Ike found himself struggling to look at her properly so long as she had that anxiety behind her eyes, so he decided to step up and tell her the one thing he thought she deserved to know more than anything. “You don’t have to worry about the Black Knight anymore,” he said. “He’s gone now, and he won’t be able to hurt you ever again.”

“I… Thank you,” Lillia smiled with a soft nod. “But I must admit that I was thinking about everything else that has happened since I arrived at this tower… There is… There are a lot of horrible things that have happened here. I wouldn’t even know where to begin with unraveling all of them.”

Uncomfortable silence fell over the group, and Soren was the one who finally broke it with a shake of his head. “I wanted to look around inside the tower anyway to see what other information we could gather about what happened,” he announced. “We can try to learn more about what Ashnard ordered happen here while we’re inside. Come on.”

Ike took a moment to will his mind to catch up with his body, and when it finally did, he nodded and trailed after Soren. If he had to guess, he would have said there was something specific driving Soren’s curiosity, and the sage seemed to think the only way to learn more about it was to go into the tower and look around for himself. Ike wondered about it for only a few seconds before he let himself ask. “What exactly are you hoping to find inside of the tower?”

“Anything,” Soren said at first, but both of them knew there was a bit more to it than that. “There were red dragon laguz fighting during the battle. They had been turned into Feral Ones. I want to know how that could be possible. Most dragon laguz never even dream of leaving their home behind to travel the world. Ena and Nasir are the exception, not the rule. If that’s the case though… Then why were there red dragon laguz on the field during that fight?

Ike nodded. He had to admit that he had been a bit curious about that as well, but he hadn’t known how to bring it up. He didn’t know if there even was a good way of bringing something like that up with so much at stake. “Then we’ll see if there’s anything in the tower that explains it,” Ike finally settled on saying. 

He followed Soren into the tower, and the two looked around silently at first. There were many cells lining the main floor of the tower, and deep claw marks gouged the flour and walls of every cell. Laguz had certainly been kept there, and they had tried with everything they had to break free of their confines. Ike’s heart skipped a beat at the thought. He didn’t even want to imagine how dark the cruelty of Daein could become in those cells. 

Ike didn’t have to wonder for long though. The situation only deteriorated more as he and Soren went downstairs into the basement of the tower. The main floor of Gritnea Tower was already an unpleasant place, but the basement was something else entirely. It reeked of blood from the instant Ike set foot in it, and he had to resist the urge to pinch at his nose to try and keep from being struck by wave after wave of nausea. Soren even seemed disturbed by it, and he normally had a much stronger stomach for these things than Ike. Soren’s gaze was unwavering and unflinching as he searched for anything that he thought would clue him in as to why there had been red dragons on the field. 

In the end, Ike and Soren found remarkably little that would answer that specific question. Instead, they were met with all sorts of evidence of the cruelty that had been visited upon the world by Daein. The army had captured all sorts of laguz, and they had tormented each and every one of them before turning them into Feral Ones. Ashnard didn’t care at all about the people he hurt in the name of finding greater glory. He simply wanted to become stronger, and that meant exercising his strength over those he believed to be weaker than him. It was a sickening thought, and Ike found himself wanting to kill Ashnard even more than ever before as the weight of reality sank in around him. Ike hadn’t even thought such a thing was possible with everything he was already dealing with. 

Soren crouched down in the darkness of the basement and picked up a small object that Ike couldn’t really see. It wasn’t until Soren unfolded his palm again that Ike realized it was a scale belonging to a red dragon laguz. “I don’t know why this happened,” Soren muttered. “If I had to guess, I would say that a lot of these transformations were recent… But the dragons being captured by Daein couldn’t have been recent. I’m sure we would have heard about something like that even if Ashnard was trying to keep the truth from reaching us.”

Ike nodded. “You’re probably right.” He couldn’t help thinking back to everything Nasir and Ena had said, and more importantly, what they hadn’t said when explaining Rajaion’s story to Soren. Perhaps it was possible that other dragon laguz had accompanied Rajaion when he left Goldoa to help Almedha. Ike couldn’t think of any other explanation, but the thought made him feel sick to his stomach. Somehow, the twisted memory of Rajaion and everything he had been put through simply continued to haunt the present. Ike was beginning to fear that miserable truth would never change. 

“We should go and ask the others about what they know,” Soren declared. “There are multiple laguz royals waiting outside, and while none of them are from Goldoa, I’m sure they would be able to at least try to help us with all of this.” Tibarn had appeared during the fight as well as Naesala, and Soren seemed sure that at least one of them would be able to help bring the truth of what had happened to light. 

Though if Ike was being honest with himself, he knew that there was more to it than that. Soren wanted to avoid talking to Nasir or Ena if at all possible even though they were probably the best people to ask about something like this. Nasir and Ena had been resistant to talking about the past before, and there was no reason Soren should think they were going to change their minds. Maybe Tibarn and Naesala had less of a chance of knowing what was going on, but Soren would still prefer turning to them to going back to Nasir and Ena. 

Ike gladly followed Soren out of the tower, and he felt himself finally start to breathe again when he stepped into the light of day. Gritnea Tower was a miserable place no matter how Ike looked at it, and he was glad to have been given the chance to escape all the horror contained within it… Though that also made him think of all the poor innocent laguz who hadn’t been able to escape it before they were turned into Feral Ones. 

Tibarn and Naesala were still speaking with the three heron siblings when Ike and Soren emerged from Gritnea Tower. Tibarn was the first to notice they had arrived, and he seemed shocked by their approach. “What in the world is that stench?” he wondered, but he didn’t get the chance to push the point further. Instead, his gaze dropped to Soren’s clenched fist where the red dragon scale was hiding. “What’s that?”

“I was hoping you would be able to answer that question,” Soren replied as he unfolded his fingers to reveal the scale. Tibarn stared at it for a long moment in shock, and Soren took that as his cue to elaborate. “There were red dragon Feral Ones during that battle. You saw them during the fight, I’m sure. Do you know how they wound up here? Why would dragon laguz leave Goldoa behind?”

“I don’t know,” Tibarn admitted. “If I did know, then I would have said something sooner.” He glanced over to Naesala, and even though he wasn’t particularly happy with the king of Kilvas’ recent treachery, he was willing to put his pride aside in the name of an answer. Naesala had nothing to say either though and simply shook his head. 

Soren let out a thin breath and tightened his grip on the scale again. “Then I have another question for you,” he began. “Do you know anything about a woman by the name of Almedha?”

“The princess of Goldoa? How could I not?” Tibarn questioned, and Ike’s chest went tight. Then their suspicions were correct; Almedha was a dragon laguz, and she was related to both Kurthnaga and Rajaion. “She left her home behind a long time ago. Apparently, she wanted to travel the world. The rest of the world doesn’t know her as the princess of Goldoa, but the laguz royals do. None of us could forget her walking out on her country the way she did.”

“She left Goldoa, and she wound up in Daein where she met the Mad King,” Soren concluded, and Tibarn nodded. “What happened after that? Do you have any details about that?”

“The crown prince, Rajaion, went after her at one point, but no one knows what happened to him after he left Goldoa. A lot of people think something bad happened to him, but we don’t know any details beyond that,” Tibarn answered. “A few of us have tried to press the truth out of that stubborn old fossil, but he won’t talk about it.”

Soren nodded slowly, the reality of his situation sinking in slowly but surely. The only way he would be able to get to the bottom of this mystery was to hear the truth directly from his mother’s lips. Almedha was the only one who held onto the secrets of the past, and as such, she was his only hope for learning anything that could make all of this make sense. 

“We’re going to get to the bottom of this,” Ike assured Soren even though he doubted the prince needed him to say that. “Even if we have to kill Ashnard in order to find the truth.” In fact, Ike would prefer it if he had to get rid of Ashnard in order to learn more about the situation with Goldoa. That way, he would be able to get rid of the Mad King once and for all, and the truth would come out right as Ashnard’s body was kicked into an unmarked grave.

Soren didn’t linger for long even as Ike tried to reassure him. “I’m going to the infirmary,” Soren declared suddenly, and Ike knew exactly how that thought was supposed to end. Soren wasn’t saying upfront that he was going to see if he could get Ena or Nasir to talk, but he was going to at least try it. That would give him the information he sought a little bit sooner, and that was all Soren wanted right now. 

Ike followed Soren back to the Crimean army’s camp and then to Ena’s bunk in the infirmary. Gawain was nowhere to be found. He had recovered enough to be able to walk around the camp from time to time, and he was off trying to see how much he could enjoy nature before the final battle. That meant Ike and Soren were alone with Ena since even Nasir had slipped out of the infirmary. 

Ena was awake when they arrived, staring up at the roof of the tent with a muted frown. Soren settled to a stop just beside her bed, and Ena turned her head to meet his gaze. “Rajaion,” Soren began. “He had something to do with the Feral Ones from Goldoa. We faced a few of them during this battle… And I’m willing to bet that Rajaion leaving Goldoa years ago has something to do with them. Unless you or Nasir brought a few dragons with you when you left home, there’s something at play here.”

Ena was silent for a long moment, her eyes glassy from tears that were slowly but surely finding a home around her irises. “Did your mother ever share the name Rajaion with you?” she questioned. “Did she ever tell you who he was?”

Soren hesitated before he shook his head. “No. Never.” He didn’t know how he had gone so long never hearing anything about his mother’s family, as a matter of fact. Almedha had simply never told him anything about the rest of his family. Soren’s only known relatives were her and Ashnard, and Almedha was doing everything in her power to keep Soren safe from his father. “The first time I heard the name was when our ship ran aground in Goldoa. Kurthnaga asked me if I knew him. I said no.”

Ena let out a slow breath, and her entire body seemed to shake from the exertion. “This is a story that your mother should be sharing with you,” she muttered. Soren opened his mouth to protest, but Ena silenced him with a shake of her head. “I don’t know all of the details about what happened that day. I couldn’t know them since I wasn’t there. The only one who does know the truth now is your mother. If you want to hear anything about your past, then you’re going to have to ask her.”

Soren couldn’t help but sigh, tilting his head back so he was looking at the roof of the tent too. He had never thought to ask many questions about his mother or her past before the war broke out. He hadn’t ever thought it would matter enough to bring up, but now, Soren knew how grave an error he had made by never asking questions. Soren had been wondering why all of this was happening for well over a year, and he was reaching the end of his patience. Luckily, that was happening in perfect harmony with the coming end of the war. Soren could only hope all of this turned out to be worth something in the end. He didn’t know what he would do if it was all for nothing somehow. 

“Soon,” Soren murmured, though he wasn’t entirely sure of what he was trying to get at when he spoke the word. Soon, everything would fall into place the way it was meant to. Soon, the war would finally draw to a conclusion that had been overdue for months. Soon, Soren would understand the truth of everything that had ever been kept out of his reach. 

A single battle remained, and it would be the final one no matter how it ended. 

~~~~~

Soren knew that he should have been trying to get at least a bit of rest before the Crimean army started to march in the direction of the capital. There were no other major obstacles standing between the liberation and their destination. Ashnard had no other armies or factions to throw at them other than his own personal guard. The next fight of the war was set to be the last one no matter how anyone looked at it. Either they would win against Ashnard and the war would end in their favor… Or they would fall by Ashnard’s hand, and everything would prove to be for nothing. 

Soren had gone over his strategy for the final battle more times than he could ever hope to count. Unfortunately, he knew that a lot of the major details were going to have to wait until after the fight began. There was no way for Soren to perfectly predict the choices his father would make before they happened. He could operate off his own assumptions, but that would not completely answer all of his questions, and he knew it. Soren would have to wait for the right moment, and that involved more patience than he felt he was able to muster. 

None of that stopped Soren from forcing himself to reread everything he had written down for the eighth time that night. He couldn’t seem to focus on the strategy nor could he come up with any ideas to fix it. However, Soren also knew that he wouldn’t be able to sleep as long as his mind was racing with all the things that could have gone wrong during the battle against Ashnard. He couldn’t stay awake, but he couldn’t sleep either. That left him trapped somewhere in the middle, drifting aimlessly and praying it didn’t destroy him in the end. 

“How are you feeling?”

Ike’s voice cut through the silence like a knife, and Soren jolted out of his thoughts to turn and face his old friend. For a moment, Soren almost thought he caught a glimpse of the person Ike had been before the world began to unravel around them. He almost thought he saw Ike, young and optimistic and only aware of the world within the walls of the villa. When Soren blinked a moment later, the sight was gone, and the Ike of the present returned once more. This Ike was sure of himself in ways he had never thought possible, standing tall and proud even in the fact of overwhelming hardship. It was admirable in more ways than Soren could ever hope to put to words, and he was glad at least one of them was able to hope for something better without succumbing to endless anxiety. 

“I… I don’t know,” Soren admitted. He leaned over the table before him, pressing his elbows against the wood and letting his eyes start to droop shut. “We’ve been planning to fight my father for ages now, but none of it truly seems real now that we’re almost here. I want to see my mother again, but… I wish we didn’t have to see my father to do that.”

“I’m not going to let him win,” Ike assured Soren even though they both knew it well. “Ragnell is the only weapon that can damage him as long as he has that armor blessed by the goddess, so I’m going to have to be the one to take care of him. I’m ready for it too. I was able to defeat the Black Knight, and I’m going to win against Ashnard too.”

“I wish we had dug Alondite out of the rubble,” Soren muttered. The thought had occurred to him after the tower crumbled and the Black Knight lost his battle, but he hadn’t pushed for it. Soren didn’t even know if it would have been possible to pry Alondite free of the remnants of the tower. Still, it would have eased his fears significantly to know at least one other person was able to deal damage to Ashnard other than Ike. 

“It’s going to be alright,” Ike promised. He sat down beside Soren, wrapping an arm around the prince’s shoulders and pulling him close. Soren fell bonelessly against Ike’s chest, not caring at all for the possibility of people seeing them there together. Once upon a time, Soren would have cared deeply about the idea of ruining Ike’s reputation. Somehow, it didn’t seem to matter all that much tonight. All that really mattered was the fact that they were together. 

Soren lost track of how long he sat there in Ike’s embrace. At long last, exhaustion felt ready to consume him, and Soren was happy to let it… Or at least he would have been if he wasn’t haunted by the idea of what would be waiting for him on the other side of that rest. When the morning came, Ike and Soren would have to rise to their feet and march toward the capital. When the morning came, they would have to be ready for a battle that would change the fate of the entire continent forever. 

Soren looked up at Ike slowly, planning on suggesting that they go back to their tent to get a bit of rest. Ike didn’t rise to his feet even as they met eyes. Any words Soren could have offered in that moment felt suddenly and overwhelmingly insufficient. All that mattered was the silence and the love that existed in the center of it all. A desire unlike anything Soren had ever known consumed him, and he leaned in, pressing his lips against Ike’s and bringing every racing thought in his mind to silence. 

The kiss was a simple thing, and while it didn’t last long, it didn’t need to. It was everything Ike and Soren had ever wanted from one another, and it was evidence that they would find a way to get through this. The final battle may have been uncertain, but in victory or defeat, they would face it together. Soren would give the fight everything he had to make sure he and Ike were able to enjoy another moment like this. He couldn’t let this be their first, last, and only kiss. If that meant he had to fight like hell against his father, then Soren was more than fine with that. 

Ike and Soren wandered like ghosts through the camp when they returned to their tent. Neither one of them spoke about the kiss, but they did not have to. They understood one another too well for words, and they dared not taint their comprehension with the misery of word. 

Chapter Text

At long last, the day had arrived. 

Soren didn’t think he had ever been this nervous in his life. He liked to think of himself as cool-headed in the face of pressure, able to handle any situation even if it seemed impossible to overcome. None of that seemed to matter today though, not that Soren had expected much else. He was going to face his father in combat that day. This was the day of the final battle of the war, and no matter how it ended, the war was going to stop. Either Ashnard would fall or… 

No. Soren couldn’t think like that. He had to stay focused. He was going to be alright. He just had to keep his head up and concentrate as much as he could. He had come up with a strategy that would work for this fight. He had gone over it more times than he could ever hope to count too. All that remained was to put it into effect, and Soren knew that was something he could do. Everyone was going to give it their all, and together, they would win the battle. They had to. 

Elincia and Ike both stood up in front of the army before they began their final march to Melior. They declared everything they had faced up to that point and every goal they were going to accomplish by the time this battle was over. Soren clapped along with the rest of the crowd, and he let that confidence spark in his chest and consume him completely. He was worried about how this could have ended, but fear wasn’t going to help anyone. His best option was to keep his head held high and his eyes trained on the future. He was giving it his all. He had made it that far, and Ashnard would not be given the chance to take this power for a second time. He had claimed Crimea once, but today, all of that would come crumbling down. 

The army surged toward the gates of Melior once the speeches came to an end, and Soren stood at the front of the crowd alongside Ike, Elincia, Mist, and Titania. Even as Soren reminded himself that this was the moment of truth, it barely felt real. He had been dreaming for ages about what would happen when he finally faced down against Ashnard, and the day had arrived at last. Soren was as ready for this as he could have been. All he could do now was put his plan into motion and hope it ended the best way it could have. Ashnard would not live to see the new day. If Soren repeated that often enough, then maybe he would believe it in full. Maybe he would truly feel like he would be able to topple his father’s empire once and for all. 

Throughout his childhood, Soren hadn’t wanted much to do with his father. Almedha had told him that Ashnard was no good, and Soren had believed her. On the rare occasion Soren did spend time with his father, he hated it more than anything. Ashnard was a power hungry man, and he was willing to strike down whoever got in his way so long as he thought it would benefit him. Soren had never wanted anything to do with his father, but the choice had been made for him the instant Ashnard decided to attack the villa to try and get him on his side. Since then, Soren had been fighting against Ashnard with everything he had. 

But that didn’t make it easy. Soren had thought for as long as he could remember that his father was impossible to defeat. Soren hadn’t even thought that Ashnard would be able to die until he got old enough to realize that every person could die. Soren thought that if he had to fight against his father, then he would be the one to fall instead of the one to kill Ashnard and dethrone him once and for all. Soren was willing to give this battle everything he had, but he couldn’t seem to escape the fear that all of this was going to collapse in one way or another.

Soren wasn’t going to let his fear tear him down though. He had fought to make it this far, and Soren was going to give it everything he had. Ashnard did not deserve anything other than death, and Soren would prove it when they fought. Soren wished there was something more he could do to fight him when the battle began, but he knew his best choice was to step back. Ike was the only one who would be able to damage Ashnard, and that meant Soren would have to leave the battle against his father up to his partner. 

Partner… That was the only word Soren could think of when it came to Ike. They hadn’t spoken about the quiet moment they had shared in the tactics tent, but Soren didn’t think they needed to talk about it. They were happy together, and they did not need to put words to it. Together, they would stand as a team, and they would defeat Ashnard however they had to. It was the only choice they had left, and Soren was going to give it everything he had. 

When Melior arrived on the horizon, Soren paused and let out a slow breath. Ike looked over at Soren with a gleam in his eyes. “Are you ready?” Soren asked. He didn’t know what his answer would have been if someone posed the same question to him, but he didn’t care. He was too focused on tearing down the man who had once been called his father to think of it. 

Ike nodded. “I’m ready… And this is where everything is going to end. I’m sure of it.” He gripped tightly at Ragnell both to get his excess energy out through his fingers and to prepare for the battle to come. With that, Ike took the last few steps toward Melior, and the capital stretched out around them in full. 

Melior’s streets were empty, and all of the civilians who would have once been bustling around in the morning sunshine had gone into hiding. They had seemingly heard that a battle was coming in their direction, and they were hoping to wait it out until they knew it was over. Ike was glad for that. He didn’t want to have to balance looking after the people of Melior when he was also focused on taking down Ashnard once and for all. 

In the distance, Ike could see the silhouette of a man on a wyvern sitting atop a balcony of the Crimean castle. Ike knew already who it was long before he heard the name. Ike felt his heart freeze in his chest, but he did his best to keep his composure. Ashnard was a monster of a man, tall and towering over everyone who stood around him. The Daein army had been powerful enough on its own, but everyone paled in comparison to the raw power Ashnard possessed. 

Elincia froze at the sight of the figure, her eyes wide and hesitant. “Ashnard…”

Ashnard took off into the sky, the wings of his wyvern beating against the air. Ike felt the world seemed to quake from the motion, and he did his best to hold his ground in the face of it. Ashnard’s wyvern looked starkly different from the wyverns that Ike had grown used to seeing Jill and Haar ride on. Even the other wyvern riders of Daein didn’t have a fearsome beast quite like the one Ashnard rode on. Ike’s chest went tight at the thought, but he didn’t back down in the face of Ashnard’s descent to the battlefield. 

Ashnard arrived at the front of the courtyard with a crazed smile on his face, and Ike resisted the urge to stare. Ashnard was massively tall, and his smile made it clear that he was ready to tear each and every one of his opponents to shreds. The wyvern he rode on was seemingly out of control, snapping at the air with a desperation Ike had never seen before. Ashnard didn’t seem to mind his wyvern’s discomfort though, instead smiling down at Elincia with a crazed wildness in his eyes. “It’s been a long time, Princess Crimea. You look quite different than you did the day that I cut your father and mother down like cattle... I can hardly believe you're the same little girl who did nothing but tremble and stare at me.”

Elincia did not bow in the face of Ashnard’s terror though, instead forcing herself to sit up as straight as she could muster on the top of her pegasus. “You... You craven… I've returned to see you defeated! I will no longer allow you to treat Crimea any way you please!”

Ashnard let out a laugh that seemed to split the sky apart. “How brave and noble of you. However, you are not the one I seek.” Instead, his gaze settled on Ike where he stood just beside the princess. Ike’s grip on Ragnell tightened. “Are you the one they claim is the son of Gawain?”

Ike didn’t rise to the bait even though it was tempting. He wanted to shout at Ashnard that he wouldn’t let him win no matter what. Ashnard had been responsible for Gawain’s injury even if it had only been indirectly. Ashnard had brought terror unlike anything else to the entire continent, and that was not something Ike could forgive. Letting his emotions get the better of him could not have possibly been a worse idea though, and Ike knew it. Instead, Ike set his shoulders and held his head as high as he could. “King Ashnard of Daein! Your treachery dies on my blade!” 

Ashnard didn’t seem threatened by Ike’s words at all. If anything, he was simply morbidly curious by everything he was hearing. A moment later, Ashnard cut through the quiet with yet another echoing laugh, and Ike fought to keep himself held together. “I see that blade in your hand... It is a sacred blade, is it not? The only type of blade that can pierce my armor. Hm. It matters not how famous the blade. If the wielder lacks skill, the greatest sword is nothing but blunted steel.”

Ike’s grip on Ragnell tightened so much he thought the hilt was going to dig into his skin. “Don’t worry. You will see for yourself how blunt it is.” The battle was set to be long and trying, but Ike would give it his all to make sure Ashnard fell. He had come this far, and he was determined to see it through one way or another. 

“I expect good things from you, son of Gawain.” Ashnard paused, gesturing out to the rest of the courtyard with his free hand. “What you see before you are my elite, handpicked soldiers. How will you deal with them? I'm looking forward to watching you. Don't disappoint me!”

With that, Ashnard turned and flew away, the wing beats of his wyvern piercing the wind. Ike wanted to demand that Ashnard stop so they could fight then and there, but he already knew Ashnard would do no such thing. In order to reach the Mad King, Ike and the rest of the Crimean liberation would have to fight through the Daein army’s strongest soldiers. Ashnard had known this would be a battle to remember, and he made sure it would go down in history however it could. 

Ike nodded, and he turned to look at the rest of his allies. “This is where it ends!” he declared. “The war shall be over by the time the sun sets tonight! Now… Let us finish this!”

The battle broke out all at once, and the Daein soldiers rushed toward the Crimean army. The liberation forces were ready for them though, and every swing of an enemy blade was met with the same from an ally. Every person Ike had ever come to befriend and know over the course of the war was there for the same purpose, and they would give it their all. Ashnard was testing them, and the Crimean liberation was determined to rise to the occasion. No matter what it took, they would reach him and tear him down from his high perch. 

Ike wanted to give the fight everything he had, but he knew better than to charge blindly into any skirmish that happened to cross his path. Ike needed to conserve his energy for the battle against Ashnard himself even though he wanted nothing more than to handle every foe that tried to cross him personally. Ike knew he could rely on the rest of the army to take care of this. He simply had to let them do what they were best at, and he would focus on his own goal. 

Ashnard had retreated to the massive balcony of the Crimean castle, and he was perched there casually as he looked out over the battlefield below. Ashnard did not respond when any of his allies fell or when they managed to get in a successful hit on the enemy forces. His face remained set in a wide, crazed smile throughout the entire battle. He barely seemed to care who won the fight or who was lost in the process. All he wanted was a battle to remember, and he was determined to make something of this no matter what it took. 

Soren remained close to Ike throughout the push up to Ashnard. Soren knew that he would not have been able to damage his father during the actual fight for the end of the war, but that wasn’t going to stop him from doing everything he could to see this through. Ashnard had taken more from Soren than he could ever hope to put into words. He may not have been able to damage the Mad King of Daein, but Soren could still stand by Ike as he saw Ashnard to his grave. If nothing else, Soren wanted to get in at least one good kick at his father’s corpse. It wouldn’t count for much, but it was a reassuring thought if nothing else. 

When Ike finally arrived in Ashnard’s range, he looked up at the king with a heavy frown on his face. Both Mist and Soren were standing just behind him, not daring to get close enough to end up in the danger of Ashnard’s strength. “You can do this,” Mist told Ike. “And if you get hurt, we’ll be here to make sure you’re alright. We’ll do everything we can to stop any of the enemies from interfering too. Promise.”

“Thank you, Mist,” Ike nodded. He wanted to look at her and Soren one last time, but he couldn’t take the chance as long as Ashnard was so close. Ike was proven right to not look away from the king for even a moment when Ashnard finally directed his wyvern into the air and away from the balcony. Just like before, the very air seemed to rip itself apart beneath the weight of Ashnard’s raw strength. Ike wasn’t going to let that stop him though. He had made it this far, and he would tear Ashnard down however he had to. 

Ashnard raised his blade high above his head and swung it down at Ike. Ike was a small target though, and he was easily able to swerve out of the way of the blow. Ike returned the attack with a slice of his own, and just as the legends had claimed, Ike was able to pierce the armor that lined Ashnard’s body. Ike could have burst into laughter from pure relief at the sight, but he didn’t let his resolve waver for even a moment. He had to stay focused. 

Ashnard went after Ike for a second time, but unfortunately, Ike wasn’t able to fully escape Ashnard’s reach when this next blow soared toward him. Ike was caught in the arm, and he let out a strained hiss of pain between his teeth. Healing magic fell upon him a moment later, and Ike knew instantly that it had come from Soren. He wasn’t sure of how he was able to pick out the difference between Mist and Soren’s healing staves, but Ike wasn’t going to ask questions about it either. He was too glad to be on his feet still to bother. 

Ashnard, however, was considerably less happy by the fact that his son had intervened. The king of Daein narrowed his eyes into a glare as he turned to look at Soren. “I was wondering when we would see one another again… I thought you would have a bit more sense than to try and come after me like this,” Ashnard began. “You didn’t have to fight against Daein. It would have been smarter if you chose to stand with me rather than against me.”

“I was never going to stand with you after everything you did,” Soren bit back. “I don’t care about the blood we may or may not share. I belong here, and I don’t regret my choices in the slightest. Maybe it’ll lead to my downfall, but I can at least fall knowing that I did what I thought was for the greater good of the world.”

Ashnard let out a wild laugh at that, unable to respond to any hardship with something more honest than cackling. “I wanted you to be my tactician. I wanted you to have the chance to see what the world was truly about when you were taken out from beneath your mother’s protection… Though I suppose I didn’t act quickly enough. Now, you’ve plotted my downfall… But I wonder if it will be enough!”

Ashnard moved to swing at Soren next, but Ike didn’t let the blow land. Instead, he rushed in between father and son, his blade at the ready. He had to put in a bit too much effort to deflect Ashnard’s sword, and Soren summoned a small wind spell to knock Ashnard’s hand off course. He may not have been able to deal concrete damage, but he could still change the weight of Ashnard’s balance, and he most certainly succeeded in that aim too. Ashnard’s sword hand went wide, and Ike rushed forward, stabbing at the king with everything he had. 

Ashnard let out a yell of pain and rage, but he didn’t back down. Instead, he shoved his hand into his armor and pulled out something bundled up in a small pack of cloth. Ike watched as the fabric fell away, and he felt his heart drop as soon as he realized what was hiding at the center of it all. Lehran’s Medallion gleamed like the only star in the sky, and its light only grew brighter as Ashnard cast aside the fabric to grab at it with his bare hand. 

Madness immediately took hold of him, and Ike watched as the king of Daein truly earned his title as the Mad King in a matter of seconds. The medallion made Ashnard’s skin turn unnaturally pale, and his hair seemed to fly in every direction it had never been meant to. Ashnard seemed to glow with an unholy fire like the same pyre that consumed the medallion when it grew too unsteady by the world at war. Ashnard was still laughing through it all, though his words were growing pinched and distorted. 

Ashnard’s strength had increased significantly when he next lunged for Ike, and the swordsman rolled out of the way, but he knew he was going to need a little something more than luck and good evasion in order to win. To prove it, Ashnard lunged for him once again, but Ike knew that he wouldn’t be able to avoid the attack in time. Soren released another blast of wind magic to knock Ashnard away even if he knew it would deal no damage… 

But much to Ike’s surprise, the attack actually landed. Despite Ashnard’s armor being blessed by the goddess, the wind magic seemed to stagger him. Ike had dealt enough damage to the armor to shatter its blessing, at least temporarily, and that left Ashnard open to any and all attacks from the rest of the army. There was no better time for the tides to turn, and Ike rushed off to greet the king in combat once more with this advantage in mind. 

Around the rest of the courtroom, the other members of the Crimean liberation had managed to finish up their own battles. Titania had seen Soren’s attack pierce Ashnard’s armor enough to push him backward, and she was ready to rush into the fight to do her own part. Elincia was hot on her heels, her staff at the ready in case anyone wound up getting hurt. The entire army was rushing directly toward Ashnard now, all of them desperate to defeat him and finally lay this war to rest. 

Ike managed to get in a lucky stab when Ashnard swooped after him, and a blast of lightning magic tore through the sky to strike the king in the side. Ashnard went stiff from the blow, and before he could recover, Titania swung her axe across his chest to open a major gash in between the plates of his armor. Ashnard’s laughter was growing quieter and quieter as the seconds passed by and his strength waned and then faded away entirely. 

Ike and Mist both raised their blades high and then slashed them across Ashnard’s sides. Ashnard let out a coughing noise that silenced his laughter for a split second, and blood splattered across the top of his wyvern’s head. Ike’s eyes went wide at the sight, but he never got the chance to fully process what he was seeing. Soren finished the fight with a single blast of wind magic, and Ashnard was sent flying off his mount. The king slammed into the ground below roughly, and Ike knew he was on the brink of death long before he came rolling to a stop. His only evidence was that Ashnard’s laughter had finally faded away completely, but given the way he had been behaving up to that point, it was the best proof Ike knew he was going to get. 

The medallion had fallen to the wayside when Ashnard tumbled off his wyvern, and Mist ran over to the pendant. She cupped it in her hands carefully, and the blue flames licking at its surface finally began to calm before subsiding entirely in the presence of someone with the heart of order. Mist pressed the medallion to her chest and let out a sigh of relief that shook her entire body. 

Soren walked over to Ashnard slowly, and he found that while his father had fallen silent, he was still alive. Soren was more than fine with that. It gave him the chance to say the things he had never been able to until that moment, and he vastly preferred his father not being able to respond. “I hope you’re happy with yourself,” Soren began bitterly. “This is where your rule ends… And I will not be continuing the tyranny of the mad king. I will not be the heir you wanted me to be. I hope that brings you misery even in death.”

Ashnard’s body went still, and Soren stared down at his father. Something like grief tried to pull at his heart, but he didn’t give it the room it needed to thrive. He didn’t care what Ashnard could have been to him in some other life. In this one, Ashnard had proven himself horrible and undeserving of anything kind. He had made his choice, and Soren wasn’t going to linger on it. He would go beyond that he had been taught, and he would prove that Daein could exist in peace. If Ashnard didn’t like that, then it was his pain to bear in the afterlife. 

Soren turned away from Ashnard to find that a small crowd had gathered around the fallen form of Ashnard’s wyvern. Somehow, the dragon had survived the battle… But when Soren truly looked at the wyvern, he realized that it didn’t look much like a wyvern at all. Instead, it seemed a lot more like the Feral Ones that he had fought against a few days prior. This dragon was black instead of red, but–

No. 

Ena rushed up to the fallen wyvern, not recognizing the calls of the rest of the army around her. She sat down beside the wyvern, cradling its head in her lap. Much to Soren’s surprise, the wyvern didn’t try to strike at her, instead falling into her grasp like it had never known anything sweeter. “It’s going to be alright,” Ena whispered to the wyvern even though it was clear as could be that nothing was ever going to be fine again, at least not the way she wanted it to be. “I’m here. I promise.”

Soren was distantly aware of Reyson, Leanne, and Lillia speaking to one another in the ancient tongue behind him, but he couldn’t figure out what they were saying. Soren had never learned how to speak the language of the herons, and he almost regretted it now. Before he could put that to words though, the three herons began to sing one another. Reyson’s voice was a grounding tenor beneath Lillia’s strong alto and Leanne’s soaring soprano. The song was similar to the one they had offered to the fallen Serenes Forest when Reyson and Leanne returned it to life. There was something different about the song now, though Soren couldn’t put a finger on what it was. 

The wyvern began to glow gently, and its body began to distort and pinch. Slowly but surely, the draconic features that lined the edge of the wyvern–no, the dragon’s –body began to fade and shrink. They retreated to show the silhouette of a laguz in human-like form. The man was weak and could barely keep himself upright for longer than a moment, but Ena was there to support him. Her eyes were overflowing with tears, and she choked on a stray sob at least once every few seconds, only barely keeping herself from falling apart completely. 

Ike stepped toward Nasir and the shape of the man beside her. “Reyson… Is that…?”

“The dragon’s true form had been warped, so we sang the galdr of rebirth…” Reyson explained, his eyes not leaving Ena and the man for even a moment. 

Ena pulled the man into a tight embrace, unable to hold back her sobbing for a moment longer. “Rajaion…”

Soren felt the world freeze, and all of the pieces fell into place. The mystery Ena had been looking to solve all this time revolved around Rajaion and everything that had happened to him almost two decades prior. Now, it all made sense. Rajaion had been transformed into a Feral One by Ashnard. He must have been. It still didn’t explain everything that was weighing on the situation, but it was a start, and Soren felt like he was finally seeing the world for what it truly was for the first time. 

Soren took a step toward Rajaion, and he found that it was like looking into a distorted mirror. Rajaion was older than him, and his skin was much darker… But other than that, Soren looked like he could have been one and the same with the prince of dragons. Soren understood why Kurthnaga had asked if he knew anything about Rajaion when they met all the way back in Goldoa. Soren looked like he was Rajaion’s son. Soren had always looked exactly like his mother, but he looked even more similar to his uncle… To Rajaion. To the man who had been transformed into his father’s mount by something sick and twisted. 

Rajaion embraced Ena in return, his smile weak but resilient. “Ena…” He couldn’t seem to find the words to say much more after everything that had happened. He hadn’t been able to speak any language since before he was transformed, or so Soren was willing to assume. Ashnard had taken everything from him. Soren didn’t know any of the details, but he could easily figure out that this was the situation that had driven a rift between his mother and father. This must have been the reason that Almedha decided to leave Ashnard behind once and for all. 

Rajaion only pulled away from the embrace with Ena when Soren drew near enough for his shadow to fall upon the pair. Rajaion stared up at Soren for a long moment, and every tiny revelation that had just occurred to the prince sparked to life in Rajaion’s mind too. Neither one of them knew what to say. Somehow, this went far beyond anything words could have ever been capable of. 

Soren took an agonizingly long time trying to find the power to speak up despite that. “Do you… Do you recognize me?”

Rajaion’s face softened into a smile. He looked exhausted, like he had never truly been given the chance to rest in all the years since he had been made into Ashnard’s pawn. It wouldn’t have shocked Soren at all if that was the case. “It has been a long time… I am glad to see you have survived this long… My nephew.”

Soren’s chest went tight, and he nodded his confirmation. “My uncle.” He rubbed at his eyes with the heels of his hands. There was only one thing that remained for him now, and he knew it. Crimea had been reclaimed, and he had even crossed paths with his uncle for the first time… No, not the first time. There was more of a story to that. Soren was sure of it. 

And there was only one woman in all of Tellius who would have been able to fill him in on the truth. 

And for the first time in over a year, she was within Soren’s grasp. 

Chapter Text

Soren wandered slowly through the corridors of the Crimean castle’s dungeons, his heart screaming in his ears with each passing step. He could hardly believe he was finally there after all this time. Soren had thought this day would never come, and he had feared he would never get the chance to see his mother again. The day had most certainly arrived though, and Soren was on the verge of reuniting with Almedha for the first time in over a year. It barely felt real, but Soren needed it to be real more than anything else he had ever experienced before. 

Most of the cells were empty, and Soren’s chest continued to tighten with anxiety. What if Almedha wasn’t there at all? What if all the rumors he had heard about her being held in the castle had been wrong? Ashnard could have killed her ages ago, and most people wouldn’t have thought twice about it. Many people didn’t even know there was a queen of Daein, and those that did know wouldn’t even bother to give her a second glance. If something had happened to her, then Soren would never be able to forgive himself. He should have been there for her. He should have protected her from–

Soren fell silent when he finally arrived in front of the cell he had been searching for. Almedha sat on the far end of the room, her eyes locked on the floor with a frown. She looked up slowly when she realized she was not alone, her movements lethargic and heavy. Almedha froze at the sight of Soren, and he noticed all the tiny ways she had changed since they last saw one another. She was exhausted, and she looked like she hadn’t enjoyed a full night of sleep in months. Almedha was pale too, her skin having lost much of the life that Soren had come to admire when he was growing up. 

Almedha couldn’t seem to convince her body to move, and she stared at Soren in a shock unlike anything else. “Soren?” she whispered, her voice threatening to break beneath its own weight. “Is… Is that you?”

Soren rushed up to the cell’s door in an instant, his fingers fumbling with the keys he had found on the wall when he arrived in the prison. Soren struggled for a few horrible seconds to shove the key into the lock, and his tears only made it harder for him to focus his attention in the right direction. Soren couldn’t restrain an ugly sob that made his entire body shake, so he gave up on trying. When he finally twisted the key in the lock, the door began to give, and Soren pulled it open before rushing into Almedha’s arms. 

Almedha was ready and waiting for Soren, and she pressed him as close to her chest as she could stand. “Soren,” she whispered, the word sacred in a way nothing else could have been in that moment. She ran her fingers gently through Soren’s hair, and the sage wondered if there had ever been anything sweeter than the love of his mother. It was all he had wanted for so long, and he couldn’t ask for anything better now or ever again. “I’ve missed you so much.”

“I’ve missed you too,” Soren murmured, his voice catching on itself more times than he could ever hope to count. He pulled away only enough to look his mother in the eyes, desperate to see that she was alright in any tiny way he could. She was exhausted and hadn’t been allowed to see the outside world for ages, but she was alive. Against all odds, she was still standing there before him. Ashnard had been strong, but Almedha had proven herself stronger, and she would continue to prove it each day for the rest of her life. 

Almedha cupped one hand around Soren’s cheek, feeling for the warmth of her son’s skin beneath her shaking fingers. “I’m so proud of you.” Soren felt his eyes go wide, and he remembered that he had changed and grown significantly in the last year too. He had immediately noticed all the ways Almedha had fallen from grace since they last crossed paths, and Soren had changed too. He was not the same person he had once been, and it was clear as could be just by looking at him. Soren was a hardened warrior and tactician now. He had won a war for Crimea through his wit and determination to reunite with his mother. He had fought to make it this far, and Almedha wanted to memorize all the shifts he had undergone in her absence. 

The mere thought brought another wave of tears to Soren’s eyes. He wasn’t used to crying this much, but it felt like all he could do now. He had grown and changed more than he could ever hope to put into words, and Almedha had been there for none of it. She wanted to be in his life, but Ashnard had deprived her of that opportunity. They would have to spend the rest of their lives catching up on and making up for missed time. They would remember this deficit for years, and all they could do was find a way to push through that grief together. 

Soren didn’t have the words for any of this though, so he looked into his mother’s eyes as warmly as he could muster. “Are you alright?” Soren asked, trying to see if there were any traces of injuries across her body. “If he did something to you, then I’ll bring him back to life just to kill him again.”

“I’m better than alright,” Almedha assured him. “Now that you’re here… Everything is fine again. Everything will be alright.” She pulled Soren into another tight hug, and for a moment, Soren felt like he couldn’t breathe. Even so, there was no place in all of Tellius he would rather be. “I’ll never let you go again. I promise.”

“I’ll never let anything pull us apart either,” Soren vowed. He let out a slow breath as he pulled back from Almedha, and he took her hand in his own. “Do you want to go outside? There’s a lot I want to show you, and… There’s someone I think you should see too.”

Almedha’s eyes went wide, and she nodded as Soren began to guide her out of the prison. Her legs were shaky and unstable, and she had to lean on Soren a bit to keep herself upright. A year ago, Soren wouldn’t have been able to help her remain on her feet since he would have simply been lacking in the physical strength he needed. The war hadn’t entirely solved Soren’s frail nature, but it had given him a new strength unlike anything he had ever thought possible. Before Ashnard attacked the villa, Soren never would have thought this would be his life. He liked to think he was making the most of it though. He had changed, but that didn’t need to be something he feared. Change had separated him from his home, but it had brought him back to Almedha all the same. 

And more importantly, change would bring their family to an even greater state of completion than before. 

The sunlight was overpowering when Soren and Almedha arrived outside. Almedha winced at the brightness of the afternoon, raising one hand to try and cover her eyes. “It has been too long… I was beginning to fear I would never see the sun again,” she confessed. The stench of blood hit her senses a moment later, and Almedha looked over at Soren with something like grief in her eyes. “If you’re here, then I can only assume…”

“He’s dead,” Soren finished for her. “I was the one who killed him.” The truth was a bit more complicated than that, but Soren did his best to not think about it too hard. It would only distress him to remember in clearer and clearer detail that he had played such a significant role in tearing his father down and then leading him into an early grave. Soren would do it again in a heartbeat, but if he thought about it too much, then he would start to crumble. The last year had been hard enough for him, and he didn’t want to see his new future get any worse. 

Almedha nodded slowly, but she didn’t respond to Soren’s words. Instead, her gaze caught on the small crowd gathered around Rajaion and Ena. They were both still sitting there on the cobbled stone ground of the courtyard, leaning into one another like the other was the only person in the world. There were others who bled in and out of their periphery, but none of them seemed to matter quite as much as the joy that came from the relief of being there together. 

Almedha froze at the sight of Rajaion, and Soren looked up to find his mother looking pale and full of grief unlike anything he had ever known from her. Rajaion seemed to recognize that Almedha had arrived, and he opened his eyes slowly to lock gazes with her. As soon as they saw one another, Almedha snapped out of her trance, breaking out into a sprint toward him. She threw her arms around Rajaion in a tight embrace, unable to hold back her sobs once he was in her arms. Rajaion held strong with a soft smile as he returned the hug, not bothering to search for words that he knew would not be sufficient to convey the depths of his emotions anyway. 

“You… You’re alive,” Almedha whispered, the words threatening to break even in the barest traces of the afternoon breeze. “I thought… I thought I would never be able to talk to you again…”

“I’m alright,” Rajaion assured her, though his words came out clumsy as proof of his forced inexperience with conversation. “You can thank the herons of Serenes for that.” Rajaion pulled away from Almedha, pressing his palms against her shoulders. “It was… Agonizing, being right there and not being able to speak to you for so long.”

“You don’t need to worry about that anymore,” Almedha vowed, pulling him in for yet another hug. “Everything is going to be alright from now on. I’m not going to let anything bad happen to you ever again. I promise.”

Soren took a slow step toward the hugging siblings. Rajaion smiled up at him, and Soren already knew what was being asked of him before he could find the words to inquire. Soren fell to his knees beside his mother and uncle, and they both pulled him in for the tightest hug he had ever been part of. Soren had never had much of a connection with his family outside of Almedha. He wanted nothing to do with his father, and he hadn’t even realized there were other relatives for him to reach out to in the first place. Until that moment, Soren supposed that his only family members had been out of his reach… But all of that had finally changed. Rajaion was safe, and he would hopefully make a full recovery even after everything he was put through. The war was over, and this would be the start of something new and beautiful so long as Soren was willing to let it be. 

The hug only dissolved when Ena nudged Rajaion in the shoulder. “You should get to the infirmary,” she advised. “I think the healers want to check you over and make sure you’re really going to be alright.” She didn’t express the depths of her worries, but Soren could still see them when he looked into her eyes. Ena had been terrified that she would never be able to see him again, and now that he was back to his old self, she didn’t want to run even the slightest risk of waiting too long to seek out help. She couldn’t squander this chance knowing that she would not get another one. 

Rajaion nodded, and he slowly pushed himself to his feet. He nearly fell over once he was standing though, and Ena rushed in to support him. Ena had to move painfully slowly to escort Rajaion out of the courtyard and in the direction of the nearby medical tent for the Crimean liberation army. They would be able to expand to a better infirmary soon enough, but for now, they had to go for what was most convenient. Rajaion did not protest, letting Ena pull him away from the courtyard and into the recovery that would start the rest of his life. 

“He’s going to be alright,” Almedha said, and Soren looked up at her with wide eyes. “He has been through a lot, but… I know that he will make a full recovery. It might take some time, but he’ll be able to do it. Rajaion is strong. He will find a way to come back from this. We simply have to place our faith in him.”

Soren nodded. “I’m glad.” He didn’t know what he would have done if he learned he had an uncle and then immediately had to say goodbye because of the cruelty of his deceased father. Soren was glad he didn’t have to think about it either. 

Almedha continued to stare after Rajaion until she was certain that he was gone. She let out a heavy sigh once she knew he would not be coming back, and she turned to look at Soren once more. “You… You want to hear the truth behind all of this,” she stated. It was not a question but instead a declaration of fact. She was right when she said it too; Soren had been wondering about the truth behind all of this for longer than he had realized. At long last, he was faced with not only his mother but all of the truths and secrets she had been holding onto during their time apart. If there was ever a time to talk, it was now, and Almedha knew it. 

“I do,” Soren confirmed. He glanced around the area, searching for a private place to talk. The courtyard was overrun with soldiers after the battle though, and Soren knew that he wasn’t going to find the peace he sought outside. The castle seemed fairly empty when he went inside to find Almedha though. Maybe he would be able to find a room inside for them to speak in without being disturbed. 

Soren led Almedha into the castle quietly. Neither one of them said a word, though Soren didn’t know what they would have said even if they had the confidence to shatter the silence. The conversation they were about to have was set to change everything Soren had ever come to know about his life, and he knew it in a deep way that could never quite be put to words. For months, Soren had been looking forward to the moment where he would finally understand his history. Soren felt like he had put a lot of the pieces together, but it was just as Ena and Nasir had said. No one would be able to tell him the full story behind his birth and his bloodline save for his mother, and at long last, she was ready to share everything. 

Soren and Almedha settled into a parlor inside the castle. The windows were massive, offering streams of sunlight that splashed upon Almedha’s skin. She had lost much of her glow during her time imprisoned beneath the palace, but she would recover with time. Soren would see to it however he had to. “So…” Soren began, unsure of where else to start. 

“Let me start from the beginning,” Almedha said with practiced ease, and Soren had to wonder if perhaps she had known a conversation like this was coming even when she was being held captive. She must have known that Soren would want the truth whenever they reunited, and now, she was offering it as freely as she could have. “I wish I had told you this sooner, but… At the time, I thought it would be safer if you did not know who I was or where I came from. I did not want you to be placed in danger because of my mistakes since I knew I had already caused more than enough harm with my recklessness.”

Soren nodded slowly, and Almedha let out a grounding breath. “I was born as the princess of Goldoa, the second of three children. My older brother, Rajaion, was the heir to the throne while my younger brother, Kurthnaga, is the youngest dragon in all of Goldoa to this day. My father is King Dheginsea, a black dragon who once fought alongside the other heroes who battled a dark god for control of Tellius in ancient times. He demanded that the power of the dragon laguz never be used for the purposes of war, so Goldoa was isolated from the world. I wanted to see what the rest of the world had to offer, so I chose to walk away on my own. I left Goldoa by myself and wandered Tellius… Before finding my way to Daein.

“In those days, Ashnard was far from close to sitting on the throne. He had grand ambitions though, and he declared that one day, he would be king. I… I was naive. I thought that he would give me a place to belong. We both desired a special kind of power, and we found one another intriguing because of that. I had just earned my freedom for the first time, and he was determined to take a new freedom all for himself. I do not know if I would call our relationship a matter of love, but we were deeply attracted to one another. Looking back now, that passion was foolishness. I thought it would be enough to keep us together forever. I wanted it to be enough. 

“I saw Ashnard do… Many terrible things in the name of reaching the throne. He was desperate for that power, and he would do anything to take it. I am not proud of the things I watched him do, and I will have to carry that weight with me for the rest of my life. At the time though, it was not enough to drive me away. He yearned for power, and I wanted it too after being deprived of it for so long.

“That mutual attraction eventually resulted in the birth of a child… You. I did not know his true intentions until after you were born though. I thought I would spend the rest of my life with him, and he… He wanted me for my power as a black dragon laguz. That was all he ever wanted. He thought that our child would be strong enough to tear the world apart between my draconic blood and his overwhelming power in combat. But… There was a catch. In order for a beorc and a laguz to have a child together, the laguz’s body must change significantly. The shift is permanent, and it robs the laguz of the ability to transform. I lost everything, and Ashnard had no further use for me. 

“For a time, he was interested in you as a tool that would give him the strength he sought. I had failed him, so he hoped that you would be different… But your childhood was not simple or easy for anyone. You struggled significantly in your earliest years. You were of poor health, and the apothecaries feared that you would not survive your first winter. You were a fighter, and you pulled through… But you were not instantly powerful the way your father had wanted. He thought that having a child with a black dragon laguz would change the future of Daein forever. Instead, I lost all abilities to transform, and I was essentially just a beorc. I had been cut off from the bulk of my family and friends in Goldoa when I chose to leave. My father disowned me. I had contact with my brothers, but it was limited. You… You were all I had left, Soren. Ashnard thought you to be useless and a waste of his time, but I… I loved you more than anything.”

Almedha took a long moment to collect herself, tears in her eyes. Soren let his hands travel in the direction of hers, and she clung to them fiercely. Almedha only pulled back long enough to rub at her eyes for a few moments before she went right back to holding onto her son. She seemingly couldn’t believe that he was sitting in front of her, and he couldn’t blame her in the slightest. He felt very similarly after all the time they had been forced to spend apart in the last year. 

Soren couldn’t say he was shocked to hear anything Almedha was telling him now. If anything, it made a lot of sense. Ashnard was not a good person, and Soren had been aware of that for longer than he could ever hope to put to words. Still, learning of just how cruel he had been to Almedha in the name of simple strength… It was sickening. Soren was glad that he had been responsible for killing the man. Ashnard didn’t deserve to live even if he somehow managed to survive the final battle against the Crimean liberation. 

Almedha finally composed herself after a few tense moments, and she forced herself to continue. “He thought of you as nothing but a pawn to be moved across a board. He… He used you as leverage. I had very little contact with my relatives in Goldoa, but Ashnard managed to get a message across. He kidnapped you and then sent a ransom note to my older brother, Rajaion. He had never been given the chance to meet you, and he hadn’t seen me since I left Goldoa years prior… But he still rushed off to do all he could to rescue you. He couldn’t stand to leave you alone in the hands of Ashnard, so he came here to Daein…

“But he did not know that he was playing right into Ashnard’s hands. Ashnard had been hoping that Rajaion would come, and he most certainly did. Rajaion brought a group of red dragons with him, and they all fought to try and save you so that you could be returned safely to Goldoa. Rajaion wanted to bring me home even though it went against our father’s wishes… But he never got the chance to try and help me. Ashnard had a trap laid out for him, and he sprung it shut before Rajaion realized what was happening.

“Rajaion wanted to save you no matter what, and Ashnard took advantage of that. He captured Rajaion and the rest of the dragons from his traveling party. From there, he had them all transformed into Feral Ones. He used Rajaion as his mount, and the rest of the world simply assumed that he had found one of the strangest wyverns in the entire continent to ride. I knew the truth though, and I was disgusted by it. I couldn’t stand to stay with Ashnard any longer than I already had. After what he did to Rajaion, I knew that he would come for you next if I gave him the chance, so I can. I took you and left to raise you in the villa instead. At the time, Gawain was considering stopping his work as a member of the Four Riders for some other reason. I asked him to come with me and do all he could to take care of me and you. I wanted him around to protect you just in case your father came back for you. I would not be able to protect you if he returned because I had lost my ability to transform, so I decided to ask him for help instead. He agreed to it, and… That is where we raised you. 

“We kept you in the villa, safe from Ashnard and the rest of the world. I spent my time trying to learn more about what had happened to my brother. I didn’t know for certain if there was a way to turn him back to the way he had been before, but I knew that I at least had to try. In between spending time with you, I did all I could to research a way to save him. In the end, I suppose you were the one who found it first though… I never would have thought he would already have been returned to normal by the time I reunited with him.”

“It was the herons of Serenes,” Soren explained, though he hadn’t put all that much effort into speaking the words. His mind was racing with shock unlike anything else, and it took much more power than he would have ever imagined to even just tell Almedha that much. “They sang one of their galdrs, and the three of them together were able to set him free from the possession.”

“I… I’m so glad,” Almedha smiled, pressing her hands to her chest quietly. “I was afraid that I would never be able to see his true face again, and I… I couldn’t bear the thought of that. I already lost him once, and I needed to do everything in my power to save him. He deserved better than everything he was forced to suffer through, and I was determined to prove it however I could.”

“And now, he’s back to normal,” Soren finished for her, and Almedha nodded. After a few silent seconds passed, Soren looked down at his hands. “I… I never knew that was the story behind my existence. I never knew… Any of it. I started to suspect over the course of the war that you were a dragon laguz, but I didn’t think… I didn’t think it would be quite like this.”

“I never wanted you to find out. I thought it would be safer if you were kept unaware of who you truly were,” Almedha explained. “Most of the world does not know that Ashnard has a son, though I doubt we will be able to hide it for too much longer now that the war is over. Still, I wanted to keep you safe for as long as possible, and that meant making sure that nobody knew the truth of who you were. There could have been others who tried to take advantage of you, and I couldn’t stand that thought. I needed to do everything I could to keep you safe. I had already made a mistake by exposing you to your father in the first place, but I would not make it again.”

Soren shook his head and clenched his fingers into fists. “I… I want to get to know you and Rajaion properly,” he declared. “I never had the chance to truly understand either one of you before now, but I want to change that. I want to learn everything I can about you both. I feel like it’s the least I can do after everything you both did for me. I wouldn’t be here today if you hadn’t been looking after me, and I… I want to make up for lost time. I want to know you the way I should have from the start.”

Almedha’s smile was soft and weak when she responded. “I had a feeling you would say that… I am sorry for putting you in this position to begin with, Soren… But I would be happy to stand by your side however I can going forward. I’m glad that we can be here together once more. It may be happening far later than we would have liked, but at least we made it there in the end.”

Soren nodded, and he took his mother’s hands in his own tightly. “I’m glad that Ashnard is dead,” he said softly. “I couldn’t imagine letting him live after hearing about all of the horrible things he did. I wouldn’t let him live. I don’t think anyone could stand the thought after all of that. Now… I’m glad that we can consider him in the past for both ourselves and all of Tellius.”

“I’m glad that he is dead too… And I feel like it is something that should have happened a long time ago,” Almedha admitted. “But if it has happened now, then I suppose that is a victory in its own way. Thank you for everything you did for the world, Soren. I don’t think anyone will ever understand the depth of your kindness, but I do, and I will never forget it.”

Soren nodded, blinking away tears that were rising at the corners of his eyes. He had lost his father that day, but it wasn’t as if Ashnard had ever meant much to him in the first place. There were others, however, who Soren wanted to find the chance to know. Rajaion had given up everything for Soren before the prince of Daein ever had the chance to know his name. If not for the way the war had ended, Soren probably still wouldn’t know who Rajaion was or the massive sacrifice that had been made in his name. He probably still wouldn’t know that he had an uncle in Goldoa and a grandfather who had left him behind before he was born. It was a bittersweet and miserable tale, but Soren found himself strangely comforted by it. He was not alone in facing the future even if the path ahead was set to be a dismal and dreary one. There would be people standing beside him even if they were not the ones who he had expected to find by his side. 

“Rajaion will need to return to Goldoa soon,” Almedha went on, her eyes growing distant and sad. “That is where he will best be taken care of after all he was forced to endure. I wish we could follow him so that you could get to know him, but I fear we will not be able to go with him easily.”

Soren nodded along, feeling as if ice had been poured down his spine. There were more reasons he could not follow Rajaion to Goldoa than he could ever hope to count. First and foremost, Almedha had been banished from Goldoa years ago, and Soren doubted the unmovable king of dragons would be willing to allow her to return after everything that had happened. Soren had wound up in Goldoa on chance when he met Kurthnaga, and he didn’t know if he would ever be able to replicate that miracle. Dheginsea probably wouldn’t allow him there a second time. Dheginsea likely wouldn’t allow anyone to come to Goldoa so soon after the threat of war had nearly consumed the entire continent of Tellius. 

The other reason, however, had to do with the other side of Soren’s heritage. Ashnard was dead, and that meant Daein’s throne was as good as empty. Soren didn’t know if word of his existence had spread over the course of the war, but he knew that the truth would travel soon. It was only a matter of time before everyone in all of Tellius knew that he was the son of the Mad King, and they would want to know what his plan was for taking over Daein and then looking after the people of his kingdom. Soren had never been trained to look after anyone other than himself since he hadn’t thought he would be a king, but he had no other choice now. 

The thought of becoming king terrified Soren to no end. He didn’t know if he would ever feel ready to step up and become a king, but he didn’t have a choice. Daein needed him, and the rest of Tellius was in much the same position. The only way Soren could fix this was to work with Elincia. The rulers of Crimea and Daein would be able to hold onto one another as their nations recovered from the miseries of war. If nothing else, Soren could say that was a positive that had come of all this. 

Soren tried to leave that thought at the door though. He would be able to worry about becoming king after he had finished his conversation with Almedha. “Are you going to try and go back to Goldoa one day?” he asked. “I know you were banished a long time ago, but…”

Almedha considered Soren’s words for a long moment before she offered a loose laugh and a half-hearted shrug. “I… I may have to try to reach out again,” she admitted. “I miss my younger brother deeply, and I want to see him after everything that has happened. I know it may not be enough, but… I want to do what I can to make up for the things that he has been forced to endure.”

“I met him during the war, you know,” Soren said, and Almedha’s eyes went wide in shock. Soren let out a small laugh. “I suppose you haven’t heard most of the details behind the war. Now’s as good a time as any to talk about everything that happened, huh?”

Almedha nodded eagerly, unable to hold back her curiosity for a moment longer. “Tell me everything, Soren. I want to know.”

Much to his own surprise, Soren found himself smiling. The war had been perhaps the hardest thing he ever had to endure, but it was over now. He could look back on it fondly and remember all that it had done for him whether he felt ready for it or not. Almedha had a right to hear the story, and Soren liked to think he had a right to reflect on all the distance he had traveled in order to arrive back at her side too. “It all started shortly after we left the villa to run from Ashnard’s army…”

~~~~~

Ike could barely believe everything that was happening. 

Ever since Ashnard fell and Rajaion was returned to his normal form, Ike’s life had been a whirlwind of activity that he could never hope to put to words. Ike’s head felt like it was too full, and he had to fight a bit too hard in order to keep himself held together. He knew all of this was real, and he could see it for himself, but that didn’t feel like enough. Ike kept blinking and wondering if he was going to find that all of this was a dream. He would wake up preparing for the final battle or perhaps all the way back at the villa, and all of this would be proven little more than a memory. 

Ike wandered his way through the world after the end of the battle, and he spoke with everyone who approached him with a nod and a smile on his face. Slowly but surely, reality seemed to come into focus, and Ike knew that everything was unfolding the way it was always meant to. The war never should have started in the first place, but so long as it had happened, this was the best ending Ike could ask for. 

Rajaion had been taken away to the infirmary to be looked over by the healers, and Mist and Elena had hurried off along with him, Ena, Nasir, and the heron siblings to ensure he recovered. Word in the army was that Rajaion was going to make a full recovery, though it would take a while for him to fully bounce back from the horrors he had been forced to endure during the war. Rajaion had been a Feral One for a long time, and the road to recovery would be lengthy and trying. 

Still, Ike had high hopes. The power of the three herons put together had been enough to liberate him of the misery that had ruined his life. Ike never would have thought it possible for Rajaion to recover at all, and if the people who were looking after him were so confident that he would be alright, then Ike was choosing to trust them. It was a far more hopeful note than he had ever imagined the war would be able to end on, and Ike loved it more than he could ever hope to describe. 

“You did a great job today.”

Ike looked up to find Gawain standing a few steps away. Ike had only just won a moment to himself, taking a few seconds to breathe after speaking with more people than he cared to remember in the last few hours. Gawain had clearly been waiting for the right chance to approach his son, and the smile on his face proved it. Ike returned the grin and nodded. “Thank you. I’m glad I was able to do my part to end the war once and for all.”

“You’ve done more than enough,” Gawain said. “You shouldn’t have ever had to deal with this, and I… I’m glad that it worked out despite all that.” He pressed one hand to his chest, clearly feeling for his heartbeat beneath the scar tissue of the wounds he had sustained during his battle with the Black Knight. “You’ve proved yourself to the entire world. I know things are going to change for you soon, but I know you’ll be ready to face it.”

Ike’s chest went tight. That was right. The war was over, and that meant all sorts of change was going to come rushing toward him like a tidal wave crashing against a rocky cliff. The continent of Tellius had come a long way since the start of the war, and Ike was going to have to do his part to guide it to its new future. He didn’t know if he would be ready to take on a position like that though. He would simply have to wait and see what Soren and Elincia needed him to do. The two of them were the ones truly in charge, and Ike was happy to do what they directed of him. 

“You’re a noble of Crimea, but you’re also from Daein. I know that will be controversial with many people now that the war is over,” Gawain went on. “Now that the war is over, you will likely have to make a choice about where your allegiances will lie. The Crimean people will want you to stand with them while the Daein citizens will draw attention to your heritage as a reason you should stand by them.”

“I want to help everyone,” Ike said simply. Perhaps it was unorthodox, but he couldn’t bring himself to care. He thought something like this was only worth it if he was able to benefit every party involved. He had fought to bring peace to both Crimea and Daein. The everyday citizens did not deserve to suffer simply because the king of Daein had decided that he wanted to drive the world into the ground. Ike would do anything and everything in his power to help them, and he would stand by Elincia too. 

Though if he was being honest, Ike didn’t think he wanted to be a noble of Crimea. He was happy to help Elincia, of course, but he didn’t think he was cut out to be a noble as she had dubbed him during the war. Maybe he would be able to find another solution. There was no way of saying for sure until he reached out to her and tried to talk about it. Surely she would be willing to hear him out even if it went against what she had planned. The two of them were friends now, and Ike was sure that she would want the best for him too. 

Gawain cast Ike a soft smile and a matching nod. “Then I’m sure you will.” He patted Ike on the back, and while in the past Ike would have stumbled from the force, he held true to his position this time. He had grown significantly since his time at the villa, and it was clear in every aspect of his appearance and his personality. This wasn’t what Ike had expected, but he felt like it was still the best possible outcome he could have asked for. 

Ike looked up at his father with one last smile before he started to retreat toward the castle grounds. He would have to talk to Elincia and Soren about their plans for everything to come. Soren had gone off to check up on Almedha, and Ike had been happy to give him the space he needed. Ike was willing to be patient until Soren was ready to talk to him, and in the worst case scenario, he could still reach out to Elincia now. She was undoubtedly busy, but Ike knew that she always found the chance to make time for him when necessary. 

It didn’t take long for Ike to find Elincia, and much to his surprise, Soren was with her. Soren was rubbing at his eyes like he was trying to chase away tears, and Elincia was smiling at him reassuringly. The prince of Daein had seemingly just finished his conversation with Almedha, and now, he was approaching the other person he most needed to share a conversation with. Elincia was more than happy to have him, and it was written all over her face. 

There was a lightness to Elincia’s features now that Ike didn’t think he had seen throughout the war. She would never be able to go back to the way things had been before the war broke out, but she could at least say that she was setting things right. She could not return her father, mother, and uncle to life, but she could take care of her country. She had avenged every Crimean citizen who died in the war by seeing to Ashnard’s end. It was not a perfect solution to her woes, but it was the best one she could have asked for, and she had every right to celebrate it. 

Soren was the first one who noticed Ike approaching, and he stood up a bit straighter at the sight of him. “Ike,” he greeted. “I’m glad to see you.”

“I could say the same to the two of you,” Ike returned as he settled into place between them. “How are you two feeling? I know a lot has happened today, but I hope you’re doing well enough.”

“I’m feeling fine,” Elincia told him. “I know there is a lot of work that has yet to be done though… The end of the war is truly only the beginning of all of this. Rebuilding Crimea and Daein will not be an easy feat.”

“But we can do it together,” Soren assured her, and Elincia nodded. Soren turned to look at Ike fully, adopting the same voice he used when he was sharing his strategies for a battle. “Elincia has agreed that Daein will fall under my control now that the war is over. Crimea should have control over Daein after defeating Ashnard, at least in the opinions of some…”

“But I want it to be in your hands,” Elincia finished for him. “I believe Daein will be best off cared for someone who knows and understands it. The Mad King left behind massive scars in the land and its people, but I know that you will be able to heal them. I will be by your side every step of the way as you find a solution.”

“Thank you,” Soren nodded. He let out a slow breath and looked over at the rest of the courtyard in the direction where Ashnard had suffered through his final moments. “It still barely feels real now that all of it is over. I knew this day was going to come sooner or later, but I never thought it would be quite like this.”

“I think this is good,” Ike told him even though that much was no doubt obvious. “We fought hard to make it this far, and we’re going to fight hard to make sure the entire continent is healed after the war too. We can do this.”

“I know we can as well,” Elincia agreed. After a few seconds passed in silence, she looked up at Ike with something like grief in her eyes. “I can only imagine that you will be returning to Daein now that the war is over. It is your home, and I cannot ask you to stay here in Crimea even with your noble status.”

“I want to do what I can to help both Crimea and Daein,” Ike said. “I know that Daein is my home, but… I fought all this time to help Crimea too. I want to do my part to look after both nations. It might be a bit strange to some people, but I don’t care. Everyone needs the chance to breathe after a war like that, and I want to pitch in anywhere I can.”

Elincia smiled, and the fear that had appeared on her face vanished in the blink of an eye. “I should have known that you would want to help everyone… You have a kinder heart than anyone else I have met. I could not ask for a better ally.”

“And I’ve been happy to stand by you.” Ike bowed his head in her direction, and much to his surprise, Elincia returned the favor. They didn’t feel at all like they were meant to be from nations that had been at war just a few short hours ago. They were simply friends, and that was all that would ever matter so long as they had something to say about it. 

Soren let out a slow breath, pressing a hand against his chest so he could feel his heartbeat and therefore know for certain that all of this was real. “We should start to think about everything we’ll be doing next, right?” he asked. “There’s still a lot of work to be done, and we can’t afford to waste any time.”

“Yes, of course,” Elincia nodded. “Crimea and Daein will both see peace soon. I am sure of it.” She tilted her face up to the sky, and the sunlight splashed across her features to make it look like she was glowing. Ike found himself smiling. He hadn’t expected any of this to be the way his life unfolded, but he was glad this was the path he was walking now. He was making the most of it, and he knew he would continue to make the world a better place for as long as he could stand it too. 

~~~~~

Time passed, and the world began to grow and change. 

Crimea and Daein continued to work together to help one another recover. Even beyond that, the other nations of Tellius, including Begnion, Gallia, and Phoenicis, began to pitch in. The war against Ashnard had brought the entire continent dangerously close to plunging into total chaos, but it had not happened. Now, the entire continent was working together to try and set their circumstances right. They had not been able to stop Ashhard, but they would be able to help to ensure the future was bright. They were stronger when they were together, and everyone was willing to put in the work to prove it. 

Soren and Elincia were both revealed to the world fully, stepping out of the shadows and into the light of the public eye. The people of both Daein and Crimea were surprised to learn their countries had secret heirs, and they were even more surprised to know that the enemy country had used the same gambit as their own royalty. Still, everyone was willing to cooperate, and Soren and Elincia quickly proved themselves to be incredible leaders. Things were finally starting to come together again, and Ike was sure that soon enough, it wouldn’t seem like there had been a war at all. 

Ike had been doing his best to pitch in during the chaos, going back and forth between guiding Elincia and standing by Soren whenever he was needed. It was exhausting work, and Ike couldn’t say he was too fond of being in the public eye, but he was willing to do it. Ike was looking forward to the day when all of this finally calmed down enough for him to go back to a somewhat normal life. He wouldn’t ever be able to return to the way things had been before, at least not completely, but he was hoping that he would be able to make his own new normalcy to embrace. He was looking forward to being able to enjoy the peace that came with the end of the war alongside the rest of his friends. They had more than earned it, and Ike couldn’t wait to see where it took them. 

Perhaps the thing Ike was most excited for though was his relationship with Soren. They hadn’t spoken at all about their close contact during the war and how they had become even better friends. They hadn’t been given much time to discuss it, and Ike wasn’t entirely sure of how to bring it up. He knew he had to do it soon though. He had fought through an entire war where he learned of the danger of holding something off until there came a good time to say it. That had nearly cost Gawain his life, and if he had died, then Ike never would have known to find his mother again. There were some things that needed to be said as soon as possible, and Ike knew that talking to Soren about his feelings had to be one of them. 

Both Elincia and Soren were set to have formal coronations as they ascended to the thrones of their nations in full. Elincia’s coronation was going to be first on account of the entire army still being in Crimea, and after that, they would go to Daein to see him crowned as the king of his nation. Elincia was busy with a million preparations, and Lucia and Geoffrey were helping her. That left Ike with shockingly little to do other than sit with his own thoughts, and he found his mind drifting to Soren constantly. 

Soren was sitting in a chair across from him, looking out the window with a muted frown on his face. Even lost in thought, Soren looked incredible, and Ike wanted to commit every detail of him to memory to ensure he never even had the chance to forget. Ike knew in a way that went beyond words that this was what it meant to be in love. He didn’t know how it had taken him so long to realize it, but he wasn’t going to let the chance slip away from him. He loved Soren, and he was going to express it. He didn’t know how he was going to say it, but he was fine with putting caution to the wind. He needed to talk about it, and if that meant he tripped over his words a few times, then so be it. If Soren was really sick of him struggling to word things, then he would have left him behind years ago, but he never had. Ike already knew he never would either. 

“Soren?” Ike asked, and the prince pulled himself out of his thoughts to look Ike in the eyes. “There’s something I want to talk to you about. Back before the final battle, we…” 

“We kissed,” Soren finished for him, and Ike nodded. Soren hesitated before he sighed. “I wasn't sure if there was a good time to talk about that with everything going on. The last thing I wanted was for anyone to overhear us and then start to spread rumors, but…”

“I don’t care what rumors they try to spread,” Ike cut in, and Soren pressed his lips together into a thin line. “I could care less what others have to say about us. All I know right now is that I care about you more than anyone in the world, Soren, and… I want to be there by your side. I want to stay with you for as long as I possibly can. There’s no one in the world I would rather be with. I belong with you, and… I love you. I have for a long time. I didn’t know how to express it before, but… I know it just as well as I know my own reflection.”

Soren stared at Ike for a long time, processing each and every word as he heard it. Once he was finished, he let out a slow breath and a matching smile. “I’m shocked we finally found a good time to talk about it,” he admitted. “I wasn’t sure if we ever would.”

“I don’t know if we needed to before,” Ike said. They had been affectionate and loving with one another for a very long time, and it had come to be second nature to them. They could put it to words if they wanted to, yes, but they still understood one another without them. They could rely on one another in a way that no others could ever hope to match, and that was what mattered most to both of them. 

“But I’m glad we did now,” Soren told him. He took Ike’s hands in his own and squeezed them tightly. “I know there are going to be a lot of expectations and eyes on me after my coronation. I’m going to have a lot to handle as the new king of Daein, especially picking up the broken pieces left behind by my father. Still… I want to have you by my side through it all. There is no one I would rather have stand by me. I don’t care what other people have to say about us. So long as you are alright with being thrust into the public eye… I want you to be there by my side through thick and thin. There is no one I would rather have stand with me.”

“I think it’s a bit too late for me to back out of the public’s attention,” Ike pointed out with a laugh, and Soren joined him a moment later. “But for the record… I wouldn’t have let them stop me from standing with you even if I did have a choice. I want to be there for you, and I want to see all of this through. No matter how long it takes… I’m going to be by your side during peaceful times. I’m going to be with you from here on out. Nothing is going to take me away from you.”

Soren slowly let his hands rise up to the back of Ike’s head, and he pulled his friend into a kiss. Ike wrapped his arms around Soren’s back, and he returned the tender gesture with everything he had. He could feel surges of electricity beneath his skin like lightning magic, but Ike loved it more than he could ever hope to put to words. This was where he belonged. He couldn’t believe it had taken him and Soren so long to admit it, but he knew the truth. They were supposed to be together, and that would be true now and forever. 

When they finally pulled away from the kiss, Soren took Ike’s hands in his once again. “When we finish our business here in Crimea… I’m going to have to buy you a ring,” he murmured. Some may have accused him of moving a bit quickly, but Ike didn’t feel that way at all. He and Soren had been made for one another from the beginning, and they had spent their whole lives waiting for this moment. They may not have seen it at the time, but Ike knew it in a way that went well beyond the reaches of his words. “Just to make sure no one else gets any bright ideas about snagging you for themselves.”

Ike couldn’t help but laugh. He already knew exactly who Soren was referring to with that line. Aimee’s flirtations toward Ike still had not been forgotten, it seemed. “That’s perfectly fine with me.” Ike squeezed Soren’s hand tightly, wanting to hold it for the rest of time. He supposed he would be able to now too. Nothing was ever going to pull them apart, and Soren had made that perfectly clear when he confessed. “I guess we should get to the coronation first though, huh? We can’t get matching rings until after that.”

Soren laughed and nodded. “Then let us end this.” He started to walk toward the door slowly, and Ike trailed after him. People were bound to ask about their linked hands when they arrived at the festivities, but Ike couldn’t bring himself to care. He had never been prouder of himself or of Soren, and he would display his love for everyone to see without so much as a second thought. This was where they belonged, and no one would ever be able to dream of tearing them apart again. 

This path had certainly not been the one Ike had expected to follow. He had been under the impression he would spend the rest of his days in the villa, and if he ever had to leave, it would be after Ashnard’s death. This outcome was unexpected, but Ike knew that it was the right one for him. Ashnard was gone, and now, Daein was going to have to find a way toward its new future. Soren would lead the world to a brighter dawn, and Ike would stand by him the whole way through it. Never again would the flames of war completely consume Tellius… Not as long as they had something to say about it. 

The war was over, but this was only the beginning of Tellius’ recovery journey. Ike knew the next few years would be long and hard, but it would all be worth it in the end. He would have something to wake up for each morning knowing that both his family and his lover were there waiting for him. Together, they would ensure the world was the best place it could be. This was the start of a new age, and Ike looked forward to ridding it of all the darkness that had once stained it. 

The future would be a radiant one, and Ike could hardly wait to see where it took him.